1 - 50-108 Me-Me-C Operation (D2378a)

Barred Speed Range
Hull No.: DY153

Engine No.: D2379A
Whereas the torsional vibration calculation report (Doc.

No.: D0944226-2.00a) has been carried out based on the
data of the propelling shaft system delivered by the
Shipyard and the engine configuration and performance
selected by the Shipyard, the conclusion is as follows:
The torsional vibrations are, from the engine maker's point of view,
satisfactory provided that a barred speed range, due to the main
critical 6th order 1 node (in shafting), between 47.5 to 57 r/min is
observed.
In case of misfiring of one cylinder, defined as no ignition but

compression present, the engine should observe the following
restriction:
Barred speed range:47.5~57r/min
Additional barred speed: The engine speed must not exceed
5639kW at 80 r/min.
Please note, the result will be verified by measurement on

the sea trial.
Vol. 1 - Operation Manual Index
Text Index Drawing No.
Content 700
Frontpage 700-00 V70000-0003

Warning S900 S900-0003
Introduction 700-01 V70001-0001
Safety Precautions and Engine Data 701
Table of Contents 701TOC V701-0001TOC

Safety precautions 701-01 V70101-0003
Guidance value automation 701-02 V70102-0015
Instrumentation 701-03 V70103-0003
Testbed adjustments 701-04 V70104-0001
IMO NOx components and technical file 701-05 V70105-0001
Checks during Standstill Periods 702

Checks during Standstill Periods 702-01 V70201-0003
Starting, Manoeuvring and Running 703

Preparations for Starting 703-01 V70301-0004
Starting-up 703-02 V70302-0001
Loading 703-03 V70303-0001
Running 703-04 V70304-0003
Preparations PRIOR to arrival in Port 703-05 V70305-0001
Stopping 703-06 V70306-0001
Operations AFTER arrival in Port 703-07 V70307-0001
Engine Control System 703-08 V70308-0005
MOP description 703-09 V70309-0005
Alarm Handling on the MOP 703-14 V70314-0007
Engine Operation 703-15 V70315-0005
Auxiliaries 703-16 V70316-0005
Maintenance 703-17 V70317-0003
Admin 703-18 V70318-0003
Troubleshooting Guide 703-20 V70320-0005
Starting Air System Plate 70304 VP70304-0002
Sequence Diagram, FPP Plant Plate 70305 VP70305-0002
Sequence Diagram, CPP Plant Plate 70309 VP70309-0001
Engine Control System Diagram Plate 70317 VP70317-0003
Diagram of Manoeuvring System Plate 70318 VP70318-0002
MOP Overview Plate 70319 VP70319-0003
MOP Alarm List Plate 70320 VP70320-0003
MOP Event Log Plate 70321 VP70321-0003
MOP Manual Cut-Out List Plate 70322 VP70322-0003
MOP Channel List Plate 70323 VP70323-0003
MOP Operation Plate 70324 VP70324-0005
MOP Status Plate 70325 VP70325-0004
MOP Process Information Plate 70326 VP70326-0004
MOP Cylinder Load Plate 70327 VP70327-0003
MOP Cylinder Pressure Plate 70328 VP70328-0003
Index Vol. 1 - Operation Manual
MOP Hydraulic System Plate 70329 VP70329-0004

MOP Scavenge Air Plate 70330 VP70330-0005
MOP Cylinder Lubricators Plate 70331 VP70331-0004
MOP System View I/O Test Plate 70332 VP70332-0004
MOP Invalidated Inputs Plate 70333 VP70333-0003
MOP Network Status Plate 70334 VP70334-0003
MOP Set Time Plate 70335 VP70335-0002
MOP Version Plate 70336 VP70336-0002
Special Running Conditions 704

Fire in Scavenge Air Box 704-01 V70401-0001
Ignition in Crankcase 704-02 V70402-0001
Turbocharger Surging (Stalling) 704-03 V70403-0001
Running with Cylinders or Turbochargers Out of Operation 704-04 V70404-0004
Running with cracked Cylinder cover studs and Staybolts 704-05 V70405-0001
Cutting cylinders out of action Plate 70401 VP70401-0001
Scavenge air drain pipes Plate 70402 VP70402-0002
Cutting turbochargers out of action Plate 70403 VP70403-0001
Turbocharger surging Plate 70404 VP70404-0001
Scavenge air spaces, fire exting. systems Plate 70405 VP70405-0003
Comp. for hydr. systems. Hydr. cyl. unit Plate 70406 VP70406-0001
Comp. for hydr. sys. (accumulator block) Plate 70407 VP70407-0001
Fuel and Fuel Treatment 705

Fuel oil 705-01 V70501-0005
Pressurised Fuel Oil System 705-02 V70502-0004
Fuel Treatment 705-03 V70503-0005
Residual Fuel Standards Plate 70501 VP70501-0003
Fuel Oil System Plate 70502 VP70502-0002
Fuel oil pipes on engine Plate 70503 VP70503-0001
Fuel oil centrifuges. Modes of operation Plate 70504 VP70504-0001
Centrifuge flow rate and separation temp. (preheating) Plate 70505 VP70505-0002
Preheating of heavy fuel oil (prior to injection) Plate 70506 VP70506-0001
Performance Evaluation and General Operation 706

Observations during Operation 706-01 V70601-0003
Evaluation of Records 706-02 V70602-0006
Cleaning of Turbochargers and Air Coolers 706-03 V70603-0005
Measuring Instruments 706-04 V70604-0001
Pressure Measurements and Engine Power Calculations 706-05 V70605-0001
Correction of Performance Parameters 706-06 V70606-0004
Turbocharger Efficiency 706-07 V70607-0006
Estimation of the Effective Engine Power without Indicator Diagrams 706-08 V70608-0004
Load Diagram for Propulsion alone Plate 70601 VP70601-0002
Load Diagram for Propulsion and Main Engine Driven Generator Plate 70602 VP70602-0002
Performance Observations (2 pages) Plate 70603 VP70603-0001
Readings relating to Thermodynamic Conditions Plate 70604 VP70604-0001
Synopsis Diagrams - for engine (Pi) (2 pages) Plate 70605 VP70605-0001

Synopsis Diagrams - for engine (Pmax) (2 - pages) Plate 70606 VP70606-0001
Synopsis Diagrams - for engine (Pe) (2-pages) Plate 70607 VP70607-0001
Synopsis Diagrams - for turbocharger (Pscav-Pe) (2-pages) Plate 70608 VP70608-0001
Synopsis Diagrams - for turbocharger (Pscav-Compressor) Plate 70609 VP70609-0001
(2-pages)
Synopsis Diagrams - for air cooler (Pscav-Tair) (2-pages) Plate 70610 VP70610-0001
Specific Fuel Oil Consumption (Corrections) Plate 70611 VP70611-0001
Dry Cleaning of Turbocharger (Turbine side) Plate 70612 VP70612-0003
Water Cleaning Turbocharger (Turbine side) Plate 70613 VP70613-0002
Air Cooler Cleaning System (Option) Plate 70614 VP70614-0001
Normal Indicator Diagram Plate 70615 VP70615-0001
Correction to ISO Reference Ambient Conditions. (Pmax) Plate 70620 VP70620-0002
Correction to ISO Reference Ambient Conditions. (Texh.) Plate 70621 VP70621-0003
Correction to ISO Reference Ambient Conditions (Pcomp.) Plate 70622 VP70622-0002
Correction to ISO Reference Ambient Conditions. (Pscav.) Plate 70623 VP70623-0003
Correction to ISO Reference Ambient Conditions. (Example) Plate 70624 VP70624-0004
Calculation of Compressor Efficiency Plate 70625 VP70625-0002
Calculation of Total Turbocharger Efficiency Plate 70626 VP70626-0002
Power Estimation Plate 70627 VP70627-0003
Turbocharger Compressor Wheel Diameter and Slip Factor Plate 70628 VP70628-0003
Cylinder Condition 707

Cylinder Condition 707-01 V70701-0010
Cylinder Lubrication 707-02 V70702-0003
Inspection of Nimonic Exhaust Valve Spindles 707-03 V70703-0002
Inspection through Scavenge Ports Plate 70701 VP70701-0001
Inspection through Scavenge Ports (Record) Plate 70702 VP70702-0001
Inspection through Scavenge Ports, Symbols Plate 70703 VP70703-0001
Inspection through Scavenge Ports (Pictures) Plate 70704 VP70704-0001
Inspection through Scavenge Ports, Evaluation Plate 70705 VP70705-0001
Factors influencing Cylinder Wear Plate 70706 VP70706-0002
Abrasive Particles Plate 70707 VP70707-0001
Cylinder oil Feed Rate during Running-in S/K/L-ME/ME-C Plate 70710 VP70710-0001
engines (2-pages)
Cylinder Condition Report Plate 70711 VP70711-0002
Calculation of Condensate Amount Plate 70712 VP70712-0002
Cylinder Lubricating Oil Pipes Plate 70713 VP70713-0003
Running-in Load Plate 70714 VP70714-0002
Bearings and Circulating Oil 708

Bearings 708-01 V70801-0001
Alignment of Main Bearings 708-02 V70802-0004
Circulating Oil and Oil System 708-03 V70803-0001
Maintenance of the Circulating Oil 708-04 V70804-0016
Turbocharger Lubrication 708-05 V70805-0002
Hydraulic System for ME Engines 708-08 V70808-0003
Index Vol. 1 - Operation Manual
Bearing Monitoring 708-09 V70809-0001

Main Bearing, Thick Shell Design Plate 70801 VP70801-0002
Main Bearing, Thin Shell Design Plate 70802 VP70802-0004
Crosshead Bearing Plate 70803 VP70803-0005
Crankpin Bearing Plate 70804 VP70804-0001
Main Bearing Assemblies Plate 70805 VP70805-0001
Guide Shoes and Strips Plate 70806 VP70806-0001
Thrust Bearing Assembly Plate 70807 VP70807-0001
Inspection of Bearings. Recording of Observations. Plate 70809 VP70809-0002
Inspection of Bearings. Location and Size of Damage in Bearing Plate 70810 VP70810-0002
Shells
Acceptance Criteria for Tin-Aluminium Bearings with Overlayer Plate 70811 VP70811-0004
(Crosshead Bearing Lower Shells)
Inspection of bearings. Location of Damage on Pin/Journal Plate 70812 VP70812-0002
Inspection of Bearings. Observations Plate 70813 VP70813-0002
Inspection of Bearings. Inspection Records, Example Plate 70814 VP70814-0002
Inspection of Bearings. Inspection Records, Blank Plate 70815 VP70815-0002
Report: Crankshaft Deflections (Autolog) Plate 70816 VP70816-0002
Crankshaft Deflection, Limits Plate 70817 VP70817-0005
Circulating Oil System (Outside Engine) (Engines with Uni-Lube Plate 70818 VP70818-0003
System)
Circulating Oil System (Inside Engine) Plate 70820 VP70820-0002
Flushing of Main Lubricating Oil System. Location of Checkbag and Plate 70821 VP70821-0005
Blank Flanges
Flushing of Main Lubricating Oil System. Dimension of Checkbag and Plate 70822 VP70822-0002
Blank Flanges
Flushing of Main Lubricating Oil System. Flushing Log Plate 70823 VP70823-0002
Cleaning System, Stuffing Box Drain Oil (Option) Plate 70824 VP70824-0002
Turbocharger Lubricating Oil Pipes Plate 70828 VP70828-0003
Check Measurements Plate 70829 VP70829-0001
Gear Driven HPS, ELFI and ELVA Plate 70830 VP70830-0002
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA Plate 70831 VP70831-0002
Gear Driven HPS, ELFI and ELVA, Separate LPS Plate 70832 VP70832-0002
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA, Separate LPS Plate 70833 VP70833-0002
Elec. Driven HPS and FIVA, Separate LPS Plate 70834 VP70834-0002
Elec. Driven HPS and FIVA Plate 70835 VP70835-0002
6L42MC/ME KMU Plate 70836 VP70836-0001
Combined HPS, Common LPS and FIVA Plate 70837 VP70837-0002
Combined HPS, Separate LPS and FIVA Plate 70838 VP70838-0001
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA, Common LPS Plate 70839 VP70839-0001
ME/ME-C Engines. Detection of Malfunction and Leaks in Hydraulic Plate 70840 VP70840-0003
System
Throttle Valve on Fuel Oil Pressure Booster Plate 70841 VP70841-0001
Drainholes in HCU Block Plate 70842 VP70842-0001
Level Switch on ME Cylinder Lubricator Plate 70843 VP70843-0001
Hydraulic Control Oil System (Separate LPS) Plate 70844 VP70844-0001
Double Wall Piping Plate 70845 VP70845-0001
Gear Driven HPS Common LPS ME-Version 4 K98ME/ME-C Rexroth Plate 70849 VP70849-0001
Pumps
Gear Driven HPS Common LPS ME-Version 4 K98ME/ME-C Eaton Plate 70850 VP70850-0001
Pumps
EL driven HPS, Common LPS, FIVA, ME-Version 5, Rexroth pumps Plate 70851 VP70851-0001
(300 bar)
EL driven HPS, Common LPS, FIVA, ME-Version 5, Eaton pumps Plate 70852 VP70852-0001
(300 bar)
Water Cooling Systems 709

Water Cooling Systems 709-01 V70901-0001
Cooling Water Treatment 709-02 V70902-0005
Seawater Cooling System. Main and Auxiliary Engines Plate 70901 VP70901-0001
Jacket Cooling Water System Plate 70902 VP70902-0001
Central Cooling System Plate 70903 VP70903-0001
Preheating of Jacket Cooling Water Plate 70904 VP70904-0001
50-108ME/ME-C VOLUME I
OPERATION
Edition 0003 – 2006
MAN Diesel Warning S900-0003
Warning!
It is important that all MAN Diesel engines are operated within the given specifications
and performance tolerances specified in the engines‘ Technical Files and are maintained
according to the MAN Diesel maintenance instructions, in order to comply with given
emission regulations.
In accordance with Chapter I of the code of Federal Regulations, Part 94, Subpart C,
§94.211, NOTICE is hereby given, that Chapter I of the Code of Federal Regulations, Part
94, Subpart K, §94.1004 requires that the emissions related maintenance of the diesel en-
gine, shall be performed as specified in MAN Diesel instructions, including, but not limited
to, the instructions to that effect included in the Technical File.
When referring to this page, please quote S-instruction S900, Edition 0003
MAN Diesel
Chapter 701
Introduction 700-01
Instruction Book ‘Operation’
for 50-108ME/ME-C Engines
General Edition 0001
In view of the continued development of our diesel engines, the present instruction
book has been made to apply generally to our engines of the types:
50 – 108 ME/ME-C
The different systems are explained on the basis of standard systems, whereas each par-
ticular engine is built to the specification in the contract for the plant in question, i.e. the
information in this book is for guidance purposes only.
All references to this instruction book should include title, edition No., and possibly page
No.
Example: Instruction book OPERATION, Edition 0001, Section 701-02, Page 3(12).
For a specific engine, also the name of the vessel, the engine number and the engine build-
er should be specified.
Further details may be found in:
❖ Plant installation drawings

❖ Instruction book Vol. I Operation
❖ Instruction book Vol. II Maintenance
❖ Instruction book Vol. III Components, Descriptions
❖ Shop trial/report
❖ Sea trial/report
for the engine concerned.
This book is subject to copyright protection. The book should therefore not, in whole or in
part, be copied, reproduced, made public, or in any other way made available to any third
party, without the written consent to this effect from MAN B&W Diesel A/S.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

Teglholmsgade 41 Teleph.:+45 33 85 11 00
DK-2450 Copenhagen Telex :16592 manbw dk
Denmark Telefax:+45 33 85 10 30
CVR. No. 39 66 13 14
When referring to this page, please quote Operation 700-01, Edition 0001 Page 1 (3)
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
700-01 Introduction
Contents
This instruction book is divided into nine Chapters and an Index – as listed below:
Chapter Title
701 Safety Precautions and Engine Data
702 Checks during Standstill Periods
703 Starting, Manoeuvring and Running
704 Special Running Conditions
705 Fuel and Fuel Treatment
706 Performance Evaluation & General Operation
707 Cylinder Condition
708 Bearings and Circulating Oil
709 Water Cooling Systems
710 Index
Each Chapter is subdivided into separate sections and sub-sections. For convenience, the
main titles and topics are summarized on the first page(s) of each chapter.
The Index gives a comprehensive list of the subjects covered.
Page 2 (3) When referring to this page, please quote Operation 700-01, Edition 0001
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
Introduction 700-01
Service Letters
In order to ensure the most efficient, economic, and up-to-date operation of the MAN B&W
engines, we, and our licensees, regularly send out ‘Service Letters’, containing first-hand
information regarding accumulated service experience.
The Service Letters can either deal with specific engine types, or contain general instruc-
tions and recommendations for all engine types, and are used as a reference when we pre-
pare up-dated instruction book editions.
Therefore, since new Service Letters could be of great importance to the operation of the
plant, we recommend that the engine staff file them to supplement the relevant chapters of
this instruction book.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Safety Precautions and Engine Data Chapter 701
Table of Contents
701-01 Safety Precautions

Special Dangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Order/Tidiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Low Temperatures – freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Check and Maintain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Entering the Crankcase or Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Turning Gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Slow-turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Feeling over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sealing Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Safety Cap in Starting Air Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
701-02 Guidance Value Automation

General Basis for Guidance Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
701-03 Instrumentation
Figure 1: Measuring Instruments, Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Figure 2: Location of Basic Measuring Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
701-04 TestbedAdjustments
When referring to this page, please quote Operation Chapter 701 Edition 0001 Page 1 (2)
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701 Safety Precautions and Engine Data
Table of Contents
701-05 IMO NOx Components and Technical File

1. Check of IMO-ID, Markings on Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Fuel Valve Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Pressure Booster Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Hydraulic Piston Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4 Cylinder Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.5 Cylinder Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.6 Piston Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. Checking Setting Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2.1 Checking the Shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. Nameplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1 ELFI Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2 Air Cooler Specifications (Nameplate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.3 Auxiliary Blower Specifications (Nameplate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4. Survey methods including on-board verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

4.1 IMO surveys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2 Definitions and Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2.2 ‘Standard MAN B&W performance check’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2.3 Tolerances for ‘load points’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2.4 Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2.5 Back pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.3 Survey cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.1 Load-point ‘corrections’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.2 Test-bed survey – All engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.3 On board – Engine without VIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.4 On board – Engine with VIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.5 Scavenging-air temperature corrections on board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.6 Sea-water cooling system (SW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.7 Central cooling system – Optimal cooling (CC-O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.3.8 Central cooling system – Fixed cooler out temperature (CC-F) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.3.9 Test-bed cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.4 Correction to ISO ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.4.1 Performance parameters correction to ISO ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.4.2 NOx emission correction to ISO ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.5 Correction to reference performance conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5. MAN B&W survey procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

5.1 On-board survey code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5.2 Manual procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.3 Comments on component checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.4 Survey example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Operation Chapter 701 Edition 0001
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
MAN B&W Safety Precautions 701-01
Correct operation and maintenance, which is the aim of this book, are crucial points for
obtaining optimum safety in the engine room. The general measures mentioned here
should therefore be routine practice for the entire engine room crew.
Engine Room Staff
Operation and Maintenance of MAN B&W engines is to be carried out exclusively by

qualified professional personnel.
Minimum personal safety equipment

requirements:
1. Safety shoes.
2. Hearing protection.
3. Boiler suit or other similar
protective wear.
Special Dangers
Numerous situations may lead to risks of serious injuries to the body. The following
recommendations must always be observed:
• Keep clear of the space below a crane with load.
• Before opening of cocks, always observe which way liquids, gases or flames will
move, and keep clear.
• Dismantling of parts may also cause the release of springs.
• Do not stand near turbochargers in case of any abnormal running.
• Do not stand near crankcase doors or relief valves - nor in corridors near doors to
the engine room - if an alarm for oil mist, high lube oil temperature, no piston
cooling oil flow, or scavenge box fire is set off. See also Chapter 704.
When referring to this page, please quote Operation 701-01 Edition 0012 Page 1 (7)
701-01 Safety Precautions MAN B&W
Turning Gear
Before engaging the turning gear, ensure that the starting air supply is shut off, the main
starting and slow turning valves are blocked, and that the indicator cocks are open.
When the turning gear is engaged, check that the indicator lamp “Turning gear in” has
switched on.
The turning gear remote control is a critical device and should always be kept in optimal
working condition. Any fault in the device or cable must be rectified before use.
When operating the turning gear it is important to note the following:
The turning gear must be operated by the remote control and only by the person working
on the engine.
Warnings must be given before each turning. Operation of the turning gear from the
switchboard must not take place while maintenance work is in progress inside the
engine.
Block the switch or place a “Do not touch” sign.
Entering the Crankcase or Cylinder
Always ensure that the turning gear is engaged and the brake is active, to prevent
external forces or unbalance of the crankshaft from turning the crankshaft.
Check that the starting air supply to the engine and the starting air distributor is shut off
and that the main starting valve is locked.
In case of oil mist alarm, precautions must be taken before opening the doors to the
crankcase (see Section 704-02). Before entering, ventilate the crankcase for about 30
minutes after stopping the engine.
Work inside the crankcase requires the use of fall protection harness and arrestor equip-
ment.
Work inside the crankcase is as minimum a two-man job, and good communication must
be maintained at all times.
The turning gear should always be operated exclusively by the person(s) who enters the
crankcase or cylinders.
Cleanliness
The engine and engine room should always be kept clean and tidy.
Oily rags must never be left around the engine room spaces as they are highly flamable
and slippery.
Remove any oil spill at once.
If there is a risk of grit or sand blowing into the engine room, stop the ventilation and
close the ventilating ducts, skylights and engine room doors.
Page 2 (7) When referring to this page, please quote Operation 701-01 Edition 0012
Welding or other work that causes spreading of grit and/or swarf must not be carried out
near the engine unless it is closed or protected and the turbocharger air intake filters are
covered.
The exterior of the engine should be kept clean, and the paintwork maintained, so that
leakages can be easily detected.
Fire
Keep the areas around the relief valves free of oil, grease, etc. to prevent the risk of
fire caused by the emitted hot air/gas if the relief valves open.
Do not weld or use naked lights in the engine room until it has been ascertained that no
explosive gases, vapour or liquids are present.
If the crankcase is opened before the engine has cooled down, welding and the use of
naked flames will result in the risk of explosions and fire. The same applies to inspection
of oil tanks and of the spaces below the floor.
Attention is furthermore drawn to the danger of fire when using paint and solvents with a
low flash point. Porous insulating material, soaked with oil from leakages, is easily inflam-
mable and should be renewed. See also Sections 704-01, 02 and ‘Sealing Materials’ in
this Section.
Order/Tidiness
Hand tools should be securely fastened and placed on easily accessible tool panels.
Special tools should be fastened in the engine room, close to the area to be used.
Do not leave major objects unfastened, and keep floor and passages clear at all times.
Spares
Large spare parts should, as far as possible, be placed near the area to be used, well
secured, and accessible by crane.
All spares should be protected against corrosion and mechanical damage. The stock
should be checked at intervals and replenished in good time.
Lighting
Ample working light should be permanently installed at appropriate places in the engine
room spaces, and portable working light should be obtainable everywhere. 24v safety
lamps must be available for use inside the engine.
Harmful Materials
Always follow the manufacturer´s specific instructions, i.e. the material safety data sheet.
Use protective gloves, goggles, breathing mask and any other recommended protective
gear, as stated in the material safety data sheet.
While handling harmful materials it is important to secure proper ventilation and shielding
if needed.
In the event of leaks or spillage, spread binding agents immediately. Dispose of the bind-
ing agents, according to the material safety data sheet.
Lifting Precautions
Plan lifting of engine components through all steps of the lifting procedure.
Use tackles between engine room crane and component, when lifting loads below 500
kg.
Make sure lifting attachments are tightened into full contact with the component to be lif-
ted.
Only use designated lifting points, see Instruction Manual Volume II for guidance.
Never exceed the lowest Safe Working Load (SWL) of the lifting equipment in the lifting
chain.
Keep lifting equipment clear of sharp edges.
Make sure to attach the load correctly on the crane hook.
Always keep clear of the space below a crane carrying a load.
Working Air
Use of working air requires safety goggles and gloves.
Avoid blowing pressurised air directly at any part of the body especially exposed skin.
Sealing Materials
Use gloves made of neopren or PVC when removing O-rings and other rubber/plastic-
based sealing materials which have been subjected to abnormally high temperatures.
First aid measures in the event of skin contact:

▪ Rinse with plenty of water
▪ Remove all contaminated clothing
▪ Consult a doctor
▪ Dispose of all material and gloves in accordance with laws and regulations.
Hot Surfaces
Beware of hot surfaces and always use gloves, when working on or near hot surfaces.
Alarms
It is important that all alarms lead to prompt investigation and remedy of the error. No
alarm is insignificant. The most serious alarms are equipped with slow-down and/or shut-
down functions. It is therefore important that all engine operation personnel are familiar
with and well trained in the use and importance of the alarm system.
Safety notes
This warning is used when an operation, procedure, or use may cause personal
injury or loss of life.
This warning is used when an operation, procedure, or use may cause a latently
dangerous state of personal injury or loss of life.
This warning is used when an operation, procedure, or use may cause damage to or
destruction of equipment and a slight or serious injury.
This warning is used when an operation, procedure, or use may cause damage to or
destruction of equipment.
Subsuppliers and external equipment

Please check the special instructions concerning subsupplier delivery and external
equipment for specific warnings!
2. Safety Precautions at Maintenance

Before carrying out maintenance work, stop and block the engine according to the safety
precautions given on the specific Data Page.
The drawing gives the approximate location of the valves concerned
3. Data Sheet Signs

Data sheets may include warning signs for special dangers that could arrise in connec-
tion with the maintenance procedures.
Warning signs Mandatory action signs

General warning sign General mandatory
action sign
Explosive material Wear ear protection
Drop (fall) Wear eye protection
Slippery surface Wear safety foot-

wear
Electricity Wear protective

gloves
Overhead load Wear face shield
Hot surface Wear head protec-

tion
Crushing Wear mask
Overhead obstacle Wear respitory pro-

tection
Flammable Wear safety harness
Crushing of hands Disconnect before

carrying out mainte-
nance
Pressurized cylinder
Pressurized device
MAN B&W Guidance Value Automation 701-02
General Basis for Guidance Values

The values stated in the list on the following pages refer to layout point L1.
(Nominal max. continuous rating).
The values must only be used as a guidance in connection with the ‘List of Capaci-
ties of Auxiliary Machinery’ for dimensioning of auxiliary systems, and must not be
used for determining the extent of the alarms or actions.
The item numbers refer to the drawings showing the extent and placement of sen-
sors for standard alarms and indicators on the engine, if the signal equipment is
fitted. See Section 701-03, furtheron.
For sensors placed in the systems outside the engine, see the actual pipe arrange-
ments in the appropriate chapters.
If the engine is provided with special equipment, some values may differ from this
list. The correct values shall in such a case be obtained from the Plant Installation
Drawings.
The engine slow-down level corresponds to 40% of nominal MCR r/min.
Engines specified and optimised at derated power may have other normal service
values depending on layout power/revolutions and application.
For derated engines, the testbed/trial values should be used.
Attention must be paid to the temperature levels stated under Nos. 8123 to
8125 (incl.), as two different values have been indicated, one value for metal
temperature and another for oil outlet temperature.
When setting the limits, maximum limits must be set at rising parameter and mini-
mum limits at falling parameter.
When referring to this page, please quote Operation 701-02, Edition 0015 Page 1(19)
701-02 Guidance Value Automation MAN B&W
Guidance Alarm Limits and Measuring Values

(at max. continuous rating with engine running steadily). The list applies to ME/
ME-C Engines. For items marked with an *, further details are given in a footnote.
Fuel Oil System
Normal Set
Sensor Code Function Designation Unit SLD SHD
Service Value point
PT 8001 I – AL Fuel oil Inlet (after filter) * 7–8 6.5 Bar
PT 8002 AL Fuel oil before filter * 6.5 Bar
PDI 8003 Fuel oil filter * 0.2 – 0.5 Bar

Pressure drop across filter
VT 8004 I-AH Fuel oil viscosity * 10 – 15 20 cST
AL 7 cST
TE 8005 I Fuel oil inlet (after filter) * T °C
LS 8006 AH Leakage from high pressure pipes Level

high
PT 8001 Fuel viscosity max. 700 cST at 50 °C measured at fuel pump level.
PT 8002 Yard supply. Fuel viscosity max. 700 cST at 50 °C.
PDT 8003 Yard supply.
VT 8004 Yard supply. Viscosity to be monitored and alarm given off by sensor built into the Viscorator
TE 8005 T = See chapter 705 Vol.1 Operation book.
Page 2(19) When referring to this page, please quote Operation 701-02, Edition 0015
Lubricating Oil System
Normal Set
Service Value point
PT 8103 I – AL Lub. oil inlet to turbocharger 1.5 – 2.2 1.2 Bar
TE 8106 I - AH Thrust bearing segment 55 – 70 75 °C
Y 80 H
TE 8107 Z Thrust bearing segment 55 – 70 90 °C H
PT 8108 I – AL Lubrication oil inlet * Bar

S50ME-C 2.0 - 2.3 1.6
S60ME-C, L60ME-C, S60ME, 2.1 - 2.4 1.7
S65ME-C, L70ME-C, K80ME-C 2.2 - 2.5 1.8
S70ME-C, S80ME-C, K90ME-C, 2.3 - 2.6 1.9
K98ME-C, K98ME 2.4 - 2.7 2.0
K90ME
S90ME-C
Y S50ME-C 1.4 L
S60ME-C, L60ME-C, S60ME, 1.5
S65ME-C, L70ME-C, K80ME-C
S70ME-C, S80ME-C, K90ME-C, 1.6
K98ME-C, K98ME,
K90ME 1.7
S90ME-C 1.8
PT 8109 Z Lubrication oil inlet * Bar L

S50ME-C 1.2
S60ME-C, L60ME-C, S60ME, 1.3
S65ME-C, L70ME-C, K80ME-C
S70ME-C, S80ME-C, K90ME-C, 1.4
K98ME-C, K98ME
K90ME 1.5
S90ME-C 1.6
TE 8112 I – AH Lubrication oil inlet 40 – 47 55 °C
AL 35
Y 60 H
TE 8113 I - AH Piston cooling oil outlet/cylinder 50 – 65 70 °C
Y 75 H
FS 8114 Y Piston cooling oil outlet/cylinder No flow L
TE 8117 I – AH Lub. oil outlet from turbocharger/TC
MAN/T CA COM 70 – 90 95 °C
MHI/ME T COM 70 – 90 85 °C
ABB/TPL COM/ABB/VTR COM 70 – 90 110 °C
Y 120 °C H
TE 8118 I – AH Lub. oil outlet from engine 50 – 60 65 °C
TE 8120 I – AH Main bearing metal temperature * 50 – 70 75 °C
Y 80
Normal Set
Service Value point
TE 8121 I – AH Crankpin bearing metal 50 – 70 75 °C

temperature
*
Y 80
TE 8122 I – AH Crosshead bearing metal 50 – 70 75 °C

temperature
*
Y 80
TE 8123 I - AH Main bearing oil outlet 50 - 60 65 °C

*
Y 70 H
AH Deviation from average +/- 5
Y +/- 7 H
TE 8124 I - AH Crankpin bearing 50 - 60 65 °C

*
Y 70 H
Y +/- 7 H
TE 8125 I - AH Crosshead bearing oil outlet, fore 50 - 60 65 °C

*
Y 70 H
Y +/- 7 H
LS 8130 AL – Y Lub. oil level in tank Low

* level
PDS 8140 AH Lub. oil difference pressure-across filter 0 - 0.6 >0.8

(Boll & kirsch)
XS 8152 A WIO sensor not ready fail
PT 8108, PT 8109. Measured by pressure gauge placed 1.8 m above crankshaft centreline. For Lub. oil pumps of cen-
trifugal type, the pressure at stopped engine will be about 0.2 bar lower. (The difference in pressure
at stopped and running engine is mainly caused by influence of oscillation forces, especially in pis-
ton cooling space.).
TE 8117 Inlet reference, see sensor TE 8112.

TE 8120 – TE 8125
* Please note that the “Normal service value” is to be stated at sea trial, but, in between the range
stated. With regard to the “Alarm”, “Slow down” and “Shut down” levels they should be 5°C, 10°C
and 20°C above the sea trial finding respectively, however, maximum the value stated.
TE 8124 and TE 8125 Cut off at stopped engine. Cut off to remain until 3 minutes after start.
LS 8130 For separate lubricating system of the turbochargers.
Cylinder Lubrication Oil System
Normal
Sensor Code Function Designation Set point Unit SLD SHD
Service Value
TE 8202 AH Cylinder Lub. oil temperature 40 – 60 70 °C
Cooling Water System
Normal
Service Value
PT 8401 I – AL Jacket cooling water inlet * 3.5 – 4.5 2.0 Bar
Y 1.5 Bar L
PS 8402 Z Jacket cooling water inlet * 3.5 – 4.5 X Bar L
PDT 8403 I – AL Jacket cooling water pressure loss 0.8 – 1.4 X Bar
across engine
*
Y X 0.2 Bar X 0.4
TE 8407 I – AL Jacket cooling water inlet 65 – 70 57 °C
TE 8408 I – AH Jacket cooling water outlet/cyl. °C
S50ME-C 75 – 80 85
S60ME-C, L60ME-C, S60ME, 80 – 85 90
S65ME-C, L70ME-C, S70ME-C,
K80ME-C, S80ME-C, K90ME-C,
K90ME, S90ME-C,
K98ME-C, K98ME, K108ME-C
Y S50ME-C 90 °C H
S60ME-C, L60ME-C, S60ME, 95
K90ME, S90ME-C,
TE 8409 I – AH Jacket cooling water outlet temp, °C

at turbocharger
S50ME-C 75 – 80 85
S60ME-C, L60ME-C, S60ME, 80 – 85 90
K90ME, S90ME-C,
TE 8411 Jacket cooling water outlet temp, 80 – 120 °C

exhaust valve
LS 8412 AL Jacket cooling water de-aerating tank Low

device level
PI 8413 Jacket cooling water outlet common 2.7 – 3.1 Bar

pipe
*
PT 8421 I – AH Cooling water inlet to air cooler(s) *
Sea water cooling system 2.0 – 2.5 X 3.5 Bar
Central cooling water system 2.0 – 4.5 X 5.5
AL 1.0 Bar
TE 8422 I – AH Cooling water inlet to air cooler(s)
Sea water cooling system >10 – 32 40 °C
Central cooling water system >10 – 36 40
Normal
Service Value
TI 8423 I Cooling water outlet from air cool.
Sea water cooling system >10 – 50 °C
Central cooling water system >10 – 63
PDT 8424 I Pressure drop of cooling water across 0.25 – 0.5 Bar
air cooler/air cooler
TE 8431 I – AL Cooling water inlet to lub. oil cool. >10 – 32 10 °C
PT 8401, PI 8413 If the expansion tank is located more than 5 m above the engine outlet, the resulting increase in
the static pressure must be added to the “normal service value” indicated here.
PS 8402 X = With stopped cooling water pump, the set point for the sensor is the static pressure plus the
stated value.
PDT 8403 X = To be stated on sea-trial. Set point 0.2 and 0.4 bar lower.
PT 8421 X = To be stated on sea-trial.
Compressed Air System
Normal
Service Value
PT 8501 I – AL Starting air inlet pressure * 30 15 Bar
PT 8503 I-C-AH Control air inlet * 6.5 – 7.5 0.5 X Bar
AL 5.5 Bar
PT 8504 I-C-AH Safety air inlet * 6.5 – 7.5 0.5 X Bar
AL 5.5 Bar
PT 8503, PT 8504, X = AH at finished with engine.

PT8501 Alarm handled by Main Operation Panel (MOP)
Scavenge Air System
Normal
Service Value
PT 8601 I Scavenge air receiver pressure * Bar
L60ME-C, L70ME-C, X – 3.50

S90ME-C
S60ME, S80ME-C X – 3.55
K80ME-C, K90ME-C, K90ME, X – 3.60
K98ME-C, K98ME
S50ME-C, S60ME-C, S65ME-C X – 3.65
S70ME-C, K108ME-C
TE 8605 I Scavenge air temp. before each cooler 170 – 210 °C

*
PDT 8606 I – AH Scavenge air pressure drop across each X XX Bar
air cooler *
PDT 8607 I – AH Scavenge air pressure drop across filter X XX Bar

*
TE 8608 I Scavenge air temperature after each air X °C
cooler *
TE 8609 I – AH Scavenge air temperature in receiver *

Sea water cooling system
>25 – 47 55 X °C
Central cooling water system
>25 – 51 55 X °C
Y °C 65 X
TE 8610 AH Scavenge air box-fire alarm/cyl. 80 °C
Y °C 120
LS 8611 AH Water mist catcher - water level High
TE 8612 I Compressor inlet temperature/ - 10 - + 45 °C

turbocharger
PT 8601 The set point of scavenge air pressure depends on the engine load and shall be set during sea
trial.
TE 8605 Value based on MCR, depending on engine load and ambient conditions.
PDT 8606, PDT 8607 X = According to shop-trial results. XX = at 50 % increase.
TE 8608 X = coolant inlet + 12 °C.
TE 8609 X = To be cut off during stop. To remain cut out until 3 – 5 minutes after start.
Exhaust Gas System
Normal
Service Value
TC 8701 I – AH Exhaust gas temperature before

turbocharger
* X °C
S50ME-C, S60ME-C, L60ME-C, 380 – 500

S60ME, L70ME-C, S65ME-C,
S70ME-C,
K90ME, S90ME-C, 380 – 460
Y X H
TC 8702 I – AH Exhaust gas temperature after valves * °C

Average.
S50ME-C, S60ME-C, L60ME-C, 320 – 390 430

S60ME, S65ME-C, L70ME-C,
S70ME-C, K80ME-C, S80ME-C,
K90ME-C, K90ME,
S90ME-C, K98ME-C, K98ME,
K108ME-C
Y 450 H
Deviation from average +/-50 +/-60
TC 8704 I Exhaust gas temperature in receiver 100 – 500 °C
TC 8701 Normal exhaust gas temperatures depend on the actual engine load and ambient condition.
NOTE: Regarding alarm for high turbine inlet temperature:
This alarm is not an MAN B&W requirement, as alarms for high gas temperatures, are given by
cylinder exhaust as well as for turbine outlet temperature alarms.
Some Classification Societies require alarm for high turbine inlet temperature. In such cases we
recommend set point equivalent to the maximum temperature for continuous operation shown
on the turbocharger name plate.
(Some Turbocharger manufacturers shows two (2) maximum temperatures on the name plate.
It is the lowest shown temperature that must be used as set point - if alarm is required. The high
maximum temperature is only allowed at short over-load tests at test-bed)
X = turbocharger dependent.
TC 8702 Normal exhaust gas temperatures depend on the actual engine load and ambient condition.
When operating below 200 °C average temperature deviation alarm is cut off.
Exhaust Gas System
Normal
Service Value
PT 8706 I Exhaust gas pressure in receiver * Bar

S90ME-C 3.25
L60ME-C, L70ME-C, 3.30
S60ME, S80ME-C 3.35
K80ME-C, K90ME-C, K90ME, 3.40
S50ME-C, S60ME-C, S65ME-C, 3.45
S70ME-C
TC 8707 I – AH Exhaust gas temperature after each 220 – 300 350 °C

turbocharger *
PT 8708 I – AH Exhaust gas pressure after each 300 450 mm –

T/C at MCR
WC
PDI 8709 I Exhaust gas pressure drop across boiler 150 mm –

at MCR
WC
ZT 8721 I Exhaust gas by-pass valve angle 0 – 90

position
PT 8706 Normal exhaust gas temperatures depend on the actual engine load and ambient condition.
TC 8707 The service values apply under the following conditions: Ambient temperature in engine room
25 °C. Scavenge air temperature in receiver 35 °C.
Hydraulic Power Supply
Normal
Service Value
X C 1231 A F ilter failure a la rm
PT 1233 AH Pressure in double pipe 50 Bar
LS 1234 AH Leakage from double pipes High L
TE 1270 I-AH
Y
Temperature HPS bearing * 55-60 70
80
°C
H
TE 1270 Only relevant for K98ME/ME-C engines
External Hydraulic Control Oil Supply System
Normal
Service Value
PI 1301 I F ine filter unit indicator Bar
PDS 1302 AH Lubricating oil difference pressure High Bar

across filter
PI 1303 I Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet 2.5 Bar
TI 1310 I Lubricating oil temperature at engine in- 40-55 °C

let
LS 1320 AH-AL Level alarm in tank Low L

High
MECS to/from Safety System
Normal
Service Value
XC 2001 Z Emergency stop to engine control units
XC 2002 Z Emergency stop to cylinder control units

and InFi amplifier
PT 2003 Z Hydraulic oil, low pressure, Bar

shut-down
XC 2010 Y Slow-down from safety/alarm system
XC 2020 Z Non-cancellable shut-down
XC 2021 Z Cancellable shut-down
MECS to/from Alarm System
Normal
Service Value
X C 2201 A Power failure alarm
X C 2202 A System a la rm
X C 2205 A Slow-down pre-warning a la rm
X C 2206 A Slow-down request a la rm
Power Supply Units to Alarm System
Normal
Service Value
X C 2903 A Earth failure ME power supply 70-1000 24 KOhm
Tacho / Crankshaft Position System
Normal
Service Value
ZT 4020 Z T acho for safety r/min MCR x

1.09
Miscellaneous
Normal
Service Value
ZT 8801 I - AH Turbocharger speed, each unit * X X r/min
PT 8802 I Engine room pressure (bar abs.) 0.95 – 1.05 Bar
PI 8803 Air inlet for dry cleaning, turbocharger 4.5 – 10 Bar
PI 8804 Water for cleaning, inlet turbocharger * min. 0.5 X Bar
WT 8805 AH Vibration of turbocharger, each unit high mm

(option)
PI 8806 Speed setting to governor (air pressure) 0.5 – 5.0 Bar
XC 8807 I Pmax. control pressure 0.0 – 5.0 Bar
XC 8808 I Fuel injection pump index, each cylinder X

*
XC 8809 I VIT index, each cylinder * X
XC 8810 I Governor index * X
XC 8811 I Engine torque * X Nm
WT 8812 I – AH Crankshaft longitudinal vibration

Axial vibration monitor
Peak to peak
Y 6K108ME-C Monitoring equip. required 0.0 - 2.10 2.80 mm 3.50

7K108ME-C 0.0 - 2.45 3.26 4.08
8K108ME-C 0.0 - 2.79 3.72 4.65
9K108ME-C 0.0 - 3.13 4.18 5.22
10K108ME-C 0.0 - 3.48 4.64 5.80
11K108ME-C Monitoring equip. required 0.0 - 3.82 5.10 6.37
12K108ME-C 0.0 - 4.17 5.56 6.95
6K98ME 0.0 - 2.28 3.05 3.81

7K98ME 0.0 - 2.66 3.55 4.43
8K98ME 0.0 - 3.03 4.05 5.06
9K98ME 0.0 - 3.41 4.55 5.68
10K98ME 0.0 - 3.78 5.05 6.31
11K98ME Monitoring equip. required 0.0 - 4.16 5.55 6.93
12K98ME 0.0 - 4.54 6.06 7.57
6K98ME-C 0.0 - 1.88 2.51 3.13

7K98ME-C 0.0 - 2.19 2.92 3.65
8K98ME-C 0.0 - 2.49 3.33 4.16
9K98ME-C 0.0 - 2.80 3.74 4.67
10K98ME-C 0.0 - 3.11 4.15 5.18
12K98ME-C 0.0 - 3.72 4.97 6.21
Normal
Service Value
6S90ME-C Monitoring equip. required 0.0 - 3.24 4.33 5.41

7S90ME-C 0.0 - 3.78 5.04 6.30
8S90ME-C 0.0 - 4.32 5.76 7.20
9S90ME-C 0.0 - 4.86 6.48 8.10
4K90ME 0.0 - 1.44 1.92 2.40

5K90ME 0.0 - 1.80 2.40 3.00
6K90ME 0.0 - 2.16 2.88 3.60
7K90ME 0.0 - 2.54 3.38 4.23
8K90ME 0.0 - 2.90 3.86 4.83
9K90ME 0.0 - 3.26 4.34 5.43
10K90ME 0.0 - 3.62 4.82 6.03
12K90ME 0.0 - 4.34 5.78 7.23
6K90ME-C 0.0 - 1.95 2.60 3.25

7K90ME-C 0.0 - 2.28 3.04 3.80
8K90ME-C 0.0 - 2.61 3.48 4.35
9K90ME-C 0.0 - 2.94 3.92 4.90
10K90ME-C 0.0 - 3.26 4.34 5.43
12K90ME-C 0.0 - 3.92 5.22 6.53

7S80ME-C 0.0 - 3.45 4.59 5.74
8S80ME-C 0.0 - 4.06 5.40 6.75
6S80ME-C9 3.46 4.62 5.77

7S80ME-C9 4.03 5.37 6.71
8S80ME-C9 4.59 6.12 7.65
9S80ME-C9 5.16 6.88 8.60
6K80ME-C 0.0 - 1.73 2.30 2.88

7K80ME-C 0.0 - 2.03 2.70 3.38
8K80ME-C 0.0 - 2.31 3.08 3.85
9K80ME-C 0.0 - 2.61 3.48 4.35
10K80ME-C 0.0 - 2.90 3.86 4.83
12K80ME-C 0.0 - 3.47 4.62 5.78
6K80ME-C9 2.28 3.03 3.79

7K80ME-C9 2.65 3.53 4.41
8K80ME-C9 3.02 4.03 5.03
9K80ME-C9 3.39 4.52 5.65
10K80ME-C9 3.77 5.02 6.28
11K80ME-C9 4.14 5.52 6.90
12K80ME-C9 4.51 6.02 7.52
4S70ME-C 0.0 - 1.77 2.36 2.95

7S70ME-C 0.0 - 3.05 4.07 5.08
8S70ME-C 0.0 - 3.58 4.78 5.97
Normal
Service Value
4L70ME-C 0.0 – 1.41 1.88 2.35

5L70ME-C Monitoring equip. required 0.0 – 1.74 2.32 2.90
7L70ME-C 0.0 – 2.42 3.23 4.03
8L70ME-C 0.0 – 2.76 3.68 4.60
4S65ME-C 0.0 – 1.84 2.46 3.07

5S65ME-C Monitoring equip. required 0.0 – 2.28 3.04 3.80
7S65ME-C 0.0 – 3.17 4.23 5.28
8S65ME-C 0.0 – 3.61 4.82 6.02
4S60ME-C 0.0 – 1.52 2.03 2.53

7S60ME-C 0.0 – 2.61 3.49 4.36
8S60ME-C 0.0 – 3.07 4.10 5.12
4S60ME 0.0 – 1.47 1.96 2.45

5S60ME Monitoring equip. required 0.0 – 1.85 2.46 3.08
6S60ME 0.0 – 2.21 2.94 3.68
7S60ME 0.0 – 2.58 3.44 4.30
8S60ME 0.0 – 2.94 3.92 4.90
4L60ME-C 0.0 – 1.20 1.60 2.00

7L60ME-C 0.0 – 2.07 2.76 3.45
8L60ME-C 0.0 – 2.36 3.15 3.93
4S50ME-C 0.0 – 1.26 1.69 2.11

7S50ME-C 0.0 – 2.17 2.90 3.62
8S50ME-C 0.0 – 2.55 3.41 4.26
X S 8813 AH – Y Oil mist in crankcase, each cyl. high mg/l high

density density
or 0.5 or 0.5
XS 8814 A Oil mist detector failure (no value)
ZT 8801 X = according to the manufacturer.
PI 8804 X = higher than exhaust gas pressure.

XC 8808, 8809,
8810 and 8811 X = Engine and load dependent.
Chapter 701
Instrumentation 701-03
Measuring Instruments, Identification

Remote Indication
Codes for identification of instruments and signal-related functions
PT 8108 AH
First letter Ident. No. Secondary letter(s)
Measured or indicating Ident. number Function

variable The first two digits indicate the point of (Secondary letter(s))
(First letter(s)) measurement, the next two are serial
numbers.
DS: Density switch 11. Manoeuvring system A: Alarm
DT: Density transmitter 12. Hydraulic power supply C: Control
GT: Gauging transmitter 14. Combustion pressure supervision H: High
(load/index transmitter) 20. ECS to/from safety system I: Indication
FT: Flow transmitter 21. ECS to/from remote control system (remote)
FS: Flow switch 22. ECS to/from alarm system L: Low
LS: Level switch 30. ECS Miscellaneous input/output R: Recording
LI: Level indication (local) values S: Switching
LT: Level transmitter 40. Tacho/crankshaft pos. system Y: Slow-down
PDI: Pressure difference 41. Engine cylinder components X: Unclassified
indication (local) 50. VOC: supply system function
PDS: Pressure difference switch 51. VOC: sealing oil system Z: Shut-down
PDT: Pressure difference 52. VOC: control oil system
transmitter 53. Other VOC related systems
PI: Pressure indication (local) 54. VOC engine related components
PS: Pressure switch 80. Fuel oil system
PT: Pressure transmitter 81. Lubrication oil system
ST: Speed transmitter 82. Cylinder lub. oil system
TC: Thermo couple (NiCr-Ni) 83. Stuffing box drain system
TE: Temperature element (Pt-100) 84. Cooling water system
TI: Temperature indication (local) e.g. central cooling water
TS: Temperature switch e.g. sea cooling water
WS: Vibration switch e.g. jacket cooling water
WT: Vibration transmitter 85. Compressed air supply system
VS: Viscosity switch e.g. control air
VT: Viscosity transmitter e.g. starting air
ZV: Position valve (solenoid valve) 86. Scavenge air
ZS: Position switch (limit switch) 87. Exhaust gas system
ZT: Position transmitter 88. Miscellaneous functions
(e.g. proximity sensor) e.g. axial vibration
XC: Unclassified control 90. Project specific
XS: Unclassified switch Note:
XT: Unclassified transmitter ECS: Engine control system
VOC: Volatile Organic Compound
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
The first link (first letter) indicates what is measured or the indicating variable. The
second link is the Ident.No., in which the first two digits indicate the point of meas-
urement or the indicating variable, followed by a serial number. The third link (sec-
ondary letter(s)) indicates the function of the measured value.
Example
TE 8026 I AH Y
Slow down
Alarm high
Indicator
Measurement No. 26
Fuel oil system
Temperature Element
Repeated signals:
Signals which are repeated, such as per cylinder measurement or per turbocharg-
er measurement, etc. are provided with a suffix number. The suffix number is iden-
tical with the place of measurement, such as 1 for cylinder 1, etc. Where signals
are redundant, suffix A or B may be used.
Examples
Cylinder or Turbocharger-Related Signals
ZV 1120-1 C
e.g. Cyl. No./TC No.

Aux. Blower No.
Redundant Signals
PT 8603-A I AH C PT 8603-B I AH C
System A System B
Cylinder-Related Redundant Signals
ZT 8203-A-1 C
e.g. Cyl. No./TC No.

System A
Graphical presentation in PI-diagrams according to ISO 1219 I - II
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
Location of Basic Measuring Points
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
Testbed Adjustments 701-04
701-04 TestbedAdjustments
M/V Engine Type: Engine layout: Checked by:

Yard: Builder: Engine BHP:
No.:
No.: Built year: r/min.: Date:
Fuel valve nozzle Marked: .......................... ......... holes of ....... mm Governor
Fuel valve Opening pressure ....................... bar Make:
Type:
No.:
Compression rate Height of shims under piston rod ................... mm Serial No.:
Lubricator pumping stroke to be finished when the corresponding crankthrow is .............. ° after BDC
Fuel pump No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Reading A:
Main piston in TDC
Reading B: Plunger
in lowest position
Cam top lift, C:
C = A-B (mm)
VIT index on STOP
Fuel index on STOP
See Section 909-1.1 in
Vol. II ‘Maintenance’ Fuel index on MAX.
Man. Exhaust Crossgirder No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
side side
in 1/100 mm X
These measurements are taken with the staybolts tightened
Optical
Bedplate alignment
measurements
Y
X
Piano wire
Y
d = 0.5 mm
load 40 kg
Z
Crankshaft deflection Crank No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

in 1/100 mm
Crank in bottom port side. Dial gauge
set to ‘Zero’ in bottom port side
Deflection to be measured in cold cond.
Crank in port side
Crank in top
Crank in starboard side
Crank in bottom starboard side

Total clearance at thrust bearing
B+C = ............................. mm (max. .............................. mm)
To ensure correct crankshaft position relative to bedplate,
check that A+B = ............... mm
‘A’ to be taken as shown, i.e. between upper edge of lower shell and
the crank web, with aftmost crank in BDC. S/K/L-MC
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
IMO NOx Components and Technical File 701-05
1. Check of IMO-ID, Markings on Components

The components described in Items 1.1 to 1.6 have been marked with unambiguous
identification numbers to enable the relevant drawing and certificate to be traced. The
schematic drawings show where to find the markings on the individual component types.
Information on the important dimensions for each component type in respect to the NOx
characteristic can be found in the engine instruction book, see references in footnotes **)
to TF Chapter 1.4.
The circled part of the number is the only part of the entire number that is
to be defined as the “IMO number”. The component marking may include a revision refer-
ence nnnnnnn-n.n, however, that reference is not part of the defining marking and should
be ignored.
See also Drawing No. 0741260-8 regarding marks and stamps on components
for MAN B&W two-stroke diesel engines.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
1.1 Fuel Valve Nozzle
302 To be marked with

Licensee’s name/ Certified markings:
trademark or abbreviation
Part No.
XXX 1261573-1 x 150

Marking instruction:
747 To be stamped:
No. 0742639-1
Part No. and hole diameter
1.2 Pressure Booster Top Cover
To be marked with
302
trademark or abbreviation and
Part No.
Part No.
xxxxx-x
No. 0742962-4
1.3 Hydraulic Piston Housing
To be marked with
302
trademark or abbreviation and
Part No.
Part No.
xxxxx-x Marking instruction:
No. 0742960-0.1
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
1.4 Cylinder Liner
Certified markings:
Part No.
307 Marking scratch
432 Fuel pump side Marking instruction:

0920352 - 4
To be marked with Licensee’s
302 name/trademark, Part No.
No. 0742637-8
1.5 Cylinder Cover
Certified markings:
To be marked with Licensee’s name/
302 trademark, Part No. Year and Week
Part No.
309 To be marked with Charge and Serial No.
On fuel pump side
No. 0742634-2
1.6 Piston Crown
Certified markings:
To be marked with Licensee’s name/
302 trademark, Part No. Year and Week
Part No.
309 To be marked with Charge and Serial No.
On fuel pump side
No. 0742392-0
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
2. Checking Setting Values
2.1 Checking the Shims

Checking the shim thickness, t (Compression volume)
Turn the crankthrow towards the exhaust side, to provide access for measuring
the thickness of the shim which is inserted between piston rod and crosshead pin.
See figure below.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
3. Nameplates
3.1 ELFI Valve

Manufacturer
Type
Serial number(s)
Manufacturing date
Specification
Max. cont. speed
Max. cont. gas temperature
3.2 Air Cooler Specifications (Nameplate)

Manufacturer
Type
Contract Number
Year build
Water side Air side
Operational Gauge Pressure bar
Test Gauge Pressure bar
Operational Temperature deg. C
Content L
3.3 Auxiliary Blower Specifications (Nameplate)

Manufacturer:
Model: Serial number(s):
Capacity: Speed:
Pressure: Power:
Temp.: Elec. source:
Density: Mfg. date:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
4. Survey methods including on-board verification
4.1 IMO surveys

Figure B.1 shows a flow chart for all the survey methods used in connection with
IMO certification of a MAN B&W two-stroke engine.
a. test-bed survey (engine pre-certification survey)

b. sea-trial survey (initial survey on board), and
c. on-board surveys (intermediate and periodical surveys)
On test bed, parent and the member engines are surveyed by the same proce-
dures, except for the important difference that emission measurements are per-
formed and surveyed on the parent engine, only. (The emissions data measured
on the parent engine are used to establish the emission simulation for the on-
board survey code to verify compliance based on standard performance data.)
On board, only the ‘on-board’ survey method shall be used for future ‘intermediate’
and ‘periodical’ surveys. (Provided that the required IMO certificates have been is-
sued based on the engine ‘pre-certification’ and ‘initial’ surveys.)
The standard MAN B&W on-board survey method is defined as a combination of

performance parameter checks, and component and setting verification. The ex-
tend of the component and setting verification depends on different conditions,
but, in general, can be reduced to the fuel nozzle, if the performance data are with-
in the specified tolerances given in TF Table 1.3 and no component changes have
been made to the engine.
The necessary performance parameters and corrections are specified in Chapter

B.2. And a description with step-by-step procedures of the actual survey is pre-
sented in Chapter B.3.
4.2 Definitions and Corrections
4.2.1 Definitions
4.2.2 ‘Standard MAN B&W performance check’

Table B.2.1 lists the parameters necessary as input for the survey code from a
standard MAN B&W performance check.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
Table B.2.1: Input data for survey code *)
Engine Number -
Vessel Name -
T/C inlet temperature ** deg.C
Ambient temperature ** deg.C
Ambient pressure ** mbar
Relative humidity of ambient air rel.%
Scavenging-air temperature ** deg.C
Scavenging-air pressure ** bar
Sea-water (inlet) temperature ** deg.C
Turbine back pressure ** mmWC
Max. cylinder pressure ** bar
Max. compression pressure bar
Power **,*** kW
Engine speed r/min
Turbocharger speed r/min
Fuel pump index -
VIT index (if applicable) -
* See foot notes **) to TF Chapter 1.4 Comments on
calibration of sensors and apparatus, and correction to
ISO ambient conditions for these measurements.
** These items are required in order to calculate the NOx
emission.
*** See comment in text on power estimation
(Section B.2.1.3.)
4.2.3 Tolerances for ‘load points’

The actual load points are attached a certain tolerance (see ‘NOx Technical Code,’
Appendix 4.) However, due to propeller lay out or vessel trim a ‘light or heavy pro-
peller’ may be experienced. In these cases MAN B&W recommend to select the
load point according to the actual measured mean effective pressure correspond-
ing to the specified load point.
4.2.4 Power
The power is usually derived from torque and speed. If the torque is difficult to
measure directly through torsion measurements, the Charts added in Fig. B.2 or
B.3, can be used to estimate the brake power. Alternatively the load could be de-
rived from a MAN B&W PMI system.
4.2.5 Back pressure

The usual variations in turbine back pressure have been shown only to have a mi-
nor influence on the NOx emission and the measurement of the turbine back pres-
sure, therefore, could be omitted during a NOx compliance survey. However, the
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
influence has been included in the survey code as well as in the following example
due to the influence on the ISO correction on Pmax.
4.3 Survey cases

The different load points and cooling conditions lead to the following survey cases:
4.3.1 Load-point ‘corrections’
4.3.2 Test-bed survey – All engines

Includes all four E3/E2-ISO cycle load points.
4.3.3 On board – Engine without VIT

The actual NOx compliance is estimated from performance data at 75% load only,
assuming that the NOx(test bed 75%) / NOx(estimated 75%) ratio is identical for the ratio
of the remaining load points, also.
4.3.4 On board – Engine with VIT

The actual NOx compliance assumes that the 25 to 75% load points contribute as
without VIT, based on the 75% performance data. The 100% load point contribu-
tion is estimated from the actual performance at the measured load above the
break point (from 85 to 100% loads), adjusting the NOx(test bed 100%) for the same
Pmax difference as the measured load, but for a Tscav and Pturb.back reflecting
the 100% load:
1. Pmax(100%) = Pmax(meas load%)

2. Tscav(100%) = Tscav(meas load%) + (100 – meas load%) x (Tscav.ref(100%) –
Tscav.ref(75%)) / 25
3. Pturb.back(100%) = Pt.back(meas load%) + (100 – meas load%) x
(Ptback.ref(100%) – Ptback.ref(75%)) / 25
(If the VIT break point can not be reached, case B.2.2.1.3 is handled identical to
case B.2.2.1.2.)
4.3.5 Scavenging-air temperature corrections on board

The correction for cooling-water temperature depends on the actual cooling sys-
tem. In all cases, TF Table 1.3 specifies the actual reference scavenging-air tem-
perature.
4.3.6 Sea-water cooling system (SW)

4. Relative scavenging-air temperature change
= (Tmeas.scav.air – Tref.scav. air) – (Tmeas.sea-water inlet – Tref.sea-wa-
ter inlet)
4.3.7 Central cooling system – Optimal cooling (CC-O)

5. Relative scavenging-air temperature change
= (Tmeas.scav.air – Tref.scav. air) –
(Tmeas.sea-water inlet – Tref.sea-water inlet)
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
4.3.8 Central cooling system – Fixed cooler out temperature (CC-F)

6. Relative scavenging-air temperature change =
Tmeas.scav.air – Tref.scav. air
4.3.9 Test-bed cooling system

The scavenging-air temperature is on test bed always adjusted similar to a CC-F
cooling system with the appropriate Tscav.ref., since the actual cooling system is
not available and different cooling-water adjustment possibilities usually exists on
a test bed. (The actual air-cooler performance can be evaluated based on a heat
balance for the system.)
All assumptions have been built into the MAN B&W survey code.
4.4 Correction to ISO ambient conditions
4.4.1 Performance parameters correction to ISO ambient conditions

Some of the measured performance parameters need to be corrected to ISO am-
bient conditions in order to perform a reliable evaluation and compare with refer-
ence conditions. These parameters are Pmax, Pcomp and Pscav.
Correction equations:
7. CorrP max = P max, m ⋅ (100 − 0.2198 ⋅ ∆Tinl + 0.081 ⋅ ∆Tsc + 0.022 ⋅ ∆Pamb − 0.005278 ⋅ ∆Pback ) / 100
8. CorrPcomp = Pcomp , m ⋅ (100 − 0.2954 ⋅ ∆Tinl + 0.153 ⋅ ∆Tsc + 0.0301 ⋅ ∆Pamb − 0.007021 ⋅ ∆Pback ) / 100
9. CorrPsc = Psc , m ⋅ (100 − 0.2856 ⋅ ∆Tinl + 0.222 ⋅ ∆Tsc + 0.0293 ⋅ ∆Pamb − 0.006788 ⋅ ∆Pback ) / 100
where: ∆ refers to (reference – measured)

subscript m measured
Tinl T/C inlet temperature (deg.C)
Tsc scavenging-air temperature (deg.C)
Pamb ambient pressure (mmHg)
Pmax maximum pressure (bar)
Pcomp compression pressure (bar)
Psc scavenging-air pressure (bar)
Pback back pressure (mmWC)
4.4.2 NOx emission correction to ISO ambient conditions

Based on simultaneous measurements of NOx emission and performance param-
eters from several different MAN B&W two-stroke engines, a special ‘NOx func-
tion’ has been formulated to calculate NOx as a function of specific engine
parameters. Together with the MAN B&W cycle simulation to predict dependent
engine parameters (or simplified in the form of performance correction factors,) the
‘NOx function’ can be used to calculate the tolerances on the most common per-
formance parameters.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
The measured data have also been used to formulate an equation to correct emis-
sions at the given ambient conditions to the specified ISO ambient conditions in
order to compare emission values at the same conditions (see Equation (10).)
1
10. CorrNO x (H a ,Tamb , pamb ) =
1 + C 1⋅ (H a − 10.71) + C 2 ⋅ (Tamb − 298.15) + C 3 ⋅ (pamb − 1000 )
where: Ha water content in scavenging air (gH2O/kg dry air)

Tamb ambient-air temperature (K)
pamb ambient pressure (mbar)
C1 to C3 coefficients depend on engine load (given in Table B.2.2)
Table B.2.2: ISO ambient correction coefficients
Engine load - C1 C2 C3
%
100 -0.00994 0.00144 -0.00007
75, 50 and 25 -0.00505 0.00145 -0.00011
Ha can be calculated the following way:
6.220 ⋅ Ra ⋅ pa
11. H a* =
pb − pa ⋅ Ra ⋅ 10− 2
6.220 ⋅ psc ⋅ 100

12. H sc =
pc − psc
13. If H*a ≥ Hsc then Ha = Hsc else Ha = H*a
where: H*a water content at ambient-air condition (gH2O/kg dry air)

Ra relative humidity of intake air (rel.%)
pa saturation vapour pressure at ambient-air condition (kPa)
pb total barometric pressure (kPa)
Hsc water content at scavenging-air condition (gH2O/kg dry air)
pc scavenging-air pressure (kPa)
psc saturation vapour pressure at scavenging-air condition (kPa)
The saturation vapour pressure is only a function of temperature and can be cal-
culated the following way:
5325.35
19.008 −
14. p = 1.013 ⋅ e T
where T is the temperature in Kelvin (K).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
The ISO corrected NOx value is calculated using the equation for the average
weighed NOx emission (IMONOx) given in the ‘IMO-NOx Technical Code:’
15. ∑ii ==1nSpecific _ emission (i ) ⋅ Power (i ) ⋅WF (i )
IMONOx =
∑ii ==1nPower (i ) ⋅WF (i )
where n=4 represents the 4 load points of the E3/E2 cycle (please refer to the
‘IMO-NOx Technical Code’ for definition of E3/E2.) Using the weight factor (WF),
the power (in kW) and the specific NOx emission (in g/kWh) for the 4 load points,
the equation can also be written as Equation (16). However, for Equation (16) to
be valid, the load points of the E3/E2 cycle must correspond exactly to 100, 75, 50
and 25% of MCR.
16. IMONOx = 0.2909 ⋅ NO x (100% ) + 0.5455 ⋅ NO x (75% ) + 0.1091 ⋅ NO x (50% ) + 0.0545 ⋅ NO x (25% )
4.5 Correction to reference performance conditions

The NOx function has also been used to derive a simplified method to calculate
the variation in the ISO corrected NOx value as function of maximum cylinder
pressure, scavenging-air temperature and turbine back pressure. The relative
changes are shown in Table B.2.3 at the four specific cycle-load conditions. How-
ever, the simplified method will predict a slightly higher NOx emission than the
NOx function.
Table B.2.3: Relative changes in NOx for Pmax, Tscav and Pturb.back
Power ∆NOx, Pmax 1) ∆NOx, Tscav 2) ∆NOx, Pturb.back 3)

(%) (gNOx/kWh pr. (gNOx/kWh pr. (gNOx/kWh pr.
bar) deg.C) mmWC)
100 0.1816 0.0224 0.0004

75 0.1760 0.0209 0.0006
50 0.1760 0.0209 0.0006
25 0.1760 0.0209 0.0006
1. Relative increase in NOx value (corrected to ISO ambient conditions) resulting from a
one bar increase in the cylinder maximum pressure.
one degree increase in the scavenging-air temperature.
one mmWC increase in the turbine back pressure.
5. MAN B&W survey procedures

MAN B&W has defined a combination of performance parameter checks and,
component and setting verification as the on-board survey method. TF Fig. 1
shows a flow chart of the on-board survey procedures only, whereas Fig. B.1 also
shows the applications for test-bed and sea-trial surveys.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
On board, the ‘on-board survey’ method checks with a minimum of component and
adjustment verifications in order not to stop and dismantle the engine. The more
extended component and setting adjustment verification can be used, when the
engine is apart. Since a performance check can not be performed in dock, the
‘missing’ setting values are based on recorded data obtained within (a recom-
mended) one-month period from a called (or anticipated) survey. However, it is
strongly recommended to perform a performance check to verify the setting values
soonest possible after the docking to ensure continuing compliance.
The parameter check method defined through the survey code accounts the influ-
ence of certain parameters, only. Through the cylinder pressure: adjustments of
injection timing, VIT, compression shims and exhaust-valve timing, through the
scavenging-air temperature: a deteriorated scavenging-air cooler performance,
and through the back pressure: eventually blocking up of the exhaust heat ex-
changer.
5.1 On-board survey code

The on-board survey (parameter check) can be performed using the manufacturer
supplied survey code as an easy tool to calculate and present the expected NOx
emission. If a computer is not available, a manual evaluation can be performed fol-
lowing Section B.3.2. The procedure is based on a ‘standard MAN B&W perform-
ance check’ (see necessary parameters in Table B.2.1 and the comments in TF
Chapter 1.4.)
Two versions of the code exist. The ‘on-board’ version is used as the standard sur-
vey method on board. And, the ‘test-bed’ version, a more detailed version, is used
to show compliance on test bed for member engines. As described in Chapter B.2,
the on-board version differs slightly for a sea-water and a central cooling-water
system and, for an engine without VIT or with VIT.
To perform the survey, the following steps are to be taken (see flow Chart Fig. 1
or Fig. B.1,) independent of the survey-code version:
a. Inspect ‘Technical File’ (TF) and ‘record book’ (or pre-TF on test bed.)
b. Perform a ‘performance check’ (the extend follows the survey-code re-
quirement) (for a load estimate see B.2.1.3.)
c. Estimate NOx for verifying compliance using the dedicated ‘survey code.’
d. Check fuel nozzle (a spare fuel nozzle may suffice.)
e. Check other NOx components on test bed or in dock (or if considered
necessary.)
f. Check setting adjustments on test bed or in dock (or if considered neces-
sary.)
g. Add output from the survey code to the ‘record book.’
The Tables in Enclosure 1 show input and output from the survey code based on
the parent engine test-bed data, as an example. The actual estimated NOx will be
compared in the plot with the measured (and corrected) parent engine data.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
5.2 Manual procedure

All the steps in Section B.3.1 are followed except for execution of the survey code
(B.3.1.c.)
To evaluate manually the NOx compliance, the following two steps have to be per-
formed:
a. Evaluate the performance influence on the ISO corrected NOx values for
each load condition (as specified in Chapter B.2 or in the following exam-
ple in Section B.3.4 based on the parent engine data.) Performance data
are corrected manually using Equations (7) to (9) in B.2.3.1 (or from
Charts in the instruction book specified in foot notes **) to TF Chapter 1.4
Comments.)
b. Calculate the final average IMO NOx (Equations (15) or (16).)
5.3 Comments on component checks

The actual NOx components are specified in TF Chapter 1.1 (or in Enclosure 1,
the last output page from the survey code,) and Appendix A specifies the neces-
sary verification procedures. The extend of the component verification is dis-
cussed above.
Turbocharger, air cooler and auxiliary blower are verified through their nameplates
(also included in Appendix A.) To verify the turbochargers internal parts (marked
by the turbocharger manufacturer) dismantling is necessary (procedures are not
included.)
To verify the setting values, a performance check has to be performed using the
on-board survey code (as described in the previous Section B.3.1.) When the
specified performance data (see Table 1.3) corrected to ISO ambient conditions
are within the given tolerances, the setting adjustments are within compliance.
For spare part changes (only components as listed in TF Table 1.1 are allowed) a
review of the record book would normally be sufficient. Although a standard per-
formance check will reveal changes to many NOx components, a new combustion
chamber or a new fuel nozzle may not be discovered. (The fuel nozzle is the most
important component to affect the NOx emission from an engine.) Therefore, a re-
view of the record book is necessary as a starting point for the survey, and a fuel
nozzle should be inspected.
5.4 Survey example

Details of the NOx estimate to verify compliance for a test-bed survey using a test-
bed cooling-water system are described in this Chapter as an example. The earlier
Chapters describe modifications necessary for the slightly different survey cases.
The NOx emission can be estimated at each load conditions using the following
calculation method:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
1. Measure the maximum pressure, scavenging-air temperature, turbine back

pressure and ambient conditions (see example in Table B.3.1) at the re-
quired load points.
2. Correct maximum pressure to ISO conditions using Equation (7).
3. Derive the equivalent relative change in NOx emission (g/kWh) using Table
B.2.3 based on the actual performance in step 1 and reference conditions in
TF Table 1.3.
Table B.3.1: Calculation of expected NOx ‘at site’ performance and ISO ambient
condition – test bed cooling-water system (example only – identical to the results
in Enclosure 1)
Power Meas- Relative Meas.‘sea Meas. Relative Meas.tur Relative Expected

ured max. change -water’ scav.air change bback change site
pressure in NOx temp. temp. in NOx pressure in NOx ISO-NOx
(%) (barabs) (g/kWh) (deg.C) (deg.C) (g/kWh) (mmWC) (g/kWh) (g/kWh)
100 148.8 -0.400 29 41 0.090 230 -0.028 13.83
75 130.7 -0.232 27 33 0.021 121 -0.035 14.70
50 99.3 -0.300 26 29 0.021 63 -0.014 12.32
25 70.8 -0.215 25 32 -0.021 19 -0.003 12.56
E3 cycle 14.07
value
Example of calculation for 100% engine load and test bed cooling (the approach
is similar for the other load conditions:)
Measured scavenging-air temperature (Table B.3.1) 41 deg.C

Reference scavenging-air temperature (TF Table 1.3) 37 deg.C
Measured ‘sea-water’ inlet temperature (Table B.3.1) 29 deg.C
‘Sea-water’ reference temperature (TF Table 1.3) 25 deg.C
Relative scavenging-air temperature = 41 – 37 = 4 deg.C
change= Tmeas.scav.air – Tref.scav. air *)
Delta NOx, Tscav (Table B.2.3) 0.0224 g/kWh

pr. deg.C
Relative change in NOx due to Tscav differ- 4 * 0.0224 = 0.090 g/kWh
ence
Measured maximum pressure (Table B.3.1) 148.8 barabs

Reference maximum pressure (TF Table 1.3) 151 barabs
Difference (measured – reference) -2.2 barabs
Delta NOx, Pmax (Table B.2.3) 0.1816 g/kWh
pr. barabs
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 701
Relative change in NOx due to Pmax differ- -2.2 * 0.1816 = -0.400 g/kWh
ence
Measured turbine back pressure (Table B.3.1) 230 mmWC

Reference turbine back pressure (TF Table 1.3) 300 mmWC
Difference (measured – reference) 230 – 300 = -70 mmWC
Delta NOx, Pturb.back (Table B.2.3) 0.0004 g/kWh pr.
mmWC
Relative change in NOx due to Pturb.back -70 * 0.0004 = -0.0280 g/kWh
difference
Measured NOx, corr. ISO ambient and ref. (TF Table 14.17 g/kWh
performance 4.2.2)
NOx value, at ISO ambient and reference 14.17 + 0.090 –
site conditions 0.400 – 0.028 = 13.83 g/kWh
*) Remember to change to the actual cooling-water system for on-board surveys
4. Estimate the expected NOx emission at measured site performance but ISO
ambient conditions for each load condition as a summation of the ISO cor-
rected NOx value and the relative changes (see last column in Table B.3.1)
using Equation (16) to verify compliance.
IMONOx = 0.2909* 13.83 + 0.5455* 14.70 + 0.1091* 12.32 + 0.0545* 12.56 = 14.07 g/kWh
This method is used to check NOx compliance for varying measured values of
maximum pressure, scavenging-air temperature and turbine back pressure. Since
the maximum IMO-NOx value for this engine group is 15.1 g/kWh, the engine ful-
fils the requirements. This is of course equivalent to the performance parameters
being within the specified tolerances.
It should be emphasized that the survey code, unlike this example, uses Equation
(15) (i.e. the measured load-point powers) to calculate the simulated NOx emis-
sion. And, the survey code will issue a warning, if the performance parameters are
outside the allowed ranges, or the load point is more than ±5% off the ideal E3/E2
cycle value.
Performance check:
1) 4 load points (E2/E3 cycle)
2) For engines with VIT: 75% load and one load point above the break point.
Without only the 75% load point.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Checks during Standstill Periods Chapter 702
Table of Contents
702-01 Checks during Standstill Periods

1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Regular Checks at Engine Standstill during Normal Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Check 2.1: Oil Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Check 2.2: Oil Pan, and Bearing Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Check 2.3: Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Check 2.4: Scavenge Port Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Check 2.5: Exhaust Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Check 2.6: Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Check 2.7: Circulating Oil Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Check 2.8: Turbocharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Check 2.9: Regular Tests of the ME Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. Checks at Engine Standstill during Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Check 3.1: Bolts, Studs and Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Check 3.2: Leakages and Drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Check 3.3: Pneumatic Valves in the Control Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Check 3.4: Bottom Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4. Checks at Engine Standstill after Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Check 4.1: Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Check 4.2: Piston Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Check 4.3: Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Check 4.4: Turbocharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Check 4.5: Cylinder Lubricators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Check 4.6: Air Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5. Laid-up Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Checks during Standstill Periods 702-01
1. General
The present chapter describes how to check up on the condition of the engine
while it is at a standstill.
To keep the engine-room staff well informed regarding the operational condition,
we recommend recording the results of the inspections in writing.
The checks mentioned below follow a sequence which is suited to a forthcoming

period of major repairs.
Checks 2.1-2.9
should be made regularly at engine standstill during normal service.
Checks 2.1 to 2.9 should be coordinated and evaluated together

with the measurements described in Chapter 706, ‘Engine Synopsis’.
Checks 3.1-3.5
should be made at engine standstill during the repairs.
Checks 4.1-4.7
should be made at engine standstill after the repairs.
If repair or alignment of bearings, crankshaft or pistons has been carried out, re-
peat checks 2.1, 2.2 and 2.6.
Checks to be made just before starting the engine are mentioned in Chapter 703.
2. Regular Checks at Engine Standstill during Normal Service

The work should be adapted to the sailing schedule of the ship, such that it can be
carried out at suitable intervals – for instance as suggested in Vol. II Introduction
‘Checking and Maintenance Programme’.
The maintenance intervals stated therein are normal for sound machinery. If, how-
ever, a period of operational disturbances occurs, or if the condition is unknown
due to repairs or alterations, the relevant inspections should be repeated more fre-
quently.
Based upon the results of Checks 2.1-2.9, combined with performance observa-
tions, it is determined if extra maintenance work (other than that scheduled) is nec-
essary.
Check 2.1: Oil Flow

While the circulating oil pump is still running and the oil is warm, open up the crank-
case and check that the oil is flowing freely from all crosshead, crankpin and main
bearings.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The oil jets from the axial oil grooves in the crosshead bearing lower shells should
be of uniform thickness and direction. Deviations may be a sign of “squeezed
white-metal” or clogged-up grooves, see also Section 708-01.
By means of the sight glasses at the piston cooling oil outlets, check that the oil is
passing through the pistons.
Check also the thrust bearing and step-up gear lubrication.
After a major overhaul of pistons, bearings, etc.,

this check 2.1 should be repeated before starting the engine.
Check 2.2: Oil Pan, and Bearing Clearances

After stopping the circulating oil pump, check the bottom of the oil pan for frag-
ments of white metal from the bearings.
Check crosshead, crankpin, main bearing and thrust bearing clearances with a
feeler gauge, and note down the values, as described in Section 708-01.
Check 2.3: Filters

Open up all filters, (also automatic filters), to check that the wire gauze and/or oth-
er filtering material is intact, and that no foreign bodies are found, which could in-
dicate a failure elsewhere.
Check 2.4: Scavenge Port Inspection

Inspect the condition of the piston rings, cylinder liners, pistons, and piston rods,
as detailed in Section 707-01.
Note down the conditions as described in Section 707-01.
During this inspection, circulate the cooling water and cooling oil through the en-
gine so that leakages, if any, can be discovered.
Remove any coke and sludge from the scavenge air ports and boxes.
(In case of prolonged port calls or similar, follow the precautions mentioned in
point 4.2).
Check 2.5: Exhaust Receiver

Open up the exhaust receiver and inspect for deposits and/or any metal frag-
ments, (which could indicate a failure elsewhere). Examine also the gas grid to
make sure that it is clean.
Check 2.6: Crankshaft

Take deflection measurements as described in Section 708-02.
Check 2.7: Circulating Oil Samples

Take an oil sample and send it to a laboratory for analysis and comments.
(See Section 708-04).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Check 2.8: Turbocharger

Unscrew the drain plugs or open the cocks at the bottom of the turbocharger hous-
ings. Also drain from the drain box/pipe in the exhaust gas uptake (also used when
cleaning the exhaust gas evaporator).
This prevents the possible accumulation of rain water, which could cause corro-
sion in the gas ducts, and partial wash-off of soot deposits, which again may result
in unbalance of the turbocharger rotor.
Open inspection covers (if fitted) or remove the gas inlet pipe on the turbine side
of the charger, and check for deposits on the turbine wheel and nozzle ring. See
also Check 4.4 regarding precautions to avoid turbocharger bearing damage dur-
ing engine standstill.
Check 2.9: Regular tests of the ME control system

Most failures will be indicated by alarms or malfunction during daily use (malfunc-
tion which will not prevent continuous safe operation)
However the following tests listed below have to be carried out regularly in service,
to secure proper operation and keeping the redundancy.
The tests are:
1. LOP lamp test.

2. Test of the pilot valves to the main start valve.
3. Function test of cylinder start valves.
4. Start up pumps.
5. HCU Safety by-pass.
6. Test of shut down signals to all MPC units.
7. Cylinder lubricator level sensor slow down function.
(For plant with level sensor, flow sensor is tested automatically)
8. Leakage test of the hydraulic system.
9. Leakage test of double wall pipes and alarm function.
10. Visual inspection of the inside of the electronic boxes and check
of the tightening torque of the terminals
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The tests are performed in the following way:
Test When Preconditions and Action Expected result

initial state
1 Weekly Stopped Engine Press the lamp test bottom and confirm that the
light is on in all lamps (after some time)
2 After Stopped Engine Activate the pilot valves (the pilot valves are seen
arrival Permission from the on Plate 70318 "Diagram of Manoeuvring Sys-
in Port bridge tem" pos. 30 and 32) one by one via the MOP
Before FWE (Screen: Engine Status Plate 70325) and confirm
that the main start valve opens. (This test is to be
made together with the cylinder starting valves
test 3)
3 After Stopped Engine Make a manual Slow Turn and Air run via the
arrival Permission from the MOP (Screen: Engine Operation Plate 70324),
in Port bridge both more than one revolution. Confirm by visual
Before FWE inspection that the rotation has the same regular-
ity during the full revolution.
4 Monthly Change master pump via the MOP

(Screen: Auxiliaries HPS Plate 70329)
5 Every 6 Engine stopped. Open manual connection valve 316 (P1-P2) Pressure drops
month MOP Access level = NOTE: Valve 316 must be closed after the test towards zero
Chief is completed. Pressure increases to
HPS Mode must be = At the MOP (Screen: Auxiliaries HPS), open 230 bar
manual Pump Bypass from ACU1 Pressure drops
Start-up pumps run- towards zero
ning. At the MOP, close Pump Bypass from ACU1 Pressure increases to
230 bar
At the MOP, open Pump Bypass from ACU3
At the MOP, close Pump Bypass from ACU3
6 Every 6 Engine stopped Activate emergency stop, check that both ECUA,
month ECUB and all CCU's gives alarm for shut down.
(Screen: Alarms Alarm List Plate 70320)
7 Every 6 Engine stopped Close the manual valve for lube oil supply on all Cylinder lube oil
month cylinders and activate from the MOP (Screen: alarm for all cylinders.
Auxiliaries Cylinder Lubricators Plate 70331) the Slow Down request
Lubricator Test Sequence for all cylinders. activated
NOTE: Lubricator Test Sequence must be All
Off when checked
8 Every 6 See Procedure M90622-xxxx and Datasheet

month D10622-xxxx for detailed test. (version number
relates to procedure/datasheet in VOL 2 mainte-
nance and is engine specific)
9 Every 6 See Procedure M90622-xxxx and Datasheet

Month D10622-xxxx for detailed test. (version number
relates to procedure/datasheet in VOL 2 mainte-
nance and is engine specific)
10 Engine stopped As described above. See chapter 701-01 Safety

Precautions this book regarding general cleanli-
ness, order and tidiness.
3. Checks at Engine Standstill during Repairs

Check 3.1: Bolts, Studs and Nuts
Check all bolts, studs and nuts in the crankcase to make sure that they have not
worked loose.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The same applies to the holding-down bolts in the bedplate. Check that side and
end chocks are properly positioned, see also Vol. II ‘Maintenance’, Procedure 912.
Check all locking devices.
Check 3.2: Leakages and Drains

Remedy any water or oil leakages. Clean drain and vent pipes of possible block-
ages by blowing-through.
Check 3.3: Pneumatic Valves in the Control Air System

Clean the filters.
Check 3.4: Bottom Tank

If not done within the previous year, pump the oil out of the bottom tank and re-
move the sludge. After brushing the tank ceiling (to remove rust and scale), clean
the tank and coat the ceiling with clean oil.
4. Checks at Engine Standstill after Repairs

If repair or alignment of bearings, crankshaft or pistons has been carried out, re-
peat Checks 2.1, 2.2 and 2.6.
Check 4.1: Flushing

If during repairs (involving opening-up of the engine or circulating oil system) sand
or other impurities could have entered the engine, flush the oil system while by-
passing the bearings, as described in Chapter 708.
Continue the flushing until all dirt is removed.
Check 4.2: Piston Rods

If the engine is to be out of service for a prolonged period, or under adverse tem-
perature and moisture conditions, coat the piston rods with clean oil, and turn the
engine while the circulating oil pump is running.
Repeat this procedure regularly in order to prevent corrosion attack on piston rods
and crankcase surfaces.
Check 4.3: Turning

After restoring normal oil circulation, check the movability of the engine by turning
it one or more revolutions using the turning gear.
Before leading oil to the exhaust valve actuators, via the main lube oil
pump, check that air supply is connected to the pneumatic pistons of
the exhaust valves, and that the exhaust valves are closed.
See also Section 703-01.
Check 4.4: Turbocharger

Mount the drain plugs, (or close the cocks) and re-fit the inspection covers.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Make sure that the turbocharger shafts do not rotate during engine standstill, as
the bearings may suffer damage if the shafts rotate while the lube oil supply is
stopped.
Check 4.5: Cylinder Lubricators

Check that all pipe connections and valves are tight.
Press the ‘pre-lubrication’ button on the HMI panel and inspect that all LED’s for
feedback indication on the intermediate boxes are flashing. This indicates that the
lubricators are functioning correctly. If in doubt, dismantle the pipe at the cylinder
liner to observe the oil flow.
Check 4.6: Air Cooler

With the cooling water pump running, check if water can be seen through the drain
system sight glass or at the small drain pipe from the water mist catcher.
If water is found, the cooler element is probably leaking. In that case the element
should be changed or repaired.
5. Laid-up Vessels
During the lay-up period, and also when preparing the engine for a long time out
at service, we recommend that our special instructions for preservation of the main
engine are followed.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Starting, Manoeuvring and Running Chapter 703
Table of Contents
703-01 Preparations for Starting

1. Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Lube Oil Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Cooling Water Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4. Slow-Turning the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

4.1 Slow-turn with Slow-Turning Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4.2 Slow-turn with Turning Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5. Fuel Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6. Hydraulic System. HPS – Hydraulic Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
7. Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
703-02 Starting-up
1. Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Starting Difficulties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Supplementary Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4. Checks during Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
703-03 Loading
1. Loading Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Checks during Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
703-04 Running
1. Running Difficulties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Supplementary Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. Check during Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
703-05 Preparations PRIOR to Arrival in Port
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 703 Starting, Manoeuvring and Running
Table of Contents
703-06 Stopping
703-07 Operations AFTER Arrival in Port
703-08 Engine Control System, 50-108ME/ME-C Engines

1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
703-09 MOP Description

1. Main Operation Panel (MOP) (Overview). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 MOP A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 MOP B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Issues to both MOP types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4 Preparations made by MAN B&W Diesel A/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
703-14 Alarm Handling on the MOP

1. HMI (Human Machine Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Alarm Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3.1 Alarm List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.2 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.3 Manual Cut-Out List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.4 Channel List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
703-15 Engine Operation

1. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3 Process Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.4 Cylinder Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.5 Cylinder Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 703 Starting, Manoeuvring and Running
Table of Contents
703-16 Auxiliaries
1. Auxiliaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Hydraulic Pump Station HPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Scavenge Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Exhaust Gas Bypass (engine dependent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Cylinder Lubricators ME Lube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
703-17 Maintenance
1. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 System View I/O Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Invalidated Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
703-18 Admin
1. System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Set Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
PLATES
Starting Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70304

Sequence Diagram, FPP Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70305
Sequence Diagram, CPP Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70309
Engine Control System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70317
Diagram of Manoeuvring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70318
MOP Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70319
MOP Alarm List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70320
MOP Event Log (2-pages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70321
MOP Manual Cut-Out List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70322
MOP Channel List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70323
MOP Operation (2-pages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70324
MOP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70325
MOP Process Information (2-pages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70326
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Starting, Manoeuvring and Running Chapter 703
Table of Contents
MOP Cylinder Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70327

MOP Cylinder Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70328
MOP HPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70329
MOP Blowers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70330
MOP ME-Lube (2-pages). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70331
MOP System View (3-pages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70332
MOP Invalidated Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70333
MOP Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70334
MOP Set Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70335
MOP Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70336
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Preparations for Starting 703-01
General:
The following descriptions cover the standard manoeuvring sys-
tem for the 50-108ME/ME-C engines.
Since the manoeuvring and hydraulic system supplied for a spe-

cific engine may differ from the standard system, ‘Plant Installa-
tion Drawings’ should always be consulted when dealing with
questions regarding a specific plant.
See Section 705-03 regarding correct fuel oil temperature before starting.
Regarding checks to be made before starting, when cylinders are out of

operation, see Section 704-04.
1. Air Systems
· Drain water, if any, from the starting air system. See also Plate 70304.
· Drain water, if any, from the control air system at the receivers.
· Pressurise the air systems. Check the pressures.
· Pressurise the air system to the pneumatic exhaust valves.
Air pressure must be applied before the lube oil pump is started.
This is to prevent the exhaust valves from opening too much.
The exhaust valve activation is controlled by the On/Off ELVA valve. Each open
and close movement, performed by the exhaust valve spindle is measured by the
ECS. The actual mechanical delay is determined and used for the next activation.
The ECS tells whether the exhaust valve is open or closed. The exhaust valve
must be closed.
2. Lube Oil Systems

1. Start the lube oil pumps for:
– Engine
– Turbochargers
If the turbochargers are equipped with a separate, built-in, lubrication
system, check the oil levels through the sight-glasses.
Check the oil pressures. See also Section 701-01.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
2. Check the oil flow, through the sight-glasses, for:

– Piston cooling oil
– Turbochargers
3. Check that the cylinder lubricator tank is filled with the correct type of oil.
See also Plate 70713.
Is the regulating handle put on STAND-BY, the ECS automati-

cally initiates a prelubrication sequence, from the cylinder
lubricators. When the MOP is set in PREPARE START mode the
auxiliary blowers and the cylinder prelubrication is started.
3. Cooling Water Systems
The engine must not be started if the jacket cooling water temperature
is below 20°C.
Preheat to minimum 20°C or, preferably, to 50°C. See also Sections 703-03 and
703-07.
· Start the cooling water pumps.

· Check the pressures. See also Section 701-01.
4. Slow-Turning the Engine

This must be carried out to prevent damage caused by fluid in one of the cylinders.
Before beginning the slow-turning, obtain permission from the bridge.
Always carry out the slow-turning at the latest possible moment before
starting and, under all circumstances, within the last 30 minutes. If it is
more than 30 minutes since last rotation and the engine is in STAND-BY
mode, at control room or bridge control, the slow turn is performed auto-
matically.
The slow turning device is standard on ME-engines, and the slow turning
follows item 4.1. However it is still possible to turn the engine manually
with the turning gear. See item 4.2.
4.1 Slow-turn with Slow-Turning Device

1. Disengage the turning gear.
Check that it is locked in the out position.
Check that the indicator lamp for TURNING GEAR DISENGAGED extinguishes.
2. Regulating handle is put from FINISHED WITH ENGINE to sTAND-BY.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
3. Lift the locking plate of the main starting valve to the SERVICE position.
Check the indicator lamp.
– The locking plate must remain in the upper position during running.
– The locking plate must remain in the lower position during repairs.
4. Open the indicator valves.
5. Turn the slow-turning switch to SLOW-TURNING position.
6. Move the regulating handle to RUN position. Check to see if fluid flows out of
any of the indicator valves.
7. When the engine has moved one revolution, move the handle back to sTAND-
BY position.
8. Turn the slow-turning switch back to NORMAL position.

9. Close the indicator valves.
4.2 Slow-turn with Turning Gear

1. Regulating handle must be in FINISHED WITH ENGINE state.
2. Open the indicator valves.
3. Turn the engine one revolution with the turning gear in the direction indicated
by the regulating handle. Check to see if fluid flows out of any of the indicator
valves.
4. Close the indicator valves.
5. Disengage the turning gear.
6. Check that it is locked in the out position. Check that the indicator lamp for
TURNING GEAR ENGAGED extinguishes. This is seen on the MOP-panel in the
control room.
5. Fuel Oil System

Regarding fuel oil temp. before starting, see Section 705-03.
· Start the fuel oil supply pump and circulating pump. If the engine was running
on heavy fuel oil until stop, the circulating pump is already running.
Check the pressures and temperatures.
6. Hydraulic System. HPS – Hydraulic Power Supply

· Start the electrical driven hydraulic pumps. This is done via the MOP in the con-
trol room. The ECS states if the oil pressure is correct.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
7. Miscellaneous
Check that all drain valves from scavenge air receiver and boxes to drain tank are
open and that test cocks are closed. See Plate 70402.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Starting-up 703-02
703-02 Starting-up
1. Starting
Start the engine as described in MOP description Section 703-09.
If the engine has been out-of-service for some time, starting-up is usu-
ally performed as a quay-trial. Prior to this, it must be ascertained that:
1. The harbour authorities permit quay-trial.
2. The moorings are sufficient.
3. A watch is kept on the bridge.
2. Starting Difficulties
Starting Difficulties – See also Item 3, ‘Supplementary Comments’
Difficulty Point Possible Cause Remedy
Engine fails to turn +1 Shut-off valve for solenoid valves Open the valve.
on starting air after is closed
START order has
been given. +2 Pressure in starting air receiver Start the compressors.
too low Check that they are working
Points marked with properly.
+ is all monitored
+3 Valve on starting air receiver Open the valve.
by the ECS and an
closed
error report
occurs. +4 No pressure in the control air Check the pressure (normally 7
system bar). If too low, change over to
the other reducing valve and
clean the filter.
+5 Main starting valve (ball valve) Lift locking plate to working posi-
locked in closed position tion.
6 Main starting valve sticking/failing Check the valve.
7 Spool in solenoid air valves stick- Overhaul the solenoid.
ing
8 Starting air valves in cylinder cov- Pressure test the valves. Replace
ers defective or overhaul defective valves.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
703-02 Starting-up
Starting Difficulties (Continued) – See also Item 3, ‘Supplementary Comments’
Engine does not 9 Propeller blades are not in zero- Set pitch to zero position.
reverse when pitch (CPP-plants)
order is given.
Engine turns too 10 Trigger/Marker signal missing Check signal.
slowly (or une-
11 ‘Slow-turning’ of engine adjusted Set the ‘Slow-turning’ adjust-
venly) on starting
to low ment screw so that the engine
air
turns as slowly as possible with-
out faltering.
12 ‘Slow-turning’ is not cancelled See the ‘Bridge Control’ instruc-
(automatic control) tions.
13 Main starting valve is not working Check valve.
properly
14 Sticking slow-turning valve (valve Check valve.
not returned)
Engine turns on +15 Shut-down of engine Check pressure and tempera-
starting air but (no rotation present) ture. Reset ‘shut-down
stops after receiv-
ing order to run on +16 Fuel pumps sticking Check fuel pumps.
fuel
+17 NC valves not functioning Check NC valves.
+18 Fuel pressure missing (an error Check fuel pressure.
is reported in the ECS)
Engine turns on +19 Auxiliary blowers not functioning 1. Stop the engine
fuel, but runs une- 2. Start the auxiliary blowers for
venly (unstable) 10 min.
and will not pick- 3. Slow-turn the engine by air
up rpm 4. Start the engine.
+20 Scavenge air limit set at too high Check level of scavenge air lim-
or too low level iter.
Check the scavenge air pressure

and the exhaust gas pressure at
the actual load. Compare the
pressures with testbed or seatrial
observations.
21 Fuel filter blocked Clean the filter.
+22 Too low fuel pressure Increase the pressure.
+23 One or more cylinders not firing Check suction valves in fuel
pumps.
See MOP- panel description.
If fault not found, check/change
fuel valves.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Starting-up 703-02
3. Supplementary Comments
Item 2. ‘Starting Difficulties’ gives some possible causes of starting failures, on
which the following supplementary information and comments can be given.
Point 2
The engine can usually start when the starting air pressure is above 10 bar. The
compressors should, however, be started as soon as the pressure in the starting
air receiver is below 25 bar.
Point 8
The testing procedure describing how to determine that all starting valves in the
cylinder covers are closed and are not leaking is found in Section 703-07. If a start-
ing valve leaks during running of the engine, the starting air pipe concerned will
become very hot. When this occurs, the starting valve must be replaced and over-
hauled, possibly replacing the spring. If the engine fails to start owing to the causes
stated under Point 8, this will usually occur in a certain position of the crankshaft.
If this occurs during manoeuvring, reversing must be made as quickly as possible

in order to move the crankshaft to another position, after which the engine can be
started again in the direction ordered by the telegraph.
Point 4
Examine whether there is voltage on the solenoid valve which controls the starting
signal.
If the solenoid valve is correctly activated, trace the fault by loosening one copper
pipe at a time on the route of the signal through the system, until the valve blocking
the signal has been found. The failure can be due to a defective valve, or to the
causes mentioned under Point 15.
Point 15
If the shut-down was caused by too low pressures or too high temperatures, bring
these back to their normal level. The shut-down impulse can then be cancelled by
actuating the appropriate “reset” switch on the alarm panel.
4. Checks during Starting

Make the following checks immediately after starting:
The start/stop logic in the ECS has already, before start, checked that
the direction of rotation is corresponding to the telegraph order.
An alive signal from the ELVA valves to the ECS states whether the
exhausts valves are operating correctly. If an error occurs an alarm will
occur.
Check 1: Turbochargers
Ensure that all turbochargers are running.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
703-02 Starting-up
Check 2: Circulating Oil

Check that the pressure and discharge are in order
(main engine and turbochargers).
Check 3: Cylinders
Check that all cylinders are firing.
Check 4: Starting Valves on Cylinder Covers

Feel over the pipes. A hot pipe indicates leaking starting valve.
See also Vol. III, Chapter 911, ‘Safety Cap in Starting Air Line’
Check 5: Pressures and Temperatures

See that everything is normal for the engine speed. In particular: the circulating oil
(bearing lubrication and piston cooling), hydraulic oil pressure, fuel oil, cooling wa-
ter, scavenge air, and control and safety air.
Check 6: Cylinder Lubricators

Make sure that all lubricators are working by checking the feedback
LED’s on the intermediate boxes.
Check the oil level in the feeder tank.
Follow the Alpha lubricator manual for checking and adjustment of the
oil feed rate.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Loading 703-03
703-03 Loading
1. Loading Sequence
Regarding load restrictions after repairs and during running-in, see Item 2.
If there are no restrictions, load the engine according to this programme:
Is the cooling water temperature above 50°C?
YES · Increase gradually to:

FPP-plants: 90% of MCR speed
CPP-plants: 80% pitch
· Increase to 100% speed/pitch over a period of

30 minutes or more.
NO · See table below.
Is the cooling water temperature between 20°C and 50°C?
YES · Preferably, preheat to 50°C.
· If you start with a cooling water temperature below 50°C,

increase gradually to:
FPP-plants: 90% of MCR speed
CPP-plants: 80% pitch.
· When the cooling water temperature reaches minimum

50°C, increase to 100% of MCR speed/pitch over a
period of 30 minutes or more.
· The time it takes to reach 50°C will depend on the

amount of water in the system and on the engine load.
NO · Do not start the engine.
· Preheat to minimum 20°C, or preferably to 50°C.
When 20°C, or preferably 50°C, has been reached, start

and load the engine as described above.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
703-03 Loading
2. Checks during Loading

Check 7: Feel-over Sequence
If the condition of the machinery is uncertain (e.g. after repairs or alterations), the
“feel-over sequence” should always be followed, i.e.:
a. After 15-30 minutes’ running on SLOW

(depending on the engine size);
b. again after 1 hour’s running;
c. at sea, after 1 hour’s running at service speed;
stop the engine, open the crankcase, and feel-over the moving parts listed below
(by hand or with a “Thermo-feel”) on sliding surfaces where friction may have
caused undue heating.
During feeling-over, the turning gear must be engaged, and the main starting valve
must be blocked.
Feel:
· Main, crankpin and crosshead bearings,
· Piston rods and stuffing boxes,
· Crosshead shoes,
· Telescopic pipes,
· Thrust bearing / guide bearing,
· Gear wheels on hydraulic pump gearbox, and chains (on some ME-engines)
· Axial vibration damper,
· Torsional vibration damper (if mounted).
After the last feel-over, repeat this procedure also mentioned in Section 702-01:
“While the circulating oil pump is still running and the oil is warm, open up the
crankcase and check that the oil is flowing freely from all crosshead, crankpin and
main bearings”.
Check 8: Running-in
For a new engine, or after:
· repair or renewal of the large bearings,

· renewal or reconditioning of cylinder liners and piston rings,
allowance must be made for a running-in period.
Regarding bearings: increase the load slowly, and apply the feel-over sequence,
see Section 703-04. Regarding liners/rings: See Section 707-01.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Running 703-04
703-04 Running
1. Running Difficulties
Running Difficulties – See also Item 2. ‘Supplementary Comments’
Exhaust tempera- 1 Increased scavenge air tempera- See Section 706-02.

ture rises ture owing to inadequate air
a) all cyl. cooler function.
+) 2 Fouled air and gas passages. Clean the turbine by means of
dry cleaning/water washing.
Clean the blowers and air cool-
ers, see Section 706-03.
Check the back pressure in the

exhaust gas system just after the
T/C turbine side.+)
3 Inadequate fuel oil cleaning, or See Sections 705-01 and
altered combustion characteris- 705-03.
tics of fuel.
b) single cyl. 4 Defective fuel valves, or fuel +)
nozzles.
5 Leaking exhaust valve Replace or overhaul the valve.+)
6 Blow-by in combustion chamber. +)
Exhaust tempera- 7 Falling scavenge air temperature. Check that the seawater system
ture decreases. thermostat valve is functioning
a) all cyl. correctly.
8 Air/gas/steam in fuel system. Check the fuel oil supply and cir-
culating pump pressures. Check
the function of the de-aerating
valve. Check the suction side of
the supply pumps for air leak-
ages. Check the fuel oil pre-
heater for steam leakages.
b) single cyl. 9 Defective fuel oil pressure Repair the suction valve.
booster suction valve.
10 Fuel oil pressure booster plunger Replace the fuel oil pressure
sticking or leaking. booster plunger/barrel.
(an alarm will occur in the ECS)
+ See Section 706-02 in particular the fault diagnosing table.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
703-04 Running
Running Difficulties (Continued) – See also Item 2. ‘Supplementary Comments’
Engine r/min 11 Exhaust valve sticking in open Replace the exhaust valve.
decrease position.
(an alarm will occur in the ECS)
12 Oil pressure before fuel oil pres- Raise the supply and circulating
sure boosters too low. pump pressures to the normal
level.
13 Air/gas/steam in the fuel oil. See point 8.
14 Defective fuel valve(s) or fuel oil Replace and overhaul the defec-
pressure boosters. tive valve(s) and fuel oil pressure
boosters.
15 Fuel index limited by torque/scav- See Section 706-01.
enge air limiters in the ECS due
to abnormal engine load.
16 Water in fuel oil. Drain off the water and/or clean
the fuel more effectively.
17 Fire in scavenge air box. See Chapter 704.
18 Slow-down or shut-down. Check pressure and tempera-

ture levels. If these are in order,
check for faults in the slow-down
equipment.
19 Combustion characteristics of When changing from one fuel oil
fuel oil. type to another, alterations can
appear in the r/min, at the same
pump index.
Fuel index (MEP%) must be rec-
tified with the fuel quality, so that
correct MEP can be obtained.
20 Fouling of hull. See Section 706-01.
Sailing in shallow water.
Smoky exhaust 21 Turbocharger revolutions do not Some smoke development during
correspond with engine r/min. acceleration is normal; no meas-
ures called for.
Heavy smoke during accelera-
tion: Fault in ECS limiters setting.
22 Air supply not sufficient. See reference quoted under
point 1.
Check engine room ventilation.
23 Defective fuel valves See point 4, and Section 706-05,
(incl. nozzles). (incl. Plate 70618).
24 Fire in scavenge air box. See Chapter 704.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Running 703-04
2. Supplementary Comments
Item 1. ‘Running Difficulties’ gives some possible causes of operational distur-
bances, on which the following supplementary information and comments can be
given.
Point 5
A leaking exhaust valve manifests itself by an exhaust temperature rise, and a
drop in the compression and maximum pressures.
In order to limit the damage, if possible, immediately replace the valve concerned,
or, as a preliminary measure, cut out the fuel oil pressure booster, see Section
704-04.
Point 6
In serious cases, piston ring blow-by manifests itself in the same way as a leaking
exhaust valve, but sometimes reveals itself at an earlier stage by a hissing sound.
This is clearly heard when the drain cock from the scavenge air box is opened. At
the same time, smoke and sparks may appear.
When checking, or when cleaning the drain pipe, keep clear of the line of ejection,
as burning oil can be blown out.
With stopped engine, blow-by can be located by inspecting the condition of the pis-
ton rings, through the scavenge air ports. Piston and cylinder liner become black
in the area of blow-by. Sludge, which has been blown into the scavenge air cham-
ber, can also indicate the defective cylinder. See also Section 707-01.
Since blow-by can be due to sticking of unbroken piston rings, there is a chance
of gradually diminishing it, during running, by reducing the fuel oil pressure booster
index for a few minutes and, at the same time, increasing the cylinder oil amount.
If this is not effective, the fuel oil pressure booster index and the pmax must be re-
duced until the blow-by ceases.
The pressure rise pcomp-pmax must not exceed the value measured on testbed at the
reduced mean effective pressure or fuel oil pressure booster index. Regarding ad-
justing of pmax, see MOP description, section 703-15.
If the blow-by does not stop, the fuel oil pressure booster should be taken out of
service (with the engine stopped), or the piston rings changed. The load limit can
be reduced and the exhaust valve movement stopped individually on each cylin-
der, without stopping the engine.
Running with piston ring blow-by, even for a very limited period of time, can cause
severe damage to the cylinder liner. This is due to thermal overheating of the liner.
Furthermore, there is a risk of fire in the scavenge air boxes and scavenge air re-
ceiver, see also Section 704-01.
In case of severe blow-by, there is a general risk of starting troubles owing to too
low compression pressure during the starting sequence.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
703-04 Running
Concerning the causes of blow-by, see Chapter 707, where the regular mainte-
nance is also described.
Points 8 and 13
Air/gas in the fuel oil system can be caused by a sticking fuel valve spindle, or be-
cause the spring has broken.
If a defective fuel valve is found, this must be replaced, and it should be checked
that no fuel oil has accumulated on the piston crown.
Points 10 and 14
If, to obtain full load, it proves necessary to increase an individual fuel oil pressure
booster index by more than 10% (from sea trial value), then this in most cases in-
dicates that the fuel oil pressure booster is worn out. This can usually be confirmed
by inspecting the plunger. If the plunger edge shows a dark-coloured eroded area,
the fuel oil pressure booster plunger/barrel should be replaced.
3. Check during Running

Check 9: Thrust Bearing
Check measuring equipment.
Check 10: Chain Tighteners (if installed)

Check the chain tighteners for the moment compensators (if installed). The com-
bined chain tighteners and hydraulic damping arrangements should be readjust-
ed, when the red-coloured part of the wear indicators is reached. See Vol. II,
Maintenance, Chapter 906.
Check 11: Shut Down and Slow Down

Check measuring equipment.
Check 12: Pressure Alarms (Pressure Switches)

General:
The functioning and setting of the alarms should be checked.
It is essential to carefully check the functioning and setting of pressure sensors

and temperature sensors.
They must be checked under circumstances for which the sensors are designed
to set off alarm.
This means that sensors for low pressure/temperature should be tested with falling
pressure/temperature, and sensors for high-pressure/temperature should be test-
ed with rising pressure/temperature.
Checking:
If no special testing equipment is available, the checking can be effected as fol-
lows:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Running 703-04
a. The alarm pressure switches in the lubricating and cooling systems may be pro-
vided with a test cock, by means of which the pressure at the sensor may be
decreased, and the alarm thereby tested.
b. If there is no such test cock, the alarm point must be displaced until the alarm
is given. When the alarm has thus occurred it is checked that the pressure
switch scale is in agreement with the actual pressure. (Some types of pressure
switches have an adjustable scale).
Then reset the pressure switch to the preselected alarm limit, which should
cause the alarm signal to stop.
Check 13: Temperature Alarms (Thermostats)

See also Check 12, ‘General’.
Most of the thermostatic valves in the cooling systems can likewise be tested by
displacing the alarm point, so that the sensor responds to the actual temperature.
However, in some cases, the setting cannot be reduced sufficiently, and such
valves must either be tested when the service temperature has been reached, or
by heating the sensing element in a water bath, together with a reference ther-
mometer.
Check 14: Oil Mist Detector

Check the oil mist detector.
Adjustment and testing of the alarm function is effected in accordance with the in-
structions given on the equipment, or in the separate Oil Mist Detector instruction
book.
Check 15: Observations

Make a full set of observations, by means of the PMI-system, see Plate 70603 and
Section 706-04. Check that pressures and temperatures are in order.
Check the load distribution between the cylinders, see Section 706-02.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Preparations PRIOR to Arrival in Port 703-05
703-05 Preparations PRIOR to Arrival in Port
See Section 707-01 regarding scavenge port inspection prior to

arrival in port.
1. Decide whether the harbour manoeuvres should be carried out on diesel oil
or on heavy fuel oil. See also Section 705-03.
Change-over should be carried out one hour before the first manoeuvres are
expected. See Section 705-03.
2. Start an additional auxiliary engine to ensure a power reserve for the manoeu-
vres.
3. Make a reversing test (FPP-plants). This ensures that the starting valves are
working.
4. Blow-off any condensed water from the starting air and control air systems
just before the manoeuvres.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Stopping 703-06
703-06 Stopping
Always perform a stop manoeuvre before entering harbour/pilot at arrival, to state

that the ECS is functioning as intended.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Operations AFTER Arrival in Port 703-07
When the ‘FINISHED WITH ENGINE’ order is received in the control room:
1. Test the starting valves for leakage:

– Obtain permission from the bridge.
– Check that the turning gear is disengaged.
This is because a leaky valve can cause the crankshaft to rotate.
– Close the main air valve to the starting air distribution system.
– Open the indicator valves.
– Change-over to manual control from the LOP on the engine side.
– Activate the START button.
This admits starting air, but not control air, to the starting valves.
– Check to see if air blows out from any of the indicator valves.
In this event, the starting valve concerned is leaky.
If the cylinder is in BDC, detection can be difficult, due to air

escaping through the scavenge air ducts in the cylinder liner.
– Replace or overhaul any defective starting valves.
2. Lock the main starting valve in its lowest position by means of the locking
plate.
Engage the turning gear.
Check the indicator lamp.
Check that the valve to the starting air distribution system is closed.
3. Close and vent the control air and safety air systems.
Do not stop the air supply to the exhaust valve air cylinders, as air draught
through an open exhaust valve may cause the turbocharger shaft to rotate,
thus causing bearing damage, if the lube oil supply to the turbocharger is
stopped.
4. Wait minimum 15 minutes after stopping the engine, then:
– stop the lube oil pumps
– stop the cooling water pumps.
This prevents overheating of cooled surfaces in the combustion
chambers, and counteracts the formation of carbon deposits in
piston crowns.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
5. Fuel oil pumps:
Did engine run on heavy fuel oil until STOP?
YES · Stop the fuel oil supply pumps.
· Do not stop the circulating pumps.
· Keep the fuel oil preheated.

The circulating oil temperature may be reduced during
engine standstill, as described in Section 705-03.
Cold heavy fuel oil is difficult or even impossible to pump
NO · Stop the fuel oil supply and circulating pumps.
6. Freshwater preheating during standstill:
Will harbour stay exceed 4-5 days?
YES · Keep the engine preheated or unheated.

However, see Sections 706-01 and 706-03.
NO · Keep the engine preheated to minimum 50°C.

This counteracts corrosive attack on the cylinder liners
during starting-up.
· Use a built-in preheater or the auxiliary engine cooling

water for preheating of the engine.
7. Switch-off other equipment which need not operate during engine standstill.
8. Regarding checks to be carried out during engine standstill, see Chapter 702.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Engine Control System, 50-108ME/ME-C Engines 703-08
1. General
The Engine Control System (ECS) consists of a set of controllers, see Plate
70317.
Briefly described, the functions of the controllers are:
EICU The Engine Interface Control Units handle the interface to ex-
ternal systems.
ECU The Engine Control Units perform the engine control functions:
engine speed, running modes and start sequence.
ACU The Auxiliary Control Units control the pumps of the hydraulic
system unit and the auxiliary blowers.
CCU The Cylinder Control Units control the FIVA valves, starting air
valves, and the ME cylinder lubricators.
MOP The engineers’ interface to the ECS.
Normal Working Sequence

The following is an example of how the control units of the ECS work together dur-
ing normal operation.
EICU
The EICUs receive navigational inputs from the control stations and select the ac-
tive station based on signals given by the ‘Remote Control’ system.
The main navigational command is the speed set point (requested speed and di-
rection of engine rotation).
In the EICUs the raw speed set point is processed by a series of protective algo-
rithms. These ensure that the speed set point from which the engine is controlled
is never harmful to the engine. An example of such an algorithm is the ‘Barred
speed range’.
Now the processed speed set point and the selected engine running mode request
are available via the control network to be used by the ECUs as a reference for the
speed control and engine running mode control.
The two redundant EICU units operate in parallel.
ECU
The engine speed control requires that the amount of fuel is calculated for each
cylinder firing.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The calculation made by the speed controller (ECU) is initiated in relation to the
crankshaft position, so that the execution is started just in time to make the fuel
injection. This is controlled by the tacho function.
The output from the speed controller is a ‘request for fuel amount’ to be injected
for the next combustion. This request is run through different protective algorithms
– the fuel limiters – and the ‘resulting amount of fuel command’ is produced.
Based on the algorithm of the selected engine running mode, the injection profile
is selected, the timing parameters for the fuel injection and exhaust valve are cal-
culated and the pressure set point for the hydraulic power supply derived.
Based on the user input of fuel sulphur content, minimum feed rate etc., the result-
ing cylinder lubrication feed rate for each individual cylinder unit is calculated.
The resulting amount of fuel command, the requested fuel injection profile, the tim-
ing parameters and the resulting cylinder lubrication feed rate amount are all sent
to the CCU of the cylinder in question via the control network. Likewise, the hy-
draulic pressure set point is sent to all ACUs.
For redundancy purposes, the control system comprises two ECUs operating in
parallel and performing the same task, one being a hot stand-by for the other. If
one of the ECUs fail, the other unit will take over the control without any interrup-
tion.
CCU
In appropriate time for the next firing, the CCU ensures that it has received new
valid data. Where after the injection profile start angle is set up using the tacho
function.
On the correct start angle the injection is initiated and is controlled according to the
fuel amount command and the injection profile command.
When the injection is completed, the exhaust open and close angles are set up us-
ing the tacho function and the exhaust valve control signal is then activated on the
appropriate crank angles.
The cylinder lubricator is activated according to the feed rate amount received
from the ECU.
All of the CCUs are identical, and in the event of a failure of the CCU for one cyl-
inder, only this cylinder will automatically be put out of operation. (Running with
cylinders out of operation is explained in Chapter 704-04 in this book).
ACU
The ACUs control the pressure of the Hydraulic Power Supply system and the
electrical start-up pumps using the ‘Pressure Set point’ given by the ECUs as a
reference. Furthermore the start and stop of the auxiliary blowers are controlled
according to the scavenge air pressure.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The control of the auxiliary equipment on the engine is normally divided among
three (four) ACUs so that, in the event of a failure of one unit, there is sufficient
redundancy to permit continuous operation of the engine.
MOP
The Main Operating Panel (MOP) is the main information interface for the engi-
neer operating the engine. The MOP communicates with the controllers of the
ECS over the Control Network. However, the running of the engine is not depend-
ant on the MOP, as all the commands from the local control stations are commu-
nicated directly to the EICU’s/ECS.
The MOP is located in the engine control room. It is a PC with a touch screen as
well as a trackball from where the engineer can carry out engine commands, ad-
just the engine parameters, select the running modes, and observe the status of
the control system. A back-up MOP is also placed in the engine control room (see
Section 703-09 for detailed MOP-description).
Control Stations
During normal operation the engine can be controlled from either the bridge, the
engine control room or the Local Operation Panel (LOP).
The LOP control is to be considered as a substitute for the previous Engine Side
Control console mounted directly onto the MC-engine.
The LOP is as standard placed on the engine.
From the LOP, the basic functions are available, such as starting, engine speed
control, stopping, reversing, and the most important engine data are displayed.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
To start and run the engine from the LOP, some conditions have to be fulfilled.
Next to the LOP, a nameplate (containing the text, highlighted below) is placed.
The name plate comprises the conditions that have to be fulfilled before start.
Main Engine Start from Local Operation Panel
In order to start/stop and operate the main engine from the Local
Operation Panel (LOP), Local control must be selected as the
active control station. This is normally done via the request/
acknowledge facility of the Remote Control System. However, it is
possible to override the normal change-over procedure by means
of the ‘Forced Take Command’ push button. Activating this button
will force the control to the local control station.
Main engine start with stopped or running auxiliary blowers:
1. Activate start
2. If the engine do not start within 30 seconds, return to stop
command and activate start again.
If the auxiliary blowers are running, the first start activation will
probably cause the Engine Control System to start the main
engine automatically.
If the auxiliary blowers are stopped, the first start activation will
cause the Engine Control System to prepare start. During start
preparation the auxiliary blowers are started and, if necessary,
the hydraulic system is started in order to rebuild the hydraulic
high-pressure. When the auxiliary blowers are started and run-
ning, the second start activation will probably cause automatic
start of the main engine.
Please note, after a shut-down the hydraulic pressure must be

rebuilt to a level (approximately 140 bar) where operation of the
fuel injection and exhaust valves are possible before the auto-
matic main engine start itself can take place. This pressure
rebuild may last 60-120 seconds.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
MOP Description 703-09
703-09 MOP Introduction (Overview)
1. Main Operation Panel (MOP) (Overview)

The MOP is the Human Machine Interface (HMI), through which the Engine Con-
trol System (ECS) and thus the ME engine is operated. The HMI is described in
sections 703-14 through 703-18.
The MOP is basically a marine approved and certified PC. The PC may be one of
two types:
1. An integrated unit with touch-screen.

2. A standard PC
An actual installation comprises of two MOPs (type 1 is usually used for MOP A
and type 2 for MOP B) where both are placed in the engine control room (ECR).
Each MOP may be any of the two types; typically MOP A is placed in a console
opposite the manouvring handle (the normal operation position) and MOP B on a
desk (as a backup MOP). The two MOPs are operationally fully redundant to each
other.
1.1 MOP A
1.1.1 Description
This MOP type has no ordinary keyboard or mouse. Both may optionally be
equipped; a trackball typically replaces the mouse.
A keyboard is essentially not required during normal engine operation and a virtual
keyboard is displayed in case textual input (e.g. password) is needed.
The touch-screen is a frame in which an infrared grid is used for detecting touches
to the screen. The operator does not need to actually touch the screen as the grid
is displaced from the screen surface.
Instead of traditional use of a mouse, the operator touches the graphic elements
on the screen in order to interact with the ECS.
1.1.2 Service kit

The MOP comes with a service kit. The kit comprises of a CD-ROM drive, a key-
board and a CD with the operating system, and is setup specifically for this PC-
type. The CD-ROM drive and keyboard should not be connected during normal
operation.
1.2 MOP B
1.2.1 Description
This MOP type is based on standard PC technology, and with a keyboard, mouse
and CD-ROM drive.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
1.2.2 Service Kit

The kit comprises a CD with the operating system and is setup specifically for this
PC-type (see Section 1.5)
1.3 Issues to both MOP types
1.3.1 Ethernet connections

Only MOP B may be equipped with an Ethernet card for connection to other sys-
tems such as CoCoS-EDS. Special care must be taken when connecting to net-
works of any kind to avoid virus and worms on the MOP. Connection to other
systems is illustrated on plate 70319 fig 1.
1.3.2 Unauthorised software

DISCLAIMER: MAN Diesel disclaim responsibility for any event or condition that
originates from installation of unauthorised software. This includes, but is not lim-
ited to, virus.
To emphasize the disclamer, yellow stickers are placed at suitable places on the
MOPs.
1.3.3 Control Network

Each MOP is connected to the ECS by means of the Control Network that inter-
connect the nodes in the ECS. Control Network is implemented as two independ-
ent networks for redundancy as shown on Plate 70319 Fig. 1
1.3.4 Maintenance
Normal PC maintenance tools and cleaning detergents apply.
1.4 Preparations made by MAN Diesel

The CD’s mentioned in Sections 1.1.2 and 1.2.2 are a part of a CD set installed on
the MOPs on the ECS at engine commissioning. This CD set (normally four) is
kept onboard as back-up.
The commissioning procedure is as follows.
An engineer from MAN Diesel or the Licensee installs the CD’s in the following
way:
1. Program Disc 1 named:

> Disc 1 of 3 < Operating System Main Operation Panel > A <
is installed in MOP A (via the connected CD-ROM drive).
> Disc 2 of 3 < Operating System Main Operation Panel > B <
is installed in MOP B (the standard PC).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

> Disc 3 of 3 < Engine Control System Main Operation Panel > A and B <
is the ME-System Software, installed on both MOP A and B.
4. Data Disc named:
> Service Parameter Set <
The parameter is loaded to the MPC’s via MOP B.
After Sea Trial a copy of the > Service parameters < is stored on board.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Alarm Handling on the MOP 703-14
1. HMI (Human Machine Interface)

The HMI consists of four fixed areas always shown. See Plate 70319 Fig. 2
1. An Alarm Status Bar showing the oldest non-Acknowledged alarm

and Alarm status at the top of the screen.
2. A Navigation Bar at the right side of the screen.
3. A Toolbar at the bottom of the screen.
4. A Screen area (rest of the Screen)
The HMI operates with two user levels, which are Operator level and Chief
level.
· Operator level: From the Operator level it is not allowed to set any parameters.
It is for normal operation and monitoring only.
· Chief level: in addition to the Operator level, the operator has privileges to set
parameters. A password must be supplied in order to access Chief level.
There is no limit in the number of unsuccessful attempts to enter the correct pass-
word. The password is hard coded in the system and can therefore not be
changed. The password is to be thought of as an aid to the operator, in order to
prevent unintended input to the ECS.
2. Alarm System
The alarms displayed on the MOP panel are all related to the ME Engine Control
System and thereby surveillance of the engine condition. As seen on Plate 70319
Fig. 1, the ordinary alarm system and the ME-ECS alarm system are connected
and able to interact. This is caused by the use of common sensors for engine mon-
itoring, i.e. common sensors are used for indicating and detecting alarm as well as
slow down.
Especially alarms interacting with the engine safety system are common for the
Engine Control System and the ordinary alarm system. As an example could be
mentioned alarms giving Slow Down and Shut Down.
When a Slow Down has been detected by the external Slow Down function, this is
signalled to the ECS by a binary signal. When the binary signal is high, the result-
ing speed set point is forced to the preset Slow Down level.
3. Alarm Handling
Alarm handling is carried out from one of the following four screens
1.1 Alarm List
1.2 Event Log
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
1.3 Manual Cut-Out List
1.4 Channel List
These four Alarm Handling screens can be accessed via the secondary navigator
by pressing the “ALARM” button in the main navigator. When pressing this button,
the latest selected alarm screen will be shown on the screen. If no screen has pre-
viously been selected, the “Alarm List” is shown. The screen can then be changed
via the secondary navigator.
3.1 Alarm List (See Plate 70320)

The Alarm List contains the central facility of the Alarm Handling, allowing for dis-
play, acknowledgement and cut-out of raised alarms. Detailed alarm explanation
can be accessed for each of the alarm occurrences.
The Alarms are displayed in chronological order, with the latest alarm at the top. If
there are too many alarms to be displayed at the same time on the screen, the re-
maining alarms can be accessed by pressing the Page-up/Page-down buttons
seen on the Toolbar at the bottom of the Screen.
Alarms presented in the alarmlist can be found in three states:
1. Alarm non acknowledged
2. Alarm acknowledged
3. Normal non acknowledged
An alarm can only appear as one line in the alarm list. An acknowledged alarm go-
ing into normal or an alarm changed to normal being acknowledged, is immediate-
ly removed from the list.
Acknowledgement of a single or all alarms is allowed on both levels (operator or

chief) from the “Ack/Ack All” buttons on the toolbar at the bottom of the screen. (By
pressing “Ack/Ack All” only the alarms visible on the screen are acknowledged).
To see a detailed alarm explanation, press the relevant alarm line. The alarm line
is then surrounded by a dotted line, and giving the impression that a “light is
switched on behind the field. By pressing the button “Info” on the Toolbar, a win-
dow will appear just above the Toolbar. This window contains:
Description – Cause – Effect - Suggested Action of the alarm, so that the engine-
er is able to start troubleshooting on this particular alarm.
(The detailed alarm explanation is removed by pressing the same “Info” button).
3.1.1 Alarm Line Fields, Colours and Symbols (See Plate 70320)
Each alarm line is divided into the following fields:
ID. This field contains a unique alarm identity. (e.g. CCU1_031220). This ID must
always be used for reference and reporting.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Time. This field shows the time of the first occurrence of the alarm, no matter the
status changes. The time is shown in hours, minutes, seconds and 1/100 sec.
(13:47:02.56)
Description. This field contains the alarm text.

(e.g. HCU oil leakage)
Status. This field shows the status of the alarm as one of the following:
· Normal
· Alarm
· Low
· High
· Not available
· Auto cut-out
· Manual cut-out
Limit. This feature is not available in this software version.
Current. This feature is not available in this software version.
Ack. The acknowledgement status field of non-acknowledged alarms contains an

icon toggling between two states, alerting the operator of a non-acknowledged
alarm.
The status of the alarm can also be identified by the background colour as well as
the graphical identification in the Acknowledgement field on the Screen as shown
below
Alarm Acknowledge Status Background Colour Acknowledgement

Status Field Graphics
Alarm Non-Acknowledged RED
Alarm Acknowledgement in YELLOW
progress
Alarm Acknowledged YELLOW
Non-Alarm Non-Acknowledged GREEN
Non-Alarm Acknowledgement in GREEN
progress
Cut-Out Not Non-Acknowledged previous LIGHT GREY
Available alarm
Cut-Out Not Acknowledgement of LIGHT GREY
Available previous Alarm in progress
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
At the upper right corner of the screen four (4) small icons are shown which are
(from left to right):
A triangle (red) with a number = Number of Non-Acknowledged alarms
A triangle (yellow) with a number = Acknowledged alarms
A triangle (yellow) with a number = Number of Manual Cut-Out alarms
A square (yellow) with a number = Number of Input Channels Cut-Out.
From the toolbar at the bottom of the Alarm List screen, alarms can be cut-out.
This feature is described in details in Section 3.3.
3.2 Event Log (See Plate 70321)

The event log is, for instance, used for viewing the history of events and to support
the operator in troubleshooting. Events stay in the log even after they have been
acknowledged and are no longer active. Alarms are logged with three events in
the Event Log. The events are Alarm, Normal and Acknowledged. There can be
up to 1 million events logged in the event log.
The events are stored in a database on the MOP’s hard disc with both local and
UTC time stamps. If more than 1 million events are logged, the oldest events are
discarded.
Each event (with the most recent event on top) is shown as a single line and each
event line is divided into the following fields:
ID Unit Tag. This field contains a unique event identity.
Date. This field contains the date of the event.
Time. This field shows the time of the event. The time is shown in hours, minutes,
seconds and 1/100 sec.
Description. This field contains the alarm text (e.g. HCU oil leakage).
Status. This field shows either Normal or Alarm.
MCo. Shows whether the alarm is Manual Cut-Out or not.
ACo. Automatic Cut-Out.
Ack. The alarm is acknowledged.
3.2.1 Searching and Filtering Event Log Records.

When using the Event Log to help analysing an event, different search and filter
facilities are available to narrow the search. Explaining in brief, the facilities are
(one button for each):
Go to Date/Time:
This feature is used to scroll the list to a certain date and time, when the speci-
fic Date or Date/Time is known.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
When pressing the Go to Date/Time button an on-screen keyboard occurs with

two button/fields for Date and Time respectively. Press the button to be speci-
fied and enter the value. The Date field is obligatory, while the Time field is op-
tional. Press “Apply” to execute the search. The selection will be the first event
after the specified date (and time).
The scroll buttons on the physical keyboard can be used afterwards to scroll
line by line, in order to make the search even more specific.
Time Span Filter:

This feature can be used if only a part of the list is interesting, e.g if a certain
range of the Event Log list is to be printed or exported for e.g trouble shooting
assistance at MAN Diesel.
Enter the From/To Date and time in the Time Span Filter toolbar by using the
on-screen keyboard. If only the From Date is entered, the To Date is automati-
cally set to the current date. Also if only the To Date is entered, the From Date is
automatically set to 1900-01-01. From Time/To Time is optional. Press “Apply”
to execute the selection.
The time entered MUST be UTC time.
Unit/Tag Filter:
When an alarm occurs, it is stored in the Event Log by its ID (Unit/Tag
number). It is possible to filter for a specific cause of event or a group of
events by pressing the Unit/Tag Filter button, e.g if one wants to see how
often a specific event occurs or if e.g only events related to a specific unit
are interesting.
Three Criteria buttons (filter buttons) occur in the on-screen keyboard to define
the filter:
Unit: The Unit name, e.g CCU.
Index: The Unit number, e.g CCU1 (only available if a Unit has been entered).
Tag: The alarm tag name, e.g 031220
The fields are all optional. Fields that are not filled in, means ‘any text’. Press
“Apply” to execute the search and filtering.
Export:
This button is used when saving the displayed Event Log Record on a USB
mamory stick, on the hard disk drive (HDD) or when printing a hard copy of
the displayed data - see next section.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
3.2.2. Saving Event Log Records.
Printing:
If a printer is connected to the MOP B hub, printing the displayed data is
possible.
1. Press the Export button.
2. Press Print on the pop-up screen.
To limit the amount of lines being printed, see Time Span Filter.
For trouble shooting purposes, MAN Diesel may request an Event Log
Record. The Event Log Record can be stored as a compressed file
(.zip) on a USB memory Stick or on the hard disk drive (HDD), by the
engine crew. The .zip file is then to be sent by e-mail from the ship’s
ordinary PC to MAN Diesel.
Save to USB Memory Stick:

This is most likely the option to use if MAN Diesel requests an Event Log Re-
cord for trouble shooting purposes.
1. Insert the USB memory stick into MOP-B.
2. On the Event Log screen, press the Export button and the Export Event
Log tool bar shows up. Destination field will read USB.
3. On the Event Log tool bar, press the Save button.
4. When the saving is finished, the destination field will read SAVED and
the USB memory stick can be removed.
The data displayed on the Event Log screen, is now stored on the USB memory
stick. The output will be a comma separated file with the name: EventLog<date,
time>.zip.
To limit the file size to be exported see Time Span Filter.
Save to Hard disk:

If a USB memory stick is not available, the Event Log data can be saved onto
the Hard disk.
1. On the Event Log screen, press the Export button and the Export Event
Log tool bar shows up. Destination field will read HDD, as no USB memo-
ry stick is plugged in.
2. On the Export Event Log tool bar, press the Save button.
3. When the saving is finished, the destination field will read SAVED. The
data displayed on the Event Log screen, is now stored on HDD.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The output will be a comma separated file with the name: EventLog<date,
time>.zip.
To limit the file size to be exported, see Time Span Filter.
Dump:
Dump and Save have the same functionality, except for the actual output i.e
when the Dump button is pressed, the displayed Event Log is saved to the
location shown in the Destination field. The data however, will be saved as an
SQL script and compressed to a .zip file. The file name will be: EventLogDump
<date, time>.zip.
<Date, Time> is the current UTC time when the file was saved.
3.3 Manual Cut-Out List (See Plate 70322)

Manual Cut-Out of alarms may be used, for instance, if the engineer has observed
a failure of a sensor that is not detected automatically (see below in the parenthe-
sis) or if, for instance, a Tacho pick-up is failing (the engine running on the redun-
dant Tacho system) and is continuously giving an alarm and cannot be replaced
immediately.
(Alarms may be cut-out automatically. Automatic cut-out may be used to suppress

alarms which is unimportant in specific states, e.g. when the engine is stopped, or
when a sensor is detected as being faulty).
The manually cut-out alarms are shown in a separate list, which can be accessed
from the navigation bar. The manual cut-out screen is in functionality equivalent to
the alarm list screen. An alarm can be cut-out manually from the screens Alarm
List, Manual cut-out List or Channel list.
All alarm channels that have the status “Manual cut-out” are shown in the manual
cut-out screen.
Removing (“activating”) an entry from the Manual cut-out list is done by highlight-
ing the alarm(s) involved on the screen and thereafter pressing the button “Reac-
tivate” in the toolbar.
3.4 Channel List (See Plate 70323)

The alarm channel screen contains status information of all alarm channels within
the ECS, no matter the status of the individual alarm channel.
As default, the alarm channels are listed in tag-name alphabetic order.
From the alarm channel screen, it is possible to cut out (and activate) alarm chan-
nels.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Engine Operation 703-15
1. Engine
Engine operation and adjustment is carried out from one of the following five
screens:
1.1 Operation
1.2 Status
1.3 Process Information
1.4 Cylinder Load
1.5 Cylinder Pressure
Screens 1.1 and 1.2 are related to engine start-up preparations and daily running,
and 1.3, 1.4 and 1.5 relate to engine adjustments.
The operator can access these five operation and adjustment screens via the sec-
ondary navigator by pressing the Engine button in the main navigator.
1.1 Operation (See Plate 70324)

Operation is the main screen for control of the engine during voyage. This screen
is active most of the time between “Engine ready” and FWE (Finished With En-
gine).
On this screen, “prepare start” and “slow turn” can be performed before start of the
engine.
Plate 70324 shows the full screen. In the following, a detailed description of the
individual fields will be given.
1.1.1 Main State

The main state field contains 3 status fields indicating the current sub-telegraph
command states and the states of the engine.
The background colours on the graphics are specified as:
· Blue = Normal state

· Yellow = Warning state
· Red = Alarm state
· Grey/dimmed = Not in use.
The top field indicates the current sub-telegraph command state, which can be
one of the following:
· FWE (Finished With Engine)

· Standby
· At Sea
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The middle field indicates the states of the engine:
· (Blank)
(engine is operative or blocked according to the sub-telegraph command)
· Engine not blocked (background yellow: if top field is in FWE condition)
· Engine not ready (background yellow: if top field is in STAND-BY or
AT SEA CONDITION
The cause of the states “Engine not blocked” or “Engine not ready” can be seen in
the Status screen, Plate 70325, in the field Start Conditions.
The bottom field indicates, via yellow or red warnings, why the engine is not ready:
· (Blank) (engine is ready)

· Increased limiter (yellow) is shown when active, and engine status is not FWE,
and neither Start Blocked or Shut down status is active. Increased limiter is a
warning condition.
· Start Blocked (red) is shown when active, and engine status is not FWE, and
Shut down status is not active. Start Blocked is an alarm condition.
· Shut down (red) is shown when active. Shut down is an alarm condition.
1.1.2 Command [RPM]

The command indicator button contains six or eight status fields. Two fields (high-
lighted), indicating the current active control station (Bridge, ECR-comb., ECR-
sep. or LOP) and the actual speed command setting for each of the control sta-
tions. The actual selected control station is indicated by dark blue (normal selec-
tion) or yellow (take command) see below.
The Bridge Control and ECR Comb. Stations are parts of the RCS (Remote Con-
trol System). Only one control station at a time is active.
The active control station is normally selected via the RCS request acknowledge
system. However, the selection may be overridden from either the ECR or LOP by
the “take command” buttons, which are wired directly to the ECS (Engine Control
System) and situated on the control station panels.
If the active control station selection is inconsistent, the ECS keeps the last valid
active control station as the active station, until a new valid selection is available
(possibly a “take command”).
In the event the “take command” signals from both the ECR and the LOP are se-
lected simultaneously, the LOP has first priority and is selected.
1.1.2.1 RPM Fine Adjust
By pressing the Command [RPM] button, a RPM Fine Adjust toolbar is displayed.
It allows the RPM setpoint to be adjusted in operator level. E.g. if the speed com-
mand setpoint is 119.5 RPM, it can be fine adjusted to 120 RPM. Moving the han-
dle will disable the fine adjustment mode. Maximum fine adjustable speed is +/- 2
RPM.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Note: RPM fine adjustment can only be performed in ECR Command mode (ECR
Sep with CPP).
1.1.3 Running Mode and Governor Mode

The engine running mode and governor mode buttons each contains a status field
indicating the current active running and governor modes.
The running mode can be either Economy or Emission; two additional modes may
be available. If only Economy mode is available, the mode selection is not usable
(dimmed).
The governor mode can be either RPM Control, Torque Control or Index Control.
Changing the running mode is done by pressing the running mode button. This
brings up a toolbar. On the toolbar, the current running mode is selected. Pressing
a button representing any available mode will issue a command to the control sys-
tem requesting a change to the corresponding mode.
Changing governor mode is done similar to changing running mode.
1.1.4 Pressure Indicators

The pressure indicators consists of a bar graph and a status field.
Both the bar graph and the status field indicate the actual pressure of the actual
medium.
1.1.5 Auxiliary System Status Indicators

The system status indicators display information of the operation mode of the aux-
iliary systems controlled by the ME ECS. These are all indicators and do not allow
changing mode or status. Possible control is made on the panels for the actual
systems. Indicators are:
· HPS (Hydraulic Power Supply): Manual, Auto

· Lubricator: Running Stopped, Prelube, LCD (Load Change Dependent) On
· PTO (Power Take Off): Off, Request, Permit, Request (yellow and warning, if a
parameter for switching on the PTO is not fulfilled). Optional, only if the engine
has PTO.
· Auxiliary Blowers represented by two status fields, one indicates the operation
mode, which can be Auto or Manual. The other indicates the current status of
the blowers, which can be Stopped, Starting, Running or Failed.
· Var.XBP (Variable Exhaust Gas Bypass): percentage open.
Optional, only if XBP is installed.
· On/Off XBP (Exhaust Gas Bypass): Open or Closed. Optional, only if XBP is
installed.
1.1.6 Start Status Indicator

The start status indicator consists of a single display, showing information on the
status of a start attempt.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The status shown can be one of the following:
· Stopped
· Running
· Repeated Start (yellow)
· Slow Turn Failed (red)
· Start Failed (red)
1.1.7 Speed [RPM]

The speed indicator consists of a bar graph. The bar graph is centred at 0 and pos-
itive and negative is up and down, respectively.
The set point and the actual running speed of the engine are shown in the two dis-
plays above the graph.
The uppermost display is the speed command modifier. The speed modifier is a
function that may override the actual speed command and control the speed sys-
tem set point for the engine speed. When the function is active, the control mode
is shown in the Speed Indicator. The available modes are:
Start / stabilizing The stabilizing modifier defines a speed set point that ensures
the starting of the engine.
Stopped The stopped modifier sets the speed set point to zero.
Minimum Speed The minimum speed command modifier defines a minimum

Command speed set point during operation of the engine.
Maximum Speed The maximum speed command modifier defines a maximum

Command speed set point during operation of the engine.
Fixed Speed Set Fixed speed set is activated when running in pitch backup mode
from bridge (option for CPP systems).
Shut down
Slow down
PTO The speed is kept higher than ordered to keep the shaft genera-
tor connected during start up of the auxiliary engines.
Speed Ramp Increase of speed is limited by the ramp, and by the load pro-
gram.
Load Control The load control modifier defines a maximum speed set point
Program that ensures the maximum fuel oil index limit is not exceeded.
Barred Speed Indicates that the modifier has changed the preset from inside a
Range barred range to either lower or upper limit of the ramp. The
engine may have 0-2 barred speed range(s).
RPM Fine Adjust The speed is being modified according to the setting entered in
the RPM Fine Adjustment toolbar on the Operation Screen.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
If the function is used, the barred speed range(s) is marked on the side of the bar
graph. Most engines have two barred ranges and the ranges are identical in the
ahead and astern directions (FPP systems). When operating from ECR and
Bridge, the speed set is automatically kept outside these range(s).
1.1.8 Pitch Indicator

The pitch indicator is only shown on ships with CPP systems.
The pitch indicator consists of a label and a bar graph, indicating the current pitch
setting. The label uses + (plus) or − (minus) to indicate positive (forward) or neg-
ative (backwards) pitch. The bar graph is centred at 0 and positive and negative is
up and down, respectively.
The pitch indicator bar graph uses a pointed graph to underline the direction (sign)
of the current pitch.
1.1.9 Fuel Index Indicator [%]

The fuel index indicator consists of a bar graph and a set of status fields. The top
status field indicates the current effective or nearest limiter. The electronic gover-
nor will limit the fuel index command according to the actual engine operating con-
ditions. If no limiter is currently active the nearest limiter is displayed on a light blue
background. When a limiter is active it is displayed on a dark blue background.
Available limiters are:
Start The start limiter defines a fixed amount of fuel to be used for the first
injections during start.
Chief The chief limiter defines a maximum amount of fuel to be injected accord-
ing to the settings done by the operator at the screen Cylinder Load.
Scavenge The scavenge air pressure limiter defines a maximum amount of fuel to
Air Pres- be injected based on the actual scavenge air pressure, in order not to
sure overfuel the engine.
Torque The torque limiter defines a maximum amount of fuel to be injected

according to actual engine speed. This is to ensure that the engine
torque does not exceed recommended levels. The limit is defined in the
load program.
Hydraulic The hydraulic power supply pressure limiter defines a maximum amount
Power Sup- of fuel oil to be injected according to actual hydraulic power supply
ply requirements, in order to ensure that the hydraulic power supply pressure
does not drop below a minimum operation limit.
This limiter is only active in case of malfunction of the HPS.
Blank When no index limiter is active the field is blank.
Below the limiter status field is a set of dynamic labels displaying the actual fuel
index and the current fuel index limit.
1.1.10 Prepare Start Button

The prepare start function is normally to be activated before start if the engine has
been stopped for some time. Pressing the button will start the cylinder pre-lubrica-
tion and the auxiliary blowers (if stopped).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
When pressed, the button will stay down until the procedure is completed.
The command is available only when the engine is stopped and the prepare start
procedure is not running.
1.1.11 Slow Turn Button

Manual slow turn is used during preparations before start of the engine, and is nor-
mally to be used with the indicator cooks open. Slow turn is used for visual inspec-
tion of the blow out. When the button is selected, the engine is operated on starting
air through the slow turn valve as long as the control handle is activated.
1.1.12 Auto Button

The auto button is pressed when start preparations are completed, and the engine
has to be started. When selected the engine will perform a normal automatic start.
1.1.13 Air Run Button

The air run button function is only available in Chief level.
The air run button can be used in the following situations:
When checking the Tacho system (test), starting air valve test and after mainte-
nance (and after check with the turning gear) to check the function and movement.
Air run function is similar to the slow turning, except that the main starting valve is
open and the engine is running faster (still without fuel injection).
Slow Turn and Air Run are activated when the handle is in “run” position. This will
rotate the engine until the handle is set to "stop" (or the engine is started by press-
ing the Auto button).
1.2 Status (See Plate 70325)

The engine status screen provides extended engine information specifically for
use when changing the status of the engine, i.e. in the process from FWE to stand-
by state or vice versa.
1.2.1 Main State Field

The main state field shows exactly the same information as the main state field in
the operation screen view, Plate 70324. For detailed explanation, see 1.1.1 Main
State Field, page 1(12) in this chapter.
1.2.2 Start Conditions

The Start Conditions field is a status list, showing whether the engine is ready for
start or not. The conditions shown with a green checker mark must be present be-
fore starting of the engine is possible.
If a condition is shown with a red background and a white exclamation mark or an

exclamation mark on a yellow background, the engine is not ready for starting.
If the condition is not relevant the background is dimmed, but a check mark or ex-
clamation mark will still indicate the status of the condition.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The possible status indications of each field are listed below:
· Main Starting Valve in service position (Standby or At Sea)

Yellow, when main starting valve is not in service position.
Green, when main starting valve is in service position.
· Main Starting Valve Blocked (FWE)
Yellow, when main starting valve is not blocked.
Green, when main starting valve is blocked.
· Starting Air Distribution System in service (Standby or At Sea)
Red, when Starting Air Distribution system is blocked.
Yellow, when Starting Air Distribution system is not in service.
Green, when Starting Air Distribution system is in service.
· Starting Air Distribution System blocked (FWE)
Yellow, when Start Air Distribution system is not blocked.
Green, when Start Air Distribution system is blocked.
· Starting Air Pressure (Standby or At Sea)
Red, when starting air pressure is not OK (Low and bridge control).
Green, when OK.
· Control Air Pressure (Standby or At Sea)
Red, when control air is vented.
Yellow, when control air pressure is low.
Green, when control air pressure is OK.
· Control Air vented (FWE)
Yellow, when control air is not vented.
Green, when control air is vented.
· Turning Gear disengaged (Standby or At Sea)
Red, when turning gear is not disengaged.
Green, when turning gear is disengaged.
· Auxiliary Blowers (Standby or At Sea)
Red, when blowers are not operational.
Green, when blowers are operational.
· Hydraulic Power Supply (Standby or At Sea) (Start-up pumps)
Yellow, when HPS is not OK.
Green, when HPS is OK.
· Hydraulic Pressure (Standby or At Sea)
Red, if pressure is too low.
Green, if pressure is OK.
· Zero Pitch before starting (Standby or At Sea) (CPP systems only)
Red, if pitch is not zero before starting.
Green, if pitch is zero before starting.
· Auxiliary Systems (Standby or At Sea) (optional – currently not in use)
Yellow, if auxiliary systems are not OK.
Green, if auxiliary systems are OK.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
1.2.3 Start Air

The starting air pressure indicator displays the system starting air pressure contin-
uously.
1.2.4 Turning Gear

The field shows either Engaged or Disengaged.
1.2.5 Blowers
Shows the status of the auxiliary blowers, which is either:
· Stopped
· Running
· Starting
· Failed
1.2.6 Hyd. Oil

The hydraulic oil pressure indicator displays the system hydraulic oil pressure con-
tinuously.
1.2.7 Crankshaft
Shows the current position of the crankshaft when turning the engine (for mainte-
nance purposes) with the turning gear, and allows checking of the position in case
of malfunction of starting air valves.
When the engine is running, the field display shows “Running”.
1.2.8 Control Air Pressure

The control air pressure indicator displays the system control air pressure contin-
uously.
1.2.9 Pitch Start Blocking Indicator (CPP systems only)

On the pitch start blocking indicator, it is possible to cancel the start blocking. (This
could be relevant if the engine is stopped with the pitch in ahead or astern position,
and return to zero is not possible due to failure).
Cancel of start blocking can only be performed from Chief Level. When blocking
is cancelled this is shown with the text “Blocking Cancelled” on a red background.
1.2.10 Start Status Indicator

The start status indicator consists of a single field containing information on the
current start status.
Three successive start attempt failures or a slow turn failure will cause Start –
Blocked. The below conditions are indicated in the start status indicator:
· Stopped
· Running
· Repeated Start (warning)
· Slow Turn Failed (alarm)
· Start Failed (alarm)
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
1.2.11 Details
Pressing this button will display the individual readings of the Start Air, Control Air
and Crank Shaft sensors.
1.2.12 Pneumatic Diagram

In addition to the information described above the screen contains a stylish dia-
gram of the pneumatic starting and control air system. The diagram is intended to
indicate the functionality of the system. For a specific engine, further details can
be found in the plant installation drawings supplied by the engine builder.
The pilot valves A, B and Slow Turning, can and must be activated to test that the
main starting valve and the slow turning valve open and the thightness of the start-
ing air valves in the cylinders. (This test is performed regularly with stopped en-
gine, see Chapter 702-01).
Pressing the field, encircling the pilot valves, opens a tool bar from which activa-
tion of the pilot valves is possible.
1.3 Process Information (See Plate 70326)

This screen gives the user a quick overview of the possible limiters/governors
used.
The screen always shows the values currently in use.
1.3.1 Running Mode

This field is the same as described in 1.1.3 Running Mode and Governor Mode
Field.
An engine running mode is based on an algorithm which continuously determines

the fuel injection and exhaust parameters that influence the cylinder process. By
controlling the cylinder process (maximum cylinder pressure, compression ratio
and blow back), fuel efficiency and emissions can be controlled to a certain extent.
For the ME engine, several running modes may exist. These contain different al-
gorithms, and provide various fuel efficiency and emission characteristics. The
running modes are configured for each engine type by MAN Diesel.
1.3.2 Speed Control

This field is the same list of speed modifiers described in Section 1.1.7 Speed In-
dicator.
The Index Limiter field is the same list of index limiters described in Section 1.1.9
Fuel Index Indicator.
1.4 Cylinder Load (See Plate 70327)

In Chief level, the operator can adjust the balance of the engine related to MIP and
Fuel Oil Properties.
In Chief level, the operator can adjust the load limit on one or more cylinders, ad-
just the cylinder load balance as well as cut out one or more cylinder units. Before
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
taking a cylinder out of operation the restrictions in section 704-04 must be taken
into consideration. The operator can adjust the settings on all cylinders at one
time, or adjust settings on each individual cylinder.
1.5 Cylinder Pressure (See Plate 70328)

The settings of the Maximum Pressure Level and Balance, Compression Ratio
and Exhaust Valve open timing are combined into a single screen view called Cyl-
inder Pressure.
In Chief level, the adjustment ranges are:
· pmax +/– 20 Bar

· pcomp ratio +/– 2
· Valve timing 0 to –2°, earlier than the engine mode’s requested value.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Auxiliaries 703-16
703-16 Auxiliaries
1. Auxiliaries
The Hydraulic System, Scavenge Air, Exhaust Gas Bypass if installed and Cylin-
der Lubrication are monitored in the Auxiliaries main navigator.
From each menu, the operator can control and monitor these systems. The
screens are:
1.1 Hydraulic System
1.2 Scavenge Air (Exhaust Gas Bypass)
1.3 Cylinder Lubricators
1.1 Hydraulic System (See Plate 70329)

This screen is a simple schematic drawing of the hydraulic system. The screen
shows from 3 (three) to 5 (five) engine-driven pumps (depending on engine layout)
and 2 (two) electrically driven start-up pumps.
A bypass valve from pump pressure side to suction side is also shown.
The following screens can also be activated directly from the screen:
The operating mode must be chief level.
· HPS (Hydraulic Power Supply) Mode

· Pump Torque Limiter
· Set Point
· Bypass
On the screen, the displays which can be activated are shown in 3-D graphic and
the inactive displays are in 2-D graphic. Once activated, the display is highlighted
with a blue line at the outer circumference
At the bottom of the screen the details button is placed. Activation of this button
reveals a view with all individual pressure readings available on the system.
(Pressing the button a second time brings you back to the default screen).
1.1.1 HPS Mode

Pressing the HPS Mode button activates a toolbar at the bottom of the screen.
At Chief level, it is possible to switch between Auto and Manual mode.
In Auto mode it is possible to perform the following commands (both Operator and
Chief level)
1. Select one of the electrically driven pumps as master.

2. Select one of the engine-driven pumps as pressure controlling pump.
In Manual mode (Chief level) the additional command features are:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
703-16 Auxiliaries
1. Adjustment of the current hydraulic pressure set point (see Section 1.1.3 in
this Chapter).
2. Operate engine-driven pumps bypass valve using either ACU1 or ACU3
(Bypass valve to be tested for movement every 6 months, at stopped engine,
see Section 1.1.4 in this Chapter).
3. Start/stop of the electric start-up pumps.
If, for some reason, automatic control of an engine-driven pump cannot be main-
tained, the pump swash plate is deflected to 100% in ahead direction only.
1.1.2 Pump Torque Limiter

In this field, it is possible to cancel the Pump Torque Limiter. (Chief-Level)
The torque limiter has two functions:
1. The total torque to the engine-driven pumps must not exceed a level that can
harm gear and chain. Hence, to protect gear and chain, the sum of the swash
plate positions must not exceed a predefined value. (Engine specific).
2. To protect the individual pumps from breakdown or damage.
By pressing the Pump Torque Limiter field, a toolbar will appear, where the limiter
can be either activated or cancelled. (Cancellation of the limiter will raise an alarm
on the MOP).
When the limiter is cancelled, the electrically controlled swash plates in the pumps
are allowed to deflect to the mechanical limitation, if the need is there. (When the
limiter is active, they are only allowed to deflect to an electrically controlled maxi-
mum position).
If for instance an engine-driven pump-shaft is broken, the limiter could be

helpful. However, it is recommended to contact MAN Diesel, if a situation
like this should occur.
At risk of mechanical overload: cancellation of the torque limiter must
only be selected, when it has been confirmed, that the engine-driven
pump is not working.
1.1.3 Set Point and Hyd. Oil

Adjustment of the oil pressure set point can be done from the Set Point display,
where the actual set point is always shown. The engine must be running. The ac-
tual oil pressure is shown at the display as Hyd.Oil.
Adjustment of the Set Point (Chief level and manual mode) is only
intended as an option in test or failure situations.
As default, the normal operating pressure is in the 150-210 bar range and is set at
commissioning. The engine shutdown level is approximately 150 bars, also set at
engine commissioning. Both the operating pressure and the shutdown pressure is
engine dependent.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Auxiliaries 703-16
The pressure set point is only relevant for the engine-driven swash plate pumps,
as the pressure of the start-up pumps is limited via mechanical adjusted pressure
limiting valves. The start-up pumps are automatically stopped at normal engine
running.
1.1.4 Double Pipe

This display shows the pressure in the outer pipes of the high pressure double
pipes. Normally, this pressure should be in the 0-10 bar range, depending on the
specific engine layout. See section 708-08 for more details of the hydraulic sys-
tem.
1.1.5 Bypass
On the main pressure line from the engine-driven pumps, a bypass is installed.
At normal running with HPS mode in “Auto”, the bypass will open in the event of
shutdown of the engine (wind milling can occur). This ensures oil return to the suc-
tion side of the pumps and thereby avoids cavitation and unintended wear on the
pump parts.
Also, if the shutdown is due to a leakage at the high pressure side, and the engine
keeps turning due to wind milling, the amount of oil spilled can be reduced by lead-
ing the oil back to the suction side.
By checking the valve manually, you are always sure that the valve is working
properly. (The valve is to be checked manually every 6 months.)
The bypass valve is tested at engine still stand, in Chief level and the HPS mode
in manual. For redundancy reasons the bypass valve is controlled both via ACU1
and ACU3.
1.2 Scavenge Air (See Plate 70330)

The scavenge air screen contains information and controls for monitoring and op-
erating the auxiliary blowers and exhaust gas bypass (engine dependent).
The blowers are normally operating in Auto mode. Operating conditions are:
The blowers are started when
· “prepare start” button is pressed (Operation Screen)

· manoeuvring handle is moved to start position (engine start is delayed until
blowers are running and pressure is correct)
· when engine is running, but the scavenge air pressure is below a certain value
(e.g. during manoeuvring)
The blowers are stopped when
· engine is shut down

· the current sub-telegraph command state is moved to FWE position
· 10 minutes (adjustable) after engine has been stopped
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
703-16 Auxiliaries
· engine is running and the scavenge air pressure is above a specified level
(See Guidance Values Automation Chapter 702-02 in this book)
If a switch to manual operation is required, this is done via the toolbar (see Plate
70330). By pressing the blower display at chief level and manual mode, it is pos-
sible to start or stop the individual blower.
The screen contains 2 to 5 blowers, depending on the engine layout. The state of
each blower is shown. Status is either stopped, starting, running or failed.
By pressing the details button, indication of the current scavenge air pressure is
shown for each individual scavenge air sensor.
1.3 Exhaust Gas Bypass (engine dependent)

Monitoring of the Exhaust gas bypass is performed from the Scavenge air screen.
The actual positions and settings of the on/off bypass and the proportional control-
led bypass valves are always shown on the screen.
By pressing the bypass display buttons (chief level), the bypass valve modes can
be changed between automatic and manual.
In manual mode (chief level), the on/off bypass can be opened or closed.
In manual mode (chief level), the proportionally controlled bypass valve can be
opened/closed or set to the angle desired.
1.4 Cylinder Lubricators (see Plate 70331) ME Lube

The ME lube Control System (LUBECS) provides the operational monitoring and
control of the ME cylinder lubrication plant which lubricates the cylinders in the ME
type engine.
The following displays can be monitored:
1.4.1 Flow
1.4.2 Total
1.4.3 LCD
1.4.4 Basic Feed Rate
1.4.5 Actual Feed Rate (each cylinder)
1.4.1 Flow
The Flow display shows the ordered lube oil amount in litres/hour.
If one or more lubricators are malfunctioning (e.g. Feedback Failure)

the actual amount applied will differ.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Auxiliaries 703-16
1.4.2 Total
The Total display shows the total ordered amount of lubricating oil used since last
power up of the ECU involved.
Both of the values Flow and Total are based on the counted numbers of lubrication
strokes and the displaced amount per stroke.
1.4.3 LCD
The LCD display shows whether the LCD (Load Change Dependent) lubrication is
on or off.
1.4.4 Basic Feed Rate

The Basic Feed Rate is a calculated rate for the complete lubricator system in
g/kWh shown with two (2) decimals. The formula for calculating the Basic Feed
Rate is = S% x (FEED RATE FACTOR).
1.4.5 Actual Feed Rate (each cylinder)

The bar graphs for each individual cylinder shows the actual feed rate per cylinder,
after the influence of limiters, load control, etc. If the feed rate due to low load ex-
ceeds the maximum display capacity (1, 45 g/kWh), the full bar is barred and the
upper display on the bar graph shows “Low Load”.
The following displays can be operated (at chief level):
1.4.6 Prelube
1.4.7 S%
1.4.8 Feed Rate Factor
1.4.9 Min. Feed Rate
1.4.10 Feed Rate Adjust Factor
1.4.11 Running in %
1.4.12 Lubricator Test Sequence
1.4.6 Prelube (for test purpose)

As stated above this button is only used for test purposes.
When the “Prelube” button is pressed a toolbar is shown on the screen (see Plate
70331) Pressing the button “ON” triggers a prelubrication on all cylinders and eval-
uates feedback from the lubricators.
As default, each lubricator is activated 20 times at the fastest possible speed.
Prelubrication can only be activated if hydraulic pressure is present.

This demands that the engine (Telegraph) is put in the state “Standby”
or that the Hydraulic start-up pumps are set at manual operation and
started.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
703-16 Auxiliaries
1.4.7 S%
Activating the display S % (Chief level) enables adjustment of the Sulphur content
equal to the sulphur content in the HFO used. The principle of how to adjust the
feed rate according to the sulphur content is explained in Section 707-02 in this
book.
The range in the LUBECS is between 0.00 to 5.00 S % and is not adjustable out-
side this range.
1.4.8 Feed Rate Factor

Activating the display Feed Rate Factor (Chief level) enables adjustment of the
feed rate for all cylinders. The display shows the feed rate with 2 decimals and
“g/kWh%S”.
1.4.9 Min. Feed Rate

The display Min. Feed Rate enables adjustment of the minimum feed rate for all
cylinders.
The value is displayed in g/kWh and is normally set to 60% of the basic recom-
mended feed rate (chief level).
1.4.10 Feed Rate Adjust Factor

Activating the display Feed Rate Adjust Factor (chief level) enables adjustment of
the feed rate for every single cylinder.
1.4.11 Running in %
When a single cylinder is under run-in, the feed rate is adjusted at this display
(chief level). Running-in of a single cylinder is described in Section 707-01 in this
book.
1.4.12 Lubricator Test Sequence

Pressing the Lubricator Test Sequence (chief level) starts a continuous activation
of the lubricator at normal injection rate (different from “Prelube” 1.4.6 where the
injection of oil is made at the fastest possible speed and 20 times)
This feature is used after repairs, etc. on the lubricator(s), enabling the engineer
to manually check the lubricator for leaks and injection.
If a single button (cylinder 1, 2, 3, etc.) is pressed, a toolbar is shown on the screen

(see Plate 70331). The toolbar enables the engineer to start lubrication on the par-
ticular cylinder concerned or on all lubricators.
The lubricator test can only be activated if hydraulic pressure is

present. This requires that the engine (Telegraph) is put in state
“Standby” or that the Hydraulic start-up pumps are set at manual
operation and started.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Maintenance 703-17
1. Maintenance
The maintenance screens give an overall view of the status of the ECS system
seen on the following three screens. Plates 70332 – 70333 – 70334.
1.1 System View I/O Test
1.2 Invalidated Inputs
1.3 Network Status
The above-mentioned three maintenance screens can be accessed via the sec-
ondary navigator by pressing the “Maintenance” button in the main navigator.
They are mainly used at engine commissioning, during fault finding on I/O cabling/
channels and external connections to sensors and during engine operation. The
use of these screens is therefore relevant for engine crew as well.
MAN B&W Diesel does not currently recommend “Preventive Replacement of

Electronics”, and there is no urgent reason to introduce such recommendation as
aging failures do not have any critical consequences for the operation of the en-
gine. However, we will consider and evaluate this continuously in preparation for
setting a future upper limit of when the electronics are to be considered ready for
replacement.
1.1 System View I/O Test (See Plate 70332)

To understand the use of this screen, an explanation of the layout of the Multi Pur-
pose Controller (MPC) is appropriate.
The MPC is a computer unit which has no user interface such as a display or a
keyboard, but has a wide variety of inputs/outputs (I/O) for interfacing to sensors
and actuators of the engine, e.g.: (see drawing next page).
· Inputs for e.g. tacho signals, standard (0)4-20mA transducers, ±10V signals,
switches and 24V binary signals
· Outputs such as (0)4-20mA and ±10V signals, contacts and high-speed semi-
conductor switches for activation of the exhaust valve of the ME Engine for in-
stance
· Duplicated Control Network for security
· Serial communication controller for either a Remote I/O Network or point-to-
point serial communication
· Service channel to be connected to a laptop PC for service purposes.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
703-17 Maintenance
Other Computer
Power Power
Equipment
A B A B
Network
Serial Communication Service Channel
Key Multi Purpose Controller

plug
Input Output
er
et
m
A
A
ts
m
m
io
c
20
0
nt
0V
0V
0
ta
o
-2
10
te
4-
ch
on
)4
-1
-1
Po
PT
)
Ta
(0
(0
+/
+/
C
X
V X
The main processor of the Multi Purpose Controller is a Motorola 68332, which is
a 32-bit processor "borrowed" from the automotive industry. It includes an on-chip
timing coprocessor for synchronisation with the crankshaft rotation and speed
measurement.
To ease the production of the Multi Purpose Controller, all programmable compo-
nents are in-circuit programmable, which also allows field update of the controller
by means of relatively simple tools. The MPC contains no harddisk or other sensi-
tive mechanical components, and the software is stored in a non-volatile Flash-
PROM memory, i.e. the application software may be sent to and programmed into
the Multi Purpose Controller through the network, and thereby restore the function-
ality after the Multi Purpose Controller has been exchanged with a spare unit from
stock.
The MPC is, as shown on the picture below equipped with a battery. This battery
is used for Back-up power to the clock – watch of the MPC in the event that the 24
V power is turned-off. All clocks of all MPC’s are synchronised via the network.
Synchronisation is done regularly and always after power is on after a possible
power off. Regarding battery in MPC: See S-instructions S906-0039 and S906-
0040.
When a new MPC is mounted in the cabinet, the dongle in the cabinet is mounted
in the dongle plug-in, after reconnection of all wires. The dongle tells the “new”
MPC in which cabinet it is mounted and, in that way, which software and parame-
ters it should upload from the MOP harddisk (e.g. CCU1, ACU 3 or EICU1).
The MPC is also equipped with a light diode, capable of showing green, yellow or
red light. This light tells the engineer in what status the MPC is.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
703-17 Maintenance
During normal running the diode is green.

When the diode is yellow, the MPC is uploading engine running parameters from
the harddisk in the MOP. Normally, this takes a few minutes.
When the diode is red, the MPC is unavailable.
Battery
Light diode
Dongle plug
The use of the screens on Plates 70332, 70333 and 70334 also becomes relevant.
When MPC change is to be done, detailed LED (light-diode) indications are shown
in the maintenance Procedure M906-xxxx, Multi Purpose Controller, Appendix.
A red light diode is not clearly the situation/status that triggers a replacement of an
MPC, but only a hint in that direction.
If in doubt, the engineer can use the screens to explain the status to skilled per-
sonnel at MAN B&W Diesel. The communication with engineers at MAN B&W Die-
sel is less complicated, and various opinions are ruled out when exact pictures are
communicated to MAN B&W Diesel.
The idea of the Maintenance screens is to help the engineer run and monitor the
ECS of the engine.
The icons (plate 70332 1(3)) shown on the controllers, show the status of each sin-
gle controller, e.g. whether it is in mode:
Active
Controlling
Configuration
Test
Blocked
Not accessible
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Maintenance 703-17
By pressing the single controller (Chief Level) on this screen (in this case ACU-3
is pressed and shown on page 2(3)), the actual inputs/outputs on the selected con-
troller ACU-3 are shown.
The screen shows Info, ID and Descriptions and processes values of each single
channel on the MPC.
To perform a view of each single channel, the button “MPC Mode” must be
pressed (Chief Level). Doing this, reveals a toolbar at the bottom of the screen. On
this toolbar “Test” must be chosen.
CAUTION: Changing to TEST Mode will STOP the MPC from controlling
the system.
By pressing the channel number to the left on the individual channel, for instance
screen 3(3) on Plate 70332 is shown. Here we see a single channel (in this case,
channel 80 on CCU-12). The status and values of this channel is listed on this
screen.
From this screen, input channels can be invalidated and validated again (Chief
Level).
CAUTION: Changing the status of a channel may cause the system to

malfunction.
It may be relevant to invalidate an input channel on an MPC if the sensor linked to

the channel, for some reason or another, occasionally or continuously is giving
alarm.
The reason for alarm could for instance be a defective sensor or loose wiring from
the sensor to the MPC.
We recommend that channels only are invalidated in agreement with skilled per-
sonnel from MAN B&W Diesel.
If a channel is invalidated, the channel involved will go into a continuous alarm

state. At the same time, the ECS will continue to operate in the best possible way,
without the invalidated input sensor value.
1.2 Invalidated Inputs (See Plate 70333)

If an input channel is invalidated (as described in Section 1.1 above), it is listed on
the screen “Invalidated Inputs”. ID number, signal ID and a short description to
easily overview and recognise the channel(s) involved are shown on this screen.
The “Invalidated Inputs” screen is a “Quick View” helping the engineer look
through and control which channels to invalidate. This could be helpful, for in-
stance after an MPC change.
Input Channels Invalidated can be validated from this screen (Chief Level).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
703-17 Maintenance
CAUTION: Changing the status of a channel may cause the system to

malfunction.
1.3 Network Status (See Plate 70334)

This screen gives the engineer an overall view and exact status of the Control Net-
work of the ECS (opposite screens 70332 and 70333 that shows the status of each
single MPC).
From this screen, it is possible to see the status of the Network using the icons
named below: (Icons are visible at Plate 70334, bottom)
· OK
· This MOP
· No Reply Single Channel
· No Communication
· Not Accessible
· On-line But No Information
· Not Relevant
· Reference
· Cross Connection
When all fields are shown with a green √ (check mark) everything is okay. The use
of the screen becomes especially relevant when manual checks for earth fault is
performed.
CAUTION: Engine must be stopped when check for earth fault is per-
formed.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Admin 703-18
703-17 System
1. System
In the Admin main navigator, time set and in table format, all controllers in the ECS
are listed and version numbers displayed.
The screens are:
1.1 Set Time
1.2 Version (software and IMO Check Sum)
1.1 Set Time (See Plate 70335)

At the Set Time screen, the operator is able to set the time/date for UTC (Chief
Level required) or to set the time offset for Local Time in intervals down to 5 min-
utes.
Pressing on either button “UTC Date/Time” or button “Local Date/Time” will display
toolbars (shown on Plate 70335). From these toolbars, Date and Time can be set.
Pressing the buttons “UTC Time displayed” or “Local Time Displayed” gives you
the opportunity to choose between the time you want displayed at the MOP panel
(upper right corner) and in the lists (alarm list, event log etc.)
Alarms and logs are recorded with both Local Time/Date and UTC Time/Date re-
gardless of which time/date you set as default.
1.2 Version (See Plate 70336)
1.2.1 Background
This screen displays the version type of the ECS controlling the ME engine. It is
used to obtain the configuration information of the Electronic Control System
(ECS) in an ME engine. It displays, in table format, all the controllers that comprise
the system, including specific information relating to each controller.
1.2.2 Screen Items

In the upper system information line, general information of the ECS system for
this particular engine is shown. The fields are: (No data shown on Plate 70336)
Type The engine classification name

Version Version number of entire system
BES Vers. Software version of the Basic Electronic System
Engine Group No. Engine builders engine number
IMO No. Engine IMO number (former Lloyds number)
Engine Builder Name of engine builder
Eng. No. Engine Serial number
1.2.3 Controller information

In the Controller information pane, data for each Controller in the system is dis-
played. The pane contains the following:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
703-18 Admin
1.2.4 Controller unit

ID Name of MPC (controller)
Addr. Network Address of MPC
Type Application group the MPC belongs to (ACU, CCU, ECU or EICU)
1.2.5 Parameters Check Sums (No data shown on Plate 70336)

User
Chief
Service
Design
IMO Design
IMO Chief
No data is shown, because specific data may vary.
1.2.6 Using the Screen

When the screen is first displayed, no information appears on the table. Press the
“Refresh” button to retrieve the system information and parameter checksums of
all controllers connected to the ECS. (See plate 70336.) (No data is shown on the
plate, because specific data may vary).
If at least one controller supplies information on the system that does not agree
with the other controllers, a warning message is displayed in yellow at the tool bar
(below on the screen) (see plate 70336).
Pressing the Print button generates a hardcopy of the information displayed in the
table (if a printer is connected to the MOP).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Troubleshooting Guide 703-20
MAN Diesel
If you encounter difficulties while operating the ME-engine, this guide can be useful in solving the
problems.
The information in this chapter will help you with:
1. Cylinder Components, Tests and Evaluation

2. Test for Earth Failure in the ECS System.
1. Cylinder Components, Tests and Evaluation

This document describes the usage of troubleshooting diagrams and procedures. The procedures
only focus on cylinder components (excluding cylinder lubricating components).
Cylinder Fault Diagram

The Cylinder Fault Diagram (CFD – pages 2 and 3 this section) describes the correlation between
system failures and symptoms (alarms and other known symptoms).
The crosses in the diagram indicate the symptoms that can be generated from a certain failure/
cause.
Cylinder Loop Test (flowchart)

The Cylinder Loop Test (CLT – pages 4 and 5 this section) is a description of a test procedure. The
CLT can isolate failures on cylinders where it is known that there is an error.
The test categorises failures in: FIVA valve, FIVA sensor, cabling, MPC, exhaust valve system, ex-
haust valve sensor, fuel plunger system, fuel plunger sensor and hydraulics.
This makes reference to the below mentioned tests.
Please note that there are separate tests for different FIVA valve types.
Amplifier Test (flowchart)

The Amplifier Test (AT – page 6 this section) is a description of a test procedure. The AT should be
used to isolate failures in the amplifier loop if it is known that there is an error.
The test categorises failures in: amplifier, power cabling, cabling to amplifier, FIVA and MPC.
The test is only applicable on systems with Curtiss Wright FIVA valves.
Sensor Chain Test (flowchart)

The Sensor Chain Test (SCT - page 7 this section) is a description of a test procedure. The SCT
should be used to isolate failures in sensor chains where there is a supervision alarm or another
error.
The test categorises failures in: sensor, cabling, MPC.
When referring to this page, please quote Operation 703-20 Edition 0005 Page (9)
703-20
Page (9)
Symptoms Possible Failures
FIVA Alarms Hydraulic failure
FIVA position feedback signal failure Fuel Plunger failure (Suction Valve)
FIVA Amplifier current Supervision (0 = Current) Low fuel oil pressure
FIVA Amplifier reports internal faults (Too high current) FIVA failure
Illegal position (FIVA pilot spool, window function) Exhaust Valve failures
Fuel Plunger and Exhaust Valve Alarms Non-return valves
Exhaust Valve open stroke low High-Pressure pipes
X X
Illlegal plunger position (Window function) Lack of pressure oil
X
Supervision Alarms Air Spring ventet hole failure
X
Superv. Ch30, 4102 Proportianl Valve position Electronics failure
X
Superv. Ch31, 4114, Plunger position M CW FIVA Amplifier failure
X
Superv. Ch34, 4111, Exhaust Valve position MPC failure
X
Superv. Ch33, 4106, Valve Amplifier Ac Sensor failures
X X X
Misc. Alarms Exhaust Valve position feedback failure
X X X
Frozen IO detected (Ch 30) Fuel Plunger position feedback failure
X X
Other Symptoms CW FIVA Pilot valve feedback failure
X
No fuel injection Cabling failure
X
Low Pmax
X X
Low MIP
X X X X
Increased fuel index
X X
Plunger sticking in top
X
Exhaust Valve noice
X X X
Exhaust Valve knocking
X X X
Exhaust Valve not moving
X
X X X
X X
Accumulators (One CCU) or Hydraulic X X
Power Supply (Many CCU’s)
X X X
Troubleshooting Guide
X X
If failure occurs on many cylinders - root cause can X To further identify the failure in these single alarm cases:
be extreme ambient conditions or water in oil perform sensor chain test
X X
Cylinder Components Failure Tree (CFD – Curtiss Wright FIVA)
To further seperate between these failures: To isolate failures in amplifier chain

Perform “Cylinder Loop Test”. perform amplifier chain test
To isolate this failure, perform Amplifier chain test
X This failure can generate this alarm

This failure can only generate this alarm
if it also generates other alarms
Additional Information
When referring to this page, please quote Operation 703-20 Edition 0005
MAN Diesel
3YMPTOMS 0OSSIBLEæ&AILURES
MAN Diesel
&)6!æ!LARMS (YDRAULICæFAILURE
&)6!æPOSITIONæFEEDBACKæSIGNALæFAILURE &UELæ0LUNGERæFAILUREæ3UCTIONæ6ALVE
&)6!æ!MPLIFIERæREPORTSæINTERNALæFAULTSæ4OOæHIGHæCURRENT ,OWæFUELæOILæPRESSURE
)LLEGALæPOSITIONæ&)6!æPILOTæSPOOLæWINDOWæFUNCTION &)6!æFAILURE
&UELæ0LUNGERæANDæ%XHAUSTæ6ALVEæ!LARMS %XHAUSTæ6ALVEæFAILURES
%XHAUSTæ6ALVEæOPENæSTROKEæLOW .ONçRETURNæVALVES
8 8
)LLLEGALæPLUNGERæPOSITIONæ7INDOWæFUNCTION (IGHç0RESSUREæPIPES
8
3UPERVISIONæ!LARMS ,ACKæOFæPRESSUREæOIL
8
3UPERVæ#Hæææ0ROPORTIONALæ6ALVEæPOSITION !IRæ3PRINGæVENTETæHOLEæFAILURE
8
3UPERVæ#Hææ0LUNGERæPOSITIONæ- %LECTRONICSæFAILURE
8
3UPERVæ#Hææ%XHAUSTæ6ALVEæPOSITION -0#æFAILURE
8
-ISCæ!LARMS 3ENSORæFAILURES
8 8
&ROZENæ)/æDETECTEDæ#Hæ %XHAUSTæ6ALVEæPOSITIONæFEEDBACKæFAILURE
8 8
/THERæ3YMPTOMS &UELæ0LUNGERæPOSITIONæFEEDBACKæFAILURE
8 8
.OæFUELæINJECTION &)6!æFEEDBACKæFAILURE
,OWæ0MAX #ABLINGæFAILURE
8 8 8
,OWæ-)0
8 8 8
)NCREASEDæFUELæINDEX
8 8
0LUNGERæSTICKINGæINæTOPæ
8
%XHAUSTæ6ALVEæNOICE
8 8 8
%XHAUSTæ6ALVEæKNOCKING
8 8
%XHAUSTæ6ALVEæNOTæMOVING
8 8 8 8
8
8 8
8 8 8
!CCUMULATORSæ/NEæ##5 æORæ(YDRAULIC 8
0OWERæ3UPPLYæ-ANYæ##5S 4OæFURTHERæIDENTIFYæTHEæFAILUREæINæTHESEæSINGLEæALARMæCASES
8
When referring to this page, please quote Operation 703-20 Edition 0005
Troubleshooting Guide
8 8 PERFORMæSENSORæCHAINæTEST
)FæFAILUREæOCCURSæONæMANYæCYLINDERSæçæROOTæCAUSEæ
Cylinder Components Failure Tree (CFD – MBD Parker FIVA)
CANæBEæEXTREMEæAMBIENTæCONDITIONSæORæWATERæINæOIL
4OæFURTHERæSEPERATEæBETWEENæTHESEæFAILURES
0ERFORMæh#YLINDERæ,OOPæ&AILUREæ4ESTv
8 4HISæFAILUREæCANæGENERATEæTHISæALARM
4HISæFAILUREæCANæONLYæGENERATEæTHISæALARM
!DDITIONALæ)NFORMATION IFæITæALSOæGENERATESæOTHERæALARMS
703-20
Page (9)
703-20 Troubleshooting Guide
MAN Diesel
Cylinder Loop Test (CW-FIVA)

Preparation
- Put CCU in test-mode Amplifier ch33 No

- Hydraulic pressure and fuel value test 1 & 2
pressure must be present OK ?
- Have an engineer stand by
for feeling and listening to
fuel and exhaust valve pipes
Yes Yes Failure in amplifier,
Other tests or amplifier cabling or
events failed ? MPC (ch70).
Go to amplifier test
- Set ch70 to: 0V No

- Set ch60 to: ON
(Enables FIVA
amplifier)
Failure in cabling or
FIVA Pos., ch30 No MPC (ch33)
value test 1 & 2
OK ?
- Set ch70 to: 3,4V

(This will cause fuel
Yes
injection) Fuel plunger ch31 test Yes
(1 or 2) OR fuel injection failed ?
or exhaust valve (ch34) test (1 or 2) Failure in FIVA or hydraulics
or exhaust valve
opening failed.
Test 1
Read values:
MUST BE DONE IMMEDIATELY
FIVA Pos., ch30:_________(<6mA)
Fuel plunger ch31:______(>8mA) No Failure in FIVA, FIVA
Amplifier, ch33:__________(3,4V) sensor, sensor cable or
Exhaust valve ch34:_____(<8mA) MPC (ch30). Go to
Fuel plunger ch31 No “Sensor Chain Test”
value test 1 & 2
OK ?
Observe events by engineer

standing by: Yes Yes
Fuel injection: evaluate sound Fuel injection AND no Failure in fuel plunger
and shockwave in pipe OK ?____ other failures ?
No
- Set ch70 to: 0V Exhaust valve (ch34) Yes

value-test 1 or 2 failed ?
or exhaust valve
opening failed ?
No Failure in fuel plunger
sensor , sensor cable or
Test 2 MPC (ch31). Go to
“Sensor Chain Test”
Read values:
MUST BE DONE IMMEDIATELY Exhaust valve ch34 No
FIVA Pos., ch30:________(>17mA) value test 1 & 2
Fuel plunger ch31:______(<8mA) OK ?
Amplifier, ch33:__________(0V)
Exhaust valve ch34:____(>10mA) Yes Yes Failure in exhaust valve.
Exhaust valve Check additional
opening failure ? symptoms

standing by: No
Exhaust valve: evaluate sound
and shockwave in pipe OK ?____
Failure in exhaust valve
Non-static failure or test sensor , sensor cable or
unable to detect failure MPC (ch34). Go to
Page (9) When referring to this page, please quote Operation 703-20 Edition 0005
MAN Diesel
Cylinder Loop Test (MD-FIVA)

Preparation
- Put CCU in test-mode

- Hydraulic pressure and fuel
pressure must be present
- Have an engineer stand by
for feeling and listening to
fuel and exhaust valve pipes
- Set ch70 to: 10 mA FIVA Pos., ch30

value test 1 & 2
OK ?
Yes
Fuel plunger ch31 test Yes
- Set ch70 to: 14 mA (1 or 2) OR fuel injection failed ?
(This will cause fuel or exhaust valve (ch34) test (1 or 2) Failure in FIVA or hydraulics
injection) or exhaust valve
opening failed.
Test 1
Read values: No Failure in FIVA, FIVA
MUST BE DONE IMMEDIATELY sensor, sensor cable or
FIVA Pos., ch30:_________(<6mA) MPC (ch30). Go to
Fuel plunger ch31:______(>8mA) Fuel plunger ch31 No “Sensor Chain Test”
Exhaust valve ch34:_____(<8mA) value test 1 & 2
OK ?
Yes Yes
Fuel injection AND no Failure in fuel plunger
Observe events by engineer other failures ?
standing by:
Fuel injection: evaluate sound
and shockwave in pipe OK ?____ No
Exhaust valve (ch34) Yes

value-test 1 or 2 failed ?
or exhaust valve
- Set ch70 to: 10 mA opening failed ?
No Failure in fuel plunger
sensor , sensor cable or
MPC (ch31). Go to
Exhaust valve ch34 No
Test 2 value test 1 & 2
Read values: OK ?
MUST BE DONE IMMEDIATELY
FIVA Pos., ch30:________(>17mA)
Fuel plunger ch31:______(<8mA)
Yes Yes Failure in exhaust valve.
Exhaust valve Check additional
Exhaust valve ch34:____(>10mA)
opening failure ? symptoms
No
standing by: Failure in exhaust valve
Exhaust valve: evaluate sound Non-static failure or test sensor , sensor cable or
and shockwave in pipe OK ?____ unable to detect failure MPC (ch34). Go to
MAN Diesel
Amplifier Test (CW-FIVA)

- CCU in test mode
- set ch 70 to 0V
- Set ch 60 to ON
(amplifier)
Set ch 70 to 0.6 V
Yes Try different values Amplifier Yes Test cannot find

Amplifier on ch 70 (max 3.4 V). Ch 33 = input fault in amplifier
Ch 33 = 0.6 V ? Fuel injection risk on ch 70 ? chain
above 1.6 V
No No
Check cabling
Replace Amplifier
with spare
Yes
Ch 33 = input Failure in amplifier Distribute
on ch 70 ? components: Further diagnosis
- Original amplifier on
cylinder +1,
No - Original MPC on
cylinder +2,
- Original FIVA on
Reattach original
cylinder +3,
amplifier
- Run as normal until
problem re-occur.
Replace MPC
with spare
Yes
Problem on original Failure in cabling
Yes cylinder ? or plugs
Ch 33 = input Failure in MPC
on ch 70 ?
No
No
Reattach original Problem on
Yes
MPC cylinder +1 ? (original Failure in amplifer
amplifier)
Replace FIVA
with new No
Problem on Yes
cylinder +2 ? (original Failure in MPC
Yes MPC)
Ch 33 = input Failure in FIVA
on ch 70 ?
No
No
Reattach orignal Problem on Yes
FIVA cylinder +3 ? (original Failure in FIVA
FIVA)
Failure in cabling
or plugs
MAN Diesel
Check cables
Sensor Chain Test
thoroughly
Connect a spare
sensor temporarily
(do not mount
spare sensor)
Yes On MPC, exchange

Reconnect original plugs with another
Alarm still present ?
sensor channel with cable
supervision,
eg. ch30, 31, 34
No
Attach original sensor Yes

on another channel Did alarm change
with cable channel ?
supervision,
eg. ch30, 31,34
No
No No
Alarm present on Alarm still present
new channel ? on original channel ?
Yes Yes
Failure in sensor Non-constant MPC input Failure in cable

failure channel failure
Further diagnosis
Yes
Alarm on original
Failure in cable
cylinder ?
Move sensor to No
cylinder +1 and MPC
to cylinder +2
Yes
Alarm on cylinder +1 ? Failure in sensor
(original sensor)
Continue normal
operation untill same No
alarm appears again
Yes
Alarm on cylinder +2 ? MPC input
(oiginal MPC) channel failure
No
Unrelated error
MAN Diesel
2. Test for Earth Failure in the ECS System
Method 1.
Fault isolation of an earth ground failure
A certain and fast method (compared to method 2 below).

Precondition: The engine must be stopped and in FWE.
1. Disconnect the isolation monitor unit (e.g. Bender xxx) from the power supply.
2. Measure the current between ground (a non-isolated point of the engine or ship steal structure)
and 0 Volt, and ground and 24 Volt, respectively, by means of an ampere meter (a multimeter in
current mode) in serial with a 2 kOhm resistor. The measurement can practically be done either
in the power supply of the ECS or in the power distribution box on the engine. If any of the cur-
rents are higher than 0.2 mA, the isolation to ground is too low. In a properly isolated system,
the current will be lower than 0.2 mA.
3. Disconnect the power plugs (J1) (which disconnects both 0 Volt and 24 Volt) for one MPC at a
time until the MPC containing the isolation fault is found, i.e. when the current drops below 0.2
mA.
4. The power plug to the MPC causing the isolation failure is connected again, and the connectors
for sensors and external signals are disconnected one at a time, until either a sensor is found
that causes the isolation failure, or all connectors have been disconnected. Ground current must
be checked as described in Item 2 between 0 Volt and 24 Volt, respectively, while each connec-
tor is disconnected.
5. If the isolation failure is located to a sensor, its cabling must be checked and perhaps the sensor
must be exchanged.
6. If the isolation failure is still present after all connectors to external signals are disconnected,
while the power connector is still connected to the MPC, the failure is probably in the MPC,
which must then be exchanged.
When the problem has been rectified, all connectors and plugs are reinstalled, and the isolation
monitor is reconnected. Check that the isolation monitor no longer initiates an alarm (note that fail-
ures might be present in more than one unit (MPC) at a time).
Method 2
A certain but slow method.
1. Disconnect the power plug (J1) (which disconnects both 0 Volt and 24 Volt) in one of the MPCs .
MAN Diesel
2. Wait one minute - check the isolation value on the isolation monitor (e.g. Bender xxxx) in power
supply A.
If the isolation value is still lower than 24 kOhm (the alarm level), then repeat point 1 in the next
MPC. In a properly isolated system the isolation is higher than 100 kOhm.
3. Repeat point 1 and 2 for each MPC until the MPC containing the isolation fault is found, i.e.
when the isolation comes above 100 kOhm.
4. The power plug to the MPC causing the isolation failure is connected again.
5. One of the connectors (J2 - J85) for the sensors and external signals is disconnected.
6. Wait one minute - check the isolation value on the isolation monitor as in point 2.
7. Repeat point 5 and 6 for each of the connectors for external signals until either a sensor is found
that causes the isolation failure (the isolation comes above 100 kOhm), or all connectors have
been disconnected.
8. As method 1 point 5 or point 6.
When the problem has been rectified, all connectors and plugs are reinstalled. Check that the isolation
monitor no longer initiates and alarm (note that failures might be present in more than one unit (MPC) at
a time).
Method 3
A faster, but uncertain method.
1. Disconnect the isolation monitor unit (e.g. Bender xxxx) from the power supply.
2. Connect a voltmeter between the 0 Volt and ground (a non-isolated point of the engine or ship
steel structure) and, if possible, another voltmeter between 24 Volt and ground. Alternatively one
voltmeter must be connected alternately between 0 Volt and 24 Volt.
The measurement can practically be done either in the power supply of the ECS or in the power
distribution box on the engine.
When using this method both measured values should be within 10 - 16 V (+ or -) if the system
has normal isolation to ground, while an isolation failure normally causes one of the measure-
ment to be below 5 V and the other above 20 V.
3. The further procedure is similar to method 1 above, except that pin pointing of the isolation fault
is based on the voltage measurements being in the isolation fault or normal range as specified
in previous point 2.
When the problem has been rectified, all connectors and plugs are reinstalled, and the isolation monitor
is reconnected. Check that the isolation monitor no longer initiates an alarm (note that failures might be
present in more than one unit (MPC) at a time).
Nom. diam. 25 mm
Plate 70304
Reduction station To fuel valve
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

testing unit
Oil and water separator

Starting air
receiver 30 bar
Nom. diam. 25 mm Nom. diam. 12 mm
Air inlet for clean To bilge
turbocharger
Nom. diam. 25 mm
Pipe To bilge
Manoeuvring air compressor

Starting Air System
Supplied with the engine
Starting air
receiver 30 bar
Main engine Aux. Aux. Aux.
When referring to this page, please quote Operation Plate 70304, Edition 0002
eng. eng. eng.
Emergency air
The air consumption for control air and
compressor Reduction
valve testing and starting of aux. engines
valve
are covered by the capacities stated for air
receiver and compressors in the list of
capacities Starting air bottle
Sequence Diagram, FPP Plant Plate 70305
Sequence Diagram for Fixed Pitch Propeller Plant
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Sequence Diagram, CPP Plant Plate 70309
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Engine Control System Diagram Plate 70317
On Bridge
BRIDGE PANEL
In Engine Control Room

Backup Operation Panel MAIN OPERATION PANEL
MOP A ECR PANEL
MOP B
EICU A EICU B
In Engine Room/On Engine

LOCAL OPERATION
PANEL - LOP
ECU A ECU B
CCU CCU
ACU 1 ACU 2 ACU 3 Cylinder 1 Cylinder n
Sensors
Sensors
Actuators
Act uat ors

Fuel Exhaust
booster valve Fuel Exhaust
position position booster valve
position position
Cylinder 1 Cylinder 1 FIVA FIVA
Cylinder n Cylinder n
AL SAV Valve AL SAV Valve
Cylinder 1 Cylinder 1 Cylinder 1 Cylinder n Cylinder n Cylinder n
AUXILIARY AUXILIARY
BLOWER 1 BLOWER 2
M PUMP 1
M PUMP 2
M PUMP 1
M PUMP 2
M PUMP 3
M PUMP 4
M PUMP 5
Marker Sensor
AUXILIARY AUXILIARY
BLOWER 3 BLOWER 4
Angle Encoders
AUXILIARY
BLOWER 5
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Diagram of Manoeuvring System Plate
MAN B&W Diesel P70318-0002
When referring to this page, please quote Plate P70318 Edition 0002 Page 1 (1)
MOP Overview Plate
MOP Alarm List
Plate
MOP Event Log
Plate
MOP Event Log
Plate
P70321-0003 MAN B&W Diesel
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Plate P70321 Edition 0003
MOP Manual Cut-Out List Plate
ECUA_01020428 13:47:02.56 Tacho set B failure Alarm - - ! 4 9 2
Manual Cut-Out-List 2004-08-19 11:04:15

ID Date Time Description Status Limit Current
EICUB_0154 2004-08-19 07:25:56 Lock in Last 'Slow Down PreWarn' Normal - -
EICUB_2205-B04 2004-08-18 13:33:05 Suprv. Ch24,2205-B,Slow Down Pre-wa Alarm - -
A dm in
Line/of
Reactivate Info
1 2
MOP Channel List Plate
Channel List 2004-08-19 11:04:18

ID Date Time Description Status MCo ACo Ack
ACU1_009904 2004-08-19 11:03:50 Suprv. Ch35,0099,Prop. Valve Test S Alarm X
ACU1_010110 2004-08-19 11:03:50 No Commands from ECU A Normal X
ACU1_010111 2004-08-19 11:03:50 No commands from ECU B Normal X
ACU1_0210 2004-08-18 12:45:07 Blower 1 Ctrl Failed Normal X
ACU1_070119 2004-08-19 11:03:58 Pump ctrl failure Normal X
ACU1_07013604 2004-08-18 12:45:09 Watchdog enabled Normal X
ACU1_07013605 2004-08-18 12:45:09 PV_AMP Amp. Current Supervision Normal X
ACU1_070210 2004-08-18 12:45:09 PV_AMP Amp. Reports Internal Fault Normal X
ACU1_0708 2004-08-18 12:45:10 Startup Pump Ctrl Failed Normal X
ACU1_1109-A4 2004-08-18 12:45:04 Hydraulic leakage (high level) Normal X
ACU1_1110-A4 2004-08-18 12:45:04 Suprv. Ch23,1109-A, Turning gear dis Normal X
ACU1_1111-A4 2004-08-18 12:45:04 Suprv. Ch22,1110-A, Turning gear eng Normal X
ACU1_1112-A4 2004-08-18 12:45:04 Suprv. Ch21,1111-A, Main start valve Normal X
ACU1_1116-A4 2004-08-18 12:45:04 Suprv. Ch24,1112-A, Main start valve Normal X
ACU1_1201-104 2004-08-18 11:03:50 Suprv. Ch25,1116-A, Start air dist I Normal X
ACU1_1202-A03 2004-08-18 12:45:06 Suprv. Ch31,1201-1, Hydraulic Pressure Normal X A dm in
ACU1_1204-104 2004-08-19 11:03:50 Suprv. Ch80,1202-A, System bypass op Normal X

ACU1_1222-104 2004-08-18 12:45:06 Suprv. Ch32,1204-1, Lube oil pressur Normal X
ACU1_123604 2004-08-18 12:45:05 Suprv. Ch34,1222-1, Swash-Plate Posi Normal X
ACU1_1238-104 2004-08-18 12:45:06 Suprv. Ch27,1236-1, Hyd. leak shutdown Normal X
ACU1_8501-A04 2004-08-19 11:03:50 Suprv. Ch30,1238-1, Prop. valve Feed Normal X
Line/of
Cut-Out Reactivate Info
--- ---
MOP Operation
Plate
FPP = Fixed Pitch Propeller

Operation 2004-08-19 11:04:24
Main State Command [RPM] Speed [RPM] Fuel Index [%]

Standby Bridge 0.0 Speed Modifier Index limiter
ECR 0.0 Operation
LOP 0.0 Set Point Actual Limiter Actual
Running Mode Governor mode 0.0 0.0 0 0 Status

100
Economy Mode RPM Control
150 150.0 Process
Start Air Inlet Oil Hyd. Oil Scav. Air Information
20.5 Bar 3.2 Bar 278 Bar 0.00 Bar 80
100
30 4 250 4 Cylinder
Load
3 225 3
20
50 * 60
Cylinder
2 200 2 * Pressure
10 0
1 175 1
* 40
0 0 150 0 -50
*
HPS Lubricator Auxiliary Blowers
-100 20
Auto Stopped Auto Running
PTO Var. XBP On/Off XBP -150 A dm in

0
Permit --- ---
Engine Start
Start Status Prepare Air
Slow Turn Auto
Stopped Start Run
* Barred Speed Range may vary depending on engine setup
RPM Fine Adjust
Current New TIP: The adjustment is Apply

possible only in ECR
--- command mode
MOP Operation
Plate
MOP Status
Plate
Status 2004-08-19 11:04:26
Main State
Main...
Standby Start Air
20.5 Bar Operation
Slow...
A Status
Start Conditions
Main Starting Valve
in service position Process
Information
B
Start Air Distribution Cylinder
System in service Start Valve Cyl.-1 ...2 ...# Load
Start Air Distribution
System in service Cylinder
Pressure
Starting Air Pressure
Blowers Hyd. Oil
Control Air Pressure Running 278 Bar
Turning Gear Crank Shaft

Turning Gear
Disengaged 122.0
disengaged
Aux. Blowers
A dm in
Hyd. Power Supply
Control Air * Pitch start blocking
Hyd. Pressure 7.6 Bar ---
Zero pitch at start *
Aux. Systems Start Status
Details
Stopped
* If CPP is present.
MOP Process Information Plate
Process Information 2004-08-19 11:04:26

Running Mode Speed Control
Operation
Running Mode Speed Set Point [RPM] Speed Actual [RPM]

--- --- --- Status
Estimated Engine Load Fuel Index Set Point

--- % --- % Process
Information
Maximum Pressure Hyd. Oil Set Point Hyd. Oil Actual
--- Bar --- Bar --- Bar Cylinder
Load
Compression Pressure Pscav Set Point Pscav Actual
--- Bar --- Bar --- Bar Cylinder
Pressure
Pcomp/Pscav Variable XBP Set Point Variable XBP Actual
--- --- % --- %
Exh. Valve Open Timing On/Off XBP Set Point On/Off XBP Actual
--- °ATDC --- ---
A dm in
Plate
MOP Process Information
Process Information 2004-08-19 11:04:26

Running Mode Speed Control
Command [RPM] Fine adj. Speed Set [RPM] Index Limit [%] Fuel Limit [%] Speed [RPM] Operation
ECR 105.8 105.0 105.0 100 77 105.0
Status
+
Speed Modifier Governor Limiter Engine
- Process
Information
Speed Modifier Index Limiter Cylinder

Stabilising Start Load
Stop Chief
Cylinder
Minimum Speed Scav. air pressure Pressure
Maximum Speed Torque
Fixed Speed Set Hyd. Power Supply
Shut Down
Slow Down
PTO
A dm in
Speed Ramp
Active Modifier Active Limiter Nearest Limiter
Load Program
Barred Speed Range
RPM Fine Adjust
MOP Cylinder Load Plate
Cylinder Load 2004-08-19 11:04:30

All 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Offset High Load [%]
Operation
10
0
Status
-10
Offset Low Load [%] Process
Information
5
Cylinder
Load
0
Cylinder
-5 Pressure
Chief Index Limit [%]
100
50
0 A dm in
Exhaust
Valve
Operation
Chief Index Limit - Cyl. x
Current New Apply

---
Exhaust Valve Operation - Cyl. x

WARNING! To avoid heavy turbocharger surging the engine
Enabled Stopped load must be reduced below 20% before exhaust valve
operation on one cylinder is stopped.
Offset High Load - Cyl. x
Current New Apply

---
Offset Low Load - Cyl. x
Current New Apply

---
MOP Cylinder Pressure Plate
Cylinder Pressure 2004-08-19 11:04:33

All 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Maximum Cylinder Pressure Offset [Bar]
Operation
20
0 Status
-20
Process
Information
Compression Ratio Offset [-]
Cylinder
2 Load
0 Cylinder
Pressure
-2
Exhaust Valve Open Timing Offset [DEG]
A dm in
-1
-2
Maximum Cylinder Pressure Offset - Cyl. x
Current New Apply

---
Compression Ratio Offset - Cyl. x
Current New Apply

---
Exhaust Valve Open Timing Offset - Cyl. x
Current New Apply

---
MOP Hydraulic System
Plate
Hydraulic System 2005-05-11 17:24:38
HPS Mode Pump Torque Limiter Double Pipe Cylinder 1 Cyl. 2 Cyl. #
Auto Limiter Activated 0 Bar Exhaust Fuel
Cylinder
Valve Press.
Lub.
Act. Booster
Hydraulic
System
Scavenge
Inlet Oil Set Point Hyd. Oil
Air
2.8 Bar 182 Bar 176 Bar
Cylinder
Lubricators
M 1 2 3 4 5 1 M 2 M A dm in
Folw Ctrl Folw AH AH Open Master

50% 50% 50% Running Stopped
Details
HPS Mode
Automatic Manual
Pump Torque Limiter
Activated Cancelled
Set Point
Current New Tip: Apply

Manual HPS mode
--- is required
Pump Bypass
Open Close Open Close Tip:

(ACU-1) (ACU-1) (ACU-3) (ACU-3) Manual HPS mode
is required
Pump X
Select as Tip:
Start Stop Manual HPS mode
Master
is required
MOP Scavenge Air
Plate
MOP Cylinder Lubricators
Plate
Cylinder Lubricators 2005-05-11 17:24:38
Flow Total Prelube LCD S% Feed Rate Factor Basic Feed Rate Min. Feed Rate
0 l/h 31 l Off Off 2.0 0.50 g/kWhS% 1.00 g/kWh 0.5 g/kWh
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Actual
Feed Rate Low Load Low Load Low Load Low Load Low Load Low Load Low Load Low Load Low Load Low Load
Hydraulic
[g/kWh]
System
1.4
1.2 Scavenge
Air
1.0
0.8 Cylinder
0.6 Lubricators
0.4
0.2
Feed Rate
A dm in
Adjust *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** ***
Factor
Running In
[%] *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** ***
Lubricator
Test *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** ***
Sequence
MOP Cylinder Lubricators
Plate
Feed Rate Factor
Current New Apply

---
Lubricator Test Sequence - Cyl. X
On Off All On All Off
Minimum Feed Rate
Current New Apply

---
Prelube
On
Running In
Current New Apply

---
S%
Current New Apply

---
Feed Rate Adjust Factor - Cyl. X
Current New Apply

---
MOP System View - I/O Test Plate
System View - I/O Test 2004-08-19 11:04:53
LOP ECR Panel Bridge Panel Auxiliaries
EICU-A EICU-B MOP-A MOP-B EICU-A EICU-B ACU-1 ACU-2 ACU-3 ACU-4
Ctrl T
T Ctrl B B
A A System View
B B I/O Test
CCU-1 CCU-2 CCU-3 CCU-4 CCU-5 CCU-6 CCU-7 CCU-8 CCU-9 CCU-10 CCU-11 CCU-12 Invalidated
C T T Inputs
Network
Status
Engine
A dm in
Active Ctrl Controlling T Test C Configuration B Blocked Not Accessible
Plate
MOP System View - I/O Test

ACU-3
MPC Mode A Analog input A Analog output Invalidated ! Alarm
Normal D Digital input D Digital output Not used N/A Not Available
# Info ID Description Process Value # Info ID Description Process Value

20 D 1224-3 Prop Valve Amp. ON 44 D 1218-3 El. HPS pump Remote op. ON
21 D 1234 Double pipe leak OFF 45 D 1219-3 El. HPS pump running OFF
22 A 1233 Double pipe press.(bar) 72.303- 46
23 D 9992 Not used OFF 47 D BSUP Splnp.System bypass open ON System View
I/O Test
24 D 9993 Not used OFF 48 D 1223-3 Prop. Valve Amp. Enable ON
25 D 9999 Not used OFF 49
Invalidated
26 D 9994 Not used OFF 50 Inputs
30 A 1238-3 Prop. Valve Feedback -28.738% 52 Network
Status
31 A 1201-3 Hydraulic Pressure(bar) 205.526- 53
32 A 1204-3 Lube oil pressure(bar). 1.623- 60
A dm in
33 A ! 1204-5 Lube oil pressure, pump 1.213- 61 A 1217-5 El. HPS pump Start/Stop OFF
34 A 1222-3 Swash-Plate Position 19.328% 70 A 1240-3 Prop Valve Amp. SP 0.000V
36 D 9995 Not used OFF 80 D 1202-B System bypass open/clos OFF
40 D 8621-3 Blower 3 Remote op./Pow ON 82 D 8620-3 Blower 3 Start/Stop OFF
41 D 8623-3 Blower 3 running OFF 83
42 84
43 85
MOP System View - I/O Test Plate
ECUA_010112 13:47:02.56 No Commands Received from EICU A Normal - - ! 49 73 2

CCU-12
Channel-80 supervised by Channel-20
Ch. No Status Signal ID Description Supervis. Ch. No
80 D 8601-xxxx Engine Not Ready 20
Process Value Logic Level Supervis. Status

A/D Interpretation
System View
Disable Off OK
I/O Test
24V Invalidated
Supervis.
Inputs
Relay
Status
0V - V + Off On Network
Status
J80 J20 Signal failure Signal failure
800
A B C D A B C D Signal failure OK A dm in
V 150
[mV]
OK Signal failure
24V Load
6
R1
0V
Signal failure Signal failure
Channel Setup Supervisor Setup

Binary Output Supervised Contact Analog Intput 150-800 mV: On 6-150 mV: Off
MOP Invalidated Inputs Plate
Invalidated Inputs 2004-08-19 11:04:51

MPC Channel
ID Ch. No. Signal ID Description
System View
I/O Test
Invalidated
Inputs
Network
Status
A dm in
WARNING
Set Valid Changing the STATUS of a channel
may cause the system to malfunction
MOP Network Status
Plate
Network Status 2004-08-19 11:04:53
Observer MOP EICU ECU ACU CCU

A B A B A B 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Observed AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
MOP A ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
B !
A !
EICU
B !
A !
ECU B !
1 !
ACU 2 ! System View
3 ! I/O Test
4 ! ! !
1 !
2 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Invalidated
3 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Inputs
CCU 4 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
5 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
6 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Network
7 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Status
8 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
9 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
10 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! A dm in
Cabling MOP EICU ECU ACU CCU

Map A B A B A B 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Net A A !
Net B ! B ! ! ! ! !
! No Reply Single Channel Not accessible Not relevant B B

OK This MOP Reference Cross Connection
! No Communication Online But No Information A A
MOP Set Time
Plate
MOP Version
Plate
A dmin Version 2005-05-11 17:24:38

Type Version BES Vers. Engine Group No. IMO No. Engine Builder Eng. No.
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Controller Unit Parameter Check Sums
ID Addr. Type User Chief Service Design IMO Design IMO Chief
EICU-A --- EICU --- --- --- --- --- ---
EICU-B --- EICU --- --- --- --- --- ---

ECU-A --- ECU --- --- --- --- --- ---
ECU-B --- ECU --- --- --- --- --- ---
ACU-1 --- ACU --- --- --- --- --- ---
A dmin
ACU-2 --- ACU --- --- --- --- --- ---
ACU-3 --- ACU --- --- --- --- --- --- Set Time
CCU-1 --- CCU --- --- --- --- --- ---
CCU-2 --- CCU --- --- --- --- --- ---
Version
CCU-3 --- CCU --- --- --- --- --- ---
CCU-4 --- CCU --- --- --- --- --- ---
CCU-5 --- CCU --- --- --- --- --- ---
CCU-6 --- CCU --- --- --- --- --- ---
CCU-7 --- CCU --- --- --- --- --- ---
CCU-8 --- CCU --- --- --- --- --- ---
CCU-9 --- CCU --- --- --- --- --- ---
CCU-10 --- CCU --- --- --- --- --- ---
Printer Status WARNING!

Refresh Print Inconsistent
--- controller information.
Export
Printer Status Clear Destination

Print Print
Save
--- ---
Special Running Conditions Chapter 704
Table of Contents
704-01 Fire in Scavenge Air Box

1. Cause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Warnings of Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
3. Measures to be taken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4. Scavenge Air Drain Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

4.1 Daily checks during running: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4.2 Cleaning of drain pipes at regular intervals: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
704-02 Ignition in Crankcase

A. “Hot Spots” in Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
B. Oil Mist in Crankcase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2. Measures to be taken when Oil Mist has occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
704-03 Turbocharger Surging (Stalling)

2. Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.1 Fuel Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.2 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.3 Turbocharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.4 Scavenge Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.5 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3. Countermeasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
704-04 Running with Cylinders or Turbochargers out of Operation

2. How to put Cylinders out of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
A. Combustion cut out. Piston and exhaust actuator (ELVA) still working
Compression on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
B. Combustion and compression cut out. Piston still working in cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C. Combustion cut out. Exhaust valve closed. Piston still working in cylinder. . . . . . . . . 5
D. Piston, piston rod, and crosshead suspended in the engine.
Connecting rod out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
E. Piston, piston rod, crosshead, connecting rod, and telescopic pipe out . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3. Starting after putting Cylinders out of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4. Running with one Cylinder Misfiring (Cases A and C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 704 Special Running Conditions
Table of Contents
5. How to put Turbochargers out of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

A. If the ship must be instantly manoeuvrable: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
B. If the ship must be instantly manoeuvrable,
but the damaged turbocharger cannot run even at reduced load: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
C. Running for an extended period with a turbocharger out of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
D. Repair to be carried out during voyage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
6. Putting an Auxiliary Blower out of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PLATES
Cutting Cylinders out of Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70401

Scavenge Air Drain Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70402
Cutting Turbochargers out of Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70403
Turbocharger Surging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70404
Scavenge Air Spaces, Fire Extinguishing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70405
Components for Hydraulic Systems – Hydraulic Cylinder Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70406
Components for Hydraulic Systems (Accumulator Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70407
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Fire in Scavenge Air Box 704-01
1. Cause
If flakes of burning or glowing carbon deposits drop into the oil sludge at the bottom
of the scavenge air box, this sludge can be ignited and, if very combustible mate-
rial is found here, serious damage can be done to the piston rod and the scavenge
air box walls, the latter possibly causing a reduction in the tension of the staybolts.
Ignition of carbon deposits in the scavenge air box can be caused by:
· prolonged blow-by,
· “slow combustion” in the cylinder, owing to incorrect atomization, incorrect type
of fuel valve nozzle, or “misaligned” fuel jets.
· “blow-back” through the scavenge air ports, owing to a large resistance in the
exhaust system (back pressure).
To keep the exhaust resistance low, heavy deposits must not be allowed to col-
lect on protective gratings, nozzle rings and turbine blades, and the back pres-
sure after the turbocharger must not exceed 350 mm WC.
2. Warnings of Fire
WARNING!
If the auxiliary blowers do not start during low-load running (due
to faults) unburned fuel oil may accumulate on top of the pistons.
This will involve the risk of a scavenge air box fire.
In order to avoid such fire:

· obtain permission to stop the engine
· stop the engine
· remove any unburned fuel oil from the top of the pistons
· re-establish the supply of scavenge air
· start the engine.
The switch for the auxiliary blowers should be in “AUTO”-posi-
tion during all modes of engine control, i.e.:
· remote control
· control from engine side control console.
If the engine stops on shut-down or if the operator commands a safety

stop, the auxiliary blowers are stopped independently of the operating
mode (automatic or manual).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
A fire in the scavenge box manifests itself by:
· an increase in the exhaust temperature of the affected cylinder,

· the turbocharger may surge,
· smoke from the turbocharger air inlet filters when the surging occurs,
· the scavenge air box being noticeably hotter.
If the fire is violent, smoky exhaust and decreasing engine revolutions will occur.
Violent blow-by will cause smoke, sparks, and even flames, to be blown out when
the respective scavenge box drain cock is opened – therefore keep clear of the
line of ejection.
Monitoring devices, see Section 701-02, in the scavenge air space give alarm and
slow-down at abnormal temperature increase.
For CPP-plants with engaged shaft generator, an auxiliary engine will be started
automatically and coupled to the grid before the shaft generator is disengaged and
the engine speed reduced.
3. Measures to be taken
Owing to the possible risk of a crankcase explosion, do not stand near the relief
valves – flames can suddenly be violently emitted.
1. Reduce speed/pitch to SLOW, if not already carried out automatically,

see above, and ask bridge for permission to stop.
2. When the engine STOP order is received, stop the engine and switch-off
the auxiliary blowers.
3. Stop the fuel oil supply.
4. Stop the lub. oil supply.
5. Put the scavenge air box fire extinguishing equipment into function.
See Plate 70405. To prevent the fire from spreading to the next cylinder(s),
the ball valve of the neighbouring cylinder(s) should be opened in case of fire
in one cylinder.
Do not open the scavenge air box or crankcase before the site of the fire has
cooled down to under 100°C. When opening, keep clear of possible fresh
spurts of flame.
6. Remove dry deposits and sludge from all the scavenge air boxes.
7. Clean the respective piston rods and cylinder liners, and inspect their surface
condition, alignment, and whether distorted. If in order, coat with oil.
Repeat the checking and concentrate on piston crown and skirt, while the en-
gine is being turned (cooling oil and water on).
Inspect the stuffing box and bottom of scavenge box for possible cracks.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Fire in Scavenge Air Box 704-01
8. If a piston caused the fire, and this piston cannot be overhauled at once, take
the precautions referred to in Section 703-02.
If heating of the scavenge air box walls has been considerable, the staybolts
should be retightened at the first opportunity.
Before retightening, normal temperature of all engine parts must be reestab-

lished.
4. Scavenge Air Drain Pipes Plate 70402

To ensure proper draining of oil sludge from the scavenge air boxes, thereby re-
ducing the risk of fire in the scavenge air boxes, we recommend:
· Daily check during running

· Cleaning of drain pipes at regular intervals
4.1 Daily checks during running:

1. Open the valve between the drain-tank and the sludge-tank.
2. Close the valve when the drain-tank is empty.
3. Check the pipes from flange AV to the drain-tank venting pipe:
Does air escape from the drain-tank venting pipe?
This indicates free passage from flange AV to the

YES
drain-tank venting pipe.
Clean the pipes as described below, at the first oppor-
NO
tunity.
4. Check the pipes from the test-cocks to flange AV:

Open the test cocks, one by one, between the main drain pipe and the scav-
enge air boxes and between the main drain pipe and the scavenge air receiv-
er/auxiliary blowers.
Begin at flange AV, and proceed towards flange BV.

Use this procedure to locate any blocking.
Does air or oil blow-out from the individual test-cock?
The scavenge air space is being drained correctly.

AIR
This indicates free passage from the actual test-cock

to flange AV.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Does air or oil blow-out from the individual test-cock?
The scavenge air space is not being drained cor-

Oil
rectly.
This indicates that the main drain pipe is blocked

between the test-cock which blows-out oil, and the
neighbouring test-cock towards flange AV.
Clean the drain pipe as described below, at the first

opportunity.
4.2 Cleaning of drain pipes at regular intervals:

The intervals should be determined for the actual plant, so as to prevent blocking-
up of the drain system.
Clean the main drain pipe and the drain-tank discharge pipe by applying air, hot
water or steam during engine standstill.
If leaking valves are suspected, dismantle and clean the main drain
pipe manually.
If hot water or steam is used, consider the risk of corrosion on the piston rods, if a
valve is leaking.
1. Check that the valve between flange AV and the main drain pipe is open.
2. Close all valves between the main drain pipe and the scavenge air boxes, and
between the main drain pipe and the scavenge air receiver/auxiliary blowers.
If hot water or steam is used, it is very important to close all valves, to pre-
vent corrosion on the piston rods.
3. Open the valve at flange BV on the main drain pipe.

This leads the cleaning medium to the main drain pipe.
4. When the main drain pipe is sufficiently clean, open the valve between the
drain-tank and the sludge-tank.
This will clean the drain-tank discharge pipe.
5. When the drain tank discharge pipe is sufficiently clean, close the valve be-
tween the drain tank and the sludge tank.
6. Close the valve at flange BV.
7. Finally, open all valves between the main drain pipe and the scavenge air box-
es, and between the main drain pipe and the scavenge air receiver/auxiliary
blowers.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Ignition in Crankcase 704-02
1. Cause
When the engine is running, the air in the crankcase contains the same types of
gas (N2-O2-CO2) in the same proportions as the ambient air, but there is also a
heavy shower of coarse oil droplets being flung around everywhere.
If abnormal friction occurs between the sliding surfaces, or heat is otherwise trans-
mitted to the crankcase (for instance from a scavenge air fire via the piston rod/
stuffing box, or through the intermediate bottom), “Hot spots” on the heated sur-
faces can occur. The “hot spots” will cause the oil falling on them to evaporate.
When the oil vapour condenses again, countless minute droplets are formed
which are suspended in the air, i.e. a milky-white oil mist develops, which is able
to feed and propagate a flame if ignition occurs. The ignition can be caused by the
same “hot spot” which caused the oil mist.
If a large amount of oil mist has developed before ignition, the burning can cause
a tremendous rise of pressure in the crankcase (explosion), which forces a mo-
mentary opening of the relief valves. In isolated cases, when the entire crankcase
has presumably been full of oil mist, the consequential explosion has blown off the
crankcase doors and set fire to the engine room.
In the event that a crankcase explosion has occurred, the

complete flame arrester of the relief valves must be replaced.
NB: Similar explosions can also occur in the gear box and scavenge air box.
Every precaution should therefore be taken to:

A) avoid “hot spots”
B) detect the oil mist in time.
A. “Hot Spots” in Crankcase

Well-maintained bearings only overheat if the oil supply fails, or if the bearing
journal surfaces become too rough (owing to the lubricating oil becoming cor-
rosive, or being polluted by abrasive particles).
For these reasons, it is very important to:
– purify the lubricating oil correctly,

– make frequent control analyses (see Chapter 708),
– ensure that the filter gauze is maintained intact.
Due to the high frictional speed of the thrust bearing, special care has been tak-
en to ensure the oil supply to this bearing.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Monitoring equipment is arranged to give an alarm in cases of low circulating

oil pressure and/or high temperature of thrust bearing segments. Keep this
equipment in tip-top condition. (See Section 701-02).
Feel over moving parts (by hand or with a “thermo-feel”) at suitable intervals
(15-30 minutes after starting, one hour later, and again at full load, (see Section
703-03).
Section 702-01, is still the best safeguard against “hot spots” when starting up
after repairs or alterations affecting the moving parts, and should never be ne-
glected. If in doubt, stop and feel over.
B. Oil Mist in Crankcase

In order to ensure a reliable, and quick warning of oil mist formation in the crank-
case, constant monitoring is obtained with an “Oil Mist Detector”, which sam-
ples air from each crankcase compartment.
The detector will give alarm and slow-down, see Section 701-02, at a mist con-
centration which is only a fraction of the lower explosion limit, LEL, to gain time
to stop the engine before ignition of the oil mist can take place.
See also the special instructions from the supplier of the oil mist detector.
For CPP-plants with engaged shaft generator, an auxiliary engine will be start-
ed automatically and coupled to the grid, before the shaft generator is disen-
gaged and the engine speed reduced.
2. Measures to be taken when Oil Mist has occurred
WARNING!
Do not stand near crankcase doors or relief valves – nor in corridors

near doors to the engine room casing in the event of an alarm for:
a. oil mist
b. high lube oil temperature
c. no piston cooling oil flow, or
d. scavenge box fire
Alarms b, c and d should be considered as pre-warnings of a possible
increasing oil mist level.
See also our Service Letters SL97-348/ERO and SL00-377/CEE.
1. Reduce speed/pitch to slow-down level, if not already carried out automatical-

ly, (see Section 701-02), see above.
2. Ask the bridge for permission to stop.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Ignition in Crankcase 704-02
3. When the engine STOP order is received:

– stop the engine
– close the fuel oil supply.
4. Switch-off the auxiliary blowers and engine room ventilation.
5. Open the skylight(s) and/or “stores hatch”.
6. Leave the engine room.
7. Lock the casing doors and keep away from them.
8. Prepare the fire-fighting equipment.
Do not open the crankcase until at least 20 minutes after stopping the en-
gine. When opening up, keep clear of possible spurts of flame. Do not use
naked lights and do not smoke.
9. Stop the circulating oil pump. Take off/open all the lowermost doors on one
side of the crankcase. Cut off the starting air, and engage the turning gear.
10. Locate the “hot spot”. Use powerful lamps from the start.
Feel over, by hand or with a “thermo-feel”, all the sliding surfaces (bearings,
thrust bearing, piston rods, stuffing boxes, crossheads, telescopic pipes, vi-
bration dampers, moment compensators, etc.).
See also point 14.
Look for squeezed-out bearing metal, and discolouration caused by heat (blis-
tered paint, burnt oil, oxidized steel). Keep possible bearing metal found at
bottom of oil tray for later analyzing.
11. Prevent further “hot spots” by preferably making a permanent repair.

In case of bearings running hot, see Section 708-01 and Section 701-01.
Ensure that the respective sliding surfaces are in good condition.
Take special care to check that the circulating oil supply is in order.
12. Start the circulating oil pump and turn the engine by means of the turning
gear.
Check the oil flow from all bearings, spray pipes and spray nozzles in the
crankcase and thrust bearing (Section 702-01).
Check for possible leakages from pistons or piston rods.
13. – Start the engine.

After:
– 15-30 minutes,
– one hour later,
– when full load is reached:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
– Stop and feel over.

– Look for oil mist.
Especially feel over (by hand or with a “thermo-feel”) the sliding surfaces
which caused the overheating. See Section 703-03.
14. In cases where it has not been possible to locate the “hot spot”, the procedure
according to Point 10 above should be repeated and intensified until the
cause of the oil mist has been found and remedied.
There is a possibility that the oil mist is due to “atomization” of the circulating
oil, caused by a jet of air/gas, e.g. by combination of the following:
– Stuffing box leakages (not air tight).

– Blow-by through a cracked piston crown or piston rod (with direct connec-
tion to crankcase via the cooling oil outlet pipe).
– An oil mist could also develop as a result of heat from a scavenge fire being
transmitted down the piston rod or via the stuffing box. Hot air jets or flames
could also have passed through the stuffing box into the crankcase.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Turbocharger Surging (Stalling) 704-03
1. General
During normal operation, a few ‘shots’ of surging will often occur, e.g. at crash stop
or other abrupt manoeuvrings. This sporadic surging is normally harmless, provid-
ed the turbocharger bearings are in a good service condition.
However, continuous surging must be avoided, as there is a risk of damaging the

rotor, especially the compressor blading.
All cases of turbocharger surging can be divided into three main categories:
1. Restriction and fouling in the air/gas system.

2. Malfunction in the fuel system.
3. Rapid variations in engine load.
However, for convenience, the points in the “check lists” below are grouped ac-
cording to specific engine systems. See also Plate 70404.
2. Causes
2.1 Fuel Oil System
· Low circulating or supply pump pressure.
· Air in fuel oil
· Water in fuel oil
· Low preheating temperature
· Malfunctioning of deaerating valve on top of venting tank
· Defective suction valve
· Sticking fuel pump plunger
· Sticking fuel valve spindle
· Damaged fuel valve nozzle
· Defect in overflow valve in fuel return pipe
· Faulty load distribution (this will be monitored in the ECS).
2.2 Exhaust System

· Exhaust valve not opening correctly
· Damaged or blocked protective grating before turbocharger
· Increased back pressure after T.Ch.
· Pressure pulsations after T.Ch.
· Pressure pulsations in exhaust receiver
· Damaged compensator before T.Ch.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
2.3 Turbocharger
· Fouled or damaged turbine side
· Fouled or damaged compressor side
· Fouled air filter boxes
· Damaged silencer
· Bearing failure.
2.4 Scavenge Air System

· Fouled air cooler, water mist catcher, and/or ducts
· Stopped water circulation to cooler
· Coke in scavenge ports
· Too high receiver temperature.
2.5 Miscellaneous
· Rapid changes in engine load.
· Too rapid rpm change:
a. when running on high load
b. during manoeuvring
c. at shut downs/slow downs
d. when running ASTERN.
e. due to “propeller racing” in bad weather.
3. Countermeasure
Continuous surging can be temporarily counteracted by “blowing-off” from the
valve at the top of the air receiver. However, when doing this the exhaust temper-
atures will increase and must not be allowed to exceed the limiting values, see
Chapter 701.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Running with Cylinders or Turbochargers
704-04
out of Operation
1. General
The engine is designed and balanced to run with all cylinders as well as all turbo-
chargers working. If a breakdown occurs which disables one or more cylinders, or
turbochargers, repair should preferably be carried out immediately.
If this is not possible, the engine can be operated with one or more cylinders or
turbochargers out of operation, but with reduced speed owing to the following:
1. As, in such cases, the air supply is no longer optimal, the thermal load will be
higher.
Therefore, depending upon the actual circumstances, the engine will have to
be operated according to the restrictions mentioned in Items 4 and 5 further
on in this Chapter.
Note that the exhaust temperatures can sometimes be high

at about 30-40% load, corresponding to 67 to 73% of MCR
speed. It may be necessary to avoid operating in this range.
2. Pressure pulsations may occur in the scavenge and exhaust receivers, which
can give a reduced air supply to any one of the cylinders, consequently caus-
ing the respective exhaust temperatures to increase.
The load limit for these cylinders must therefore be reduced to keep the ex-
haust temperatures (after valves) below the value stated in Chapter 701.
However, see “Note” under point 1 above.
3. Since the turbochargers will be working outside their normal range, surging
may occur.
This can generally be remedied by “blowing off” from the scavenge air receiv-
er. The increased temperature level caused by this must be compensated for
by a reduction of the engine revolutions, until the exhaust temperatures are in
accordance with the values stated in Chapter 701.
If more than one cylinder must be cut out of operation, and the engine has two
or more turbochargers, it may be advantageous to cut out one of the turbo-
chargers. However, see “Note” under point 1 above.
4. When cylinders are out of operation, hunting may occur. When this happens,
the load limit must be limited by operating the limiter on the MOP.
5. With one or more cylinders out of operation, torsional vibrations, as well as
other mechanical vibrations, may occur at certain engine speeds.
The standard torsional vibration calculations cover the following conditions:
– normal running
– misfiring of one cylinder
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
704-04
out of Operation
The latter leads to load limitations, see Item 4 further on, which in most cases
are irrespective of the torsional vibration conditions; additional restrictions
may occur depending on the specific conditions.
The above-mentioned calculations do not deal with the situation where recip-
rocating masses are removed from the engine or where the exhaust valve re-
mains open. In such specific cases the engine maker has to be contacted.
Should unusual noise or extreme vibrations occur at the chosen speed, this
speed must be further reduced.
Because the engine is no longer in balance, increased stresses occur in

crankshaft. However, if abnormal vibrations do not occur, the engine can usu-
ally be run for a short period (for instance some days) without suffering dam-
age.
If the engine is to be run for a prolonged period with cylinders out of operation, the
engine builder should always be contacted in order to obtain advice concerning
possible recommended barred speed ranges.
When only the fuel for the respective cylinders is cut off, and the starting air con-
nections remain intact, the engine is fully manoeuvrable.
In cases where the starting air supply has to be cut off to some cylinders, starting
in all crankshaft positions cannot always be expected.
If the engine does not turn on starting air in a certain crankshaft position, it must
immediately be started for a short period in the opposite direction, after which re-
versal is to be made to the required direction of rotation.
Should this not give the desired result, it will be necessary to turn the engine to a
better starting position, by means of the turning gear. Remember to cut off the
starting air before turning, and to open the indicator cocks.
2. How to put Cylinders out of Operation Plate 70401

See MOP Description.
The following points (A-E) describe five different “methods” of putting a single cyl-
inder out of operation.
The extent of the work to be carried out depends, of course, on the nature of the
trouble.
NB In cases where the crosshead and crankpin bearings are operative, the oil inlet
to the crosshead must not be blanked-off, as the bearings are lubricated through
the crosshead.
A summary of the various cases is given on Plate 70401.
The items stated on Plates 70406 and 70407 are described below:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
704-04
out of Operation
Component list S50ME-C Plates 70406 and 70407
215: Check valve – cartridge (accumulators)
304: Check valve – cartridge (pump pressure side)
305: Check valve – cartridge (ACC-bloc inlet from start-up pumps)
309: Check valve – cartridge (high pressure depart ACC-bloc)
310: Pressure relief valve (out pipe)
311: Pressure relief valve (inner pipe)
315: Plug valve. Drain valve from inner pipe
316: Plug valve. Connection from inner to outer pipe
320: Pressure transducer (3 pcs.). System pressure suveillance
330: Pressure transducer. Double wall suveillance
335: Hydraulic accumulator
339: Mini-mess (pressure outer pipe)
340: Mini-mess (pressure inner pipe)
345: Directional valve. Drain from double wall pipe
350: Orifice part of 345
355: Leak indicator double wall suveillance
405: Plug valve. From T-side (return oil)
420: Plug valve. Inlet valve high pressure supply
421: Plug valve. Drain valve from high pressure supply line
425: Mini-mess (high pressure supply line)
430: Plug valve. Leak detection valve from double wall pipe
431: Plug valve. Drain valve from double wall pipe
435: Mini-mess. Pressure between double wall pipes
450: Hydraulic accumulator. The nitrogen pre-charged accumulators

are during operation partly full of high-pressure oil, ensuring a stable
supply, without fluctuations to the cylinder units.
455: Mini-mess. Oil pressure supply at ELFI inlet
456: Mini-mess. Oil pressure supply at ELVA inlet
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
704-04
out of Operation
465: Mini-mess. T-side (return oil)
540: Mini-mess. Push rod oil pressure
545: Mini-mess. Oil pressure in ELVA actuator
550: Mini-mess. Oil pressure in ELFI pump
560: Plug valve. Oil supply to cylinder lubricator (currently blanked)
A. Combustion cut out. Piston and exhaust actuator (ELVA) still working
Compression on
Reasons:
Preliminary measure in the event of, for instance: blow-by at piston rings or ex-
haust valve; bearing failures which necessitate reduction of bearing load; faults in
the injection system.
Procedure:
Cut out the fuel pump. (See MOP Description).
Piston cooling oil and cylinder cooling water must not be cut off.
See also Item 4.
B. Combustion and compression cut out. Piston still working in cylinder

Reasons:
This measure is permitted in the event of, for instance, water is leaking into the cyl-
inder from the cooling jacket/liner or cylinder cover.
Running in this way must as soon as possible be superseded by the precautions

mentioned under D or E. See also Item 3.
Procedure:
1. Cut out the fuel pump. See MOP Description.
2. Put the exhaust valve out of action and lock it in open position.
See Vol. II, Procedure 906-28 (Special Running).
Shut-off the air supply to the exhaust valve, and stop the lube oil pumps.
Restart the lube oil pumps.
3. Close the cooling water inlet and outlet valves for the cylinder. If necessary,
drain the cooling water spaces completely.
4. Dismantle the starting air pipe, and blank off the main pipe and the control air
pipe for the pertaining cylinder.
5. When operating in this manner, the speed should not exceed 55% of MCR
speed see also ‘Note’ below.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
704-04
out of Operation
The joints in the crosshead and crankpin bearings have a strength that,
for a short time, will accept the loads at full speed without compression
in the cylinder. However, to avoid unnecessary wear and pitting at the
joint faces, it is recommended that, when running a unit continuously
with the compression cut-out, the engine speed is reduced to 55% of
MCR speed, which is normally sufficient to manoeuvre the vessel.
During manoeuvres, if found necessary, the engine speed can be raised to 80%
of MCR speed for a short period, for example 15 minutes.
Under these circumstances, in order to ensure that the engine speed is kept within
a safe upper limit, the over-speed level of the engine must be lowered to 83% of
MCR speed.
C. Combustion cut out. Exhaust valve closed. Piston still working in cylinder.
Reasons:
This measure may be used if, for instance, the exhaust valve or the actuator is de-
fective. See also Item 4.
Procedure:
1. Cut out the fuel pump. (See MOP Description).
2. Put the exhaust valve out of action (See MOP Description) so that the valve
remains closed (stop the oil supply and remove the hydraulic pipe).
The cylinder cooling water and piston cooling oil must not be cut out.
D. Piston, piston rod, and crosshead suspended in the engine.

Connecting rod out
Reasons:
For instance, serious defects in piston, piston rod, connecting rod, cylinder cover,
cylinder liner and crosshead. See also Item 3.
Procedure:
remains closed.
3. Dismantle the starting air pipe
Blank off the main pipe and the control air pipe for the pertaining cylinder.
In this case the blanking-off of the starting air supply is particularly
important, as otherwise the supply of starting air will blow down
the suspended engine components.
4. Suspend the piston, piston rod and crosshead, and take the connecting rod
out of the crankcase, in accordance with the directions in Volume II, Chapter
904.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
704-04
out of Operation
5. Blank off the oil inlet to the crosshead.

6. Set the cylinder lubricator for the pertaining cylinder, to “zero” delivery.
E. Piston, piston rod, crosshead, connecting rod, and telescopic pipe out
Reasons:
This method is only used if lack of spare parts makes it necessary to repair the
defective parts during the voyage. See also Item 3.
Procedure:
remains closed.
3. Dismantle the starting air pipe, and blank off the main pipe and the control air
pipe for the pertaining cylinder.
4. Dismantle piston with piston rod and stuffing box, crosshead, connecting rod
and crankpin bearing. Blank off the stuffing box opening with two plates (to-
wards scavenge air box and crankcase). Minimum plate thickness 5 mm.
5. Blank off the oil inlet hole from the telescopic pipe.
6. Set the cylinder lubricator for the pertaining cylinder to “zero” delivery.
3. Starting after putting Cylinders out of Operation

After carrying out any of the procedures described under points B, C, D, and E, it
is, before starting, absolutely necessary to check the oil flow through the bearings,
and the tightness of blanked-off openings.
After 10 minutes’ running, and again after one hour, the crankcase must be
opened for checking:
· the bearings,
· the temporarily secured parts,
· the oil flow through bearings,
· the tightness of blanked-off openings.
Load Restrictions:
Cases A and C, see Item 4 below. Cases B, D and E, always contact the engine
builder for calculation of allowable output and possible barred speed range.
4. Running with one (1) Cylinder Misfiring (Cases A and C)

Misfiring is defined as:
· no injection and
· compression present.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
704-04
out of Operation
If only one cylinder is misfiring, it may be possible to run the engine with the re-
maining and working cylinders, under two restrictions:
1. The thermal load of the cylinders.

2. The torsional vibration in the propeller shaft system.
Ad 1) Thermal load restriction: The following r/min and shaft powers may be ob-
tained with a fixed pitch propeller given by the thermal load of the cylinders:
Total No. of % r/min % Load

Cylinders (of MCR) (of MCR)
4 83 57
5 86 63
6 88 67
7 89 71
8 90 73
9 91 75
10 91 77
11 92 78
12 92 78
14 93 80
Ad 2) Torsional vibration restrictions: These restrictions, given as barred speed

range, may be found from the class-approved report on the torsional vibration of
the actual propeller shaft system.
Note Only valid for misfiring, i.e. Item 2, cases A and C. See also Plate 70401.
With a CP-propeller, the same restrictions apply when running according to the de-
sign pitch. During the misfire operation keep the CP-propeller pitch fixed at the de-
sign pitch.
If more than one cylinder is misfiring, the engine builder must be contacted.
Running limitations in Cases B, D and E

In cases B, D and E, the engine builder must always be contacted for calculation
of allowable output and possible barred speed range.
5. How to put Turbochargers out of Operation

(See also special instruction book for turbochargers).
If heavy vibrations, bearing failure, or other troubles occur in a turbocharger, pre-

liminary measures can be taken in one of the following ways:
A. If the ship must be instantly manoeuvrable:

Reduce the load until the vibrations cease.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
704-04
out of Operation
B. If the ship must be instantly manoeuvrable,

but the damaged turbocharger cannot run even at reduced load:
This mode of operation is only recommendable if no time is available

for carrying out the procedures described in Item ‘C’, ‘Running for an
extended period with a Turbocharger out of Operation’.
Refer to the T/C manual regarding the maximum time of operation in condition ‘B’,
before the bearings will be damaged.
Engines with one turbocharger:
1. Stop the engine.

2. Lock the rotor of the defective turbocharger. (See T/C manual).
3. Remove the compensator between the compressor outlet and the scavenge
air duct. This reduces the suction resistance.
4. Load restrictions: See Plate 70403.
Engines with two or more turbochargers:
1. Stop the engine.

2. Lock the rotor of the defective turbocharger. (See T/C manual).
3. Insert an orifice plate in the compressor outlet.
A small air flow is required through the compressor to cool the impeller.
The load limit can be increased considerably if an orifice plate is also

inserted in the turbine inlet, as described in Item C, ‘Engines with two
or more Turbochargers’.
C. Running for an extended period with a turbocharger out of operation

Engines with one turbocharger:
· Engines with exhaust by-pass (Option).
The blanking plates mentioned in item 3 below, are optional for BBC/
ABB and MHI turbochargers.
1. Stop the engine.

2. Lock the turbocharger rotor. (See T/C manual).
3. Remove the blanking plate from the exhaust by-pass pipe.
4. Remove the compensator between the compressor outlet and
the scavenge air duct. This reduces the suction resistance.
· Engines without exhaust by-pass.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
704-04
out of Operation
1. Stop the engine.

2. Remove the rotor and nozzle ring of the turbocharger. (See T/C manual)
3. Insert blanking plates. (See T/C manual)
4. Remove the compensator between the compressor outlet and
the scavenge air duct. This reduces the suction resistance.
1. Stop the engine.

2. Lock the rotor of the defective turbocharger. (See T/C manual)
3. Insert orifice plates in the compressor outlet and the turbine inlet.
A small air flow is required to cool the impeller, and a small gas flow is desir-
able to prevent corrosion.
D. Repair to be carried out during voyage.

1. Stop the engine.

2. Insert blanking plates in compressor outlet, turbine inlet and turbine outlet.
Engines with one turbocharger, equipped with exhaust by-pass (Option):
1. Stop the engine.

2. Insert blanking plates in turbine inlet and turbine outlet.
3. Remove the blanking plate from the exhaust by-pass pipe.
4. Remove the compensator between the compressor outlet and the scavenge
air duct.
5. Load restrictions: See Item ‘C’, ‘Engines with exhaust by-pass (Option)’.
6. Putting an Auxiliary Blower out of Operation

If one of the auxiliary blowers becomes inoperative, it is automatically cut out by
the built-in non-return valve, and there are no restrictions in the operation of the
engine. See also Vol. III, ‘Components Descriptions’, Chapter 910.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Running with Cracked Cylinder Cover
704-05
Studs/Staybolts
If a crack in a cylinder cover stud/ staybolt occurs, replacement should preferably

be carried out immediately.
If this is not possible, the engine can still be operated at reduced speed according
to the guidelines specified below.
1. Cylinder Cover Studs

· 8 studs; one stud cracked, reduce cylinder pressure to 85 % of pmax
· 8 studs; two studs cracked, reduce cylinder pressure to 75 % of pmax
· 16 studs; one stud cracked, no reduction

· 16 studs; two studs cracked, reduce cylinder pressure to 85 % of pmax
Always ensure that no gasleak occurs from the cylinder with cracked bolts. Gas-
leaks will cause burnings on the joint surfaces of the cylinder cover and liner.
2. Staybolts, Mono and Twin Staybolts

· Engine end staybolts; one bolt cracked (located ahead of cylinder No. 1 or the
aft cylinder), reduce the cylinder pressure in the nearest cylinder to 75 % of pmax.
· Staybolts in between cylinder No. 1 and the aftmost cylinder, including the bolts
located by the chain drive at the centre; reduce the cylinder pressure in the both
adjacent cylinders to 80 % of pmax (by the centre chain drive, only the nearest
cylinder is affected).
Cylinder cover studs and staybolts must be replaced at first opportunity. For end
mono-staybolts we recommend that both staybolts (manoeuvring side and ex-
haust side) are replaced.
In all other situations (than the above-mentioned) involving cracked cylinder cover
studs or staybolts, MAN Diesel or the engine builder must be contacted.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Cutting Cylinders out of Action Plate 70401
Case A Case B Case C Case D Case E

Nature of the Combustion to Compression Combustion to All reciprocat- All reciprocat-
action be stopped and combus- be stopped ing parts sus- ing parts out
tion to be (due to faulty pended or out
stopped exhaust valve)
Some reasons for Blow-by at pis- Leaking cyl- Exhaust valve, Quickest and Only of inte-
the action ton rings or inder cover or or exhaust safest meas- rest if spare
exhaust valve. liner valve actuator, ure in the event parts are not
Reduction of malfunction of faults in large available
load on bear- moving parts,
ings. Faulty or cylinder
injection equip- cover or cylin-
ment. der liner
ELFI (fuel pump) Cut out Cut out Cut out Cut out Cut out
Exhaust valve Working Held open Closed Closed Closed
Air for air spring Open Closed Open Open Open
ELVA Working Cut out Cut out Cut out Cut out
(exhaust actuator)
Starting valve Working Blanked Working Blanked Blanked
Piston with rod Moving Moving Moving Suspended Out
Crosshead Moving Moving Moving Suspended Out
Connecting rod Moving Moving Moving Out Out
Crankpin bearing Moving Moving Moving Out Out
Oil inlet to Open Open Open Blanked Blanked

crosshead
Cooling oil outlet Open Open Open

from crosshead
Cylinder Working Working Working Stopped Stopped

lubricators
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Plate 70402 Scavenge Air Drain Pipes
Normally open. To be closed

AV in case of fire in the
BV
scavenge air box.
10 mm orifice
Sludge tank Drain tank

for heavy oil
centrifuges
Normally closed. Tank to be emptied

during service with valve open
Scavenge air receiver
Cyl. 1
TEST COCK TEST COCK
Normally open
BV AV
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Cutting Turbochargers out of Action Plate 70403
Case B Case C 1) Case D
Component Engines with Engines with Engines with one T/C Engines with (Engines
one T/C two or more two or more with two or
T/C With Without T/C more T/C)
by-pass by-pass
Rotor 2) Locked Locked Locked Removed Locked
Nozzle ring 2) Removed
Compressor Orifice plate Orifice plate Blanking

outlet plates
Turbine inlet Orifice plate Blanking

plates
Turbine outlet Blanking

plates
Compensator Removed Removed Removed

after compres-
sor outlet
By-pass Removed
blanking plate
T/C housing 2) Blanking

plates
Max % of MCR
load/ (speed):
1 T/C of 1 15/(53) 3) – 20-(58) 4)

15/(53) 3) – –
1 T/C of 2 – 15/(53) 3) 5) – – 50/(79) 3) 6) 50/(79) 3) 6)
1 T/C of 3 – 20/(58) 3) 5) – – 66/(87) 3) 6) 66/(87) 3) 6)
1 T/C of 4 – 20/(58) 3) 5) – – 75/(91) 3) 6)

75/(91) 3) 6)
1 Aux.bl. of 2 7) 10/(46) 4) 15/(53) 4) 10/(46) 3) 10/(46) 3) 8) 8)
1 Aux.bl. of 3 7) – 15/(53) 4) – – 8) 8)
1 Aux.bl. of 4 7) – 15/(53) 4) – – 8) 8)
1) The engine builder will, in each specific case, be able to give further information about engine load pos-
sibilities and temperature levels.
2) See T/C manual.
3) The exhaust temperatures must not, however, exceed the value(s) stated in Chapter 701.
See also the Note in Item 1, ‘General’.
4) The exhaust temperature must not exceed 430°C.
5) This is due to the loss of exhaust gas through the damaged turbocharger.
6) The mentioned exhaust temperature limit is an average value for the whole load range.
7) Simultaneous with 1 T/C out of operation. There are no load restrictions with 1 aux. blower out of
operation and all T/C’s in operation.
8) See the limits given under ‘1 T/C of 2’, ‘1 T/C of 3’, and ‘1 T/C of 4’, above.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
E
DE
D
E
D
Observations: Temporary stop of surging: Check of engine performance: Investigations of surging T/C: Corrective actions:
See Chapter 706 (See notes below) (See Chapter 706)
START T/C Clean the turbine, 706

Y
Record: speed Check that the exh. receiver is free from
- Engine load A), B)
Plate 70404
loose parts, that the protecting grating to

- Open one exhaust by-pass valve - Engine speed N the turbine is free for passage and that
(if installed), or - T/C speed the compensators are OK.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

Y - reduce engine load, or - pmax
Y
Surging tbtc - tatc
at constant - open the relief valve on the scav. air - pcomp
C)
load? receiver, - pi (if possible)
until surgigng just stops *) N
N - texhv Clean the air cooler, 706
- tbtc
pc Y
- Open one exhaust by-pass valve - tatc
(if installed), or C) Check for:
-patc - Fuel pump / valve failure
Surging Y - open the relief valve on the scav. air - pc N
while run- receiver, or - Low fuel oil pressures, 701
ning up? - start the aux. blowers, if possible, to
- pf pmax - Low fuel oil temp., 701
‘help’ the charger pass the critical point - tcoolinl pcomp pi Y - Back press. valve failure in return pipe
N t exhv - Exhaust valve failure
until surgigng just stops *) - tcoolout
D) - Liner / ring failure
- tscav N
Repair if possible
- pscav
Surging Y If possible: - pexhrec pexhrec Y
at fluctuating - Stabilise the engine load Check that the gas passage from turbine
load? - Adjust the load C) to funnel is free
- Switch over to index regulation N
Turbocharger Surging
N
Check the water supply to the cooler(s)
twater Y
NOTES:
Surging Y C) Clean or renew the filter
while running Reduce the engine load more slowly A) Deviating from normal N
down? B) Deviating from the other T/C’s
C) Higher than normal tscav Y Check that the scav. ports are free from
D) Abnormal or deviating from
Has C) coke, that silencer conditions is OK and
Y surging the other cyl.
END stopped ? N that the air passage in the air duct is
free, if the vessel has direct air intake
*) Note: The exhaust temperatures must N pf Y

not be allowed to exceed the C) If surging has not stopped:
limiting values, see Chapter 701 N Inspect the turbocharger turbine, cover
ring, nozzle ring, compressor and
diffusor, as described in the T/C manual
Steam extinguishing
CO2 extinguishing
MAN Diesel A/S

Steam pressure 3-10 bar
CO2 test pressure 150 bar
Normally position
open to bilge
CO2 CO2 bottles

At least two bottles ought to be installed.
Water mist extinguishing In most cases, one bottle should be
sufficient to extinguish fire in three cylinders,
Fresh water pressure min. 3.5 bar
while two or more bottles would be required
to extinguish fire in all cylinders
S35MC only applied with one inlet valve as shown below
Normally position
open to bilge
Scavenge Air Spaces, Fire Extinguishing Systems
To prevent the fire from spreading to the

next cylinder(s), the ball-valve of the
neighbouring cylinder(s) should be opened
in the event of fire in one cylinder
Plate 70405
Page 1
Components for Hydraulic Systems
Plate 70406 Hydraulic Cylinder Unit
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Components for Hydraulic Systems
(Accumulator Block) Plate 70407
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Fuel and Fuel Treatment Chapter 705
Table of Contents
705-01 Fuel Oil

1. Diesel Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Heavy Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Fuel Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.1 Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.2 Analysis of Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.3 Sampling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4. Guiding Fuel Oil Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

4.1 Heavy Fuel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
705-02 Pressurised Fuel Oil System

1. System Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Fuel Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
705-03 Fuel Treatment

1. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Centrifuging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 High Density Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.4 Homogenisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.5 Fine Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.6 Super Decanters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. Fuel oil stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. Preheating before Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3.1 Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.2 Fuel Preheating During Engine Standstill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.3 Starting after Engine Standstill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4. Other Operational Aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

4.1 Circulating Pump Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.2 Fuel change-over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 705 Fuel and Fuel Treatment
Table of Contents
PLATES
Residual Fuel Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70501

Fuel Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70502
Fuel Oil Pipes on Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70503
Fuel Oil Centrifuges – Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70504
Centrifuge Flow Rate and Separation Temperature (Preheating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70505
Preheating of Heavy Fuel Oil (Prior to Injection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70506
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Fuel Oil 705-01
1. Diesel Oil
Diesel oil fulfilling:
ISO 8217, CIMAC no. 21, British Standard MA 100 Class M2, ASTM Classification
of Diesel fuel oil D975 grade No. 4-D, or similar; may be used. If deviating qualities
are applied, the engine must be prepared for this.
2. Heavy Oil
Most commercially available fuel oils with a viscosity below 700 cSt. at 50°C (7000
sec. Redwood I at 100°F) can be used.
For guidance on purchase, reference is made to ISO 8217, BS6843 and to CIMAC
recommendations no. 21 regarding requirements for heavy fuel for diesel engines,
edition 2003. From these, the maximum accepted grades are RMH 700 and RMK
700. The mentioned ISO and BS standards supersede BS MA 100 in which the
limit is M9.
For reference purposes, an extract from relevant standards and specifications is

shown in Plate 70501.
The data in the above fuel standards and specifications refer to fuel as delivered to
the plant, i.e. before cleaning.
In order to ensure effective and sufficient cleaning of the fuel oil – i.e. removal of
water and solid contaminants – the fuel oil specific gravity at 15°C (60°F) should be
below 1.010 for e.g. ALCAP.
Higher densities can be allowed if special treatment systems are installed. See
Section 705-03.
Current analysis information is not sufficient for estimating the combustion proper-
ties of the oil.
This means that service results depend on oil properties which cannot be known
beforehand. This especially applies to the tendency of the oil to form deposits in
combustion chambers, gas passages and turbines. It may therefore be necessary
to rule out some oils that cause difficulties.
If the plant has been out of service for a long time without circulation of fuel oil in
the tanks (service and settling), the fuel must be circulated before start of the en-
gine.
Before starting the pump(s) for circulation, the tanks are to be drained for possible
water settled during the stop.
The risk of concentration of dirt and water in the fuel to the engines caused by
long time settling is consequently considerably reduced. For treatment of fuel oil,
see further on in this Chapter.
When referring to this page, please quote Operation Plate 705-01, Edition 0005 Page 1 (3)
MAN Diesel A/S
705-01 Fuel Oil
3. Fuel Sampling
3.1 Sampling
To be able to check whether the specification indicated and/or the stipulated de-
livery conditions have been complied with, we recommend that a minimum of one
sample of each received fuel lot be retained. In order to ensure that the sample
is representative for the oil received, a sample should be drawn from the transfer
pipe at the start, in the middle, and at the end of the receiving period.
3.2 Analysis of Samples

The samples received from the oil supply company are frequently not identical with
the heavy fuel oil actually received. It is also appropriate to verify the heavy fuel oil
properties stated in the delivery note documents, such as density, viscosity, and
pour point. If these values deviate from those of the heavy fuel oil received, there is
a risk that the heavy fuel oil separator and the preheating temperature are not set
correctly for the given injection viscosity.
3.3 Sampling Equipment

Several suppliers of sampling and fuel test equipment are available on the market,
but for more detailed and accurate analyses, a fuel analysing institute should be
contacted.
4. Guiding Fuel Oil Specification

4.1 Heavy Fuel Specifications
Based on our general service experience we have, as a supplement to the above-
mentioned standards, drawn up the guiding fuel oil specification shown in the
table below.
Fuel oils limited by this specification have, to the extent of the commercial avail-
ability, been used with satisfactory results on MAN Diesel two-stroke low speed
diesel engines, as well as MAN Diesel auxiliary engines.
Guiding specification (maximum values) Unit Fuel Oil
Density at 15°C kg/m3 9911

Kinematic viscosity at 100°C cSt 55
Kinematic viscosity at 50°C cSt 700
Flash point °C ≥60
Pour point °C 30
Carbon residue %(m/m) 22
Ash %(m/m) 0.15
Total sediment after ageing %(m/m) 0.10
Water %(v/v) 0.5
Sulphur %(m/m) 4.5
Vanadium mg/kg 600
Aluminium + Silicon mg/kg 80
Equal to ISO 8217 RMH 700/CIMAC H700
1) 1010 provided automatic modern centrifuges are installed.
Page 2 (3) When referring to this page, please quote Operation Plate 705-01, Edition 0005
MAN Diesel A/S
Fuel Oil 705-01
The Heavy Fuel data refers to the fuel as supplied, i.e. before any on-
board cleaning.
If fuel oils with analysis data exceeding the above figures are to be used,
especially with regard to viscosity and specific gravity, the engine builder
should be contacted for advice regarding possible fuel oil system changes.
On account of the relatively low commercial availability, only limited service ex-
perience has been accumulated on fuels with data exceeding the following:
Viscosity 450 cSt / 50 ˚C

Conradson Carbon 18 %
Sulphur 4%
Vanadium 400 mg/kg
Therefore, in the case of fuels with analysis data exceeding these figures, a close
watch should be kept on engine performance.
MAN Diesel A/S
Pressurised Fuel Oil System 705-02
1. System Layout (Plates 70502, 70503)

The system is normally arranged such that both diesel oil and heavy fuel oil can be
used as fuel.
Plate 70502 shows the UNI-Concept common for plant engines.
From the storage tanks, the oil is pumped to an intermediate tank, from which the
centrifuges can deliver it to the respective service tanks (“day-tank”).
To obtain the most efficient cleaning, the centrifuges are equipped with preheat-
ers, so that the oil can be preheated to 98°C (regarding the cleaning, see Section
705-03). Also refer to SL 05-452/KEA.
From the particular service tank in operation, the oil is led to one of the two electri-
cally driven supply pumps, which deliver the oil, under a pressure of about 4 bar
(possibly through a meter), to the low pressure side of the fuel oil system.
The oil is thereafter drawn to one of two electrically driven circulating pumps,
which passes it through the preheater, the viscosity regulator, the filter, and on to
the fuel injection pumps.
The filter mesh shall correspond to an absolute fineness of 50 µm (0.050 mm). The
absolute fineness corresponds to a nominal fineness of approximately 30 µm at a
retaining rate of 90%.
The return oil from the fuel valves and pumps is led back, via the venting pipe, to
the suction side of the circulating pump.
In order to maintain a constant pressure in the main line at the inlet to the fuel
pumps, the capacity and delivery rate of the circulating pump exceeds the amount
of fuel consumed by the engine.
In addition, a spring-loaded overflow valve is fitted, which functions as a by-pass

between the fuel oil inlet to the fuel injection pumps and the fuel oil return, thus
ensuring a constant pressure in the fuel oil inlet line.
The fuel oil drain pipes are equipped with heat tracing, through which hot jacket
cooling water flows. The drain pipe heat tracing must be in operation during run-
ning on heavy fuel. See also Plate 70903.
To ensure an adequate flow of heated oil through the fuel pumps, housings and
fuel valves at all loads (including stopped engine), the fuel valves are equipped
with a slide and circulating bore, see Vol. III, Section 909.
By means of the “built-in” circulation of preheated fuel oil, the fuel pumps and
fuel valves can be maintained at service temperature, also while the engine is
stopped.
MAN Diesel A/S
705-02 Pressurised Fuel Oil System
Consequently, it is not necessary to change to diesel oil when the engine is

stopped, provided that the circulating pump is kept running and preheating of the
circulated fuel oil is maintained, see Section 705-03.
If, during long standstill periods, it is necessary to stop the circulating pump or the
preheating, the fuel oil system must first be emptied of the heavy oil.
This is carried out by:
• either changing to diesel oil in due time before the engine is stopped, see
Section 705-03, or
• stopping the preheating, and pumping the heavy oil back to the service tank,
through the change-over valve mounted at the top of the venting pipe.
See Section 705-03.
2. Fuel Oil Pressure

Carry out adjustment of the fuel oil pressure, during engine standstill, in the follow-
ing way:
1. Adjust the valves in the system as for normal running, thus permitting fuel oil
circulation.
2. Start the supply and circulating pumps, and check that the fuel oil is circulat-
ing.
3. Supply Pumps: Adjust the spring-loaded safety valve at supply pump No. 1 to
open at the maximum working pressure of the pump.
The pressure must not be set below 4 bar, due to the required pressure level
in the supply line, see point 4.
Make the adjustment gradually, while slowly closing and opening the valve in
the discharge line, until the pressure, with closed valve, has the above-men-
tioned value.
Carry out the same adjustment with supply pump No. 2.
4. Regulate the fuel oil pressure, by means of the over-flow valve between the
supply pump’s discharge and suction lines. Adjust so that the pressure in the
low pressure part of the fuel system is 4 bar.
5. Circulating Pumps: With the supply pumps running at 4 bar outlet pressure,
secure that the spring-loaded relief by-pass valves for each circulating pump
(the valve is preset from the valve manufacturer) open at the maximum work-
ing pressure of the circulation pumps involved, about 10 bar.
If adjustments have to be made, regulate the spring tension in the relief by-
pass valve(s), see valve maker’s instruction.
Page 2 (3) When referring to this page, please quote Operation Plate 705-02, Edition 0004
MAN Diesel A/S
Pressurised Fuel Oil System 705-02
6. Fuel Line: Regulate the fuel oil pressure by means of the spring-loaded over-
flow valve installed between the main inlet pipe to the fuel injection pumps
and the outlet pipe on the engine. Adjust the overflow valve so that the pres-
sure in the main inlet pipe is 7-8 bar, see also Chapter 701.
7. With the engine running, the pressure will fall a little.
Re-adjust to the desired value at MCR.
MAN Diesel A/S
MAN B&W Fuel Treatment 705-03
1. Cleaning
1.1 General
Fuel oils are always contaminated and must therefore, before use, be thoroughly
cleaned for solid as well as liquid contaminants.
The solid contaminants are mainly rust, sand and refinery catalytic fines (“cat-
fines”); the main liquid contaminant is water, – i.e. either fresh or salt water.
These impurities can:
• cause damage to fuel pumps and fuel valves.

• result in increased cylinder liner wear.
• be detrimental to exhaust valve seatings.
• give increased fouling of gasways and turbocharger blades.
1.2 Centrifuging
Effective cleaning can only be ensured by means of centrifuges.
The ability to separate water depends largely on the specific gravity of the fuel oil
relative to the water – at the separation temperature. In addition, the fuel oil viscos-
ity (at separation temp.) and flow rate, are also influencing factors.
The ability to separate abrasive particles depends upon the size and specific
weight of the smallest impurities that are to be removed; and in particular on the
fuel oil viscosity (at separation temp.) and flow rate through the centrifuge.
To obtain optimum cleaning, it is of the utmost importance to:
a. operate the centrifuge with as low a fuel oil viscosity as

possible.
b. allow the fuel oil to remain in the centrifuge bowl for as long as
possible.
Re a.
The optimum (low) viscosity, is obtained by running the centrifuge preheater at the
maximum temperature recommended for the fuel concerned.
It is especially important that, in the case of fuels above 1500 Sec. RW/100°F
(i.e. 180 cSt/50°C), the highest possible preheating temperature – 98°C –
should be maintained in the centrifuge preheater. See Plate 70505.
The centrifuge should operate for 24 hours a day except during necessary clean-
ing.
MAN Diesel & Turbo
705-03 Fuel Treatment MAN B&W
Re b.
The fuel is kept in the centrifuge as long as possible, by adjusting the flow rate so
that it corresponds to the amount of fuel required by the engine, without excessive
re-circulation.
The ideal output should thus correspond to the normal amount of fuel required by
the engine, plus the amount of fuel consumed during periods when the centrifuge
is stopped for cleaning.
The nominal capacity of the installed centrifuges must be according to the maker’s
instructions.
For efficient removal of water by means of a conventional purifier, the correct

choice of gravity disc is of special importance. The centrifuge manual states the
disc which should be chosen, corresponding to the specific gravity of the fuel in
question.
Centrifuge Capacity: Series or Parallel Operation
It is normal practice to have at least two centrifuges available for fuel cleaning.
See Plate 70504
Regarding centrifuge treatment of today’s residual fuel qualities, the latest experi-
mental work has shown that, the best mode of operating modern centrifuges with
no gravity disc, is when the centrifuges are operated in parallel.
Experiments have shown, that when running the centrifuges i series, particles
which are not removed during treatment in the first centrifuge are not removed
during treatment in the second centrifuge either. Therefore, running the centrifuges
i parallel, provides the oportunity of decreasing the flow through the centrifuges,
as the amount of fuel that need be treated per hour, is shared by two centrifuges,
thus increasing the cleaning quality.
However, it is recommended to follow the maker’s specific instructions, see item

1.3.
Regarding the determination/checking of the centrifuging capacity, we generally

advise that the recommendations of the centrifuge maker are followed, but the
curves shown on Plate 70505 can be used as a guidance.
MAN Diesel & Turbo
1.3 High Density Fuels

To cope with the trend towards fuels with density exceeding 991 kg/m3 at 15°C,
the centrifuging technology has been further developed.
Improved centrifuges, with automatic de-sludging provides adequate separation of

water and particles from the fuel, up to a density of 1010 kg/m3 at 15°C.
The centrifuges should be operated in parallel or in series according to the maker’s

instructions and recommendations.
1.4 Homogenisers
As a supplement only (to the centrifuges), a homogeniser may be installed in the
fuel oil system, to homogenise possible water and sludge still present in the fuel
after centrifuging. A homogenizer should always be installed AFTER the centri-
fuges.
1.5 Fine Filter

As a supplement only (to the centrifuges), a fine filter with very fine mesh may be
installed, to remove possible contaminants present in the fuel after centrifuging.
A homogeniser should be inserted before a possible fine filter in order to minimise

the risk of blocking by agglomeration of asphaltenes.
1.6 Super Decanters

As a supplement only, a super decanter may be installed. This is, in principle, a
“horizontal” clarifier. The aim is to remove sludge before normal centrifuging and
thus minimize the risk of blocking of the centrifuges.
2. Fuel oil stability

Fuel oils of today are produced on the basis of widely varying crude oils and refin-
ery processes. Practical experience has shown that, due to incompatibility, certain
fuel types may occasionally tend to be unstable when mixed.
As a consequence, fuel mixing should be avoided to the widest possible extent.
A mixture of incompatible fuels, in the storage tanks and the settling tanks, may
lead to stratification, and also result in rather large amounts of sludge being taken
out by the centrifuges, in some cases even causing centrifuge blocking.
Stratification can also take place in the service tank, leading to a fluctuating pre-
heating temperature, when this is controlled by a viscorator.
Service tank stratification can be counteracted by recirculating the contents of the

tank through the centrifuge. This will have to be carried out at the expense of the
previously mentioned benefits of low centrifuge flow rate.
MAN Diesel & Turbo
3. Preheating before Injection

In order to ensure correct atomization, the fuel oil has to be preheated before in-
jection.
The necessary preheating temperature is dependent upon the specific viscosity of

the oil in question.
Inadequate preheating (i.e. too high viscosity):
• will influence combustion,

• may cause increased cylinder wear (liners and rings),
• may be detrimental to exhaust valve seatings,
• may result in too high injection pressures, leading to
excessive mechanical stresses in the fuel oil system.
In most installations, preheating is carried out by means of steam, and the resul-
tant viscosity is measured by a viscosity regulator (viscorator), which also controls
the steam supply.
Depending upon the viscosity/temperature relationship, and the viscosity index

of the fuel oil, an outlet temperature of up to 150°C will be necessary. This is il-
lustrated in the diagram on Plate 70506, which indicates the expected preheating
temperature as a function of the fuel oil viscosity.
Recommended viscosity meter setting is 10-15 cSt.
As opposed to a too high viscosity, experience from service has shown that a
higher viscosity of the fuel oil than the above recommended, before the fuel oil
pump, is not a too strict parameter, for which reason we allow a viscosity of up to
20 cSt after the preheater.
In order to avoid too rapid fouling of the preheater, a temperature of 150°C should
not be exceeded.
3.1 Precaution
Caution must be taken to avoid heating the fuel oil pipes by means of the heat
tracing when changing from heavy fuel to diesel oil, and during running on diesel
oil. Under these circumstances excessive heating of the pipes may reduce the vis-
cosity too much, which will involve the risk of the fuel pumps running hot, thereby
increasing the risk of sticking of the fuel pump plunger and damage to the fuel oil
sealings. (See item 4.2).
3.2 Fuel Preheating during engine standstill

During engine standstill, the circulation of preheated heavy fuel oil (HFO) does not
require the viscosity to be as low as is recommended for injection. Thus, in order
to save energy, the preheating temperature may be lowered some 20°C, giving a
viscosity of about 30 cSt.
MAN Diesel & Turbo
3.3 Starting after engine standstill

If the engine has been stopped on HFO, and the HFO has been circulated at a re-
duced temperature during standstill, the preheating and viscosity regulation should
be made operative about one hour before starting the engine, so as to obtain the
required viscosity, see Item 3., ‘Preheating before Injection’.
4. Other Operational Aspects

4.1 Circulating Pump Pressure
The fuel oil pressure measured on the engine (at fuel pump level) should be 7-8
bar, equivalent to a circulating pump pressure of up to 10 bar. This maintains a
pressure margin against gasification and cavitation in the fuel system, even at
150°C.
The supply pump may be stopped when the engine is not in operation.
See Plate 70502.
4.2 Change-over between heavy fuel oil and distillate fuel (DFO)
Before the intended change-over from HFO to DFO and vice versa, we recommend
checking the compatibility of the two fuels – preferably at the bunkering stage. The
compatibility can be checked either by an independent laboratory or by using test
kits onboard.
As incompatible fuels may lead to filter blockage, there should be extra focus on
filter operation in case of incompatibility.
Change-over of fuel can be somewhat harmful for the fuel equipment, because
hot HFO is mixed with relatively cold DFO. The mixture is not expected to be im-
mediately homogeneous, and some temperature/viscosity fluctuations are to be
expected. The process therefore needs careful monitoring of temperature and vis-
cosity.
In general, only the viscosity controller should control the steam valve for the fuel
oil heater. However observations of the temperature/viscosity must be the factor
for manually taking over the control of the steam valve to protect the fuel compo-
nents.
During change-over two factors are to be kept under observation:
• The viscosity must not drop below 2 cSt and not exceed 20 cSt
• The rate of temperature change of the fuel inlet to the fuel pumps must not
exceed 2°C/min to protect the fuel equipment from thermal shock (expansion
problems) resulting in sticking.
It should be noticed that when operating on low-viscosity fuel internal leakages

in the fuel equipment will increase. With worn pump elements this can result in
starting difficulties, and an increased start index might be necessary. The wear in
the fuel pumps should be monitored by comparing the fuel index for the new en-
gine and during service. At a 10% increase of the fuel index for the same load the
MAN Diesel & Turbo
plunger/barrels can be considered as worn out and should be replaced.
A change-over of the main engine’s fuel will result in a dilution of the fuel already in
the booster circuit. The fuel feed to the system will mix with fuel in the system, and
the main engine’s consumption from the system will be a mixture of the fuels. A
complete change of fuel (only DFO in the system) can therefore take several hours,
depending on engine load, system layout and volume of fuel in the booster-circuit.
Before manoeuvring in port, it should be tested that the engine is able to start on
DFO.
We do not recommend reducing the temperature difference between the HFO and
the DFO by preheating the DFO in the service tank. This will reduce the cooling
capacity of the oil and might result in a too low viscosity during change-over.
4.2.1 Distillate fuel oil to heavy fuel oil

• E
nsure that the HFO in the service tank is at normal service temperature (80-
100°C)
• R
educe the engine load
The load should be 25-40% MCR during this process to ensure a slow heat-
up to normal HFO service temperature at engine inlet (up to 150°C), maximum
change gradient 2°C/min.
• C
arry out change-over by turning the three-way valve
The load can, based on experience with the individual system, be changed to
a higher level – up to 75% MCR, as long as the change gradient is kept below
2°C/min.
• S
lowly stop the cooler (if installed) when the viscosity exceeds 5 cSt
A slow stop of the cooler can be done by controlling the oil flow through the
cooler, the cooling medium flow or a combination of both
The temperature change gradient at engine inlet is still to be kept below 2°C/
min.
• O
pen for steam to pre-heater and check that the set point is at normal level
(10-15 cSt)
Manual control of the heater might be necessary if it is observed that the vis-
cosity control exceeds the maximum temperature change gradient of 2°C/min
at engine inlet
• Open for steam tracing when the pre-heater is operating normally
4.2.2 Heavy fuel oil to distillate fuel oil

• E
nsure that the temperature of the DFO in the service tank is at an acceptable
level.
The following must be taken into consideration:
- Viscosity at engine inlet must not drop below 2 cSt

- Heat transmission from metal parts in the system to the fuel will occur
MAN Diesel & Turbo
- Cooling capacity in the system, if any
• R
educe the pre-heating of the fuel, by increasing the set point of the viscosity
controller to 18 cSt
- Manual control of the heater might be necessary if it is observed that the
viscosity control exceeds the maximum temperature change gradient 2°C/
min. at engine inlet
• R
educe the engine load when the fuel reaches a temperature corresponding
to 18 cSt
- During this change-over the load should be 25-40% MCR to ensure a slow
reduction of the temperature at engine inlet, max. change gradient 2°C/min.
• S
top steam tracing
Carry out change-over by turning the three-way valve
- The load can, based on experience with the individual system, be changed
to a higher level – up to 75% MCR, as long as the change gradient is kept be-
low 2°C/min.
• S
top steam to pre-heater when the regulating valve has closed completely.
Depending on system layout and condition, it might be necessary to open the
heater bypass
• S
lowly start the cooler (if installed) when viscosity is below 10 cSt
- To obtain slow start of the cooler control the oil flow through the cooler, the
cooling medium flow or a combination of both
- Keep the temperature change gradient at engine inlet below 2°C/min.
4.3 Change-over during standstill

When change-over is to be carried out during standstill of the engine there is no
consumption from the fuel system and thus, no replacement of the oil. It is there-
fore necessary to return the oil to the HFO service tank. This will cause some DFO
to be returned to the HFO service tank. However this is better than contaminating
the DFO service tank with HFO.
When change-over is performed at standstill the engine should not be started until
all the components in the fuel oil system have had sufficient time to adapt to the
new temperature.
4.3.1 Heavy fuel oil to distillate fuel oil

• Stop the preheating and heat tracing
• Start the supply and circulating pumps (if they are not already running)
• C
hange position of the change-over valve at the venting pipe, so that the fuel
oil is pumped to the HFO service tank
• T
emperature in the system should now drop to the same level as the HFO ser-
vice tank temperature
MAN Diesel & Turbo
• Change position of the change-over valve at the fuel tanks, so that DFO is led
to the supply pumps
• When the HFO is replaced with DFO, turn the change-over valve at the vent-
ing pipe back to its normal position. The HFO in the venting pipe is now mixed
with DFO
• Stop the circulating pumps
• Stop the supply pumps.
• Start the supply pumps
• Start the circulating pumps (if they are not already running)
• Change position of the change-over valve at the fuel tanks so that HFO is led
to the supply pumps
• Change position of the change-over valve at the venting pipe, so that the fuel
oil is pumped to the HFO service tank
• Temperature in the system should now rise to the same level as the HFO ser-
vice tank temperature
• When the DFO is replaced with HFO turn the change-over valve at the vent-
ing pipe back to its normal position. The DFO in the venting pipe is now mixed
with HFO
• Stop the supply pumps
• Start the preheating and heat tracing.
MAN Diesel & Turbo
Residual Fuel Standards Plate 70501
When referring to this page, please quote Operation Plate 70501, Edition 0003 Page 1 (1)
MAN Diesel A/S
Plate 70502 Fuel Oil System
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Fuel Oil Pipes on Engine Plate 70503
Cylinder 1
Fuel valve
High pressure pipes
Fuel pump
TI
302
PI
305
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Fuel Oil Centrifuges
Plate 70504 Modes of Operation
In Series Fig. 1
In Parallel Fig. 2
By courtesy of Alfa-Laval
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Centrifuge Flow Rate and
Separation Temperature (Preheating) Plate 70505
Rate of Flow - related to rated capacity of centrifuge

%
100
80
60
40
20
paration temperature
Separation temperature
1
C
$
À
9
8
7
6
5
0
4
°C
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
$
15 25 45 75 100 130
cSt/80°C
Log scales
30 60 80 180 380 600
Log cSt/50°C
scales
200 400 600 1500 3500 6000
sec R I/100°F
MAN Diesel A/S
Preheating of Heavy Fuel Oil
Plate 70506 (Prior to Injection)
Approx. viscosity
Temperature after preheater
after preheater °C sek.
cSt.
Rw.
7 43
170
Normal preheating limit 10 52
160
12 59
150
15 69
140
20 87
130
120 30 125
110
100
90
80
70
60
Approx. pumping limit
50
40
30 Viscosity of fuel
10 15 25 35 45 55 cSt / 100°C
30 60 100 180 380 600 cSt / 50° C
200 400 800 1500 3500 6000 sec. Rw / 100° F
This cart is based on information from oil suppliers regarding typical

marine fuels with viscosity index 70-80.
Since the viscosity after the preheater is the controlled parameter, the
preheating temperature may vary, dependent on the viscosity and the
viscosity index of the fuel.
Recommended viscosity meter setting is 10-15 cSt.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Performance Evaluation and General Operation Chapter 706
Table of Contents
706-01 Observations during Operation

1. Symbols and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1 Load Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.2 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.3 Limits for Continuous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.4 Limits for Overload Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.5 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.6 Propeller Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. Performance Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.2 Key Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.3 Measuring Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.4 Intervals between Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.5 Evaluation of Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
706-02 Evaluation of Records

1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Engine Synopsis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.1 Parameters related to the Mean Indicated Pressure (pi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.1.A Mean Draught . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1.B Mean indicated Pressure (pi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1.C Engine Speed (pi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1.D Maximum Combustion Pressure (pmax – pi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1.E Fuel Index (pi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Parameters related to the Effective Engine Power (Pe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2.A Exhaust Temperature (texhv – Pe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2.B Compression Pressure (pcomp – Pe). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. Turbocharger Synopsis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.0.A Scavenge Air Pressure (pscav – Pe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.0.B Turbocharger Speed (T/C speed – pscav) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.0.C Pressure Drop across Turbocharger Air Filter (∆pf – pscav) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.0.D Turbocharger Efficiency (ηT/C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 706 Performance Evaluation and General Operation
Table of Contents
4. Air Cooler Synopsis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4.0.A Temperature Difference between Air Outlet and Water Inlet
(∆ t(air-water) – pscav) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.0.B Cooling Water Temperature Difference (∆ twater – pscav). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.0.C Pressure Drop across Air Cooler (∆ pair – pscav) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.1 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
5. Specific Fuel Oil Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
706-03 Cleaning of Turbochargers and Air Coolers

1. Turbocharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Cleaning the Turbine Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2.A Dry Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2.B Water Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Cleaning the Compressor Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2. Air Cooler Cleaning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
3. Drain System for Water Mist Catcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

3.1 Condensation of Water from a Humid Atmosphere. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.2 Drain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.3 Checking the Drain System by the Sight Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
706-04 Measuring Instruments

1. Thermometers and Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. PMI System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Indicator Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
706-05 Pressure Measurements and Engine Power Calculations

1. Calculation of the Indicated and Effective Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Performance Evaluation and General Operation Chapter 706
Table of Contents
706-06 Correction of Performance Parameters

1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Examples of calculations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4. Maximum Exhaust Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
706-07 Turbocharger Efficiency

1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Calculating the Efficiencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2.1 Plants without TCS and Exhaust By-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.2 Plants with TCS and/or Exhaust By-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
706-08 Estimation of the Effective Engine Power

without Indicator Diagrams
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.1 Fuel Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.2 Turbocharger Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 706 Performance Evaluation and General Operation
Table of Contents
PLATES
Load Diagram for Propulsion alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70601

Load Diagram for Propulsion and Main Engine Driven Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70602
Performance Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70603
Readings relating to Thermodynamic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70604
Synopsis Diagrams – for engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plates 70605-70607
Synopsis Diagrams – for turbocharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plates 70608-70609
Synopsis Diagrams – for air cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70610
Specific Fuel Oil Consumption – Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70611
Dry Cleaning of Turbocharger (Turbine side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70612
Water Cleaning Turbocharger (Turbine side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70613
Air Cooler Cleaning System (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70614
Normal Indicator Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70615
Correction to ISO Reference Ambient Conditions :
Maximum Combustion Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70620
Exhaust Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70621
Compression Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70622
Scavenge Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70623
Example of Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70624
Calculation of Compressor Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70625
Calculation of Total Turbocharger Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70626
Power Estimation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70627
Turbocharger Compressor Wheel Diameter and Slip Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70628
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Observations during Operation 706-01
1. Symbols and Units

The following designations are used:
Parameter Symbol Unit 1 Unit 2
Effective engine power Pe bhp kW
Engine speed speed speed speed
Indicated engine power pi ihp ikW
Fuel pump index Index No. %
Specific fuel oil consumption SFOC g/bhph g/kWh
Fuel oil lower calorific value LCV kcal/kg kJ/kg
Turbocharger speed T/C speed speed speed
Barometric pressure pbaro mmHg mbar
Pressure drop across T/C air filters ∆pf mmWC mbar
Pressure drop across air cooler ∆pc mmWC mbar
Scavenge air pressure pscav mmHg bar )
Mean indicated pressure pi bar ) bar )
Mean effective pressure pe bar ) bar )
Compression pressure pcomp bar ) bar )
Maximum combustion pressure pmax bar ) bar )
Exhaust receiver pressure pexhrec mmHg bar )
Pressure after turbine patc mmWC mbar
Air temperature before T/C filters tinl °C °C
Air temperature before cooler tbcoo °C °C
Cooling water inlet temp., air cooler tcoolinl °C °C
Cooling water outlet temp., air cooler tcoolout °C °C
Scavenge air temperature tscav °C °C
Temperature after exhaust valve texhv °C °C
Temperature before turbine tbtc °C °C
Temperature after turbine tatc °C °C
Conversion factors: N
1 bar= 1.02 kp/cm2 = 0.1 MPa = 105 Pa = 105
1 kg/cm2 = 0.9807 bar m2
1 kW = 1.3596 hp
1 mbar = 10.2 mmWC = 0.75 mm
π = 3.14159
) Pressure stated in bar is the measured value, i.e. read from an ordinary
pressure gauge. Note: the official designation of bar is Absolute Pressure.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
2. Operating Range
2.1 Load Diagram
The specific ranges for continuous operation are given in the ‘Load Diagrams’:
· For propulsion alone, Plate 70601.

· For propulsion and main engine driven generator, Plate 70602.
Specific engine calculations (load diagrams) can be ordered by contacting MAN
B&W Diesel A/S.
2.2 Definitions
The load diagram, in logarithmic scales (Plates 70601 and/or 70602) defines the
power and speed limits for continuous as well as overload operation of an installed
engine having a specified MCR (Maximum Continous Rating) point ‘M’ according
to the ship’s specification.
The service points of the installed engine incorporate the engine power required
for ship propulsion, see Plate 70601, and for main engine driven shaft generator,
if installed, see Plate 70602.
2.3 Limits for Continuous Operation

The continuous service range is limited by four lines:
Line 3: Represents the maximum speed which can be accepted for

continuous operation.
Running at low load above 100% of the nominal speed of the
engine is, however, to be avoided for extended periods.
Line 4: Represents the limit at which an ample air supply is available

for combustion and gives a limitation on the maximum combi-
nation of torque and speed.
Line 5: Represents the maximum mean effective pressure (mep) lev-

el, which can be accepted for continuous operation.
Line 7: Represents the maximum power line for continuous operation.
2.4 Limits for Overload Operation

Many parameters influence the performance of the engine. Among these is: over-
loading. The overload service range is limited as follows:
Line 8: Represents the overload operation limitations.
The area between lines 4, 5, 7 and the heavy dotted line 8 is available as overload
for limited periods only (1 hour per 12 hours).
2.5 Recommendations
Continuous operation without limitations is allowed only within the area limited by
lines 4, 5, 7 and 3 of the load diagram.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The area between lines 4 and 1 is available for running conditions in shallow water,
heavy weather and during acceleration, i.e. for non-steady operation without actu-
al time limitation.
After some time in operation, the ship’s hull and propeller will be fouled, resulting
in heavier running of the propeller, i.e. loading the engine more. The propeller
curve will move to the left from line 6 to line 2 and extra power is required for pro-
pulsion. The extent of heavy running of the propeller will indicate the need for
cleaning the hull and possibly polishing the propeller.
Point A is a 100% speed and power reference point of the load dia-
gram. Point M is normally equal to point A but may in special cases, for
example sometimes when a shaft generator is installed, be placed to
the right of point A on line 7.
2.6 Propeller Performance

Experience indicates that ships are – to a greater or lesser degree – sensitive to
bad weather (especially with heavy waves, and with head winds and seas), sailing
in shallow water with high speeds and during acceleration. It is advisable to notice
the power/speed combination in the load diagram and to take precautions when
approaching the limiting lines.
3. Performance Observations Plates 70603 (two pages), 70604
3.1 General
During engine operation, several basic parameters need to be checked and eval-
uated at regular intervals.
The purpose is to follow alterations in:
· the combustion conditions,

· the general cylinder condition,
· the general engine condition
in order to discover any operational disturbances.
This enables the necessary precautions to be taken at an early stage, to prevent

the further development of trouble.
This procedure will ensure optimum mechanical condition of the engine compo-
nents, and optimum overall plant economy.
3.2 Key Parameters

The key parameters in performance observations are:
– Barometric pressure
– Engine speed
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
– Ships draught
– Mean indicated pressure
– Compression pressure
– Maximum combustion pressure
– Fuel pump index
– Exhaust gas pressures
– Exhaust gas temperatures
– Scavenge air pressure
– Scavenge air temperature
– Turbocharger speed
– Exhaust gas back pressure in exhaust pipe after turbocharger
– Air temperature before T/C filters
– ∆ p air filter (if pressure gauge installed)
– ∆ p air cooler
– Air and cooling water temperatures before and after
scavenge air cooler.
3.3 Measuring Instruments

The measuring instruments for performance observations comprise:
– Thermometers,
– Pressure gauges,
– Tachometers,
– PMI – On/Off-line Cylinder pressure measurring equipment
– Eventually the engine diagnosis system CoCos-EDS
It is important to check the measuring instruments for correct functioning.
Regarding check of thermometers and pressure gauges, see Section 706-04.
3.4 Intervals between Checks

Constantly: Temperature and pressure data should be constantly monitored, in or-
der to protect the engine against overheating and failure. In general, automatic
alarms and slow-down or shut-down equipment are installed for safety.
Guiding values of permissible deviations from the normal service data are given in
Section 701-02.
Daily: Fill-in the Performance Observation record, Plate 70603.
3.5 Evaluation of Observations

Compare the observations to earlier observations and to the testbed/sea trial re-
sults.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
From the trends, determine when cleaning, adjustment and overhaul should be
carried out.
See Chapter 701, regarding normal service values and alarm limits.
Not all parameters can be evaluated individually.
This is because a change of one parameter can influence another parameter.
For this reason, these parameters must be compared to the influencing parame-
ters to ensure correct evaluations.
A simple method for evaluation of these parameters is presented in Section

706-02.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Evaluation of Records 706-02
1. General
Record the performance observations as described in the previous Section
706-01.
Use the synopsis diagrams to obtain the best and most simple method of plotting
and evaluating the parameters:
Engine: Plates 70605, 70606, 70607

Turbocharger: Plates 70608, 70609
Air cooler: Plate 70610
Plates 70605, 70606 and 70607 are sufficient to give a general impression of the
overall engine condition.
The plates comprise:
Model curve: shows the parameter as a function of the parameter on which it is

most dependent (based on the testbed/sea trial results).
Time based deviation curve: shows the deviation between the actual service ob-
servations and the model curve, as a function of time. The limits for max. recom-
mended deviation is also shown. The limits are based on the MAN B&W CAPA-
system. (Computer Aided Performance Analysis).
From the deviation curves, it is possible to determine what engine components

should be overhauled.
From the slope of the curves, it can be determined approximately when the over-
haul should be carried out.
Blank sheets: Blank ‘Time based deviation’ sheets which can be copied. Use
these sheets for plotting the deviation values for the specific engine.
The following Items describe the evaluation of each parameter in detail.
2. Engine Synopsis
A 6L60MC has been used in these examples.
2.1 Parameters related to the Mean Indicated Pressure (pi)

Plates 70605 and 70606 (engine synopsis diagrams) show model curves for en-
gine parameters which are dependent upon the mean indicated pressure (pi).
Plate 70605 also includes two charts for plotting the draught of the
ship, and the average mean indicated pressure as a function of the
engine running hours.
For calculation of the mean indicated pressure, see Section 706-05.
When referring to this page, please quote Operation 706-02 Edition 000 6 Page 1 (14)
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
2.1.A Mean Draught

The mean draught is depicted here because, for any particular engine speed, it will
have an influence on the engine load.
2.1.B Mean indicated Pressure (pi)

The average calculated value of the mean indicated pressure is depicted in order
that an impression of the engine’s load can be obtained.
Load balance: the mean indicated pressure for each cylinder should not deviate
more than 0.5 bar from the average value for all cylinders.
The load balance must not be adjusted on the basis of the exhaust
gas temperatures after each exhaust valve.
The fuel index must be steady. Unbalances in the load distribution may cause the
governor to be unstable.
2.1.C Engine Speed (pi)

The model curve shows the relationship between the engine speed and the aver-
age mean indicated pressure (pi).
The engine speed should be determined by counting the revolutions over a suffi-
ciently long period of time.
Deviations from the model curve show whether the propeller is light or heavy, i.e.
whether the torque on the propeller is small or large for a specified speed. If this
is compared with the draught (under the same weather conditions), see remarks
in Section 706-01, then it is possible to judge whether the alterations are owing to:
· changes in the draught,

· or an increase in the propulsion resistance, for instance due to fouling of the
hull, shallow water, etc.
Valuable information is hereby obtained for determining a suitable docking sched-
ule.
If the deviation from the model curve is large, (e.g. deviations from shop trial to sea
trial), it is recommended to plot the results on the load diagram, see Section
706-01, and from that judge the necessity of making alterations on the engine, or
to the propeller.
2.1.D Maximum Combustion Pressure (pmax – pi)

The model curve shows the relationship between the average pmax (corrected to
ISO reference ambient conditions) and the average pi.
For correction to reference conditions, see Section 706-06.
Deviations from the model curve are to be compared with deviations in the com-
pression pressure and the fuel index (see further on).
Page 2 (14) When referring to this page, please quote Operation 706-02 Edition 000 6
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Constant pmax in the upper load range is achieved by a combination of fuel injection
timing and variation of the compression ratio (the latter by varying the timing of
closing the exhaust valve).
If an individual pmax value deviates more than 3 bar from the average value, the
reason should be found and the fault corrected.
The pressure rise pcomp-pmax must not exceed the specified limit, i.e. 45 bar.
2.1.E Fuel Index (pi)

The model curve shows the relationship between the average index and the aver-
age pi.
Deviations from the model curve give information on the condition of the fuel injec-
tion equipment.
Worn fuel pumps, and leaking suction valves, will show up as an increased fuel
index in relation to the mean pressure. Note, however, that the fuel index is also
dependent on:
a. The viscosity of the fuel oil, (i.e. the viscosity at the pre-
heating temperature). Low viscosity will cause larger
leakages in the fuel pump, and thereby necessitate
higher indexes for injecting the same volume.
b. The calorific value and the specific gravity of the fuel oil.
These will determine the energy content per unit vol-
ume, and can therefore also influence the index.
c. All parameters that affect the fuel oil consumption (am-
bient conditions, pmax, etc.)
Since there are many parameters that influence the index, and thereby also the
pmax, it can be necessary to adjust the pmax from time to time.
It is recommended to overhaul the fuel pumps when the index has increased by
about 10%.
In case the engine is operating with excessively worn fuel pumps, the starting per-
formance of the engine will be seriously affected.
2.2 Parameters related to the Effective Engine Power (Pe)

Plate 70607 shows model curves for engine parameters which are dependent on
the effective power (Pe).
Regarding the calculation of effective engine power, see Section 706-05.
Because the ME engine is without indicator drive, the estimated effective engine
power is found by using the fuel index and T/C revolutions as parameters, see
Section 706-08.
It is recommended to apply PMI-system for easy access to P-V-diagrams (work

diagrams) and thereby the effective engine power.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
2.2.A Exhaust Temperature (texhv – Pe)

The model curve shows the average exhaust temperatures (after the valves), cor-
rected to reference conditions, and drawn up as a function of the effective engine
power (Pe).
For correction to ISO reference ambient conditions, see Section 706-06.
Regarding maximum exhaust temperatures, see also Section 706-06.
The exhaust temperature is an important parameter, because the majority of faults

in the air supply, combustion and gas systems manifest themselves as increases
in the exhaust temperature level.
The most important parameters which influence the exhaust temperature are list-
ed in the table on the next page, together with a method for direct diagnosing,
where possible.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Increased Exhaust Temperature Level – Fault Diagnosing
Possible Causes Diagnosing

a. Fuel injection equipment: As these faults occur in individual cylinders,
– Leaking or incorrectly working fuel compare:
valves (defective spindle and seat) · fuel indexes
– Worn fuel pumps. If a high wear rate · Indicator and draw diagrams
occurs, the cause for this must be found
See Section 706-05.
and remedied.
Check the fuel valves:
Note: Inadequate cleaning of the fuel oil
can cause defective fuel valves and worn · visually
fuel pumps. · by pressure testing.
b. Cylinder condition: These faults occur in individual cylinders.
– Blow-by, piston rings · Compare the compression pressures from
See also Chapter 703, Item ‘4.1, Run- the indicator and draw diagrams.
ning Difficulties’, point 7. See Section 706-05.
– Leaking exhaust valves · During engine standstill:
See also Chapter 703, Item ‘4.1, Run-
Carry out scavenge port inspection.
ning Difficulties’, point 6.
See Section 707-01.
Check the exhaust valves.
c. Air coolers: Check the cooling capability.
– Fouled air side See Section 706-02.
– Fouled water side
d. Climatic conditions: Check cooling water and engine room temper-
– Extreme conditions atures.
Correct Texhv to reference conditions.
See Section 706-06.
e. Turbocharger: Use the turbocharger synopsis methods for
– Fouling of turbine side diagnosing.
See Section 706-02.
– Fouling of compressor side
f. Fuel oil: Using heavy fuel oil will normally increase Texhv
– Type by approx. 15°C, compared to the use of gas
– Quality oil.
Further increase of Texhv will occur when using
fuel oils with particularly poor combustion
properties. In this case, a reduction of pmax can
also occur.
2.2.B Compression Pressure (pcomp – Pe)

The model curve shows the relationship between the compression pressure pcomp
(corrected to ISO reference ambient conditions) and the effective engine power Pe.
For correction to reference conditions, see Section 706-06.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Deviation from the model curve can be due to:
a. a scavenge air pressure reduction,

b. – mechanical defects in the engine components (blow-by
past piston rings, defective exhaust valves, etc. – see
the table on the next page).
– excessive grinding of valve spindle and bottom piece.
It is therefore expedient and useful to distinguish between ‘a’ and ‘b’, and investi-
gate how large a part of a possible compression reduction is due to ‘a’ or ‘b’.
This distinguishing is based on the ratio between absolute compression pressure

(pcomp + pbaro) and absolute scav. pressure (pscav + pbaro) which, for a specific engine,
is constant over the largest part of the load range (load diagram area).
Constant pmax in the upper load range is achieved by a combination of fuel injection
timing and variation of the compression ratio (the latter by varying the timing of
closing the exhaust valve).
The ratio is first calculated for the “new” engine, either from the testbed results, or
from the model curve.
See the example below regarding:
· Calculating the ratio

· Determining the influence of mechanical defects.
It should be noted that, the measured compression pressure, for the individual cyl-
inders, can deviate from the average, owing to the natural consequence of air/gas
vibrations in the receivers. The deviations will, to some degree, be dependent on
the load.
However, such deviations will be “typical” for the particular engine, and should not
change during the normal operation.
When evaluating service data for individual cylinders, comparison must be made
with the original compression pressure of the cylinder concerned, at the corre-
sponding load.
Example:
The following four values can be assumed read from the model curves:
The barometric pressure was: 1.00 bar

The scavenge pressure was: 2.25 bar
This gave an absolute scavenge pressure of: 3.25 bar
The average (or individual) compression pressure was: 115 bar
which gave an absolute compression pressure of 115 + 1.00 = 116 bar
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
pcomp abs 116 = 35.7

=
pscav abs 3.25
This value is used as follows for evaluating the data read during service.
Service Values
pcomp : 101 bar (average or individual)

pscav : 2.0 bar
pbaro : 1.02 ba r
Calculated on the basis of pscav and pbaro, the absolute compression pressure would
be expected to be:
pcomp abs = 35.7 × (2.0 + 1.02) = 107.8 bar
i.e. pcomp = 107.8 – 1.02 = 106.8 bar
The difference between the expected 106.8 bar and the measured 101 bar could
be owing to mechanical defects or grinding of exhaust valve spindle and bottom
piece.
Concerning the pressure rise pcomp-pmax,

see Item 2.1.D, ‘Maximum Combustion Pressure (pmax – pi)’.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Mechanical Defects which can influence the Compression Pressure
Possible Causes Diagnosis / Remedy

a. Piston rings: Diagnosis: See Table Increased Exhaust Tem-
– Leaking perature Level – Fault Diagnosing
Remedy: See Section 703-04.
b. Piston crown: Check the piston crown by means of the tem-
– Burnt plate. See Vol. II, Procedure 902-3.
c. Cylinder liner: Check the liner by means of the measuring
– Worn tool. See Vol. II, Procedure 903-2.
d. Exhaust valve: Remedy: See Section 703-04.
– Leaking
– The exhaust temperature rises.
– A hissing sound can possibly be
heard at reduced load.
– Timing Check:
– Hydraulic oil leakages, e.g. misalignment
of high pressure pipe between exhaust
valve actuator and hydraulic cylinder.
– Damper arrangement for exhaust valve
closing.
e. Piston rod stuffing box: Small leakages may occur due to erosion of
– Leaking the bronze segments of the stuffing box, but
– Air is emitted from the check this is normally considered a cosmetic phe-
funnel from the stuffing box. nomenon.
Remedy: Overhaul the stuffing box, see Vol. II,
Chapter 902.
3. Turbocharger Synopsis Plates 70608 and 70609

(Turbocharger synopsis diagrams)
Plates 70608 and 70609 should be filled out in a number of copies

which corresponds to the number of turbochargers.
Regarding cleaning of the turbochargers, see Section 706-03.
3.0.A Scavenge Air Pressure (pscav – Pe)

The model curve shows the scavenge air pressure (corrected to reference condi-
tions) as a function of the effective engine power (Pe).
See Sections 706-05 and 706-08 regarding the effective engine power.
For correction to ISO reference ambient conditions, see Section 706-06.
Deviations in the scavenge air pressure are, like the exhaust temperature, an im-
portant parameter for an overall estimation of the engine condition.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
A drop in the scavenge air pressure, for a given load, will cause an increase in the
thermal loading of the combustion chamber components.
A simple diagnosis, made only from changes in scavenge air pressure, is difficult.
Fouled air filter, air coolers and turbochargers can greatly influence the scavenge
air pressure.
Changes in the scavenge air pressure should thus be seen as a “consequential

effect” which is closely connected with changes in:
· the air cooler condition.
· the turbocharger condition.
· the timing.
Reference is therefore made to the various sections covering these topics.
3.0.B Turbocharger Speed (T/C speed – pscav)

The model curve shows the speed of the turbocharger as a function of the scav-
enge air pressure (pscav).
Corroded nozzle ring or turbine blades will reduce the turbine speed. The same
thing will happen in case of a too large clearance between the turbine blades and
the shroud ring (MAN B&W) / cover ring (BBC / ABB).
Deviation from the model curve, in the form of too high speed, can normally be at-
tributed to a fouled air filter, scavenge air cooler, turbine side or compressor side.
A more thorough diagnosing of the turbocharger condition can be made as out-

lined in the ‘turbocharger efficiency’ Section below.
3.0.C Pressure Drop across Turbocharger Air Filter (∆pf – pscav)

The model curve shows the pressure drop across the air filter as a function of the
scavenge air pressure (pscav).
Deviations from this curve give direct information about the cleanliness of the air
filter.
Like the air cooler, the filter condition is decisive for the scavenge air pressure and
exhaust temperature levels.
The filter elements must be cleaned when the pressure drop is 50% higher than
the testbed value.
If a manometer is not standard, the cleaning interval is determined by visual in-

spection.
3.0.D Turbocharger Efficiency (ηT/C)

The model curves show the compressor and turbine efficiencies as a function of
the scavenge air pressure (pscav).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
In order to determine the condition of the turbocharger, the calculated efficiency

values are compared with the model curves, and the deviations plotted.
Calculation of the efficiency is explained in Section 706-07.
As the efficiencies have a great influence on the exhaust temperature, the condi-
tion of the turbocharger should be checked if the exhaust temperature tends to in-
crease up to the prescribed limit.
Efficiency reductions can normally be related to “flow deterioration”, which can be

counteracted by regular cleaning of the turbine side (and possibly compressor
side).
4. Air Cooler Synopsis Plate 70610 (Air cooler synopsis diagrams)

The plate gives model curves for air cooler parameters, which are dependent on
the scavenge air pressure (pscav).
Regarding cleaning of air coolers, see Section 706-03.
4.0.A Temperature Difference between Air Outlet and Water Inlet (∆ t(air-water) – pscav)
The model curve shows the temperature difference between the air outlet and the
cooling water inlet, as a function of the scavenge air pressure (pscav).
This difference in temperature is a direct measure of the cooling ability, and as

such an important parameter for the thermal load on the engine. The evaluation of
this parameter is further discussed in Item 4.1, ‘Evaluation’.
4.0.B Cooling Water Temperature Difference (∆ twater – pscav)

The model curve shows the cooling water temperature increase across the air
cooler, as a function of the scavenge air pressure (pscav).
This parameter is evaluated as indicated in Item 4.1.
4.0.C Pressure Drop across Air Cooler (∆ pair – pscav)

The model curve shows the scavenge air pressure drop across the air cooler, as
a function of the scavenge air pressure (pscav).
This parameter is evaluated as indicated in Item 4.1, ‘Evaluation’.
4.1 Evaluation
Generally, for the above three parameters, changes of approx. 50% of the testbed
value can be considered as a maximum. However, the effect of the altered tem-
peratures should be kept under observation in accordance with the remarks under
Exhaust Temperature. (Point 2.2 earlier in this Section).
In the case of pressure drop across air cooler, for purposes of simplification, the
mentioned “50% margin” includes deviations caused by alterations of the suction
temperature, scavenge air temperature, and efficiency of the turbochargers.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Of the three parameters, the temperature difference between air outlet and water
inlet, is to be regarded as the most essential one.
Deviations from the model curves, which are expressions of deteriorated cooling
capability, can be due to:
a. Fouling of the air side

b. Fouling of the water side
a. Fouling of the air side: manifests itself as an increased pressure drop
across the air side.
Note however, that the heat transmission can also be influenced by an
“oily film” on tubes and fins, and this will only give a minor increase in the
pressure drop.
Before cleaning the air side, it is recommended that the U-tube manom-
eter is checked for tightness, and that the cooler is visually inspected for
deposits.
Make sure that the drainage system from the water mist catcher functions
properly, as a high level of condensed water (condensate) – up to the
lower measuring pipe – might greatly influence the ∆p measuring. See
also Section 706-03.
b. Fouling of the water side: Normally involves a reduction of the cooling wa-
ter temperature difference, because the heat transmission (cooling abili-
ty) is reduced.
Note however that, if the deposits reduce the cross sectional area of the
tubes, so that the water quantity is reduced, the cooling water tempera-
ture difference may not be affected, whereby diagnosis is difficult (i.e.
lower heat transmission, but also lower flow volume).
Furthermore, a similar situation will arise if such tube deposits are

present simultaneously with a fault in the salt water system, (corroded
water pump, erroneous operation of valves, etc.). Here again the reduced
water quantity will result in the temperature difference remaining approx-
imately unaltered.
In cases where it is suspected that the air cooler water side is obstructed,
the resistance across the cooler can be checked by means of a differen-
tial pressure gauge.
A mercury manometer pressure gauge should not be used,

because of environmental considerations.
Before dismantling the air cooler, for piercing of the tubes, it is recom-
mended that the remaining salt-water system is examined, and the cool-
ing ability of the other heat exchangers checked.
Be careful when piercing, because the pipes are thin-walled.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
5. Specific Fuel Oil Consumption Plate 70611

Calculation of the specific fuel oil consumption (g/kWh, g/bhph) requires that en-
gine power, and the consumed fuel oil amount (kg), are known for a certain period
of time.
The method of determining the engine power is illustrated in Section 706-05. For
engines without indicator drive, see Section 706-08.
The oil amount is measured as described below.
To achieve a reasonable measuring accuracy, it is recommended to measure over

a suitably long period – dependent upon the method employed i.e.:
· If a day tank is used, the time for the consumption of the whole tank
contents will be suitable.
· If a flow-meter is used, a minimum of 1 hour is recommended.
The measurements should always be made under calm weather conditions.
Since both of the above-mentioned quantity measurements will be in volume units,

it will be necessary to know the oil density, in order to convert to weight units. The
density is to correspond to the temperature at the measuring point (i.e. in the day
tank or flow-meter).
The specific gravity, (and thus density) can be determined by means of a hydrom-
eter immersed in a sample taken at the measuring point, but the density can also
be calculated on the basis of bunker specifications.
Normally, in bunker specifications, the specific gravity is indicated at 15°C/60°F.
The actual density (g/cm3) at the measuring point is determined by using the curve
on Plate 70611, where the change in density is shown as a function of tempera-
ture.
The consumed oil quantity in kg is obtained by multiplying the measured volume

(in litres) by the density (in kg/litre).
In order to be able to compare consumption measurements carried out for various

types of fuel oil, allowance must be made for the differences in the lower calorific
value (LCV) of the fuel concerned.
Normally, on the testbed, gas oil will have been used, having a lower calorific value
of approx. 42,707 kJ/kg (corresponding to 10,200 kcal/kg). If no other instructions
have been given by the shipowner, it is recommended to convert to this value.
Usually, the lower calorific value of a bunker oil is not specified by the oil compa-
nies. However, by means of the graph, Plate 70611, the LCV can be determined
with sufficient accuracy, on the basis of the sulphur content, and the specific grav-
ity at 15°C.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The corrected consumption can then be determined by multiplying the “measured

consumption”, by either:
LCV1
LCV1 = the specific lower calorific value,
42,707 in kJ/kg, of the bunker oil concerned
or
LCV2 LCV2 = the specific lower calorific value,
10,200 in kcal/kg, of the bunker oil concerned
Example: (6L60MC)
Effective Engine
Power, Pe : 15,600 bhp
Consumption, Co : 7.125 m3 over 3 hours
Measuring point temperature : 119°C
Fuel data : Specific gravity:

0.9364 g/cm3 at 15°C, 3% sulphur
Density at 119°C (see Plate 70611), ρ 119: 0.9364 – 0.068 = 0.8684 g/cm3.
Specific consumption:
Co × ρ 119 × 106
(g / bhph)
h × Pe
where:
Co = Fuel oil consumption over the period, m3
ρ 119 = Corrected gravity, g/cm3
h = Measuring period, hours
Pe = Brake horse power, bhp
7.125 × 0.8684 × 106
= 132.2 g/bhph
3 × 15,600
Correction to ISO reference conditions

regarding the specific lower calorific value:
LCV1 = 40,700 kJ/kg, derived from Plate 70611.

Consumption corrected for calorific value:
132.2 × 40,700
= 126.0 g/bhph
42,707
or
LCV2 = 9723 kcal/kg derived from Plate 70611.
Consumption corrected for calorific value:
132.2 × 9723
= 126.0 g/bhph
10,200
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The ambient conditions (blower inlet temperature and pressure and

scavenge air coolant temperature) will also influence the fuel consump-
tion. Correction for ambient conditions is not considered important
when comparing service measurements.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Cleaning of Turbochargers and Air Coolers 706-03
1. Turbocharger
1.1 General
We recommend to clean the turbochargers regularly during operation.
This prevents the build-up of heavy deposits on the rotating parts and keeps the
turbochargers in the best running condition between manual overhauls.
The intervals between cleaning during operation should be determined from the
degree of fouling of the turbocharger in the specific plant.
This is because the tendency to form deposits depends, among

other things, on the combustion properties of the actual fuel oil.
Guiding intervals between cleaning are given for each cleaning method in the fol-
lowing items.
If the cleaning is not carried out at regular intervals, the deposits may
not be removed uniformly. This will cause the rotor to be unbalanced,
and excite vibrations.
IF Vibrations occur after cleaning THEN Clean again

Vibrations occur after repeated See Section 704-04.
cleaning
Clean the turbochargers manu-
ally at the first opportunity.
Manual overhauls are still necessary to remove deposits which the cleaning during
operation does not remove, in particular on the non-rotating parts.
Regarding intervals between the manual overhauls, see the maker’s instructions.
1.2 Cleaning the Turbine Side
1.2.A Dry Cleaning (Plate 70612)

Intervals between cleaning: 24-50 hours of operation.
The cleaning is effected by injecting a specified volume of crushed nut shells or

similar. The “grain size” is to be about 1.5 mm.
Since the cleaning is mechanical, the highest efficiency is obtained at full load, and
cleaning should not be carried out below half load.
Carry out the cleaning according to the instruction given on the “instruction plate”
located at the turbocharger, see Plate 70612. See also Vol. II, ‘Maintenance’,
Chapter 910.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
1.2.B Water Cleaning (Not TCA, TCR and MET-Turbochargers) (Plate 70613)
Intervals between cleaning: Approx. every 50 to 500 operating hours.
The cleaning is effected by injecting atomised water through the gas inlet, at re-
duced engine load.
Carry out the cleaning according to the instruction given on the “instruction plate”
located at the turbocharger, see Plate 70613.
Be aware that water cleaning can cause corrosion on the shroud ring surrounding
the T/C turbine blading.
Note that, during normal running, some of the scavenge air is led through a three-
way cock, from pipe No. 2 to pipe No. 1, at the turbine outlet drainage hole, where-
by this pipe is kept clean.
1.3 Cleaning the Compressor Side

Guiding intervals between cleaning: 25-75 hours of operation.
Always refer to the maker’s special instruction.
The cleaning is effected by injecting water through a special pipe arrangement

during running at high load and normal temperatures.
Regarding the cleaning procedure, see the maker’s special instructions.
If the deposits are heavy and hard, the compressor must be

dismantled and cleaned manually.
If the in-service cleaning is carried out when the compressor side is too contami-
nated, the loosened deposits can be trapped in the narrow passages of the air
cooler element.
This reduces the air cooler effectiveness.
Regarding air cooler cleaning, see Item 2., ‘Air Cooler Cleaning System’, below.
We recommend to wrap a thin foam filter gauze around the turbocharger intake
filter, and fasten it by straps.
This greatly reduces fouling of the compressor side, and even makes in-
service cleaning unnecessary.
Replace and discard the filter gauze, when it becomes dirty.
2. Air Cooler Cleaning System Plate 70614

See Section 701-02 regarding the basis for intervals between cleaning.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Carry out the cleaning only when the engine is at standstill.

This is because the water mist catcher is not able to retain the
cleaning fluid. Thus there would be a risk of fluid being blown into
the cylinders, causing excessive liner wear.
Cleaning of the air side of the scavenge air cooler is effected by injecting a chem-
ical fluid through ‘AK’ to a spray pipe arrangement fitted to the air chamber above
the air cooler element.
The polluted chemical cleaning agent returns from ‘AM’, through a filter to the
chemical cleaning tank.
The procedure is described in the ‘Maintenance’ instruction book, Chapter 910.
3. Drain System for Water Mist Catcher

3.1 Condensation of Water
A combination of high air humidity and cold cooling water will cause an amount of
condensed water to be separated from the scavenge air in the water mist catcher.
Estimation of condensate from the water mist catcher drain

The amount of condensate from the water mist catcher(s) can be estimated based
on the below listed measurements and figure 1 and 2.
· Engine load (kW)

· Ambient air temperature (oC)
· Relative humidity of ambient air (%)
· Scavenge air pressure (Bar abs)
· Scavenge air temperature (oC)
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Figures of water vapour in ambient and scavenge air can be seen in full figur on
plate 70712.
Wate r vapour in intake air Maxim um w ater vapour

Mambient
kg/kWh M scavenge
kg/kWh in scavenge air
0.60 0.60
Rel. Humidity = 100%

Pscav = 2.0 bar abs
Rel. Humidity = 90%
Pscav = 2.5 Bar abs
0.50 0.50
Rel. Humidity = 80% Pscav = 3.0 Bar abs
Rel. Humidity = 50%

0.40 0.40
Rel. Humidity = 40%
0.30
0.30
0.20
0.20
0.10
0.10
0.00
0.00
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
(°c)
Am bie nt air te m perature (c) (°c)
Scave nge air tem perature (c)
Figure 1 Figure 2
Calculation procedure
1. The amount of water vapour in the intake air (Mambient) is found in figure 1
based on measurements of ambient air temperature and relative humidity.
2. The maximum amount of water vapour in the scavenge air (Mscavenge ) is found
in figure 2 based on measurements of scavenge air pressure and tempera-
ture.
3. The expected amount of condensate is calculated by:
MCondens = k × Engine load × (Mambient - Mscavnege)* [kg/h]
where, k = 1.05 for K80-K98 type engines

k = 1.00 for S50-S90 and L50-L70 type engines
k = 0.90 for S26-S46 and L35-L42 type engines
*) The tolerance of the result is ± 10%
No water condensation occurs, if the result is negative.
The sea water temperature may alternatively be used in figure 1 instead of the am-
bient air temperature and relative humidity. The 100% relative humidity curve ap-
plies, if the sea water temperature is used.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Example of estimation of condensate amount:
Readings:
Engine type: 7K80MC-C

Engine load: 22,700 kW
Ambient air temperature: 30 oC
Relative humidity: 85 %
Scavenge air pressure: 3.25 Bar abs
Scavenge air temperature: 45 oC
Calculation procedure:
1) Mambient = 0.21 kg/kWh found from figure 1 (as outlined)
2) Mscavenge = 0.17 kg/kWh found from figure 2 (as outlined)
3a) k = 1.05 for K80 type engine
3b) Mcondens = 1.05 x 22700 x (0.21 - 0.17) = 953 kg/h
The condensate amount is estimated to be 950 kg/h (± 10%) or 22.8 t/day for the
7K80MC-C engine.
The estimation of condensate amount is based on nominal air amount for the en-
gine and even distribution of the air outlet temperature from the scavenge air cool-
er. The expected condensate amount should, therefore, be taken as rough
guidance in case of small amounts of condensate (between -0.01 and 0.01 kg/
kWh).
3.2 Drain System Plate 70614

Condensed water will be drained off from the water mist catcher through the sight
glass, the orifice and flange AL to bilge.
The size of the orifice in the drain system is designed to be able to drain off the
amount of condensed water under average running conditions.
In case of running under special conditions with high humidity, it can be necessary
to open the bypass valve on the discharge line a little.
Close the bypass valve when possible to reduce the loss of scavenge air.
A level-alarm (Section 701-02) will set off alarm in case of too high water level at
the drain.
Check the alarm device regularly to ensure correct functioning.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
3.3 Checking the Drain System by the Sight Glass

a. A mixed flow of air and water indicates a correctly working system where
condensation takes place.
b. A flow of water only, indicates malfunctioning of the system.
Check the orifice for blocking.
Check for any restrictions in the discharge pipe from AL.
Check and overhaul the level alarm.
c. A flow of air is only normal when running under dry ambient conditions
A sight glass which is completely filled with clean water, and with no air
flow, visually looks like an empty air-filled sight glass.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Measuring Instruments 706-04
1. Thermometers and Pressure Gauges

The thermometers and pressure gauges fitted on the engine are often duplicated
with instruments for remote indication.
Owing to differences in the installation method, type and make of sensing ele-
ments, and design of pockets, the two sets of instruments cannot be expected to
give exactly the same readings.
During shoptest and sea trials, readings are taken from the local instruments. Use
these values as the basis for all evaluations.
Check the thermometers and pressure gauges at intervals against calibrated con-
trol apparatus.
Thermometers should be shielded against air currents from the engine-room ven-
tilation.
If the temperature permits, keep thermometer pockets filled with oil to ensure ac-
curate indication.
Keep all U-tube manometers perfectly tight at the joints.
Check the tightness from time to time by using soap-water.
To avoid polluting the environment, do not use mercury instruments.
Check that there is no water accumulation in tube bends.
This would falsify the readings.
If cocks or throttle valves are incorporated in the measuring equipment, check

these for free flow, prior to taking readings.
If an instrument suddenly gives values that differ from normal, consider the possi-
bility of a defective instrument.
The easiest method of determining whether an instrument is faulty or not,

is to exchange it for another.
2. PMI System
The PMI System is designed to provide engineers and service personnel onboard
ship and at power plants with a computerised tool for pressure measurements and
analysis on two-stroke diesel engines. The main advantages of the system are:
· On-line measurement of cylinder pressure. Fully automated measurement rou-

tine for measurements conducted from engine control room.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
· Graphic display and print out of PT, PV and Balance Diagrams, together with
Mean Indicated Pressure and Max. Pressure deviation limits.
· Calculated values of Effective Power, Mean Indicated Pressure pi, Compres-

sion Pressure pcomp, Max. Pressure pmax, and Scavenge Pressure pscav, including
proposed values for index adjustments, etc.
· Software interface for use with MAN B&W Diesel’s engine performance and en-
gine diagnostics software, e.g. CoCos-EDS.
3. Indicator Valve
During the running of the engine, soot and oil will accumulate in the indicator bore.
Clean the bore by opening the indicator valve for a moment.
To protect the valve against burning:
– Open the valve only partially,

– Close the valve after one or two ignitions.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Pressure Measurements and
706-05
Engine Power Calculations
706-05 Pressure Measurements and Engine Power Calculations
Regarding taking the diagrams, see Section 706-04.
1. Calculation of the Indicated and Effective Engine Power

(For engines without PMI-system, see Section 706-08)
Calculation of the indicated and effective engine power consists of the following
steps:
Calculate:
– The mean indicated pressure, pi

– The mean effective pressure, pe
– The cylinder constant, k2
– The indicated engine power, Pi
– The effective engine power, Pe
The mean indicated pressure, pi

A
pi = (bar)
L × Cs
where:
A (mm2) = area of the indicator diagram, as found by planimetering.
L (mm) = length of the indicator diagram (= atmospheric line).
Cs (mm/bar) = spring constant (= vertical movement of the indicator

stylus (mm) for a 1 bar pressure rise in the cylinder).
pi corresponds to the height of a rectangle with the same area and length as the
indicator diagram.
I.e., if pi was acting on the piston during the complete downwards stroke,
the cylinder would produce the same total work as actually produced in
one complete revolution.
The mean effective pressure, pe
pe = pi – k1 (bar)
where
k1 = the mean friction loss
The mean friction loss has proved to be practically independent of the engine load.
By experience, k1 has been found to be approx. 1 bar.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
706-05
Pressure Measurements and
Engine Power Calculations
The cylinder constant, k2
k2 is determined by the dimensions of the engine, and the units in which the power
is wanted.
For power in kW : k2 = 1,30900 × D2 ×S
For power in BHP : k2 = 1,77968 × D2 × S
where:
D (m) = cylinder diameter
S (m) = piston stroke
For power in kW For power in BHP

Engine type
k2 k2
S50ME 0.6250 0.8498
S50ME-C 0.6545 0.8899
L60ME 0.9161 1.2455
S60ME 1.0801 1.4685
S60ME-C 1.1310 1.5377
L70ME 1.4547 1.9779
S70ME 1.7151 2.3319
S70ME-C 1.7959 2.4418
L80ME 2.1715 2.9524
S80ME 2.5602 3.4809
K80ME-C 1.9268 2.6198
L90ME 3.0918 4.2037
K90ME 2.7037 3.6761
K90ME-C 2.4387 3.3157
K98ME-C 3.0172 4.1022
K98ME-C 3.0172 4.1022
The indicated engine power, Pi
Pi = k2 × n × pi (ikW or ihp)
where
n (rpm) = engine speed.
The effective engine power, Pe
Pe = k2 × n × pe (kW or bhp)
where
n (rpm) = engine speed.
Due to the friction in the thrust bearing, the shaft power is up to 1% less than the
effective engine power, depending on speed and load conditions and plant type
(FPP/CPP).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Correction of Performance Parameters 706-06
1. General
Some measured performance parameters need to be corrected to ISO ambient
conditions to facilitate reliable evaluation.
These parameters are: pmax, texhv, pcomp and pscav. See also Section 706-01.
Making such corrections enables comparison to earlier (corrected)

readings or model curves, regardless of deviations of the actual tinl and
tcoolinl from reference conditions.
I.e. the correction provides the values which would have been measured if
tinl and tcoolinl had been 25°C.
In extreme cases, the divergencies can be large.
Record the corrected value as described in Section 706-02.
Use the following reference conditions:
tinl = Air inlet temperature = 25°C
(The air inlet temperature can vary greatly, depending on the position in
which it is measured on the intake filter. Experience has shown that two
thermometers situated at ten o’clock and four o’clock positions (i.e. 180°
apart) and at the middle of the filter, give a good indication of the average
temperature).
tcoolinl = Cooling water inlet temp. to air cooler = 25°C.

See also Plate 70610, regarding ∆t (tscav-tcoolinl).
MAN Diesel A/S
2. Correction
The correction for deviations of tinl and tcoolinl from reference conditions can be car-
ried out in two ways:
By reading
See Plate 70624, which shows how to use Plates 70620-70623 to determine the
correction.
By calculation
The corrections can be determined by the general equation:
Acorr = (tmeas – tref) × F × (K + A meas)
where
Acorr = the correction to be applied to the parameter, i.e. to pmax, texh,

pcomp or pscav.
tmeas = measured tinl or tcoolinl.
tref = reference tinl or tcoolinl (in case of Standard Conditions, 25°C).
F1, F2 = constants, see the table below.
K = constant, see the table below.
A meas = the measured parameter to be corrected, i.e. pmax, texh, pcomp or pscav.
See Plates 70620, 70621, 70622 and 70623, which show how to use the formulas.
Parameter to F1: for air inlet temp. F2: for cooling water K
be corrected inlet temp.
texhv – 2.446 × 10–3 – 0.59 ×10–3 273
pscav + 2.856 ×10–3 – 2.220 ×10–3 pbaro = 1 bar
pcomp + 2.954 × 10–3 – 1.530 ×10–3 pbaro = 1 bar
pmax + 2.198 × 10–3 – 0.810 ×10–3 pbaro = 1 bar
MAN Diesel A/S
3. Examples of calculations:
See Plate 70624, which states a set of service readings.
1. Correction of texhv (Plate 70621).

Measured:
Exhaust temperature after valve = 425°C
Air inlet temp. = 42°C
Cooling water inlet temp.(air cooler) = 40°C
Correction for air inlet temperature:

(42 – 25) × (–2.466 × 10 –3) × (273 + 425) = –29.3°C
Correction for cooling water inlet temperature:

(40 – 25) × (–0.59 × 10 –3) × (273 + 425) = –6.2°C
Corrected texhv value = 425 – 29.3 – 6.2 = 389.5°C
2. Correction of pscav (Plate 70623):

Measured: Scavenge air pressure = 2.0 bar
Air inlet temp. = 42 °C
Cooling water inlet temp.(air cooler) = 40 °C
Correction for air inlet temp.:

(42 – 25) × (2.856 × 10 –3) × (1 + 2.0) = 0.146 bar
Correction for cooling water inlet temp.:
(40 – 25) × (–2.220 × 10 –3) × (1 + 2.0) = –0.10 bar
Corrected pscav value = 2.0 + 0.146 – 0.10 = 2.046 bar
Corrections of pcomp (Plate 70622) and pmax (Plate 70620) can be made in a
similar manner.
MAN Diesel A/S
4. Maximum Exhaust Temperature

The engine is designed to allow a limited increase of the thermal loading, i.e.
increase of texhv.
This enables the engine to operate under climatic alterations and under
normally deteriorated service condition.
Whether the engine exceeds this built-in safety margin for thermal loading can be
evaluated as follows:
The factors contributing to increased exhaust temperature levels (and thereby

thermal loads) and the largest permissible deviation values are:
Max. temp.
Factor
increase
• due to fouling of turbocharger (incl. air intake filters), and + 30°C
exhaust uptake, see also Chapter 701, Item TC 8707
• due to fouling of air coolers + 10°C
• due to deteriorated mechanical condition (estimate) + 10°C
• due to climatic (ambient) conditions + 45°C
• due to operation on heavy fuel, etc. + 15°C
Total 110°C
Regarding increasing exhaust temperatures, see also Section 706-02.
For new engines it is not unusual to observe a temperature increase of 50–60°C

from the testbed to the commissioning test.
This is due to the operation on heavy fuel oil and altered climatic
conditions.
If the temperature increases further during service:
• Find the cause of the temperature increase.

• Clean, repair or overhaul the components in question at the first opportunity, to
improve the engine performance.
T h e exh a ust te m p e r atur e m u st not exc e e d th e a l a r m limit,

see Section 701-02.
To evaluate the exhaust temperature correctly, it is important to distinguish

between:
• Exhaust temperature increase due to fouling and mechanical condition, and

• Exhaust temperature increase due to climatic alterations.
The method to distinguish between the factors is shown in the example:
MAN Diesel A/S
Example:
According to a model curve, the exhaust temperature (approx. 95% engine load)
should be 375°C. The observed exhaust temperature is 425°C.
Correct texhv according to Plate 70621:

Air inlet temp. (tinl) = 42°C corresponding to (42 – 25) = 17°C above the reference
value.
Cooling water inlet temp. to the air cooler (t coolinl) = 40°C, corresponding to
(40 – 25) = 15°C above the reference value.
Using the curves, the following temperature corrections are obtained:
Correction due to increased engine room temperature: –27.0°C

Correction due to increased cooling water inlet temp. –6.0°C
Total –33.0°C
Distinguish between the factors:

The total exhaust temp. increase of 425°C – 375°C = 50°C, is caused by:
• an increase of 33.0°C on account of climatic alterations,

• an increase of 50°C – 33°C = 17°C, due to mechanical conditions and operation
on heavy fuel oil.
MAN Diesel A/S
Turbocharger Efficiency 706-07
1. General
To record the turbocharger efficiencies, see Section 706-02.
Plate 70609 shows model curves for compressor and turbine efficiencies,
based on the scavenge air pressure.
For general evaluation of the engine performance, it is unnecessary to calculate

turbocharger efficiencies.
However, if such calculations are desired, they can be carried out as described
below.
2. Calculating the Efficiencies

The total turbocharger efficiency is the product of the compressor, turbine, and
mechanical efficiencies.
However, the last one has almost no effect on the efficiency calculations, and is
therefore omitted.
When calculating the turbocharger efficiency, it is necessary to distinguish be-

tween:
• Plants without turbo compound system (TCS) and exhaust by-pass.

• Plants with TCS and/or exhaust by-pass.
2.1 Plants without TCS and Exhaust By-Pass

Measure the parameters listed in Table 1.
It is essential that, as far as possible, the measurements are taken

simultaneously.
Convert all pressures to the same unit.
About conversion factors, see Section 706-01:
Unit Examples of Measurements
Barometric pressure pbaro bar 1.022 bar

Pressure drop, air cooler ∆pc bar 0.0168 bar
Temperature before compr. tinl °C 21°C
Turbocharger speed n rpm 11950 rpm
Scavenge air pressure pscav bar 2.533 bar *)
Exhaust receiver pressure pexh bar 2.393 bar *)
Pressure after turbine patc bar 0.026 bar *)
Temperature before turbine tbtc °C 400°C
Table: Measurements for calculation of efficiencies *) “Gauge” Pressure
MAN Diesel A/S
706-07 Turbocharger Efficiency
Note that the official designation of bar (HPa) is “absolute pressure”.
Total Efficiency:
The total efficiency ηtot is given by the equation
Example:
MF : Fuel mass flow injected for combustion: 0.88 kg/g
MX : Exhaust gas mass flow through turbine: 48.05 kg/g
MA : Air mass flow through compressor
MA = MX – M F
MA × T1 × (R10.286 – 1)
ηtot = 0.9265 MX × T2 × (1 – R20.265)
if MA or MX unknown:
MA
≈ 0,9817
MX
Example of Calculation, ηtot

See measurements in Table 1
T1 = tinl + 273,15 T1 = 21 + 273,15 = 294,,15 K
pbaro + pscav + ∆pc R1 =

1,022 + 2,533 + 0,017
= 3,495
R1 =
pbaro 1,022
T2 = tbtc + 273,15 T2 = 400 + 273,15 = 673,15 K
pbaro + patc 1,022 + 0,026
R2 = R2 = = 0,307
pbaro + pexh 1,022 + 2,393
(R10.286–1) H (R10,286 –1) = 0,430
(1 – R20.265) H (1 – R10,265) = 0,269
MX = 48,05 kg/g
MA × T1 × (R10.286 – 1)
ηtot = 0.9265 MX × T2 × (1 – R20.265) MA=48,05 – 0,88 = 47,17 kg/g
47,17 × 294,15 × 0,430
η=0,9265 x = 0,64
48,05 × 673,15 × 0,269
MAN Diesel A/S
Turbocharger Efficiency 706-07
Compressor efficiency:
The compressor efficiency ηcompr is given by the equation
3628800 × T1 (R10.286 – 1)
ηcompr =
µ × U2
µ = slip factor, see Plate 70628
U2 = (π × D × n)2
D = Diameter of compressor wheel, see Plate 70628
n = is the peripheral speed of the compressor wheel.
The turbocharger used in this example is a MAN B&W, type TCA77.
From Plate 70628 is taken:

D = 0,752 m
µ = 0,745
Example of Calculation, ηcompr
See measurements in Table 1
T1 = tinl + 273,15 ºK 21 + 273,15 = 294,15 K

pbaro + pscav + ∆pc 1,022 + 2,533 + 0,017
R1 = = 3,495
pbaro 1,022
(R10.286–1)* = 0,430
U2 = (p × D × n )2 (π × 0,752 × 11950)2 = 797022356
3628800 × T1 (R10.286 – 1) 3628800 × 294 × 0,430

ηcompr = = 0,77
µ × U2 0,745 × 797022356
* Determine the values of the expressions (R10.286 –1) and (1– R2 0.265).
Use a mathematical calculator or use the curves in Plates 70625 and 70626.
Turbine efficiency:
The turbine efficiency ηturb appears from
ηtotal = ηcompr × ηturb
i.e. ηturb = ηtotal =
0.64
= 0.83
ηcompr 0,77
2.2 Plants with TCS and/or Exhaust By-Pass
MA × T1 × (R10.286 – 1)
The equation ηtotal = 0.9265 stated in item 2.1 is based on
MX × T2 × (1 – R20.265)
a situation where the mass flow through the turbine is equal to the mass flow
through the compressor plus the fuel oil amount.
MAN Diesel A/S
706-07 Turbocharger Efficiency
If a TCS or an exhaust by-pass is fitted, the mass flow through the turbine is re-
duced by the mass flow through the TCS or the exhaust by-pass.
The mass flows through the turbine and the TCS or through the turbine and the
exhaust by-pass are proportional to the effective areas in the turbines or the orifice
in the exhaust by-pass.
Calculate the turbocharger efficiency as described in Item 2.1 ‘Plants without TCS
and exhaust by-pass’.
Then correct the results in accordance with the following:
Total efficiency:
Aeff + aeff
ηtot TCS/by-pass = ηtot × Aeff
where
Aeff = Effective area in turbocharger turbine
aeff = Effective area in TCS or exhaust by-pass.
See also ‘Remarks’, below
Turbine Efficiency:
Aeff + aeff
ηturb TCS/by-pass = ηturb × Aeff
See also ‘Remarks’, below
Compressor Efficiency:
ηcompr is unchanged, as it is not affected by whether the plant operates with TCS/
by-pass or not.
Remarks
Aeff + aeff
The relation can vary from plant to plant, but is most often about 1.07.
Aeff
This value can be used when evaluating the trend of the efficiency in service.
Aeff + aeff
When using a computer program in which the relation is not introduced,
Aeff
the value for ηtot and ηturb will have to be multiplied by the above-mentioned factor
of about 1.07.
MAN Diesel A/S
Estimation of the Effective Engine Power
without Indicator Diagrams 706-08
1. General
The estimation is based on nomograms involving engine parameter measurements

made on testbed.
The nomograms are shown in Plate 70627. The following relationships are illus-
trated:
Chart I • fuel index and mean effective pressure.
Chart II • mean effective pressure and effective engine power (kW), with the
engine speed as a parameter.
Chart III • turbocharger speed and effective engine power (kW), with the
scavenge air temperature and ambient pressure as parameters.
A condition for using these charts is that the engine timing and turbocharger
matching are unchanged from the testbed.
2. Methods
2.1 Fuel Index (an approximate method)
Chart I: Draw a horizontal line from the observed fuel index to the nomogram
curve, and then a vertical line down to the observed engine speed on
Chart II. From this intersection a horizontal line is drawn to the effective engine
power scale, i.e. 12,100 kW.
This method should only be used as a quick (rough) estimation, because the fuel
oil, as well as the condition of the fuel pump, may have great effect on the index.
In particular, worn fuel pumps or suction valves tend to increase the index, and will
thus result in a too high power estimation.
2.2 Turbocharger Speed (A more accurate method)
Chart III: Draw a horizontal line from the observed tscav value and an inclined line
from the observed turbocharger speed.
From the intersection point, draw a vertical line down to the nomogram curve and
then a horizontal line to the vertical line from the observed ambient pressure (point
x in the ambient pressure scale).
Finally, a line is drawn parallel with the inclined ‘ambient pressure correction’ lines.
The effective engine power can then be read on the scale at the right hand side,
i.e. 11,600 kW.
This method is more reliable, and an accuracy to within ± 3% can be expected.

However, the accuracy obtained will depend on the condition of the engine and
turbocharger. A fouled or eroded turbocharger will in most cases tend to decrease
MAN Diesel A/S
Estimation of the Effective Engine Power
706-08 without Indicator Diagrams
the turbocharger speed, and thus result in a too low power estimation. This situ-
ation is characterized by increased exhaust gas temperatures and a decreased
scavenge air pressure.
It is recommended to apply PMI-system, for easy access to P-V-diagrams (work

diagrams) for power calculation. See also Section 706-05.
MAN Diesel A/S
Load Diagram for Propulsion alone Plate 70601
Engine shaft power,

per cent of power A
110 100% ref. point (A)

105 Specified MCR (M)
A=M
100 7
5
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
55
8 4 1 6 3
50
9
2
45
40
60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110
Engine speed,
per cent of speed A
Line 1: Propeller curve through point A – layout curve for engine
Line 2: Propeller curve – heavy running, recommended limit

for fouled hull at calm weather conditions
Line 3: Speed limit
Line 4: Torque/speed limit
Line 5: Mean effective pressure limit
Line 6: Propeller curve – light running (range: 3.0-7.0%)

for clean hull and calm weather conditions – for propeller layout
Line 7: Power limit for continuous running
Line 8: Overload limit
Line 9: Speed limit at sea trial.
Plant specific calculations can be prepared by contacting MAN B&W Diesel A/S.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Load Diagram for Propulsion and
Main Engine Driven Generator Plate 70602
Engine shaft power,

per cent of power A
110 100% ref. point (A)

105 Specified MCR (M)
A
100 5 7
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
1)
55 SG
8 4 1 6 3
50
9
2A 2
45
40
60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110
Engine speed,
per cent of speed A
Line 1: Propeller curve through point A – layout curve for engine
Line 2: Propeller curve for propulsion alone – heavy running, recommended

limit for fouled hull at calm weather conditions
Line 2A: Engine service curve for heavy running propulsion (line 2) and shaft generator (SG)
Line 3: Speed limit
Line 4: Torque/speed limit
Line 5: Mean effective pressure limit
Line 6: Propeller curve for propulsion alone – light running (range: 3.0 - 7.0%),
for clean hull and calm weather conditions - for propeller layout
Line 7: Power limit for continuous running
Line 8: Overload limit
Line 9: Speed limit at sea trial.
1) Note: The propeller curve for propulsion alone is found by subtracting the actual shaft generator power
(incl. generator efficiency) from the effective engine power at maintained speed.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Plate 70603
Performance Observations Page 1 (2)
SERVICE Engine Type: Name of vessel:

DATA (ME)
Engine Builder: Engine No.: Yard:
Layout kW: Layout RPM: Engine Mode: Sign.: Test No.:
Turbocharger(s) No. of TC: Serial No. No. of Cyl.: Bore, m: Stroke, m:
Make: Type: 1 Cylinder Constant, (HP,bar): Mean Friction. Press., bar:
Max. RPM: Max. Temp., °C: 2 Lubrication Oil System (Tick box)
Compr. Slip Factor: Compr. Diam., m: 3 Internal External from External from
TC specification: 4 M. E. System Gravity Tank
Observation No:
Fuel Oil Viscosity: at: °C Brand Type
Bunker Station: Cylinder Oil
Oil Brand: Heat value, kcal/kg: Circulating Oil
Density at 15 °C: Sulphur, %: Turbo Oil
Ambient Fuel Index Speed VIT
Test Date Test Hour Load Engine Total Running
Pressure ECU Setting Control
RPM Hours
(yyyy-mm-dd) (hh:mm) % mbar % RPM
bar
Effective Effective Indicated Eff. Fuel Eff. Fuel Draft Fore, m Log Knots Wind, m/s Direction, °
Power Power Power Consumption Consumption
BHP kW kW g/BHPh g/kWh Draft Aft, m Obs. Knots Wave Height, m Direction, °
Cylinder No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Ave.

Pi, bar
Pmax, bar
Ref. Pmax, bar
Pcomp, bar
Fuel Index Offset, HIGH Load
Fuel Index Offset, LOW Load
Pmax Adjustment, bar
Pcomp Ratio (Pcomp/Pscav)
Exh. Valve Open Timing, °CA
(Correction value)
Exhaust Gas Temp., °C
Cooling Water Outlet Temp., °C
Piston Outlet Lub. Temp., °C
Cooling Water Temperature, °C Exhaust Gas Temp., °C Exhaust Pressure Turbo Aux. Scavenge Air Pressure
Charger Blower Ÿp Filter Ÿp Cooler
Air Cooler Main Engine Turbine Receiver Turb. Outl. Receiver
Inlet Outlet Inlet Turb. Outlet Inlet Outlet bar mmWC RPM On/Off mmWc mmWc bar
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Seaw. mmHg Axial mmHg
2 2 Temp. 2 2 2 2 2 Vibration 2 2
mm
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Ave. Ave. Ave. Ave. Ave. Ave. Ave. Ave. Ave.
Scavenge Air Temperature, °C Lubricating Oil Fuel Oil Pressure Hydraulic Pressure
Scav. Inlet Blower Before Cooler After Cooler Pressure, bar Temperature, °C bar bar
Air 1 1 1 System Oil TC Inlet / TC Outlet / Before Filter Before Filter
Temp.
Blower end Turb. end
°C 2 2 2 Cooling Oil 1 1 After Filter After Filter
3 3 3 Turbine Oil 2 2 Temperature, °C Main Pressure

Before Pumps
4 4 4 Temperature, °C 3 3 Swash Plate Position, %
Inlet Engine 1 2
Ave. Ave. Ave. 4 4
Thrust Segment 3 4
Ave. Ave.
Remarks:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Plate 70603
Page 2 (2) Performance Observations
TESTBED Engine Type: Water Brake: No.: Constant, K: BHP/Kg.RPM

DATA Engine Builder: Engine No.: Yard:
Layout BHP: Layout RPM: Entry Date: Sign: Test No.:
Turbochargers(s): Nos.: Serial No.: No. of cyl.: Bore (m): Stroke (m):
Make: 1 Cylinder Constant (HP,bar)
Type: 2 Governor: Type:
Max. RPM: 3 TC specification:
Max. Temp. °C: 4 MFP: Compr. Slip Factor: Compr. Diameter:
Lub. Oil System:
Observation No:
Fuel Oil Viscosity: at: °C Brand Type
Bunker Station: Cylinder Oil
Oil Brand: Heat value, kcal/kg: Circulating Oil
Density at 15 °C: Sulphur, %: Turbo Oil
VIT
Ambient Water Brake Governor Speed
Test Date Test Hour Load Engine Control
Pressure Load Index Setting
RPM Press.
(yyyy-mm-dd) (hh:mm) % mbar Kg bar bar
Effective Effective Indicated Eff. Fuel Eff. Fuel Indicated Fuel Indicated Fuel
Power Power Power Consumption Consumption Consumption Consumption
BHP kW kW g/BHPh g/kWh g/IHPh g/kWh
Cylinder No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Ave.

Pi, bar
Pmax, bar
Ref. Pmax, bar
Pcomp, bar
Fuel Pump Index
VIT Index
Exhaust Gas Temp. °C
Cooling Water Outlet Temp. °C
Piston Outlet Lub. Temp. °C
Cooling Water Temperature °C Exhaust Gas Temp. °C Exhaust Pressure Turbo Aux. Scavenge Air Pressure
Charger Blower
Air Cooler Main Engine Turbine Receiver Turb. Outl. Ÿp Filter Ÿp Cooler Receiver
Inlet Outlet Inlet Turb. Outlet Inlet Outlet bar mmWC RPM On/Off mmWc mmWc bar
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Seaw. mmHg Axial mmHg
2 2 Temp. 2 2 2 2 2 Vibration 2 2
mm
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Ave. Ave. Ave. Ave. Ave. Ave. Ave. Ave. Ave.
Scavenge Air Temperature °C Lubricating Oil Fuel Oil Pressure

Scav. Air Inlet Blower Before Cooler After Cooler Pressure, bar Temperature, °C Temperature, °C bar
1 1 1 System Oil Inlet Engine TC Inlet / TC Outlet / Before Filter
Blower end Turb. end
2 2 2 Cooling Oil Inlet Camshaft 1 1 After Filter
3 3 3 Camshaft Oil Outlet Camshaft 2 2 Temperature, °C

Before Pumps
4 4 4 Turbine Oil Thrust Segment 3 3
Ave. Ave. Ave. 4 4
Remarks:
Ave. Ave.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
EXHAUST TEMPERATURE,
g
measured at turbocharger
inlet
EXHAUST TEMPERATURE increasing on
pp
all cylinders indicates: EXHAUST TEMPERATURE increasing

a) Air system fouled. on a single cylinder indicates:
(air filter / blower / cooler / a) Fuel valves need overhaul
scavenge ports) b) Compression pressure too low
b) Exhaust system fouled. owing to exhaust valve leakage
(nozzle ring / turbine wheel / or blow-by past piston rings
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

exhaust gas boiler)
, gg g
MEAN INDICATED PRESSURE

g ggg
Measured by indicator cards,

which also give compression
and max. combustion pressure
qp ypg ygg
INLET AIR TEMPERATURE

Rising ambient temperature will give
increasing exhaust temperatures.
qyp pp gp
PRESSURES in combustion chamber.

Will be reduced by piston ring blow-by
burnt piston top; wear; leaking exhaust
valve; defective fuel valves; etc.
), g ggpg
g
PRESSURE DROP across air filter. SCAVENGE AIR TEMPERATURE

Rising scavenge air temperature will
(
Increasing p indicates fouling.

y ggyq g gp pyg pp
Cleaning required when p is 50% give increasing exhaust temperature.

gp;
greater than on testbed.

p;
y
g g
PRESSURE DROP across air cooler.

g
Increasing p indicates fouling of air
side. Cleaning required when p is
50% greater than on testbed.
Readings relating to Thermodynamic Conditions
py ; g p
SCAVENGE AIR PRESSURE

Decreasing air pressure implies
) )
TEMPERATURE RISE of cooling water

)
decreasing air quantity and indicates

increasing temperature difference fouling of air or gas system.
indicates reduced water flow.
; y
TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE
air after cooler and at water inlet.
Increasing temperature difference
indicates fouled air cooler.
(
Plate 70604
M/V Engine Type Checked by:
Builder No. Time based Deviation Charts
Date:
Yard Built year
ge
ng
ght
m8
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

edmean
Mean
All the model curves are based on test results 4
draught
(ballasted)
from shop trial or sea trial.

(full loaded)
1 2
Directions for use: 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running
hours
Service results are plotted faintly in the Model
Bar
Curve diagrams. The vertical deviations are
indicated pressure, pi
transferred to the pertaining Time based 20

Deviation-chart (on the right hand side).
15
cated pressure
Average mean indi-
10
2 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running
0 hours
RPM RPM
Synopsis Diagrams – for engine
Draught (full loaded)

130
Draught (ballasted)
120 5
Model curves + time based deviation chart for: r/min as a function of pi.
110
100
0
Testbed
Engine revolutions
90
Engine revolution deviation
Bar 3
Time based deviation charts for: mean draught and average mean indicated pressure (pi).
80 -5
0 5 10 15 20 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running
hours
Page 1 (2)
Plate 70605
Average mean indicated pressure, pi

Plate 70605
Page 2 (2) Synopsis Diagrams – for engine
Time based deviation charts for: mean draught and average mean indicated pressure (pi).
Model curves + time based deviation chart for: r/min as a function of pi.
Checked by:
Running hours
Running hours
Running hours
Date:
Time based Deviation Charts
No.
Engine Type
Built year
Builder
2
4
6
m8
20
Bar
15
RPM
10
-5
5
draught
M/V
Mean cated pressure Engine revolution deviation

Yard
2
1
Average mean indi-
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Date:
Yard Built year
Bar Bar
gg
150
+5
140
130
p
120 0
110
Average Pmax (corrected)

,p
100
90 -5
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Bar 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running

hours
Index Index
pmax and fuel index as a function of pi
100
90
+3
Model curves and time based deviation chart for:
80
70 0
60
-3
Average fuel index

50
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Bar 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running

hours
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Page 1 (2)
Plate 70606
Plate 70606
Time based deviation chart for:
pmax and fuel index
g
Checked by:
Date:
Running hours
Running hours
No.
Engine Type
Built year
Builder
Bar
Index
-5
-3
+5
0
+3
Pmax deviation Fuel index deviation

M/V
Yard
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Date:
Yard Built year
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

°C
°C 40
gp
450
,
20
400
350
-20
Average exhaust temp. (corrected)

300
8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running
Effective power, Pe BHP hours
texhv and pcomp as a function of pe
Bar Bar
130
120
3
110
100 0
90
-3
80
Average compression pressure (corrected)

70
8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running
hours
Page 1 (2)
Plate 70607
Effective power, Pe BHP

Plate 70607
texhv and pcomp
À!À20 hours
20
40
À!À3
3
r0
Running
Checked by:
Date: m
P
cp
n
o
ia
vtd
xh
e a
B
C
À
Running hours
Running hours
No.
Engine Type
Built year
Builder
-20
0
40
20
Bar
-3
3
Pcomp deviation
°C
texhv deviation
M/V
Yard
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Date:
Yard Built year
gp
3.5 0.2
Bar Bar
3 0.1
gg p
2.5 0
p,
-0.1
(corrected)
2
1.5 -0.2
Scavenge air pressure

1 -0.3
8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running
Effective power, Pe BHP hours
rpm rpm
12000 1000
pscav as a function of pe
10000 500
8000 0
Turbocharger rpm
6000 -500
T/C r/min and ∆pf as a function of pscav
4000
Synopsis Diagrams – for turbocharger
1 2 3 Bar 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running

Scavenge air pressure hours
mmWC 50 mmWC
40 20
30 10
20 0
10 -10
T/C air filter intake

Pressure drop across
0 -20
1 2 3 Bar 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Page 1 (2)
Plate 70608

Plate 70608
Page 2 (2) Synopsis Diagrams – for turbocharger
pscav T/C r/min and ∆ pf
Checked by:
p g
Date:
Running hours
Running hours
Running hours
No.
Engine Type
Built year
Builder
-20
-0.1
-500
-0.3
500
1000
-10
rpm
-0.2
mmWC
0.1
20
10
0
0.2
∆ pf deviation
Bar
Pscav deviation T/C rpm deviation T/C air filter

M/V
Yard
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

Date:
Yard Built year
g
η comp ηcomp
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

gg
0.82
p
0.80 0.02
0.78
0.76 0
compressor
0.74
0.72 -0.02
1 2 3 Bar 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running

η turb
ηturb
0.82
Synopsis Diagrams – for turbocharger
0.80 0.02
0.78
0.76 0
turbine
Compressor and turbine efficiencies as a function of pscav
0.74
0.72 -0.02
1 2 3 Bar 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running

Page 1 (2)
Plate 70609

Plate 70609
Page 2 (2) Synopsis Diagrams – for turbocharger
compressor and turbine efficiencies
Checked by:
F
lp
fuA
rg
n
vito
em
P
xd
aÀ!À5
r+5
a
!B
À
3
+
x0
e
dRunning
In hours
Running hours
Running hours
Date:
No.
l
Engine Type
Built year
Builder
comp
0.02
-0.02
-0.02
0.02
0
0
turb
η
Compressor efficiency deviation Turbine efficiency deviation

M/V
Yard
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

Date:
Yard Built year
16 °C
°C
gg
14 20
10
p
12
10 0
∆t (air-water)
8 -10
outlet and water inlet)

6
(Temp. diff. between air

1 2 3 Bar 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running
hours
°C °C
20 10
15 5
10 0
5 -5
across cooler
Water temp. diff.
Synopsis Diagrams – for air cooler
0
1 2 3 Bar 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Running
hours
tair-water, twater, and pair, as a function of pscav

mmWC mmWC
200 75
150 50
100 25
50 0
drop across cooler

0 - 25
1 2 3 Bar
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
2000 2500 Running
Page 1 (2)
Plate 70610
0 500 1000 1500 hours

Plate 70610
Page 2 (2) Synopsis Diagrams – for air cooler
∆ tair-water ∆ twater and ∆ pair
Checked by:
g g
Date:
Running hours
Running hours
Running hours
No.
Engine Type
Built year
Builder
25
-10
0
0
20
10
10
75
50
-25
0
5
°C
°C
-5
mmWC
∆ ∆ ∆ pair
t air-water deviations t water deviations deviations
M/V
Yard
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Specific Fuel Oil Consumption –
Correction for Fuel Temperature (Density) and
Sulphur Content (Calorific Value) Plate 70611
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Dry Cleaning of Turbocharger
(Turbine side) Plate 70612
Dry cleaning is carried out under high en- It is recommended to perform the clean-
gine load (50% - 100%). ing with granules every one to two
days.
1 Compressed air pipe

2 Screw plug
3 Granulate container
4 Pipe
5 Connection flange
6 Adapter
7 Gas-admission casing
8 Gas outlet casing
9 Turbine wheel
10 Nozzle ring
A Stop cock (compressed air)
B Stop cock (exhaust gas)
Dry wash operation: T/C type Amount [liter]
1. Open valve A and B, in order to vent TCR22 0.5

the granulate container for possible TCA55 1.0
deposits or condensate.
TCA66 1.5
2. Close valve A and B. Fill the conainer TCA77 2.0
with the specified amount of granules TCA88 2.5
and shut the container tight.
TCA99 3.0
3. Slowly open valve A. Then open valve MET33 0.4
B to blow the granulate into the tur MET42 0.7
bine. MET53 1.6
4. After 1 to 2 minutes, close valves B MET60 2.1
and A. MET66 2.6
MET71 3.0
MET83 3.5
MET90 3.5
TPL69 1.0
TPL73 1.0
TPL77 1.5
TPL80 2.0
TPL85 3.0
TPL91 3.5
MAN Diesel A/S
Wet Cleaning of Turbocharger
(Turbine side) Plate 70613
Wet cleaning of the turbine is carried A general recommendation is to per-

out during operation at reduced engine form cleaning every 250 operating
load in order to avoid overstressing of hours.
the turbine blades (thermal shock)
Type TCR 22 TCA 33 TCA 44 TCA 55 TCA 66 TCA 77 TCA 88 TCA 99

Exh. gas tempera-
ture before Turbine ≤ 320 ≤ 320 ≤ 320 ≤ 320 ≤ 320 ≤ 320 ≤ 320 ≤ 320
[°C]
Turbocharger
≤ 12 000 ≤ 15 500 ≤ 13 000 ≤ 11 000 ≤ 9 500 ≤ 8 000 ≤ 7 000 ≤ 5 500
Speed [rpm]
1 Washing water
A
2 Pressure gauge
3 Nozzles
4 Gas-admission casing

5 Nozzle ring

6 Turbine wheel

7 Washing water drain

8 Drain funnel
A Water stop cock

" B Drainage cock
• Use fresh water without any The washing water collects in the gas-
chemical additives whatsoever. outlet casing and runs through the
washing water outlet and the drainage
• The washing duration is 10 to 20 cock. The washing water is conducted
minutes (until clean water comes via a funnel to a sediment tank and col-
out of the dirt-water outlet lected there.
openings).
The funnel enables the visual inspection
The wash water flows through the stop of the washing water. The cleaning pro-
cock with a water pressure of 2-3 bar cedure is completed once the washing
into the gas-admission casing. The water remains clean.
washing nozzles spray the water in
front of the turbine. The droplets of the
washing water bounce against the noz-
zle ring and the turbine where they wear
off contamination.
MAN Diesel A/S
Air Cooler Cleaning System (Option) Plate 70614
Nom. diam. 25 mm
Air cooler Air cooler
To bilge
F.W. (from hydrophor)
Re-circulation
Nom. diam. 50 mm Orifice
Filter 1 mm Nom. diam. 50 mm
Drain from air cooler

cleaning & water mist
catcher in air cooler
Chemical clean. tank
Heating coil *
Circulating pump Sludge pump suction
* Capacity for heating coils according to

requirement from supplier of the chemical
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Normal Indicator Diagram Plate 70615
K/L-MC Engines:
(
p
p
Indicator diagram
(p-v diagram, Draw diagram
working diagram)
Ignition Ignition
C
om
Combustion
bu
on
sti
s i
es
on
pr
Ex
om
pa
C
ns
p comp
io
p max
n
Exp
Co
m ans
pr ion
es
sion
Atmospheric line
Top dead centre
Bottom dead centre
Compression pressure
Maximum combustion
pcomp
pressure p max
Length of indicator diagram =
Length of atmospheric line
S-MC Engines:
For this type of engine it has been necessary to delay the point of ignition to 2-3° after
TDC, in order to keep the pressure rise, pcomp - pmax, within the specified 35 bar, while
still maintaining optimum combustion and thereby low SFOC.
Due to this delay in ignition, the draw diagram will often show two pressure peaks, as
shown in the figure below.
cÙ
mÙ
p
pcomp
max
p
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Correction to ISO Reference Ambient Conditions Plate 70620
Maximum Combustion Pressure

Correction of measured pmax
because of deviations between tinl / tcoolinl and standard conditions
,
()g
p
Correction bar Measured pmax.
160 bar 140 bar
120 bar
t inl.
100 bar
80 bar
t inl
t
coolinl.
Measured p
max
80 bar
100 bar
120 bar
t coolinl.
140 bar
160 bar
Air inlet temp. (t )

inl.
Cooling water inlet temp., air cooling (t coolinl. )
Calculating the corrections:
tinl : Acorr = (tmeas -25) x 2.198 x 10-3 x (1+ Ameas) Bar
tcoolinl : Acorr = (tmeas -25) x -0.810 x 10-3 x (1 + Ameas) Bar
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Exhaust Temperature (after exhaust valves)
Correction of measured exhaust temperature (texhv)

Correction
°C
t inl
t
coolinl.
Measured t exh
325 °C
tcoolinl. 425 °C
t inl. Measured t exh.
Air inlet temp. (t ) 425 °C 325 °C

inl.
Cooling water inlet temp., air cooling (t linl.
)
tinl : Acorr = (tmeas – 25) x 2.466 x 10 -3 x (273+ Ameas) ˚C
tcoolinl : Acorr = (tmeas – 25) x -0.590 x 10-3 x (273 + Ameas) ˚C
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Compression Pressure
Correction of measured compression pressure
,
()g
p
Correction bar Measured p
comp.
140 bar 120 bar
t inl. 100 bar
80 bar
t inl
t coolinl.
Measured pcomp.
80 bar
tcoolinl.
100 bar
120 bar
140 bar
Air inlet temp. (t inl.)

Cooling water inlet temp., air cooling (t coolinl.)
tinl : Acorr = (tmeas -25) x 2.954 x 10-3 x (1+ Ameas) Bar
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Scavenge Pressure
Correction of measured scavenge pressure
,
p
()g
Correction bar
Measured p
scav.
3.5 bar 3.0 bar
2.5 bar
2.0 bar
t inl.
1.5 bar
1.0 bar
t inl
t coolinl.
Measured p
scav.
1.0 bar
1.5 bar
tcoolinl
t inl. 2.0 bar
2.5 bar
3.0 bar
Air inlet temp. (t inl. ) 3.5 bar

tinl : Acorr = (tmeas -25) x 2.856 x 10-3 x (1 + Ameas) Bar
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Example of readings:pmax : 140 bar pscav : 2.0 bar

texhv : 425 °C tinl : 42 °C
pcomp : 110 bar tcoolinl : 40 °C
Correction bar Measured p max. Correction
°C
160 bar 140 bar
120 bar
pmax t inl. texhv

100 bar
80 bar
t inl
t coolinl.
t inl.
t coolinl. Measured t exh.
Measured pmax
80 bar 325 °C
100 bar tcoolinl. 425 °C
t coolinl. 120 bar

140 bar
160 bar
t inl.
Measured t exh.
Air inlet temp. (t inl.)

Air inlet temp. (t inl.) 425 °C 325 °C
Correction for tinl : +5.3 bar Correction for tinl : -27 °C

Correction for tcoolinl : - 1.7 bar Correction for tcoolinl : - 6 °C
Correction 5.3-1.7 : +3.6 bar Correction -29 -6 : - 33 °C
,
()g
p ,
()g
p
Correction bar Measured p Correction bar
comp.
Measured p scav.
140 bar 120 bar
3.5 bar 3.0 bar
pcomp 100 bar pscav 2.5 bar
t inl.
2.0 bar
80 bar t
inl.
1.5 bar
1.0 bar
t inl
t coolinl.
Measured p
scav.
t inl
tcoolinl.
1.0 bar
1.5 bar
Measured pcomp.
80 bar tcoolinl
t inl. 2.0 bar
tcoolinl. 2.5 bar

100 bar
3.0 bar
120 bar
Air inlet temp. (t inl.) 3.5 bar
140 bar
Air inlet temp. (t inl. )

Correction for tinl : +5.6 bar Correction for tinl : +0.145 bar
Correction for tcoolinl : - 2.5bar Correction for tcoolinl : - 0.1 bar
Correction 5.6-2.5 : +3.1 bar Correction 0.145-0.1 : +0.045 bar
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Calculation of Compressor Efficiency Plate 70625
Curve for the factor (R1 0.286-1)
R1
3.502
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
-1)
0.286
1
(R
1.5
0.4311
0.12
0.4
0.3
0.2
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Calculation of Total Turbocharger Efficiency Plate 70626
Curve for the factor (1–R2 0.265)
R2
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.307
0.3
)
0.265
2
(1-R
0.2
0.2688
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Power Estimation Plate 70627
Engine RPM
Fuel Pump
Index
kW
Ambient Pressure
Scavenge
Temp.
Deg.C
Air
Estimation of Effective Engine
X
Power for 7L60MC
T/C speed / 100 rpm
MAN Diesel A/S
Turbocharger Compressor Wheel Diameter and
Slip Factor Plate 70628
Turbocharger Make: MAN B&W
Type Designation Diameter, D (m) No. of Blades Slip Factor, µ
NR 24/R 0.276 – 0.76
NR 26/R 0.324 – 0.75
NA 34/S 0.408 – 0.70
NA 40/S 0.480 20 0.70
NA 48/S 0.576 20 0.70
NA 57/T9 0.684 20 0.70

0.684 18 0.74
NA 70/T9 0.840 22 0.76

0.840 18 0.74
Turbocharger Make: MAN B&W
Type Designation Diameter, D(m) Slip Factor

TCR18 0.264 0.727
TCR20 0.318 0.727
TCR22 0.415 0.727
TCA44 0.449 0.745
TCA55 0.533 0.745
TCA66 0.633 0.745
TCA77 0.752 0.745
TCA88 0.893 0.745
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Turbocharger Compressor Wheel Diameter and
Plate 70628 Slip Factor
Turbocharger Make: BBC / ABB
Type Diameter, Slip Type Diameter, Slip

Designation D (m) Factor µ Designation D (m) Factor µ
VTR254 0.2943 TPL65-A10 0.3390
VTR304 0.3497 TPL69-BA10 0.3999
VTR354 0.4157 TPL73-B11 0.4879
VTR 454D-VA12 0.5233 TPL73-B12 0.5065
VTR 454D-VA13 0.5756 TPL77-B11 0.5799

0.69
VTR 564D-VA12 0.6588 0.77 TPL77-B12 0.6020
VTR 564D-VA13 0.7247 TPL80-B11 0.6729
VTR 714D-VA12 0.8294 TPL80-B12 0.6985
VTR 714D-VA13 0.9123 TPL85-B11 0.8239
TPL85-B12 0.8553
TPL91-B12 0,9430 0,69
Turbocharger Make: Mitsubishi H.I. (MET)
Type Diameter, Slip Factor µ

Designation D (m)
I m p e l l e r P r o f i le V, S or R V S or R
Impeller Size 2 3 2 3 2 3
MET33SD,SE 0.352 0.373
MET42SD,SE 0.436 0.462
MET53SD,SE 0.553 0.586
MET66SD,SE 0.689 0.730 0.72 0.69
MET71SE 0,790
MET83SD,SE 0.873 0.924
MET90SE 1,02
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Operation Chapter Plate 70628, Edition 0003
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Cylinder Condition Chapter 707
Table of Contents
707-01 Cylinder Condition

1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Piston Ring Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Scavenge Port Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.3 Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.3.A Piston Rings: In good Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.3.B Piston Rings: Micro-seizure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.3.C Piston Rings: Scratched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.3.D Piston Rings: Sticking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.3.E Piston Rings: Breakage/Collapse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.3.F Piston Rings: Blow-by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.3.G Deposits on Pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.3.H Lubricating Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.4 Replacement of Piston Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4. Cylinder Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.1 Intervals between Piston Pulling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2 Initial Inspection and Removal of the Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.3 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.4 Measurement of Ring Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.5 Inspection of Cylinder Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.5.A Cylinder Wear Measurements: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.5.B Correction of wear measurements:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.5.C Maximum Wear: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.5.D Checking Liner Surface: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.6 Piston Skirt, Crown and Cooling Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.7 Piston Ring Grooves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.8 Reconditioning the Running Surfaces of Liner, Rings and Skirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.9 Piston Ring Gap (New Rings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.10 Fitting of Piston Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.11 Piston Ring Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.12 Cylinder Lubrication and Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.13 Running-in of Liners and Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.13.ABreaking-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.13.BSpecial Remarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.13.CRunning-in of Rings after a Piston Overhaul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.13.DRunning-in of Liners and Rings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 707 Cylinder Condition
Table of Contents
5. Factors Influencing Cylinder Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.2 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.3 Cylinder Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.4 Corrosive Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5.4.A The Influence of Sulphur in the Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5.4.B Sodium Chloride . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5.4.C Cleaning Agents (Air Cooler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.4.D Water Condensation on Air Cooler Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.5 Abrasive Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.5.A Particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.5.B Scuffing (micro-seizure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.5.C Fuel Oil Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6. Propeller Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
707-02 Cylinder Lubrication

1. Lubricators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Cylinder Oil Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Cylinder Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
4. Cylinder Oil Feed Rate (dosage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4.2 Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4.3 Basic Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4.4 Alpha ACC (Adaptive Cylinder oil Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4.5 How to adjust the dosage according to the Alpha ACC principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Cylinder Condition Chapter 707
Table of Contents
707-03 Inspection of Nimonic Exhaust Valve Spindles

1. Spindle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Inspection Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3. Inspecting the Contact Condition of the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4. Checking the Seat for Gas Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5. Cleaning and Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6. Inspecting the Valve Stem Wear Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
7. Grinding the Spindle Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
8. Exhaust Valve Condition Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
PLATES
Inspection through Scavenge Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plates 70701-70705

Factors influencing Cylinder Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70706
Abrasive Particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plates 70707-70709
Cylinder oil Feed Rate during Running-in – S/K/L-ME/ME-C Engines . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70710
Cylinder Condition Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70711
Calculation of Condensate Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70712
Cylinder Lubricating Oil Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70713
Running-in Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70714
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Cylinder Condition 707-01
1. General
To obtain and maintain a good cylinder condition involves the optimisation of many
factors.
Since most of these factors can change during the service period – and can be in-
fluenced by service parameters within the control of the engine room staff – it is of
great importance that running conditions and developments are followed as close-
ly as possible.
By means of continual monitoring it is normally possible to quickly discover abnor-

malities, whereby countermeasures can be taken at an early stage.
In particular, it is advisable to regularly check the cylinder condition by means of

inspection through the scavenge ports – especially concentrating on the piston
ring condition. See Item 3.1 further on.
In order to cover all aspects, this chapter is divided into seven principal subjects –
each having a certain amount of topic overlap.
1. General
2. Piston Ring Function
3. Scavenge Port Inspection
4. Cylinder Overhaul
5. Factors Influencing Cylinder Wear
6. Propeller Performance
and a separate section dealing with: Cylinder Lubrication
2. Piston Ring Function

The function of the piston ring is to give a gas-tight sealing of the clearance be-
tween the piston and cylinder liner. This seal is brought about by the gas pressure
above and behind the piston ring, which forces it downwards, against the bottom
of the ring groove, and outwards against the cylinder wall.
In order to ensure optimum sealing, it is therefore important that the piston rings,
the grooves, and the cylinder walls, are of proper shape, and that the rings can
move freely in the grooves (since the piston will also make small horizontal move-
ments during the stroke).
The lubrication of the piston rings influences the sealing as well as the wear.
Experience has shown that unsatisfactory piston ring function is probably one of
the main factors contributing to poor cylinder condition. For this reason, regular
scavenge port observations are strongly recommended as a means of judging
how conditions are progressing, see Item 3.1 below. See also Item 3.4 ‘Replace-
ment of Piston Rings’
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
3. Scavenge Port Inspection

3.1 General
Regarding intervals between scavenge port inspection, see Vol. II, 900-1, ‘Check-
ing and Maintenance Schedules’.
This inspection provides useful information about the condition of cylinders, pis-
tons and rings, at low expense.
The inspection consists of visually examining the piston, the rings and the lower
part of the cylinder liner, directly through the scavenge air ports.
To reduce the risk of scavenge box fire, remove any oil sludge and carbon depos-
its in the scavenge air box and receiver in connection with the inspection.
The port inspection should be carried out at the first stop after a long voyage, e.g.
by anchoring if possible, to obtain the most reliable result with regard to the effec-
tiveness and sufficiency of the cylinder lubrication and the combustion cycle (com-
plete or incomplete).
A misleading result may be obtained if the port inspection is carried out after arrival
at harbour, since manoeuvring to the quay and low-load running, e.g river or canal
passage, requires increased cylinder oil dosage, i.e the cylinders are excessively
lubricated.
Further, during low load, the combustion cycle might not be as effective and com-
plete as expected, due to the actual fuel oil qualities and service (running) condi-
tion of the fuel injection equipment. It is highly recommended to take this informa-
tion into consideration.
3.2 Procedure
Scavenge port inspections are best carried out by two men, the most experienced
of whom inspects the surfaces, and states his observations to an assistant, who
records them. The assistant also operates the turning gear.
Keep the cooling water and cooling oil circulating, so that possible leakages can
be detected.
Block the starting air supply to the main starting valve.
Open the indicator valves. Engage the turning gear.
Remove the inspection covers on the fuel pump side of the cylinder frame, and
clean the openings. Remove the cover(s) on the scavenge air receiver.
Do not enter the scavenge air receiver before it has been thoroughly
ventilated.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Begin the inspection at the cylinder whose piston is nearest BDC.
· Inspect the piston, rings, and cylinder wall.

Wipe the running surfaces clean with a rag to ensure correct
assessment of the piston ring condition.
Use a powerful lamp to obtain a true impression of the details.
Regarding the sequence, see Plate 70701. Regarding description
of the conditions, see Item 3.3, points A) to H).
Record the results on Plate 70702, ‘Inspection through Scavenge Ports’.
Use the symbols shown on Plate 70703 to ensure easy interpretation
of the observations.
Keep the records to form a “log book” of the cylinder condition.
· Measure the total clearance between the piston rings and the ring grooves.
See Vol. II Procedure 902-1, ‘Maximum Clearance, and Vol. II Data 102-1.
Continue the inspection at the next cylinder whose piston is nearest BDC, and so
on according to the firing order. Note down the order of inspection for use at later
inspections.
Check the non-return valves (flap valves/butterfly valves) in the auxiliary blower
system for easy movement and possible damage.
Remove any oil sludge and carbon deposits in the scavenge air boxes and receiv-
er. Record the observations on Plate 70702.
3.3 Observations
3.3.A Piston Rings: In good Condition

When good and steady service conditions have been achieved, the running sur-
faces of the piston rings and cylinder liner will be worn bright (this also applying to
the ring undersides and the “floor” of the ring grooves, which, however, cannot be
seen). In addition, the rings will move freely in the grooves and also be well oiled,
intact, and not unduly worn.
The ring edges will be sharp when the original roundings have been worn away,
but should be without burrs.
3.3.B Piston Rings: Micro-seizure

If, over a period of time, the oil film partially disappears, so that dry areas are
formed on the cylinder wall, these areas and the piston ring surfaces will, by fric-
tional interaction, become finely scuffed and hardened, i.e. the good “mirror sur-
face” will have deteriorated (see Plates 70704 and 70705).
In case of extensive seizures, sharp burrs may form on the edges of the piston
rings.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
A seized surface, which has a characteristic vertically-striped appearance, will be

relatively hard, and may cause excessive cylinder wear.
Due to this hardness, the damaged areas will only slowly disappear (run-in again)
if and when the oil film is restored. As long as the seizure is allowed to continue,
the local wear will tend to be excessive.
Seizure may initially be limited to part of the ring circumference, but, since the rings
are free to “turn” in their grooves, it may eventually spread over the entire running
face of the ring.
The fact that the rings move in their grooves will also tend to transmit the local sei-
zure all the way around the liner surface.
If seizures have been observed, then it is recommended that the cyl. oil dosage is
temporarily increased (see item 4.12, and Section 707-02).
3.3.C Piston Rings: Scratched Plates 70704, 70705

Scratching is caused by hard abrasive particles originating from the ring itself, or,
usually, from the fuel oil. As regards liner and ring wear, the scratching is not al-
ways serious, but the particles can have serious consequences elsewhere. (See
item 5.5 ‘Abrasive Wear’).
3.3.D Piston Rings: Sticking

If, due to thick and hard deposits of carbon, the piston rings cannot move freely in
their grooves, dark areas will often appear on the upper part of the cylinder wall
(may not be visible at port inspection). This indicates lack of sealing, i.e. combus-
tion gas blow-by between piston rings and cylinder liner.
The blow-by will promote oil film break-down, which in turn will increase cylinder
wear. Sticking piston rings will often lead to broken piston rings.
The free movement of the rings in the grooves is essential, and can be checked
either by pressing them with a wooden stick (through the scavenge ports) or by
turning the engine alternately ahead and astern, to check the free vertical move-
ment.
3.3.E Piston Rings: Breakage/Collapse

Broken piston rings manifest themselves during the scavenge port inspection by:
· Lack of “elastic tension”, when the rings are

pressed into the groove by means of a stick
· Blackish appearance
· Fractured rings
· Missing rings.
Piston ring breakage is mostly caused by a phenomenon known as “collapse”.
However, breakage may also occur due to continual striking against wear ridges,
or other irregularities in the cylinder wall.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Collapse occurs if the gas pressure behind the ring is built up too slowly, and there-
by exerts an inadequate outward pressure. In such a case, the combustion gas
can penetrate between the liner and ring, and violently force the ring inwards, in
the groove. This type of sudden “shock” loading will eventually lead to fracture –
particularly if the ring ends “slam” against each other.
The above-mentioned slow pressure build-up behind the rings can be due to:
· carbon deposits in the ring groove,

· too small vertical ring clearance,
· partial sticking,
· poor sealing between the ring and the groove floor,
· “clover-leafing” (see below)
· ring-end chamfers (see below)
· too large ring-edge radii,
· etc.
“Clover-leafing”, is a term used to describe longitudinal corrosive wear at several
separate points around the liner circumference – i.e. in some cases the liner bore
may assume a “clover-leaf” shape, see Item 5.4.D.
Chamfering at the ring ends is unnecessary and detrimental in MAN B&W en-
gines, as the scavenge ports are dimensioned to avoid “catching” the ring ends.
3.3.F Piston Rings: Blow-by

Leakage of combustion gas past the piston rings (blow-by) is a natural conse-
quence of sticking, collapse or breakage (see points D and E).
In the later stages, when blow-by becomes persistent, it is usually due to ad-
vanced ring breakage, caused by collapse.
Blow-by is indicated by black, dry areas on the rings and also by larger black dry
zones on the upper part of the liner wall which, however, can only be seen when
overhauling the piston (or when exchanging the exhaust valve.
See also Sections 704-04 and 706-02.
3.3.G Deposits on Pistons

Usually some deposits will have accumulated on the side of the piston crown (top
land). Carbon deposits on the ring lands indicate lack of gas sealing at the respec-
tive rings, see Plate 70703.
If the deposits are abnormally thick, their surfaces may be smooth and shiny from
rubbing against the cylinder wall. Such contact may locally wipe away the oil film,
resulting in micro-seizure and increased wear of liner and rings.
In some instances, ‘mechanical clover-leafing’ can occur, i.e. vertical grooves of

slightly higher wear in between the lubricating quills.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Such conditions may also be the result of a combustion condition which overheats
the cylinder oil film. This could be due to faulty or defective fuel nozzles or insuffi-
cient turbocharger efficiency.
3.3.H Lubricating Condition

Note whether the “oil film” on the cylinder wall and piston rings appears to be ad-
equate. All piston rings should show oil at the edges. However, see also Item 3.1.
White or brownish coloured areas may sometimes be seen on the liner surface.
This indicates corrosive wear, usually from sulphuric acid (see also Item 5.4), and
should not be confused with grey-black areas, which indicates blow-by.
In such cases it should be decided whether, in order to stop such corrosive attack,
a higher oil dosage should be introduced. (See Item 5.4 and Section 707-02).
3.4 Replacement of Piston Rings

It is recommended that the complete set of piston rings is replaced at each piston
overhaul, to ensure that the rings always work under the optimum service condi-
tions, thereby giving the best ring performance.
4. Cylinder Overhaul
To ensure correct recording of all relevant information, we recommend

that our ‘Cylinder Condition Report’ (Plates 70711 and 70712) be used.
4.1 Intervals between Piston Pulling

Regarding guiding, average intervals, see Vol. II ‘Maintenance’ ‘Checking and
Maintenance Schedules’.
Base the actual intervals between piston overhauls on the previous wear meas-
urements and observations from scavenge port inspections, supplemented with
the pressures read from the CoCos-eds or PMI-system.
Regarding procedures for the dismantling and mounting of pistons, see Vol. II,
Procedures 902-2.1 and 902-2.2.
Remove the piston cleaning (PC) ring (if installed) and carefully remove
any coke deposits and wear ridges from the upper part of the liner,
before the piston is lifted.
Regarding procedure for checking the PC-ring, see Vol. II Procedure
903-1.1.
4.2 Initial Inspection and Removal of the Rings

Before any cleaning, inspect the piston and liner, as described in Item 3.3, points
A) to H).
Measure the free ring gap and compare to that of a new ring, whereby the loss of
tension can be calculated. Note down the measurements on Plate 70711.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Remove the piston rings.
Use only the MAN B&W standard ring opener for all mounting and
removal of piston rings.
This opener prevents local overstressing of the ring material which, in turn, would
often result in permanent deformation, causing blow-by and broken rings. Straps
to expand the ring gap, or tools working on the same principle, should never be
used.
It is extremely important that the piston rings are removed by means of the special
ring opener, if they are to be reinstalled after inspection. However, it is recom-
mended to replace the complete set of piston rings at each overhaul, see Item 3.4
above.
4.3 Cleaning
Clean the piston rings. Clean all ring grooves carefully. If carbon deposits remain,
they may prevent the ring from forming a perfect seal against the floor of the
groove.
Remove deposits on the piston crown and ring lands.
Remove any remaining coke deposits from the upper section of the liner.
4.4 Measurement of Ring Wear See Plate 70711

Measure and record the radial width and the height of the rings.
Compare the measured wear to the wear tolerances stated in Vol. II ‘Mainte-
nance’, Chapter 902.
When this value has been reached, scrap the ring. As it is recommended to re-
place the complete set of piston rings at each overhaul, use these measurements
to form the basis for deciding optimal overhaul intervals, see Item 4.1.
4.5 Inspection of Cylinder Liner See Plate 70711
4.5.A Cylinder Wear Measurements:

Before measuring the cylinder wear:
· ensure that the tool and cylinder liner temperatures are close
to each other
· record the tool and cylinder liner temperatures on Plate 70711
to enable correction.
Measure the wear with the special tool at the vertical positions marked on the tool.
Measure in both the transverse and longitudinal directions. This ensures that the
wear is always measured at the same positions. See also Vol. II, Procedure 903-2.
Record the measurements on Plate 70711.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
4.5.B Correction of wear measurements:

Correct the actual wear measurements by multiplying with the following factors, if
the temperature of the cylinder liner is higher than the temperature of the tool. This
enables a comparison to be made with earlier wear measurements.
Δt °C Factor
10 0.99988
20 0.99976
30 0.99964
40 0.99952
50 0.99940
Example (S/K/L90MC):
Measured value : 901.3 mm
Δt measured : 30°C
(corrected value : 901.3 × 0.99964 = 900.98
(i.e. a reduction of 901.3-900.98 = 0.32 mm)
4.5.C Maximum Wear:

The maximum wear of cylinder liners can be in the interval of 0.4% to 0.8% of the
nominal diameter, depending on the actual cylinder and piston ring performance.
Ovality of the liner, for instance, may form a too troublesome basis for maintaining
a satisfactory service condition, in which case the cylinder liner in question should
be replaced.
4.5.D Checking Liner Surface:

Inspect the liner wall for scratches, micro-seizure, wear ridges, collapse marks,
corrosive wear, etc.
If corrosive wear is suspected or if a ring is found broken, take extra wear meas-
urements around the circumference at the upper part of the liner:
Press a new piston ring into the cylinder. Use a feeler gauge to check for local
clearances between the ring and liner. This can reveal any “uneven” corrosive
wear. See items 3.3.E, 3.3.H and 5.4.
4.6 Piston Skirt, Crown and Cooling Space Plate 70711

Clean and check the piston skirt for seizures and burrs.
In case of seizures, grind over the surface to remove a possible hardened layer.
Check the shape of the piston crown by means of the template. Measure any burn-
ings.
If in any place the burning/corrosion exceeds the max. permissible, send the pis-
ton crown for reconditioning.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Regarding max. permissible burning, see Vol. II, Procedure 902-1. Inspect the
crown for cracks.
Pressure-test the piston assembly to check for possible oil leakages, see Vol. II,
Procedure 902-1.
See Plate 70711
If the piston is taken apart, for instance due to oil leakage, check the condition of
the joints between the crown, the piston rod, and the skirt. Inspect the cooling
space and clean off any carbon/coke deposits.
Replace the O-rings. Check that the surfaces of the O-ring grooves are smooth.
This is to prevent twisting and breakage of the O-rings.
Pressure test the piston after assembling.
4.7 Piston Ring Grooves

Check the piston ring grooves as described in Vol. II, Procedure 902-1.
If the ring groove wear exceeds the values stated in Procedure 902.1, send the
crown for reconditioning (new chrome-plating).
4.8 Reconditioning the Running Surfaces of Liner, Rings and Skirt

If there are micro-seized areas on the liner or skirt:
· Scratch-over manually with a coarse carborundum stone (grindstone),

moving the grindstone crosswise, at an angle of 20 to 30 degrees to
horizontal.
This is done to break up the hard surface glaze.
Leave the “scratching marks” as coarse as possible.
It is not necessary to completely remove all signs of “vertical stripes” (micro-sei-

zure).
If there are horizontal wear ridges in the cylinder liner – e.g. at the top or bottom
where the rings “turn”: smoothen out carefully with a portable grinding machine.
4.10 Fitting of Piston Rings

Fit the piston rings. See also Item 3.4.
Push the ring back and forth in the groove to make sure that it moves freely.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Use only the MAN B&W standard piston ring opener.

See also point 4.2.
4.11 Piston Ring Clearance

When the rings are in place, check and record the vertical clearance between ring
and ring groove.
Furthermore, insert a feeler gauge of the thickness specified in Vol. II, Procedure
902-1, and move it all the way round the groove both above and below each piston
ring. Its free movement will confirm the clearances as well as proper cleanliness.
4.12 Cylinder Lubrication and Mounting

Check the cylinder lubrication:
Press pre-lubrication on the HMI Panel and check that the pipes and joints are
leak-proof, and that oil flows out from each lubricating orifice.
If any of the above-mentioned inspection points have indicated that the cylinder oil
amount should be increased, or decreased: Adjust the feedrate as described in the
Alpha Lubricator Manual.
Coat the piston with clean oil.
Before mounting the overhauled piston, remove any remaining depos-

its from the upper end of the liner.
Mount the piston. See Vol. II, Procedure 902-1.
4.13 Running-in of Liners and Rings

After reconditioning or renewal of cylinder liners and/or piston rings, allowance
must be made for a running-in period, see Items 4.13.A – 4.13.D.
· Refer to Section 703-03.

· If only one or two cylinders have been overhauled, see Item 4.13.B.
· See also Item 4.13.B regarding manoeuvring and low-load running.
· Refer to the maker’s special instructions on how to adjust the lubrica-
tor’s stroke.
4.13.A Running-in of Liners and Rings (Fixed pitch propeller plants) Plate 70710 and 70714
Breaking-in:
Breaking-in of all cylinders, or of individual cylinders having their separate cylinder
lubricator:
Adjust the lubricators to 200% of basic setting. See Section 703-16, Auxiliaries.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Start the engine. Increase gradually to 55% of MCR-speed.
Increase to 100% of MCR-speed during the next 20 hours, as shown on Plate

70714.
After this 20-24 hour breaking-in period, stop the engine and make a scavenge
port inspection.
If the cylinder condition proves satisfactory, decrease the feed rate corresponding
to an over-lubrication of 150%, see Section 703-16, Auxiliaries.
Running-in:
Running-in of all cylinders, or of individual cylinders having their separate cylinder
lubricator:
Maintain the 150% feed rate during the next 600 hours of service.
Make a scavenge port inspection. If the cylinder condition proves satisfactory, de-
crease the feed rate corresponding to an over-lubrication of 125%, see Section
703-16, Auxiliaries.
Maintain the 125% feed rate during the next 600 hours of service.
Make a scavenge port inspection. If the cylinder condition proves satisfactory, de-
crease the feed rate to the Basic Setting, see Section 703-16, Auxiliaries.
Basic Setting:
After the running-in period the Basic Setting should be maintained.
Actual feed rate:

When the cylinder condition has stabilised and proved satisfactory by scavenge
port inspections, adjustments towards the actual feed rate may be introduced:
· Make repeated scavenge port inspections.

· If the cylinder condition proves satisfactory, reduce the feed rate
by maximum 0.05 g/bhph, at intervals of minimum 600 hours,
see Plate 70710.
Increase or decrease the feed rate during the continued service, based on the reg-
ular:
– scavenge port inspections, see Vol. II, Chapter 900, and

– piston/liner overhauls, see earlier in this Section 4.1
See also earlier in this Section 4.8.
4.13.B Special Remarks (See also Item 4.13.A)

Running-in only one cylinder:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
If only one cylinder has been renewed, the fuel pump index for the cylinder in ques-
tion may be decreased in proportion to the required load reduction, under the con-
dition that the torsional vibration in the propeller shaft allow it.
As vibration condition due to reduction of the fuel pump index of one cylinder is
very similar to running the engine with one cylinder in misfire, a barred engine
speed range may be present (see Chapter 704 ‘Special Running Conditions’).
Thus consult the class-approved report on the torsional vibration of the actual pro-
peller shaft system and avoid any barred speed range during running-in.
Before starting the engine, fix the fuel rack for the pertaining cylinder at 16% of
MCR index. Increase the index stepwise in accordance with the breaking-in
schedule, see Plate 70714. Regarding the pressure rise pcomp - pmax, see comp max
Chapter 703 ‘Running Difficulties, Supplementary Comments’, point 7.
If the engine is fitted with the Turbo Compound System (TCS), the TCS
must be out of operation if running-in with reduced index is chosen in
order to safeguard the gear.
Regarding cylinder lubrication, see Item 4.13.A.
Manoeuvring and low load:

In practice, of course, the engine must be able to operate freely in the whole ma-
noeuvring range.
Also the situation where low load has to be maintained for an extended period, e.g.
in connection with river/canal passage, has to be coped with in the breaking-in pro-
gram.
As an example, when the first breaking-in has to take place during a long river pas-
sage, we suggest the following program, (see also Plate 70714):
% rpm % Load Duration (h)

Increase to: 55 16 0.5
River passage: 55 16 5.5
Sea passage: 70 34 2.0
– 80 51 2.0
– 85 61 2.0
– 87.5 67 2.0
– 90 73 2.0
– 92.5 79 2.0
– 95 86 2.0
– 97.5 93 2.0
– 100 100 2.0
Total Breaking-in time 24.0
Do not run for less than two hours at 55% rpm (16% load).
Regarding cylinder lubrication, see Item 4.13.A.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
4.13.C Running-in of Rings after a Piston Overhaul (Fixed pitch propeller plants)
When running-in piston rings in already run-in liners, the breaking-in time can be
reduced to some 5 hours, e.g. following the dotted line in Plate 70714, ‘Run-
ning-in Load’.
The extra lubrication should follow the same pattern as when running-in new lin-
ers; however, the duration of the 150% and 125% steps can be reduced to the time
intervals between scavenge port inspections, see Plate 70710.
4.13.D Running-in of Liners and Rings (Controllable pitch propeller plants)

Regarding running-in when only one or two cylinders have been overhauled, see
the procedure described in Item 4.13.B.
Regarding the cylinder oil dosage during breaking-in and running-in, see the pro-
cedure described in Item 4.13.A.
About half an hour before harbour manoeuvres are expected, start the engine and
increase to rated speed, with the propeller in Zero-pitch.
Connect the shaft generator (if installed) to the grid, and let the generator take over
the electrical power supply.
This is in order to raise the engine temperature towards the normal service value
prior to the harbour manoeuvres.
When manoeuvring is finished, gradually increase the propeller pitch correspond-

ing to about 50% of MCR-load.
The increase to 100% of MCR-load should be effected gradually during the next
20 hours. See also Plate 70714.
When running-in piston rings in already run-in liners, the breaking-in period can be
reduced to abt. 10 hours.
5. Factors Influencing Cylinder Wear

5.1 General
Plate 70706 gives a summary of the most common causes of cylinder wear. The
following gives a brief explanation of the most important aspects, and of the pre-
cautions to be taken to counteract them.
5.2 Materials
Check that the combination of piston ring and cylinder liner materials complies with
the engine builder’s recommendations.
5.3 Cylinder Oil

Check that the quality and feed rate are in accordance with the recommendations
in the latest service letter.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
5.4 Corrosive Wear
5.4.A The Influence of Sulphur in the Fuel

Corrosive wear is caused by condensation and the formation of sulphuric acid on
the cylinder wall.
In order to minimise condensation, the newest ME design incorporates optimised

temperature level of the liner wall, based on the actual engine layout.
If corrosion arises even so, insulation of the liner and/or insulated steel pipes in the
cooling bores can be arranged.
To reduce the risk of corrosive attack:
· Keep the cooling water outlet temperatures within the specified interval,
see Section 701-02.
· Keep the temperature difference across the cylinder units between
12°-18°C at MCR.
· Use alkaline cylinder lubricating oils, see also Item 5.3, ‘Cylinder Oil’.
· Preheat the engine before starting, as described in Chapter 703.
· Check that the drain from the water mist catcher functions properly,
to prevent water droplets from entering the cylinders, see also Item 5.4.D.
It is important that any corrosion tendency is ascertained as soon as possible.
If corrosion is prevailing:
· Check the cylinder feed rate, see Item 5.3.

· Increase the feed rate as described in Section 707-02.
· Check the alkalinity, see Item 5.3.
· Check the timing.
· Check the cooling water temperatures and the drain from the water mist catch-
er, as described above. The amount of condensate can be read from Plate
70713. See also Item 5.4.D.
In case of too small cylinder oil feed rate or too low alkalinity, the alkaline additives
may be neutralised too quickly or unevenly, during the circumferential distribution
of the oil across the liner wall.
This systematic variation in alkalinity may produce “uneven” corrosive wear on the
liner wall, see points 3.3.B and 5.4.D, regarding ‘clover-leafing’.
5.4.B Sodium Chloride

Seawater (or salt) in the intake air, fuel, or cylinder oils, will involve the risk of cor-
rosive cylinder wear. The corrosion is caused by sodium chloride (salt), which
forms hydrochloric acid.
To prevent salt water entering the cylinder, via the fuel and cylinder oil:
· maintain the various oil tanks leak-proof
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
· centrifuge the fuel carefully.

· do not use the bunker tanks for ballast water.
5.4.C Cleaning Agents (Air Cooler)

The air side of the scavenge air cooler can, if the necessary equipment is installed,
be cleaned by means of cleaning agents dissolved in fresh water.
Follow the supplier’s instructions strictly for:
· the dosage of the agent

· the use of the cleaning system
After using chemical agents, flush with clean fresh water to remove the agent from
the cooler and air ducts.
Cleaning of the air side of the air cooler must only be carried out dur-
ing engine standstill.
See also Section 706-03 and Maintenance book Chapter 910.
5.4.D Water Condensation on Air Cooler Tubes

Depending on the temperature and humidity of the ambient air and the tempera-
ture of the seawater, water may condense on the coldest air cooler tubes.
Water mist catchers are installed directly after the air coolers on all MAN B&W ME
engines to prevent water droplets from being carried into the cylinders.
If water enters the cylinders, the oil film may be ruptured and cause wear (clover-
leafing) on the liner surfaces between the cylinder lub. oil inlets.
It is very important that the water mist catcher drains function properly.
See Section 706-03. See also Plate 70712 for amount of condensate.
5.5 Abrasive Wear Plates 70705, 70707, 70708 and 70709
5.5.A Particles
Abrasive cylinder wear can be caused by hard particles which enter the cylinder
via
· The fuel oil, e.g. catalyst fines. See also point 5.5.C, ‘Fuel Oil Treatment’.
Particles in the fuel oil can also be caught in the fuel pump suction valve. If this
occurs, the suction valve seats can very quickly become so heavily pitted (Plate
70709, photo 4) that they leak, causing a reduction of the maximum pressure
and an increase of the fuel index.
The occurrence of the particles is unpredictable. Therefore, clean the fuel oil as
thoroughly as possible by centrifuging, in order to remove the abrasive parti-
cles.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
· The air, e.g. sand.

Keep the turbocharger intake filter in a good condition. See also Section
706-03 regarding the use of a thin foam filter. See also Section 701-01.
Abrasive wear can occur on:
1. The running surfaces of the liner and piston rings.

Scratching on the piston ring running surface is one of the first signs of abra-
sive particles, and can be observed during scavenge port inspections or pis-
ton overhauls.
Scratching is often seen as a large number of rather deep “trumpet shaped”
grooves (see Plates 70705 and 70708),
Usually, micro-seizures do not occur, i.e. the ring surface remains soft. This
can be checked with a file, see Plate 70704.
2. The upper and lower sides of the piston rings.
Particles caught between the upper horizontal ring/groove surfaces will cause
pitting – “pock-marks” – on the upper ring surface (Plates 70707 and 70708).
“Pock-marks” may also arise during a prolonged period of ring collapse.
Even if the running surface of the top ring has a satisfactory appearance, the
condition of the ring’s upper surface, (and of the suction valve seats) will re-
veal the presence of abrasive particles.
3. The upper edge of the piston rings.
When particles pass down the ring pack, via the ring joint gaps, they will cause a
“sand blasting” effect on the upper edge of the ring below, which protrudes from
the piston ring groove, i.e. this is only seen on ring Nos. 2, 3, and 4.
5.5.B Scuffing (micro-seizure)

Abrasive wear may be the result of scuffing (micro-seizure).
Apart from the factors mentioned under point 3.3 (blow-by, deposits, cyl. oil defi-
ciencies, etc.) scuffing can be due to:
· unsatisfactory running-in conditions (especially if a previous micro-seizure has

not been successfully counteracted during a cylinder overhaul). As regards run-
ning-in, see point 4.13.
· misalignment, (including machining errors).
5.5.C Fuel Oil Treatment (See also Chapter 705)

Correct fuel oil treatment and proper maintenance of the centrifuges are of the ut-
most importance for cylinder condition, exhaust valves and fuel injection equip-
ment.
Water and abrasive particles are removed by means of the centrifuges:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
1. The ability to separate water depends largely on the specific gravity of the fuel
oil relative to the water – at the separation temperature. Other influencing fac-
tors are the fuel oil viscosity (at separation temp.) and the flow rate.
Keep the separation temperature as high as possible, for instance: 95-98°C
for fuel oil with a viscosity of 380 cSt at 50°C.
2. The ability to separate abrasive particles depends upon the size and specific
weight of the smallest impurities that are to be removed and, in particular, on
the fuel oil viscosity (at separation temp.) and the flow rate through the centri-
fuge.
Keep the flow rate as low as possible.
6. Propeller Performance
As indicated in Section 706-01, special severe weather condition can cause a
change to heavy propeller running. In cases where the power/speed combination
has moved too much to the left in the load diagram (see Section 706-01), contin-
ued service may cause thermal overload of the components in the combustion
chamber and thereby create heat cracks.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Cylinder Lubrication – ME 707-02
1. Lubricators Plate 70713

Each cylinder liner has a number of lubricating quills, through which oil is intro-
duced from the Alpha Lubricators, as outlined in instruction book, Volume III ‘Com-
ponents’.
The oil is pumped into the cylinder (via non-return valves) when the piston rings
pass the lubricating orifices, during the upward stroke. See also Plate 70713, Fig.
2. For check of functioning, see Section 702-01.
The lubricators are supplied with oil from a pump station to which the oil is supplied
from a head tank.
2. Cylinder Oil Film

If a satisfactory cylinder condition is to be achieved, it is of vital importance that the
oil film is intact. Therefore, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
1. The cylinder lubricators must be correctly timed.

(See Alpha Lubricator Manual).
2. The cylinder oil type and TBN must be selected in accordance with the fuel
being burned (see point 3 below).
3. New liners and piston rings must be carefully run-in, see Plate 70710.
4. The oil feed-rate (dosage) under normal service must be in accordance with
the engine builder’s recommendations. Furthermore, the dosage must be ad-
justed in accordance with the service experience for the actual trade (ob-
tained from the scavenge port inspections).
5. The feed-rate must be increased in the situations described in Item 4.8, ‘Spe-
cial Conditions’.
3. Cylinder Oils
We recommend the use of cylinder oils of the SAE 50 viscosity grade.
During shop trial and seatrial, we recommend using a cylinder oil with a high de-
tergency level.
Use a “total base number” (TBN) of 70 as a 70 TBN oil will normally give good re-
sults. Use higher TBN oils in the event of high sulphur content in the fuel oil.
Some high alkaline cylinder oils are not compatible with:
· certain low sulphur fuels (having poor combustion properties),

· some diesel oils.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
707-02 Cylinder Lubrication – ME
Such incompatibility may be indicated by poor cylinder condition during scavenge

port inspection. In such cases, change to a lower TBN cylinder oil.
The table below indicates international brands of oils that have given satisfactory
results when applied in MAN B&W diesel engine types (heavy fuel operation).
Do not consider the list complete, as oils from other companies can be equally suit-
able.
Type Cylinder Oil

Requirement SAE50/BN 70-80 SAE50/BN 40-50
Oil Company
BP CLO 50-M CL/CL-DX 405
Castrol S/DZ 70 cyl. CL/CL-DX 405
Chevron Delo Cyloil Special Taro Special HT 50
Elf Talusia HR70 Talusia LS 40
Exxon Exxmar X70 Mobilgard L540
Mobil Mobilgard 570 Mobilgard L540
Shell Alexia 50 Alexia LS
Texaco Taro Special HT70 Taro Special HT50
Further information can be obtained by contacting the engine builder or MAN B&W
Diesel A/S, Copenhagen.
4. Cylinder Oil Feed Rate (dosage)

4.1 General
The following guidelines are based on service experience, and take into consider-
ation the specific design criteria of the MC/ME engines (such as mean pressure,
maximum pressure, lubricated liner area) as well as today’s fuel qualities and op-
erating conditions.
The recommendations are valid for fixed pitch and controllable pitch propeller
plants as well as stationary plants (generator application).
This Section is based on our Service Letter 03-417/HRJ, which recommends:
· Adjusting the lubricators to the Basic Setting.

· Over-lubricating during breaking-in and running-in.
· Gradually reducing the feed rate based on scavenge port inspections.
4.2 Running-in
Regarding increased feed rate during breaking-in and running-in, and the step-
wise reduction towards the actual feed rate, see Plate 70710.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
4.3 Basic Setting

The Basic Setting for S/K/L-ME/ME-C engines is 0.8 g/bhph. See Plate 70710.
Service experience has now demonstrated that it is also possible to reduce the
feed rate for the super-long-stroke S-MC/MC-C engines fitted with Alpha Lubrica-
tors, even down to the same low level as for the K/L engines, i.e. to a basic feed
rate of 0.8 g/bhph and a minimum of 0.6 g/bhph.
4.4 Alpha ACC (Adaptive Cylinder oil Control)

The actual need for cylinder oil quantity varies with the operational conditions such
as load and fuel oil quality. Consequently, in order to obtain the optimal lubrication,
the cylinder oil dosage should be adapted to such operational variations.
With the introduction of the electronically controlled Alpha Lubricator system, fea-
turing the easy-to-operate “HMI” panel, such adaptive lubrication has become fea-
sible. The Alpha Lubricator system offers the possibility of saving a considerable
amount of cylinder oil per year and, at the same time, to obtain a safer and more
predictable cylinder condition.
Intensive studies of the relation between wear and lube oil dosage have revealed
thatthe actual need for cylinder lubrication follows the amount of fuel being burnt
and the fuel quality.
This calls for part-load lube oil control which is proportional to the engine output,
as load and oil consumption in this connection are practically proportional. This is,
at the same time, the most economical control mode, compared to the previous
practice where part-load dosages were controlled proportionally with either engine
speed or cylinder mean pressure.
The basic feed rate control should be adjusted in relation to the actual fuel quality
being burnt at a given time. Of course, fuel quality is rather complex. However,
studies have also shown that the sulphur percentage is a good indicator in relation
to wear, and an oil dosage proportional to the sulphur level will give the best overall
cylinder condition.
This new cylinder oil control principle is called the “Alpha Adaptive Cylinder oil
Control”, or abbreviated “Alpha ACC”.
Tests with Alpha ACC on K and S engines of various engine sizes have shown that
a safe and optimum lube-economical control is obtained with a basic setting ac-
cording to the below formula:
Basic lube oil setting = 0.25 g/bhph x S%,
with a minimum setting of 0.5 g/bhph, i.e. the setting should be kept constant from
2% sulphur and down.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Alpha ACC
Cylinder oil Dosages (g/bhph)
Fuel Oil Sulphur %
4.5 How to adjust the dosage according to the Alpha ACC principle
First of all, knowledge of the sulphur percentage of the fuel oil being burnt at any
time is a condition for obtaining the savings with Alpha ACC. Therefore, we rec-
ommend that the ships in question join one of the well-known fuel analysis pro-
grammes on the market, and that burning of the oil is not started until the analysis
result is known. This will normally take two to four days after bunkering.
One of the key parameters in Alpha ACC lubrication is part-load control proportion-
al to engine load. This is important in order to prevent over-lubrication at low loads,
and it is one of the main parameters to save oil, compared with conventional lubri-
cation.
If “load-proportional control” is not already preset from delivery of your Alpha Lu-
bricator system, we suggest that you contact MAN B&W Diesel A/S in order to get
instructions on how to change the software from either speed-proportional control
or cylinder-mean-pressure proportional control.
When starting to burn new bunker oil, the HMI setting of the Alpha ACC should be
adjusted according to the bunker analysis results. For reference, the below table
should be used:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Sulphur Dosage HMI

% g/bhph g/kWh Setting
0.0-2.0 0.50 0.68 63
2.2 0.55 0.75 69
2.4 0.60 0.82 75
2.6 0.65 0.88 81
2.8 0.70 0.95 88
3.0 0.75 1.02 94
3.2 0.80 1.09 100
3.4 0.85 1.16 106
3.6 0.90 1.22 113
3.8 0.95 1.29 119
4.0 1.00 1.36 125
4.2 1.05 1.43 131
4.4 1.10 1.50 138
4.6 1.15 1.56 144
4.8 1.20 1.63 150
5.0 1.25 1.70 156
Our ‘basic setting’ is traditionally chosen to obtain a dosage which, in average con-
ditions, results in a safe and lube-oil-economical cylinder condition. This leaves
possibilities for further individually based reductions, towards the recommended
minimum setting.
In the case of the Alpha ACC, the basic factor of 0.25 g/bhph x S% may, of course,
also be lowered. Currently, we have experienced down to a factor of 0.21 g/bhph
x S%.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
1. Lubricators Plate 70713

Each cylinder liner has a number of lubricating quills, through which oil is intro-
duced from the Alpha Lubricators, as outlined in instruction book, Volume III ‘Com-
ponents’.
The oil is pumped into the cylinder (via non-return valves) when the piston rings
pass the lubricating orifices, during the upward stroke. See also Plate 70713, Fig.
2. For check of functioning, see Section 702-01.
The lubricators are supplied with oil from a pump station to which the oil is supplied
from a head tank.
2. Cylinder Oil Film

If a satisfactory cylinder condition is to be achieved, it is of vital importance that the
oil film is intact. Therefore, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
1. The cylinder lubricators must be correctly timed.

(See Alpha Lubricator Manual).
2. The cylinder oil type and TBN must be selected in accordance with the fuel
being burned (see point 3 below).
3. New liners and piston rings must be carefully run-in, see Plate 70710.
4. The oil feed-rate (dosage) under normal service must be in accordance with
the engine builder’s recommendations. Furthermore, the dosage must be ad-
justed in accordance with the service experience for the actual trade (ob-
tained from the scavenge port inspections).
5. The feed-rate must be increased in the situations described in Item 4.8, ‘Spe-
cial Conditions’.
3. Cylinder Oils
We recommend the use of cylinder oils of the SAE 50 viscosity grade.
During shop trial and seatrial, we recommend using a cylinder oil with a high de-
tergency level.
Use a “total base number” (TBN) of 70 as a 70 TBN oil will normally give good re-
sults. Use higher TBN oils in the event of high sulphur content in the fuel oil.
Some high alkaline cylinder oils are not compatible with:
· certain low sulphur fuels (having poor combustion properties),

· some diesel oils.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Such incompatibility may be indicated by poor cylinder condition during scavenge

port inspection. In such cases, change to a lower TBN cylinder oil.
The table below indicates international brands of oils that have given satisfactory
results when applied in MAN B&W diesel engine types (heavy fuel operation).
Do not consider the list complete, as oils from other companies can be equally suit-
able.
Type Cylinder Oil

Requirement SAE50/BN 70-80 SAE50/BN 40-50
Oil Company
BP CLO 50-M CL/CL-DX 405
Castrol S/DZ 70 cyl. CL/CL-DX 405
Chevron Delo Cyloil Special Taro Special HT 50
Elf Talusia HR70 Talusia LS 40
Exxon Exxmar X70 Mobilgard L540
Mobil Mobilgard 570 Mobilgard L540
Shell Alexia 50 Alexia LS
Texaco Taro Special HT70 Taro Special HT50
4. Cylinder Oil Feed Rate (dosage)

4.1 General
The following guidelines are based on service experience, and take into consider-
ation the specific design criteria of the MC/ME engines (such as mean pressure,
maximum pressure, lubricated liner area) as well as today’s fuel qualities and op-
erating conditions.
The recommendations are valid for fixed pitch and controllable pitch propeller
plants as well as stationary plants (generator application).
This Section is based on our Service Letter 03-417/HRJ, which recommends:
· Adjusting the lubricators to the Basic Setting.

· Over-lubricating during breaking-in and running-in.
· Gradually reducing the feed rate based on scavenge port inspections.
4.2 Running-in
Regarding increased feed rate during breaking-in and running-in, and the step-
wise reduction towards the actual feed rate, see Plate 70710.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
4.3 Basic Setting

The Basic Setting for S/K/L-ME/ME-C engines is 0.8 g/bhph. See Plate 70710.
Service experience has now demonstrated that it is also possible to reduce the
feed rate for the super-long-stroke S-MC/MC-C engines fitted with Alpha Lubrica-
tors, even down to the same low level as for the K/L engines, i.e. to a basic feed
rate of 0.8 g/bhph and a minimum of 0.6 g/bhph.
4.4 Alpha ACC (Adaptive Cylinder oil Control)

The actual need for cylinder oil quantity varies with the operational conditions such
as load and fuel oil quality. Consequently, in order to obtain the optimal lubrication,
the cylinder oil dosage should be adapted to such operational variations.
With the introduction of the electronically controlled Alpha Lubricator system, fea-
turing the easy-to-operate “HMI” panel, such adaptive lubrication has become fea-
sible. The Alpha Lubricator system offers the possibility of saving a considerable
amount of cylinder oil per year and, at the same time, to obtain a safer and more
predictable cylinder condition.
Intensive studies of the relation between wear and lube oil dosage have revealed
thatthe actual need for cylinder lubrication follows the amount of fuel being burnt
and the fuel quality.
This calls for part-load lube oil control which is proportional to the engine output,
as load and oil consumption in this connection are practically proportional. This is,
at the same time, the most economical control mode, compared to the previous
practice where part-load dosages were controlled proportionally with either engine
speed or cylinder mean pressure.
The basic feed rate control should be adjusted in relation to the actual fuel quality
being burnt at a given time. Of course, fuel quality is rather complex. However,
studies have also shown that the sulphur percentage is a good indicator in relation
to wear, and an oil dosage proportional to the sulphur level will give the best overall
cylinder condition.
This new cylinder oil control principle is called the “Alpha Adaptive Cylinder oil
Control”, or abbreviated “Alpha ACC”.
Tests with Alpha ACC on K and S engines of various engine sizes have shown that
a safe and optimum lube-economical control is obtained with a basic setting ac-
cording to the below formula:
Basic lube oil setting = 0.25 g/bhph x S%,
with a minimum setting of 0.5 g/bhph, i.e. the setting should be kept constant from
2% sulphur and down.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Alpha ACC
Cylinder oil Dosages (g/bhph)
Fuel Oil Sulphur %
4.5 How to adjust the dosage according to the Alpha ACC principle
First of all, knowledge of the sulphur percentage of the fuel oil being burnt at any
time is a condition for obtaining the savings with Alpha ACC. Therefore, we rec-
ommend that the ships in question join one of the well-known fuel analysis pro-
grammes on the market, and that burning of the oil is not started until the analysis
result is known. This will normally take two to four days after bunkering.
One of the key parameters in Alpha ACC lubrication is part-load control proportion-
al to engine load. This is important in order to prevent over-lubrication at low loads,
and it is one of the main parameters to save oil, compared with conventional lubri-
cation.
If “load-proportional control” is not already preset from delivery of your Alpha Lu-
bricator system, we suggest that you contact MAN B&W Diesel A/S in order to get
instructions on how to change the software from either speed-proportional control
or cylinder-mean-pressure proportional control.
When starting to burn new bunker oil, the HMI setting of the Alpha ACC should be
adjusted according to the bunker analysis results. For reference, the below table
should be used:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Sulphur Dosage HMI

% g/bhph g/kWh Setting
0.0-2.0 0.50 0.68 63
2.2 0.55 0.75 69
2.4 0.60 0.82 75
2.6 0.65 0.88 81
2.8 0.70 0.95 88
3.0 0.75 1.02 94
3.2 0.80 1.09 100
3.4 0.85 1.16 106
3.6 0.90 1.22 113
3.8 0.95 1.29 119
4.0 1.00 1.36 125
4.2 1.05 1.43 131
4.4 1.10 1.50 138
4.6 1.15 1.56 144
4.8 1.20 1.63 150
5.0 1.25 1.70 156
Our ‘basic setting’ is traditionally chosen to obtain a dosage which, in average con-
ditions, results in a safe and lube-oil-economical cylinder condition. This leaves
possibilities for further individually based reductions, towards the recommended
minimum setting.
In the case of the Alpha ACC, the basic factor of 0.25 g/bhph x S% may, of course,
also be lowered. Currently, we have experienced down to a factor of 0.21 g/bhph
x S%.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Inspection of Nimonic Exhaust Valve Spindles 707-03
Introduction
These instructions are a supplement to “Procedure 908-2”, in our Volume II,
Maintenance” instruction book, and should be used in combination with that
Procedure during inspection and overhaul of all Nimonic spindles on MAN B&W
engines.
All general data, including specified wear limits for the spindle used on your engine
type, are given in Procedure 908-2, DATA. Note down the actual engine data in
the “DATA”-box in the relevant chapters of these instructions.
The procedure is divided into the following eight sections:
1. Spindle identification Page 1
2. Inspection intervals 2
3. Inspecting the contact condition of the seat 2
4. Checking the seat for gas leakage 4
5. Cleaning and evaluation 5
6. Inspecting the valve stem wear layer 8
7. Grinding the spindle seat 9
8. Exhaust Valve Condition Report 11
Sections 3 to 7 are each divided into four steps:
· What to do
· Acceptance criteria
· Remarks
· Further action
1. Spindle Identification
Markings:
The tops of Nimonic spindles are marked:
“Nim”, “Nim80A”, “N80A”,”N80”, or “NCF80A”.
If in doubt, please contact MAN B&W Diesel A/S, Copenhagen.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
2. Inspection Intervals
Inspection Inspections:
intervals Initial Second Subsequent
Normal hours of After 6,000 hours After 16,000 hours *) Every 16,000 hours *)
service:
Recommended: After 6,000 hours Based on condition Based on condition at
(50-60MC at initial inspection initial and second
3-6,000 hours) inspections **)
*) The normal hours of service between overhauls for Nimonic exhaust valve
spindles is 16,000 hours (see instruction book Volume II, Chapter 900).
**) If the spindle condition is very good, the condition of other exhaust valve
parts may prove to be the decisive factor in determining the future
overhaul/inspection intervals.
3. Inspecting the Contact Condition of the Seat

What to do
Do not clean the spindle disc before inspection.
· Visually check that there is inner contact.
Fig. 1 shows inner contact between the seats of the spindle and bottom piece, cor-
responding to slow/low-load/manoeuvring condition.
Inner contact
Inner part
Outer part
Fig. 1: Inner contact, and zone designation
Acceptance criteria
There must be contact around the entire inner circumference of the seat.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Remarks
When the valve heats up in service, the angular difference between the spindle
and bottom piece seatings will decrease. At steady, full load, the seatings will be
parallel, as shown in Fig. 2.
Thus, inner contact must be maintained in order to be sure of parallel contact dur-
ing running.
Parallel contact
Fig. 2: Contact condition during running
If there is no inner contact, outer contact (Fig. 3) will occur during running, and this
will increase the risk of blow-by.
Outer contact
Fig. 3: Outer contact, increased risk of blow-by
Further action:
Fill in Page 11 ‘Exhaust Valve Condition Report’.
If the seat contact is incorrect, grind the spindle seating, as described in Step 7.
However, before grinding, proceed to Steps 4, 5 and 6.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
4. Checking the Seat for Gas Leakage

What to do
Do not clean the spindle disc before inspection

· Visually check the inner part of the seating for blow-by
(Fig. 4 and Photo 1).
Blow-by
Inner part
Fig. 4: Blow-by
Photo 1: Blow-by
Acceptance criteria:
There must be no blow-by “tracks” across the inner part of the seat
(Figs. 1 + 4, and Photo 1).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Remarks:
Blow-by indications may be associated with large/deep dent marks, and will of-
ten form a “gas-jet-fan” in the deposits on the disc cone (Photo 1).
The surface of a serious blow-by track/groove will usually show signs of hot corro-
sion, i.e. it will have an “elephant skin” texture.
Minor leakages. Small, faint, fan-shaped leakage indications on the spindle cone,
just inside the seat area (Photo 2), are harmless.
Photo 2: Minor leakages, and “fans”
Further action:
Fill in Page 11, ‘Exhaust Valve Condition Report’.
If blow-by has been found, then grind the seat, as described in Step 7.
However, before grinding, proceed to Steps 5 and 6.
5. Cleaning and Evaluation

What to do
· Clean the seat with coarse emery cloth. Observe and note down the size and
number of dent marks. Also note any possible crack indications.
· Check the outer part of the seat for high temperature corrosion
(Fig. 1 and Photo 3).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Inner part
Outer part
Photo 3: Example of high-temperature corrosion at outer part

after 33,000 hours
· Clean the contact faces on which the measuring template is to be applied, and
measure:
– the burn-off on the disc underside,
– the total amount the seat has been ground.
See Vol. II Procedure 908-2
Dent marks, of varying number and size (up to 8-10 mm), will be seen on the seat-
ing after a few thousand service hours. The first marks may appear as early as af-
ter testbed running. In general, dent marks are acceptable and should not
necessitate grinding of the seat. If, however, the marks have caused blow-by, then
the seat must be ground/reconditioned.
Cracks. Any indications of cracks in the seat area should be checked carefully. If
cracking is confirmed, contact MAN B&W Diesel A/S.
High-temperature corrosion on the outer part of the seat may result in a meas-
urable difference in level between the inner and outer seat zones. In that case the
spindle must be ground. However, this will not normally happen before 20 –
30,000 hours after the previous grinding.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Wear allowances:.
Fill in data from
· Burn-off on disc underside, (F1) Procedure 908-2
F1:
· Total grinding of seat, (G1).
G1:
Remarks:
Burn-off rate (disc underside). The number of service
hours before shore-side reconditioning usually depends upon the burn-off rate of
the disc underside (Table 1)
Engine Type: *) Max. permissible

burn-off (mm)
26MC 5
35MC 6
42MC 7
46MC-C 8
50MC/MC-C 8
50ME/ME-C
60MC/MC-C 9
60ME/ME-C
70MC/MC-C 10
70ME/ME-C
80MC/MC-C 11
80ME/ME-S
90MC/MC-C 12
90ME/ME-C
*) Also valid for stationary engines (power plants)
Table 1: Permissible burn-off rate before reconditioning of spindle disc underside
Further action:
If the burn-off or grinding limits have been reached, contact MAN B&W Diesel A/
S for advice on reconditioning.
If the seat and the disc underside are acceptable with respect to Steps 3, 4, and
5, then the spindle can be reinstalled without grinding after step 6 has been carried
out. Otherwise, proceed to Steps 6 and 7.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
6. Inspecting the Valve Stem Wear Layer

What to do
· Clean the valve spindle stem.
· Measure the diameter of the spindle stem in the area shown
in Volume II, Procedure 908-2.
· Check the surface condition of the chrome-plated/HVOF-coated area.
Acceptance criteria:.
Fill in data from
Min. diameter: Must not be less than that stated in Vol. II, DATA 908-2
Procedure 908-2, DATACracking (“network cracking”)
D-__________:
of chrome/HVOF: Slight cracking of the lowermost part of min. diameter of
the chrome plating/HVOF-coating (Photo 4) has no signif- spindle stem:
icance, and is therefore acceptable.
Peeling-off: The chrome plating/HVOF-coating must not

show peeling-off.
Photo 4: Slight cracking (“network cracking”) of wear layer
Further action:
If the spindle stem is acceptable, proceed to Step 7.
Otherwise, contact MAN B&W Diesel A/S for advice on reconditioning.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
7. Grinding the Spindle Seat

What to do
· Mount the spindle in the grinding machine and, using the dial-gauge positioned
just inside the area of inner contact, (see Fig. 5), true-up to within a maximum
of 0.05 mm. This is done in order to minimize the amount of material removed
during grinding.
Max. 0.05 mm
Fig. 5: Truing-up the spindle
· Grind the seat according to the special instructions from

the grinding machine supplier. Fill in data from
DATA 908-2
See also MAN B&W Service Letter SL95-332/UM,
“Grinding of Nimonic Exhaust Valve Spindles”. D-__________:
Offset angle:
Keep the grinding to a minimum!
After full contact between grindstone and seat is reached at the beginning of
the grinding process:
Normally Limit the grinding to 0.2 mm.
Rare cases Remove 0.3 mm or more.
Blow-by Continue the grinding until the blow-by marks are removed.
Dent marks It is not necessary to continue grinding until all dent marks
have been removed.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Photo 5 shows an overhauled Nimonic valve spindle which is ready for further
service.
Photo 5: Acceptable seat condition after grinding
The ground surface. The grindstone must have removed
material from the whole width and the whole circumference Fill in data from
DATA 908-2
of the seat. There must be no signs of blow-by.
G1:
Max. grinding depth: must not exceed the limit (G1) stated
in Vol. II, Procedure 908-2, DATA.
If the seat surface is still not acceptable when the max. grinding depth has been
reached, contact MAN B&W Diesel A/S for advice on reconditioning.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
8. Exhaust Valve Condition Report
Exhaust Valve Condition Report

Vessel: Engine type: Builder/no.:
Valve dismounted from cyl.: Date: Engine hours (total): Valve no.:
Valve checked/overhauled by: Date: Place: Remarks:
Valve mounted on cyl.: Date: Engine hours (total): Kept as spare (yes/no):
BOTTOM PIECE
Marking: Base material: Hours after overhaul:
Type: Seat material: Hours total:
Seat contact (inner/outer/parallel): No. of dent marks larger than Ø = 7 mm:
Cracks (yes/no): Blow-by (yes/no): Maximum deposit thickness in duct (mm):
Deposit in chamber, extent (mm): at position (degrees, 0° = port side):
Total grinding, G1 (mm): S = 180°
Note! Max grinding, G1 = 2.0 mm

G1
Remarks: F = 90° A = 270°
P = 0°
SPINDLE
Marking: Base material: Hours after overhaul:
Disc coating: Seat material: Hours total:
Cracks (yes/no): Seat contact (inner/outer/parallel): Blow-by (yes/no):
Spindle disc max burn-off (mm): at position (A, B, C, D or E): Burn-off rate (mm/1000h):
No. of dent marks larger than Ø = 7 mm: Total grinding, G2 (mm): Note! Max grinding, G2 = 2.0 mm
E
Stem diameter d0 above sealing area (mm):
D
Min. stem diameter dmin at sealings (mm): C
B
Extent of reconditioning 1st 2nd 3rd A
Welding of seat (Tick off)

Seat welding material:
dmin d0
Welding of disc (Tick off) G2
Disc welding material:

Stem recond. Chr.-plating Remarks:
(Tick off)
HVOF-Cermet
HOUSING
Marking: Hours after overhaul:
Spindle guide diameter, d Top Bottom Extent of reconditioning 1st 2nd Hours total:
Minimum (mm) Repair welding (Tick off) Max coke deposit thickness (mm):
Maximum (mm) Coating:
Corrosion d 12 o'clock
Area A B C C
mm
B 6 o'clock
position
(o'clock)
A
Remarks:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Inspection through Scavenge Ports Plate 70701
1. Dismount the small covers on the scav-

enge air boxes, and clean the openings.
2. When the piston has been turned below

the level of the scavenge air ports, in-
spect the cylinder liner walls and the pis-
ton crown.
3. A tiltable mirror fixed to a telescopic rod

can be used as illustrated. Use a power-
ful light source for inspection.
4. In order to inspect a larger area of the

cylinder liner and piston, it is expedient
to enter the scavenge air receiver and
make observations from the “exhaust
side”. This should be done every time
the sludge is cleaned out from the scav-
enge air receiver and box.
5. While the piston is passing the scav-

enge air port, examine the piston crown,
the rings, and the skirt.
In order to be able to correctly observe

the running surfaces of the piston rings,
clean them with a rag.
Check the free movement and the ten-

sion of the piston rings, by pressing
them with a wooden stick.
6. Measure the total clearance between

the piston rings and the ring grooves.
7. When the piston has been turned up-

wards past the scavenge air ports, in-
spect the piston rod.
8. Note down the results on Plate 70702.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Plate 70702 Inspection through Scavenge Ports. Record
Inspection through Scavenge Ports

Vessel: Ll. no.: Builder/no.:
Number of cylinders: Eng. type: Eng. hrs.: Checked by: Date:
Weeks pr. port calls: Normal service load (% of MCR): MEP lubricator type (Y/N):
Cyl. oil consump. (l/24 hrs): at load % Cyl. oil type: Position: Exhaust Manoeuvre
Cylinder No.
Condition and Symbol Engine Part 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Intact - *
Burning - BU
Piston crown
Leaking oil - LO
Leaking water - LW
Topland
No deposit - *
Deposits
Light deposit - LC
Ringland 1
Medium deposit - MC
Excessive deposit - EC
Ringland 2
Polished deposit - PC
Ringland 3
Intact - *
Ring breakage
Ring 1
Collapsed - C
Broken opposite ring gap - BO Ring 2
Broken near gap - BN
Several pieces - SP Ring 3
Entirely missing - M
Ring 4
Ring movement
Ring 1
Loose - * Ring 2
Sluggish - SL
Sticking - ST Ring 3
Ring 4
Clean, smooth - * Ring 1

Running surface, Black,overall - B
Running surface, Black, partly - (B) Ring 2
Black ring ends > 100 mm - BR
Surface condition
Scratches (vertical) - S Ring 3

Micro-seizures (local) - mz
Micro-seizures (all over) - MZ Ring 4
Micro-seizures, still active - MAZ
Old MZ - OZ Piston skirt
Machining marks still visible - **
Wear-ridges near scav. ports - WR Piston rod
Scuffing - SC Cylinder liner abv.
Clover-leaf wear - CL scav. ports
Rings sharp-edged Top/Bot. - T/B Cylinder liner near
scav. ports
Ring 1
Lubrication condition
Ring 2
Optimal - * Ring 3
Too much oil - O
Slightly dry - D Ring 4
Very dry - DO
Black oil - BO Piston skirt
Piston rod
Cylinder liner
Deposit
No Sludge - *
Scavenge box
Sludge - S
s
Much sludge - MS
Scav. receiver
Flaps and nonreturn
Intact - *
valves
Running hours since last overhaul
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Inspection through Scavenge Ports, Symbols Plate 70703
q
g
Sym- Condition of inspection part
Piston Bowl
bol
Burning Carbon
• Satisfactory
Deposits, etc.
C Carbon Deposit
BU Burning Piston Liquid
LO Leakage Oil Topland
LW Leakage Water Piston
Ringlands
• Satisfactory (no deposits) 1, 2 and 3
LC Light carbon deposit
Deposits
EC Excessive carbon deposit Piston
PC Thick carbon deposit worn Rings
bright by rubbing against Piston
cyl. liner Skirt
• Intact Piston Rod

BO Broken, opposite ring gap
Broken
BN Broken, near ring gap

SP Broken in several pieces
M Entirely missing
COL Collapsed
• Loose
SL Sluggish in groove
Sticking
ST Sticking Cyl. Liner

above Ports
B Black running surface, over-
(B) all
Black running surface, parly
• Clean, smooth
S Vertical scratches
(abrasive particles)
mz Micro Seizures in spots Area near
MZ (local) Scavenge Air
Surface condition
MAZ Micro Seizures, all over Ports

OZ Micro Seizures still active Cyl. Liner
WR Old (nearly recovered) MZ below Ports
CO Wear ridges near bottom
CL Corrosion
T/B Clover-leaf wear Wear
Edge
Rings sharp-edged Top/Bot.
Lubr. condition
• Oil film normal

O Too much oil
D Too dry
DD Very dry
BO Black oil
A dot (•) always means that the inspected condition is satisfactory, e.g. small deposits, no leakage,
no breakages, no sticking, clean smooth surfaces, normal oil film, etc. However, this shall be record-
ed in order to show that the condition has been noted.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Plate 70704 Inspection through Scavenge Ports. Pictures
Running Surface of Piston Rings (see also Plate 70705)
NB: In file tests, use a new very finely cut file
“Polished Mirror Surface”

Photo 1 (about X3)
A normal, good running surface is smooth,

clean, and without scratches. The horizontal
line is a scratch mark resulting from a file
test, which indicates that the surface is not
hardened.
“Vertically Scratched”
Photo 2 (about X3)
Here the running surface has been

scratched by sharp, hard abrasive particles,
e.g. grains of sand.
The file test shows that the surface is not

hardened.
“Micro-Seizures”
Photo 3 (about X3)
A micro-seized running surface can appear

as shown here.
The file test gives almost no horizontal

scratch, which indicates that the surface is
covered by a hard glaze, i.e. has been hard-
ened due to micro-seizure.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Inspection through Scavenge Ports, Evaluation Plate 70705
Surface Condition Profile Running Surface
Normal good
“mirror surface”
“•” Barrel-shaped Clean, smooth, soft
Scratched by hard
abrasive particles
“S”
Uniform scratches, dull, soft
Sharp burrs
New
Micro seizures
(still active)
“MAZ”
Flat
Irregular marks, hardened
Old
Micro seizures
(restoration has
begun)
“OZ”
Curved edges, im- Smooth and soft Still hard in
plies that restora- along the edges centre area
tion has begun
Lubrication
Clover-leaf formation: orifice
heavy wear at several areas
around the cylinder liner,
in the case illustrated
concentrated between the
lubrication orifices
“CL”
Horizontal Section of Cyl. Liner
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Plate 70706 Factors influencing Cylinder Wear
Schematic summary of the most widely recognized causes of “cylinder wear”
Water droplets *)
Water leakages
H2SO4 “Cold” liner wall
Cleaning agents
Cyl. oil film deficiencies → 
Salt in intake air 
Sea water in fuel 
Corrosive HCL Sea water in cyl. oil 
wear Air cooler leakage 
Cyl. oil film deficiences → 


Cylinder 
liner ↓


Cyl. oil/fuel oil matching 
Piston rings
Cylinder Too low cyl. oil dosage 
oil film Distribution ←
deficiencies Water in cyl. oil 
Water leakage to cylin- 
Piston skirt ↓

Cyl. oil film deficiencies → 
Material Liner
Design Ring
Machining Skirt
Mechanical load
Micro- Thermal load
seizure Lack of ring tension
Deformation of piston rings
(during fitting)
Misalignment
Too high cyl. oil dosage
(deposits)
Water droplets *)
Cleaning agents
Abrasive
wear
Impurities in fuel oil

Scratches Impurities in intake air
Wear particles
*) Drain for condensed water in scavenge air receiver blocked or out of function.
See also Section 706-03 ‘Cleaning of Turbochargers and Air Coolers’
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Abrasive Particles Plate 70707
Typical observations when particles penetrate from

the combustion chamber into the piston ring zone
Exaggerated illustration of “worn and eroded” piston rings

No. 1 to 4, in “worn” grooves. It is typical for particle wear
that it excessively affects the upper ring (both the running
face and the horizontal surfaces) as well as the groove.
Some degree of micro-seizure sometimes occurs on the
lower rings, decreasing upwards. This is contrary to the
scratching intensity (or roughness) which decreases, from
ring to ring, downwards.
When particle-wear prevails, the cylinder liner wear rate
usually rises to between 0.30 and 0.50 mm/1000 hours.
Running face ring No. 1

The “trumpet-shaped” scratches
indicate that the hard particles
have penetrated from above.
Upper side of the uppermost rings

The horizontal faces, especially the
upper side, often become pock-marked
due to hard grains being crushed when
the rings are pressed upwards by the
gas trapped between the rings.
However, such an appearance can also
be the result of mechanical impact
due to ring collapse.
Upper side of the lower rings

The part sheltered in the groove
still shows intact machining marks.
The exposed part, protruding from
the groove, becomes sand-blasted
by the hard particles blown down
through the ring gap above.
Designations
“S” – Scratched running face
“PO” – “pock-marked”
“E” – Erosion. Outer edge sand-blasted

“MI” – Machining marks intact.
Numbers 1 to 5 give degree of damage

(5 being most).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Photo 1 (X30) Photo 2 (X30)
Rough scratching Typical “older” much
(degree 5) of a top finer scratching.
piston ring running That recovery or res-
face. The photo toration is at work,
shows the upper can be ween from
Plate 70708
edge, where the hard the fact that the

particles enter be- graphite flakes are
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

tween ring and liner distinct.
wall. This scratching Designation S2OLD.
is quite fresh, i.e. re-
covery or restoration
has not yet com-
menced.
Designation S5NEW.
Abrasive Particles

Typical “pock- This photo illus-
marking” of a ring trates how small
upper side, caused pieces of cast iron
by hard particles are “torn out” of the
penetrating into the top surface, by the
clearance above the masticating effect
ring and being of the hard parti-
crushed. This is cles. The pieces
most often seen on probably loosen
the two uppermost due to shear stress-
rings, which, during es, which cause
the last part of the fractures in the ma-
expansion stroke, terial between the
are pressed up- graphite flakes.
wards, against the Also ring collapse
ceiling of the groove, can cause “torn out”
by the gas trapped material.
between the rings
Typical erosion or Hard particles (sand)
sand-blasting on separated from a
the part of the ring sample of piston
topside which pro- crown deposit. Oil
trudes out of the and carbon have
groove. This is due been removed by in-
to hard grains being cineration, other mat-
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

blown down through ter by acid, magnetic
the gap in the ring separation and filtra-
above (NB: The tion. Theoretically
rings “turn” in the these particles could
grooves). Such ero- have come into the
sion is only seen on combustion chamber
rings Nos. 2, 3 and 4. either with the air or
with the fuel.

Abrasive Particles
Sand (or sand-like Fuel pump suction

grains) separated valve flap after only
from centrifuge a few service hours
sludge. In this case (the lapping marks
the centrifuge treat- are still visible. The
ed the fuel oil after depressions in the
the oil had passed a surface are in many
full flow (fabric) filter. cases made by one
The particles size is and the same parti-
10µ to 15µ. cle (repeated and
identical in shape
and size). Usually
the edge around the
holes is raised, and
often the original lap-
ping marks are still
visible in the bottom
of the depression
Plate 70709
Cylinder oil feed rate during running-in
Plate 70710 1(2)
- Running-in feed rate
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

- Basic feed rate
210
- Example of service feed rate
200
- Max. recommendable service feed rate
190
- Minimum feed rate
180
170
160
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
S/K/L-ME/ME-C Engines
60
50
40
Cylinder oil dosage in percent of basic setting

30
Cylinder oil Feed Rate during Running-in
20
10
0
0 600 1200 1800 2400 3000 3600 4200 4800 5400
Running hours
Guiding Cylinder Oil Feed Rates Plate 70710 2(2)
Guiding Cylinder Oil Feed Rates

S/L/K-MC/MC-C/ME/ME-C engines with Alpha Lubricators, based on a BN 70 cylinder oil
Standard guidelines Alpha Adaptive Cylinder oil

(ref. to MCR load) Control (Alpha ACC)
Basic setting 0.8 g/bhph 0.25 g/bhph x S%
1.1 g/kWh 0.34 g/kWh x S%
Minimum feed rate 0.6 g/bhph 0.5 g/bhph
0.8 g/kWh 0.7 g/kWh
Maximum feed rate during 1.25 g/bhph 1.25 g/bhph
normal service 1.7 g/kWh 1.7 g/kWh
Part-load control Proportional to mean cylinder Proportional to engine load
pressure
Below 25% load, proportional to engine speed.
Alu-coat piston First 5 hours: 1.6 g/bhph
rings: From 5 to 250 hours: Basic setting +50%
From 250 to 500 hours: Basic setting +25%
Running-in Feed rate:
new liners Non-coated or First 15 hours: 1.6 g/bhph
and piston hard-coated From 15 to 250 hours: Basic setting +50%
rings rings: From 250 to 500 hours: Basic setting +25%
Alu-coat piston Stepwise increase to max. load over 5 hours
Engine rings:
load:
Non-coated or Stepwise increase to max. load over 15 hours
hard-coated
rings:
Running-in new rings in Alu-coat piston rings: No load restrictions
already run-in liners: Non-coated or hard-coated rings: Stepwise load increase to max.
load over 5 hours.
Feed rate: Basic setting +25% for 24 hrs.
Load change device During starting, manoeuvring and load changes, regulation propor-
(LCD) tional to load or mean effective pressure should be replaced by rpm
proportional control, and the dosage increased by 25%.
Lubrication of cylinders Frequent scavenge port inspections of piston rings and cylinder lin-
that show abnormal con- ers are very important for maintaining a good cylinder condition.
ditions: If irregularities are seen, adjustments of the lube oil rate should be
considered.
In case of scuffing, sticking piston rings or high liner temperature
fluctuations, the feed rate should be raised by 25–50%.
) When referring to this page, please quote Operation Plate 70710, Edition 0001
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Cylinder Condition Report Plate 70711
If a liner or piston crown is exchanged, two reports must be filled-in!
Cylinder Condition Report

Vessel: Ll. no.: Eng. builder: Eng. no.: Checked by:
No. of cyl.: Eng. type: Eng. hrs.: Date (yymmdd): Inspected unit no.:
Voyage info
Weeks pr. port calls: Normal service load (% of MCR): Lub. part load control: Lub. type:
Cyl. oil consumption (l/24 hrs): at load %: Cyl. oil type:
Cylinder liner
Liner hours: Insulation pipe (Y/N): PC ring (Y/N): Liner material:
Drawing no.: Frame type: Liner cool type:
Producer/Marking: Wear type: Liner honed (Y/N):
Cyl. cover tightened (Y/N): Temp. between liner and measuring tool (°C): Shims (mm):
Measuring A1 A2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
point (Additional) (Additional)
Depth (mm)
Diameter F-A
(mm) E-M
F A 0 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 3 All measuring points are defined from the distance of themating surface from the cylinder cover.
Pos. 0: The middle of the none sliding part above the top piston ring at TDC.
Pos. 1-4: The middle of the rings at TDC.
M Pos. 5 & 6: Equally positioned between pos. 4 and 7 (1/3 of distance).
Pos. 7: Lubrication quill level.
E: Exhaust M: Manoeuvre Pos. 8 & 9: Equally positioned between pos. 7 and 10 (1/3 of distance).
Pos. 10: 100 mm. above the scav. air ports.
A: Aft F: Fore Pos. 11: The middle of the none sliding part below the bottom piston ring at BDC.
Liner
remarks
Piston rings
Base material Coating Profile Manufacturer Lock type CL grooves Broken
Ring 1
Ring 2
Ring 3
Ring 4
Ring 5
Width of ring (mm) Free ring
F
Ring grooves
A B C D E gap "F" Height, H (mm)
E A 2 mm
Degrees (mm) F E A M
D B
Ring 1
Ring 2 H
C
Ring 3
Ring 4 "F" to be measured
before dismantling
Ring 5
Hours since last overhaul:
Piston Reason for examination
Crown hours: High topland (Y/N): Routine piston overhaul (If either of these boxes are ticked, below
boxes must be kept blank)
Bronze ring (Y/N): Oros piston (Y/N): Test
Max burning 1 (mm) E (180°) Liner Piston Crown Piston Rings Piston Skirt
Position 1 (degree) Cracks Burning Broken Leaking
Max burning 2 (mm) Scuffing Cracks Collapsed Scuffing
F (90°) A (270°)
Position 2 (degree) Leak Leaking Scuffing Piston Rod
Max burning 3 (mm) High Groove Sticking Stuff. box
Position 3 (degree) M (0°) Wear
Piston
remarks
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Calculation of Condensate Amount Plate
M ambient Water vapour in intake

(kg/kWh)
0.60 100%
Rel. Humidity = 100%

90%
Rel. Humidity = 90%
0.50
Rel. Humidity = 80%
Rel. Humidity = 70% 80%
Rel. Humidity = 60%

Rel. Humidity = 50% 70%
0.40
Rel. Humidity = 40%
60%
0.30
50%
40%
0.20
0.10
0.00
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
Am bient air tem perature (oc)
Plate
Calculation of Condensate Amount
M scavenge Maxim um w ater vapour

(kg/kWh) in scavenge air
0.60
Pscav = 2.0 bar abs

Pscav = 2.5 bar abs
0.50
Pscav = 3.0 bar abs
Pscav = 3.5 bar abs
Pscav = 4.0 bar abs 2.0 bar abs
0.40
2.5 bar abs
0.30 3.0 bar abs
3.5 bar abs
4.0 bar abs
0.20
0.10
0.00
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
Scavenge air tem perature ( oc)
Cylinder Lubricating Oil Pipes Plate 70713
Deck
Filling pipe
Fig. 1
Cylinder oil storage or
service tank
Level
Min. 3000mm
alarm
LS 8212 AL
Heater with set
point of 40°C
TI
Min. 2000mm
Small box for

Insulation
heater element
AC
Fig. 2
50/60 65/70/80 90/98
Solenoid valve
ZV 8204 C
Lubricator
Feed-back sensor
ZT 8203 C
Level switch
LS 8208 C
AC TE 8202 C AH
Drain
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Breaking-in load programme
MAN Diesel A/S

120
110
96% load 94% 97% 99% 100% load
100 88% 86% 88% 91%
80% 78% 80% 83%
70% 73%
90
57% 61% 67%
51
80
41% 37
70
22%
60
Breaking-in load new cylinder
Running-in Load
50 liner and Alucoat piston rings

6%
40
Rpm % (ship's speed)

Breaking-in load new cylinder
30 liner and non-coated piston rings
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Hours
Page 1 (2)
Plate 70714
Page 2 (2)
Cylinder oil regulation, fixed-pitch propeller
Plate 70714
1,3
1,2
25% load
1,1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
Reduction factor
Running-in Load
0,4
0,3 Manoeuvring and load change situations

RPM regulation
0,2
MEP reg. down to 40% and then RPM reg.
0,1 Load reg. down to 40% and then RPM reg.
0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
RPM, % of MCR
MAN Diesel A/S
Bearings and Circulating Oil Chapter 708
Table of Contents
708-01 Bearings
1. General Bearing Requirements and Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Bearing Metals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.1 Tin based White Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.2 Tin Aluminium (AlSn40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Overlayers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4. Flashlayer, Tin (Sn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
5. Bearing Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
5.1 Smooth Runout of Oil Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
5.2 Bore Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
5.3 Axial Oil Grooves and Oil Wedges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5.4 Thick Shell Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5.5 Thin Shell Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5.6 Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5.7 Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5.8 Undersize Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
6. Journals/Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
6.1 Surface Roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
6.2 Spark Erosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6.3 Surface Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6.4 Undersize Journals/Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
7. Practical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
7.1 Check without Opening up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
7.2 Open up Inspection and Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
7.3 Types of Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
7.4 Causes of Wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
7.5 Cracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
7.6 Cause for Cracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
7.7 Repair of Oil Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
7.8 Bearing Wear Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
7.9 Surface Roughness (journal/pin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
7.10 Repairs of Bearings on the Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
7.11 Repairs of Journals/Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
7.12 Inspection of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 708 Bearings and Circulating Oil
Table of Contents
8. Crosshead Bearing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

8.1 Bearing Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
8.2 Bearing Function and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
9. Main Bearing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

9.1 The Thick Shell Bearing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
9.2 The Thin Shell (Insert Bearing) Bearing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
10. Crankpin Bearing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
11. Guide Shoes and Guide Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
12. Thrust Bearing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
13. Check of Bearings before Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

13.1 Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
13.2 Check Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
13.3 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
708-02 Alignment of Main Bearings

1. Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Alignment of Main Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2.1 Deflection Measurements (autolog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.2 Checking the Deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.3 Floating Journals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.4 Causes of Crankshaft Deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.5 Piano Wire Measurements. Bedplate Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.6 Shafting Alignment, Bearing Load, “Jack-up” Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
708-03 Circulating Oil and Oil System

1. Circulating Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
2. Circulating Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Circulating Oil Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

3.1 Cooling Oil Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.2 Lubricating Oil Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Bearings and Circulating Oil Chapter 708
Table of Contents
708-04 Maintenance of the Circulating Oil

1. Oil System Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Cleaning the Circulating Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2.1 Cleaning before filling-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.2 Flushing Procedure, Main Lub. Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Circulating Oil Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.2 The Centrifuging Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.3 The System Volume, in Relation to the Centrifuging Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.4 Guidance Flow Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4. Oil Deterioration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2 Oxidation of Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2.A High Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2.B Air Admixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2.C Catalytic Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.3 Signs of Deterioration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.4 Water in the Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.5 Check on Oil Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5. Circulating Oil: Analyses & Characteristic Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6. Cleaning of Drain Oil from Piston Rod Stuffing Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
708-05 Turbocharger Lubrication

1. MAN B&W T/C, System Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. MET T/C, System Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. BBC T/C, System Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Table of Contents
708-08 Hydraulic System for ME Engines

1. ME Engine Concept and Mechanical Hydraulic System Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1 Hydraulic Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1.1 Filter Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1.2 Electrically Driven Start-up or Start-up/Back-up Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1.3 Engine Driven Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1.4 Safety and Accumulator Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.1.5 High Pressure Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.1.6 Drip Pan with Leak Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. Hydraulic Cylinder Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4. Distribution Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5. Electronically Controlled Fuel Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
6. Functional Description of the Throttle Valve on the Fuel Oil Pressure Booster. . . . . . . . . . 7
7. Electronic Exhaust Valve Actuation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8. Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
PLATES
Main Bearing, Thick Shell Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70801
Main Bearing, Thin Shell Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70802
Crosshead Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70803
Crankpin Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70804
Main Bearing Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70805
Guide Shoes and Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70806
Thrust Bearing Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70807
Inspection of Bearings – Recording of Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70809
Inspection of Bearings – Location and Size of Damage in Bearing Shells . . . . . . . Plate 70810
Acceptance Criteria for Tin-Aluminium Bearings with Overlayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70811
Inspection of Bearings – Location of Damage on Pin/Journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70812
Inspection of Bearings – Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70813
Inspection of Bearings – Inspection Records, Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70814
Inspection of Bearings – Inspection Records, Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70815
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Table of Contents
Report: Crankshaft Deflections (Autolog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70816

Crankshaft Deflection, Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70817
Circulating Oil System (Outside Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70818
Circulating Oil System (Inside Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70820
Flushing of Main Lub. Oil System – Location of Checkbag and Blank Flanges . . . Plate 70821
Flushing of Main Lub. Oil System – Dimension of Checkbag and Blank Flanges . Plate 70822
Flushing of Main Lubricating Oil System – Flushing Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70823
Cleaning System, Stuffing Box Drain Oil (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70824
Turbocharger Lubricating Oil Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70828
Check Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70829
Gear Driven HPS, ELFI + ELVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70830
Gear Driven HPS, FIVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70831
Gear Driven HPS, ELFI + ELVA, Separate LPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70832
Gear Driven HPS, FIVA, Separate LPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70833
El Driven HPS, FIVA, Separate LPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70834
El Driven HPS, FIVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70835
6L42MC/ME KMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70836
Combined HPS, Common LPS, FIVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70837
Combined HPS, Separate LPS, FIVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70838
Gear Driven HPS, FIVA, Common LPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70839
Leak Detection in Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70840
Throttle Valve on Fuel Oil Pressure Booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70841
Drain Holes in HCU Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70842
Level Switch on ME Cylinder Lubricator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70843
Hydraulic Control Oil System, Separate LPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70844
Double Wall Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70845
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Bearings 708-01
708-01 Bearings
1. General Bearing Requirements and Criteria

Bearings are vital engine components; therefore, the correct bearing design and
the proper choice of bearing metal is necessary for reliable engine performance.
Bearing design criteria depend on the bearing type and, in general, on:
a. Bearing load
· Static
· Dynamic
b. Bearing load direction
c. Journal/housing movement
d. Revolutions
e. Cooling used.
The compactness of engines and the engine ratings influence the magnitude of
the specific load on the bearing and make the correct choice of bearing metals,
production quality and, in certain bearings, the application of overlayer necessary.
(See Item 3., ‘Overlayers’).
Scraping of the bearing surfaces is not advisable, except in those repair situ-
ations mentioned in Items 7.7 and 7.10. It is strongly recommended to contact
MAN B&W Diesel for advice before starting any repairs, as incorrect scraping has
often proved to have an adverse effect on the sliding properties of the bearing, and
has resulted in damage.
2. Bearing Metals
2.1 Tin based White Metal
Tin-based white metal is an alloy with minimum 88% tin (Sn), the rest of the alloy
composition is antimony (Sb), copper (Cu), cadmium (Cd) and small amounts of
other elements that are added to improve the fineness of the grain structure and
homogeneity during the solidification process. This is important for the load carry-
ing and sliding properties of the alloy. Lead (Pb) content in this alloy composition
is an impurity, as the fatigue strength deteriorates with increasing lead content,
which should not exceed 0.2 % of the cast alloy composition.
2.2 Tin Aluminium (AlSn40)

Tin aluminium is a composition of aluminium (Al) and tin (Sn) where the tin is
trapped in a 3-dimensional mesh of aluminium. AlSn40 is a composition with 40%
tin. The sliding properties of this composition are very similar to those of tin based
white metal but the loading capacity of this material is higher than tin based white
metals for the same working temperature; this is due to the ideal combination of
tin and aluminium, where tin gives the good embedability and sliding properties,
while the aluminium mesh functions as an effective load absorber.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-01 Bearings
3. Overlayers
An overlayer is a thin galvanic coating of mainly lead (Pb) and tin (Sn), which is
applied directly on to the white metal or, via a thin galvanically applied intermediate
layer of either Ag or Ni, on to the tin aluminium sliding surface of the bearing. The
overlayer is a soft and ductile coating, its main objective is to ensure good embed-
ability and conformity between the bearing sliding surface and the pin surface ge-
ometry. Overlayer is mainly used in XH-bearing design
4. Flashlayer, Tin (Sn)

A flash layer is a 100% tin (Sn) layer which is applied galvanically; the thickness
of this layer is only a few µm. The coating of tin flash is applied all over and func-
tions primarily to prevent corrosion (oxidation) of the bearing. The tin flash also
functions as an effective dry lubricant when new bearings are installed and when
the crankshaft is turned.
5. Bearing Design (Plates 70801, 70802, 70803, 70804)

Plain bearings for MC engines are manufactured as steel shells with a sliding sur-
face of white metal or tin aluminium with or without overlayer/flash layer. Tin alu-
minium bearings are always of the thin shell design while the white metal bearings
can either be of the thick shell or thin shell design.
The bearing surface is furnished with a centrally placed oil supply groove and oth-
er design features such as smooth run-outs, oil wedges and/or bore reliefs.
5.1 Smooth Runout of Oil Groove (Plates 70801, 70802, 70804, Fig. B-B)
A smooth runout is the transition geometry between the circumferential oil supply
groove and the bearing sliding surface. This special oil groove transition geometry
prevents an oil scraping effect and reduces the resistance to the flow of oil towards
the loaded area of the bearing (Main bearing Plates 70801, 70802 and crankpin
bearing Plate 70804).
5.2 Bore Relief (Plates 70801, 70802, 70804, Fig. A-A)

The bearing sliding surface is machined at the mating faces of the upper and lower
shells to create bore reliefs. Their main objective is to compensate for misalign-
ments which could result in a protruding edge (step) of the lower shell’s mating
face to that of the upper shell. Such a protruding edge can act as an oil scraper
and cause oil starvation. Main bearing (Plates 70801, 70802), and crankpin bear-
ing (Plate 70804).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Bearings 708-01
5.3 Axial Oil Grooves and Oil Wedges (Plates 70803, 70806, Fig. A-A)
Oil grooves and wedges have the following functions:
1. To enance the oil distribution over the load carrying surfaces.

(The tapered areas give improved oil inlet conditions).
2. Especially in the case of crosshead bearings (Plate 70803) – to assist the for-
mation of a hydrodynamic oil film between the load carrying surfaces.
3. To provide oil cooling (oil grooves).
In order to perform these functions, the oil must flow freely from the lubricating
grooves, past the oil wedges, and into the supporting areas – where the oil film car-
ries the load.
5.4 Thick Shell Bearings (Plate 70801)

This type of bearing has a steel back with the required stiffness
1. To ensure against distortion of the sliding surface geometry, and

2. To support the cast-on white metal in regions where the shell lacks support,
for example in the area of the upper shell mating faces.
The top clearances in this bearing design are adjusted with shims, while the side
clearances are a predetermined result of the summation of the housing bore, shell
wall thickness, journal tolerances, and the influence of the staybolt tensioning
force which deforms the bedplate around the bearing assembly.
Thick shell bearings are typically 30-60 mm thick and used for main bearings only.
5.5 Thin Shell Bearings (Plate 70802)

Thin shell bearings have a wall thickness between 2% and 2.5% of the journal di-
ameter. The steel back does not have the sufficient stiffness to support the cast-
on bearing metal alone. The bearing must therefore be supported rigidly over its
full length. This type of bearing is manufactured with a circumferential overlength
(crush/nip) which, when the shells are mounted and tightened up, will produce the
required radial pressure between the shell and the bearing housing.
The top and side clearance in this bearing is predetermined and results from a
summation of the housing bore, shell wall thickness, journal/pin diameter toleranc-
es and, for main bearings, the deformation of the bedplate from the staybolt ten-
sioning force.
5.6 Top Clearance

Correct top clearance in main bearings, crankpin bearings, and crosshead bear-
ings is a balance between sustaining the required oil flow through the bearing,
hence stabilizing the bearing temperature at a level that will ensure the fatigue
strength of the bearing metal and having a geometry, which enhances a proper oil
film build-up and maintenance.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-01 Bearings
Too high top clearance is often the cause of fatigue cracks.
The bearings are checked in general by measuring the top clearances.
In service, top clearance measurements can be regarded:
1. as a check of the correct re-assembly of the bearing.

For new bearings the clearances should lie within the limits specified in the
maintenance manual (see Volume II, 904 and 905).
2. as an indicator to determine the condition of the bearing at a periodic check
without opening up, see Item 7.1, ‘Check without Opening up’.
In both cases, it is vital that the clearance values from the previous check are avail-
able for comparison. Therefore, it is necessary to enter clearances in the engine
log book with the relevant date and engine service hours (see e.g. Plate 70813).
The initial clearances can be read from the testbed results
5.7 Wear
Bearing wear is negligible under normal service conditions, see Item 7.8, ‘Bearing
Wear Rate’. Excessive wear is due to abrasive or corrosive contamination of the
system oil which will affect the roughness of the journal/pin and increase the wear
rate of the bearing.
5.8 Undersize Bearings

1. Crankpin bearings are thin shell bearings. Due to relatively long production
time, the engine builder has a ready stock of semi-produced shells (blanks)
that covers a range from nominal diameter to 3 mm undersize, see also Item
6.4, ‘Undersize Journals/Pins’. Semi-produced shells for journals with under-
sizes lower than 3 mm are not stocked as standard. Furthermore, undersizes
lower than 3 mm can also involve modification such as the bolt tension, hy-
draulic tool, etc.
For advice on the application of undersize bearings, it is recommended to
contact MAN B&W Diesel.
2. The main bearings for the MC engine series can be of the thick or thin shell
type (see 70801, 70802); the information under point 1 is also valid here.
3. Crosshead bearings are only available as standard shells, as the recondition-
ing proposal for offset grinding of the pin (refer to 6.4 2.b) facilitates the use
of standard shells.
It is recommended to contact MAN B&W Diesel for advice on such recondi-
tioning.
6. Journals/Pins
6.1 Surface Roughness
Journal/pin surface roughness is important for the bearing condition.
Increased surface roughness can be caused by:
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Bearings 708-01
1. Abrasive damage due to contamination of the system oil.

See also Item 7.4.2.
2. Corrosive damage due to sea water or other contamination of the system oil
(acidic) or oxidation of the journals due to condensate. See also Item 7.4.2.
3. Spark erosion (only known in main bearings). See also Item 6.2, ‘Spark Ero-
sion’.
4. Scratches caused by manhandling.
With increasing journal/pin roughness, a level will be reached where the oil film
thickness is no longer sufficient, causing metal contact between journal/pin and
the bearing sliding surface. This will cause bearing metal to adhere to the journal/
pin, giving the surface a silvery white appearance. When such a condition is ob-
served, the journal/pin must be reconditioned by polishing, and the roughness of
the surface made acceptable. In extreme cases, the journal/pin must be ground to
an undersize (see Item 6.4, ‘Undersize Journals/Pins’).
6.2 Spark Erosion

Spark erosion is caused by a voltage discharge between the main bearing and
journal surface.
The cause of the potential is the development of a galvanic element between the
ship’s hull, sea water, and the propeller shaft/crankshaft.
The oil film acts as a dielectric. The puncture voltage in the bearing depends on
the thickness of the oil film.
Since the hydrodynamic oil film thickness varies through a rotation cycle, the dis-
charge will take place at roughly the same instant during each rotation cycle, i.e
when the film thickness is at its minimum. The roughening will accordingly be con-
centrated in certain areas on the journal surface.
In the early stages, the roughened areas can resemble pitting erosion – but later,
as the roughness increases, the small craters will scrape off and pick up bearing
metal – hence the silvery white appearance.
Therefore, to ensure protection against spark erosion, the potential level must be
kept at maximum 80 mV, which is feasible with a high efficiency earthing device.
If an earthing device is installed, its effectiveness must be checked regularly.
Spark erosion has only been observed in main bearings and main bearing jour-
nals. Regarding repair of the journals, see Item 7.11, ‘Repairs of Journals/Pins’.
The condition of the bearings must be evaluated to determine whether they can be
reconditioned or if they have to be discarded. It is recommended to contact MAN
B&W Diesel if advice is required.
6.3 Surface Geometry

Surface geometry defects such as lack of roundness, conicity and misalignment
may give rise to operational difficulties. Such abnormal cases of journal/pin geom-
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-01 Bearings
etry and misalignment may occur after a journal grinding repair.

It is recommended to contact MAN B&W Diesel for advice.
6.4 Undersize Journals/Pins

In case of severe damage to the journal, it may become necessary to recondition
the journal/pin by grinding to an undersize. The final undersize should as far as
possible be selected as a half or full millimetre. This is advisable in order to simplify
production and availability of undersize bearings, as for example in the following
cases:
1. Main and crankpin journals can be ground to 3 mm undersize; undersize jour-

nals below this value require special investigations of the bearing assembly.
2. In service, crossheads pins can be:
a. Polished to (Dnominal – 0.15 mm) as the minimum diameter.
b. Offset to a maximum of 0.3 mm and ground.
In both cases, since standard bearings are used, the bearing top clearance
will increase depending on the surface condition of the pin to be recondi-
tioned. The offset value used for grinding must be stamped clearly on the pin.
7. Practical Information
7.1 Check without Opening up
Follow the check list in accordance with the programme stated in Vol. II ‘Mainte-
nance’, 904 and 905. Enter the results in the engine log book. See also Item 7.12,
‘Inspection of Bearings’.
1. Stop the engine and block the main starting valve.

2. Engage the turning gear.
3. Just after stopping the engine, while the oil is still circulating, check that uni-
form oil jets appear from all the oil outlet grooves in the crosshead bearing
lower shell and the guide shoes.
4. Turn the crankthrow for the relevant cylinder unit to a suitable position and
stop the lube oil circulating pump (it is recommended to trial the engine for
½-1 hr with the pumps off to let the oil drip off).
5. a. Check the top clearance with a feeler gauge. The change in clearances
must be negligible when compared with the readings from the last inspec-
tion (overhaul). If the total increase in top clearance as from new is be-
yond the tolerance, the bearing should be inspected.
b. For guide shoe and guide strip clearances and checking procedure, see
Vol. II: ‘Maintenance’, 904.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Bearings 708-01
6. Examine the sides of the bearing shell, guide shoes and guide strips, and
check for squeezed-out or loosened metal; also look for bearing metal frag-
ments in the oil pan, see item Volume II, ‘Maintenance’, 905.
7. In the following cases, the bearings must be dismantled for inspection, see
Item 7.2, ‘Open up Inspection and Overhaul’.
a. Bearing running hot.
b. Oil flow and oil jets uneven, reduced or missing.
c. Increase of clearance since previous reading larger than 0.05 mm.
See also Item 7.8, ‘Bearing Wear Rate’.
d. Bearing metal squeezed out, dislodged or missing at the bearing, guide
shoe or guide strip ends.
If Item 7.a has been observed excessively in crosshead bearings or crankpin bear-
ings, measure the diameter of the bearing bore in several positions. If the diameter
varies by more than 0.06 mm, send the connecting rod complete to an authorised
repair shop.
If Items 7.a, 7.c or 7.d are observed when inspecting main bearings, we will rec-
ommend to inspect the two adjacent bearing shells, to check for any abnormalities.
7.2 Open up Inspection and Overhaul (Plates 70809)
Record the hydraulic pressure level when the nuts of the bearing cap
go loose.
Carefully wipe the running surfaces of the pin/journal and the bearing shell with a
clean rag. Use a powerful lamp for inspection.
Assessment of the metal condition and journal surface is made in accordance with
the directions given below. The results should be entered in the engine log book.
See also Item 7.12, ‘Inspection of Bearings’.
7.3 Types of Damage

The overlayer and bearing metal can exhibit the following types of damage.
1. Tearing of the overlayer (XH bearings) is due to substandard bonding. The

damage is not confined to specific areas of the bearing surface. The bearing
metal/intermediate layer in the damaged area is seen clearly with a sharply
defined overlayer border. This defect is regarded mainly as a cosmetic defect,
if it is confined to small areas of the bearing surface without interconnection.
For tin-aluminium bearings, the total area where the intermediate

layer is exposed due to overlayer tearing, wiping or wear must not
exceed the maximum limit given in Table 1 on Plate 70810.
Whether the intermediate layer is exposed can be determined if the layer is Ni

(for Daido produced bearings) with a knife test, as the knife will leave only a
faint or no cut mark in the intermediate layer.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-01 Bearings
2. Wiping of overlayer manifests itself by parts of the overlayer being smeared

out. Wiping of overlayer can take place when running-in a new bearing; how-
ever, if the wiping is excessive, the cause must be found and rectified. One of
the major causes of wiping is pin/journal surface roughness and scratches.
See also the ‘Note’ above.
3. Bearing metal wiping is due to metal contact between the sliding surfaces
which causes increased frictional heat, resulting in plastic deformation (wip-
ing) (see Item 7.4, ‘Causes of Wiping’). See also Item 7.10.2.
Moderate wiping during the running-in stage is normal, and is considered as
a “cosmetic” problem.
7.4 Causes of Wiping

1. Hard contact spots, e.g. originating from:
a. Defective pin/journal, bearing, or crosshead guide surfaces.
b. Scraped bearing or guide shoe surfaces.
c. Hard particles trapped between the housing bore and the back
of the shell.
d. Fretting on the back of the shell and in the housing bore.
2. Increased pin/journal surface roughness.
In most cases the increase in roughness will have occurred in service, and is
attributed to:
a. Hard particle ingress:
Hard particle ingress may be due to the malfunction of filters and/or cen-
trifuges or loosened rust and scales from the pipings. Therefore, always
pay careful attention to oil cleanliness.
b. Corrosive attack:
· If the oil develops a weak acid.
· If strong acid anhydrides are added to the oil which, in combination with
water, will develop acid.
· If the salt water content in the lube oil is higher than 1%. The water will
attack the bearing metal, and result in the formation of a very hard
black tin-oxide encrustation (SnO) which may scratch and roughen the
pin surface. The formation of tin oxide is intensified by rust from the bot-
tom tank. Therefore, keep the internal surface, especially the “ceiling”,
clean.
3. Inadequate lube oil supply.
4. Misalignment.
7.5 Cracks
Crack development is a fatigue phenomenon due to increased dynamic stress lev-
els in local areas of the bearing metal.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Bearings 708-01
In the event of excessive local heat input, the fatigue strength of the bearing metal
will decrease, and thermal cracks are likely to develop even below the normal dy-
namic stress level.
A small cluster of hairline cracks develops into a network of cracks. At an ad-

vanced stage, increased notch effect and the influence of the hydrodynamic oil
pressure will tear the white metal from the steel back and produce loose and dis-
lodged metal fragments.
7.6 Cause for Cracks

1. Insufficient strength of the bonding between the white metal and the steel
back (tinning or casting error).
2. Crack development after a short working period may be due to a misalignment
(e.g. a twist between the bearing cap and housing) or geometric irregularities
(e.g. a step between the contact faces of the bearing shell, or incorrect oil
wedge geometry).
3. High local loading: for example, if, during running-in, the load is concentrated
on a few local high spots of the white metal.
Bearings with cracks can only be repaired temporarily depending

on the extent of the damage.
7.7 Repair of Oil Transitions (Wedges, tangential run out and bore relief)
It is strongly recommended to contact MAN B&W Diesel for advice

before starting any repairs. (See also Item 1., ‘General Bearing
Requirements and Criteria’.)
Formation of sharp ridges or incorrect inclination of the transition to the bearing
surface will seriously disrupt the flow of oil to the bearing surface, causing oil star-
vation at this location.
Oil transitions are reconditioned by carefully cleaning for accumulated metal with
a straight edge or another suitable tool. Oil wedges should be rebuilt to the re-
quired inclination (maximum 1/100) and length, see Plate 70803.
Check the transition geometries before installing the bearings,

see Item 13., ‘Check of Bearings before Installation’.
7.8 Bearing Wear Rate

The reduction of shell thickness in the loaded area of the main, crankpin and
crosshead bearing in a given time interval represents the wear rate of the bearing.
Average bearing wear rate based on service experience is 0.01 mm/10,000 hrs.
As long as the wear rate is in the region of this value, the bearing function can be
regarded as normal. See also Item 7.1, ‘Check without Opening up’, point 7.c.).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-01 Bearings
For white metal crosshead bearings, the wear limit is confined to about 50% re-
duction of the oil wedge length, see Plate 70803. Of course, if the bearing surface
is still in good shape, the shell can be used again after the oil wedges have been
extended to normal length. Check also the pin surface condition, see Items 6.1,
‘Surface Roughness’ and 7.9, ‘Surface Roughness (journal/pin)’.
For tin-aluminium crosshead bearings, see the ‘Note’ in Item 7.3.1.
For further advice, please contact MAN B&W Diesel A/S.
7.9 Surface Roughness (journal/pin)

1. Limits to surface roughness
The surface roughness of the journal/pin should always be within
the specified limits.
a. For main and crankpin journals: 0.4 Ra AlSn 40-layer
· New journals 0.8 Ra WM-layer
· Roughness approaching 1.6 Ra WM-layer
(journal to be reconditioned) 0.8 Ra AlSn 40-layer
b. For crosshead pins: +
+ Scratches
· New or repolished 0.05 Ra OK
· Acceptable in service 0.05-0.1 Ra

· Repolishing if higher than 0.1 Ra
3. Determination of the pin/journal roughness 120°
Measure the roughness with an electronic roughness tester, or

Evaluate the roughness with a Ruko tester, by comparing the surface of the
pin/journal with the specimens on the Ruko tester. When performing this test,
the pin surface and the Ruko tester must be thoroughly clean and dry. Hold
the tester close to the surface and compare the surfaces. If necessary, use
your finger nail to run over the pin/journal surface and the Ruko specimens to
compare and determine the roughness level.
7.10 Repairs of Bearings on the Spot
It is recommended to contact MAN B&W Diesel for advice before start-

ing any repairs. See also Item 1., ‘General Bearing Requirements and
Criteria’).
1. Overlayer wiping
a. Overlayer wiping and moderate tearing in crosshead bearing lower shells
is not serious, and is remedied by careful use of a scraper. However, see
the ‘Note’ in Item 7.3.1.
b. Hard contact on the edges of crosshead bearings is normally due to gal-
vanic build-up of the overlay. This is occasionally seen when inspecting
newly installed bearings and is remedied by relieving these areas with a
straight edge or another suitable tool.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Bearings 708-01
2. Bearing metal squeezed out or wiped:

a. The wiped metal can accumulate in the oil grooves/ wedges, run-out or
bore relief where it forms ragged ridges. Such bearings can normally be
used again, provided that the ridges are carefully removed with a suitable
scraping tool and the original geometry is re-established (see Item 7.7,
‘Repair of Oil Transitions’). High spots on the bearing surface must be
levelled out by light cross-scraping.
b. In cases of wiping where the bearing surface geometry is to be re-estab-
lished, it is important:
· to assess the condition of the damaged area and, if found
necessary, to check the bearing surface for hairline cracks
under a magnifying glass and with a penetrant fluid, if necessary.
· to check the surface roughness of the journal/pin.
c. In extreme cases of wiping, the oil wedges in the crosshead bearing may
disappear. In that event, the shell should be replaced.
3. For evaluation and repair of spark erosion damage, refer to Item 6.2, ‘Spark
Erosion’.
4. Cracked bearing metal surfaces should only be repaired temporarily. The
bearing must be replaced (see Items 7.5, ‘Cracks’ and 7.6, ‘Cause for
Cracks’).
7.11 Repairs of Journals/Pins

1. Crosshead pins
Pin surface roughness should be better than 0.1 Ra (see Item 7.9, ‘Surface
Roughness (journal/pin)’). If the Ra value is higher than 0.1 µm, the pin can
often be repolished on the spot, as described below. If the pin is also
scratched, the position and extent of the scratched areas must be evaluated.
If there are also deep scratches, these must be levelled out carefully with
hardbacked polishing paper, or similar, before the polishing process is start-
ed.
Use a steel ruler, or similar, to support the polishing paper, as the finger-
tips are too flexible.
The surface roughness not counting in scratches after polishing should be

0.05 Ra in the 120° crown. The upper 240° can be accepted up to an average
roughness of 0.2 Ra including scratches.
The following methods are recommended for repolishing on the spot.
a. Polishing with microfinishing film

The polishing process is carried out with a “microfinishing film”, e.g. 3M
aluminium oxide (30 micron and 15 micron), which can be recommended
as a fairly quick and easy method, although to fully reestablish the pin
surface it will often be necessary to send the crosshead ashore.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-01 Bearings
The microfinishing film can be slung around the pin and drawn to and fro
by hand and, at the same time, moved along the length of the pin, or it is
drawn with the help of a hand drilling machine; in this case, the ends of
the microfilm are connected together with strong adhesive tape or glued
together.
b. Braided hemp rope method
This method is executed with a braided hemp rope and jeweller’s rouge.
Before the rope is applied all frontending scratches must be removed with
fine emery cloth as per 7.11.1.
A mixture of polishing wax and gas oil (forming an abrasive paste of a
suitably soft consistency) is to be applied to the rope at regular intervals.
During the polishing operation, the rope must move slowly from one end
of the pin to the other.
The polishing is continued until the roughness measurement proves that
the surface is adequately smooth (see Item 7.9).
This is a very time consuming operation and, depending on the surface
roughness in prior, about three to six hours may be needed to complete
the polishing.
2. Journals (Main and crankpin journals)
a. The methods for polishing of crosshead pins can also be used here, and
method a) Polishing with microfinishing film, will be the most suitable
method. A 30 micron microfinishing film is recommended here or 220-270
grade emery cloth of a good quality.
b. Local damage to the journal can also be repaired. The area is to be
ground carefully and the transitions to the journal sliding surface are to be
rounded carefully and polished. We recommend to contact MAN B&W
Diesel for advice before such a repair is carried out. But as temporary re-
pair the ridges must be filed or ground to level.
7.12 Inspection of Bearings

Regarding check of bearings before installation, see item 13., ‘Check of Bearings
before Installation’.
For the ship’s own record and to ensure the correct evaluation of the bearings
when advice is requested from MAN B&W Diesel, we recommend to follow the
guidelines for inspection, which are stated in Plates 70809 – 70814. See the ex-
ample of an Inspection Record on Plate 70813.
8. Crosshead Bearing Assembly (See Vol. III, ‘Components’, Plate 90401)
8.1 Bearing Type

The type of bearing used in the crosshead assembly is a thin shell (insert) bearing
(see Item 5.5, ‘Thin Shell Bearings’). The lower shell is a trimetal shell, i.e. the shell
is composed of a steel back with cast-on white metal and an overlayer coating.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Bearings 708-01
See also Item 3, ‘Overlayers’. The upper shell is a bimetal shell, as it does not have
the overlayer coating; both the upper and lower shells are protected against cor-
rosion with tin flash (see Item 4, ‘Flashlayer, Tin (Sn)’). The upper part can also be
cast into the bearing cap.
8.2 Bearing Function and Configuration

Because of the oscillating movement and low sliding speed of the crosshead bear-
ing, the hydrodynamic oil film is generated through special oil wedges (see Item
5.3, ‘Axial Oil Grooves and Oil Wedges’) on either side of the axial oil supply
grooves situated in the loaded area of the bearing. The oil film generated in this
manner can be rather thin. This makes the demands for pin surface roughness
and oil wedge geometry important parameters for the assembly to function. A fur-
ther requirement is effective cooling which is ensured by the transverse oil
grooves. The pin surface is superfinished (see Item 7.9 1.b). The lower shell is
most often executed with a special surface geometry (embedded arc) which ex-
tends over a 120 degree arc, and ensures a uniform load distribution on the bear-
ing surface in contact with the pin. The lower shell is coated with an overlayer (see
Item 3., ‘Overlayers’), which enables the pin sliding geometry to conform with the
bearing surface in the embedded arch area.
Another geometry execution is the “Single bore” geometry, which depends on a

fully positive yet small clearance. With “Single bore” the overlayer is omitted.
9. Main Bearing Assembly

The MC engine series can be equipped with “Thick shell bearings” (Item 5.5) or
“Thin shell bearings” (Item 5.4).
The bearing type, i.e. “thick shell” or “thin shell” determines the main bearing hous-
ing assembly described below (see table of installed bearing types, Plate 70801,
and housing assemblies, Plate 70805).
9.1 The Thick Shell Bearing Assembly (Plate 70805, Fig. 1)
The tensioning force of a thick shell bearing assembly (Fig. 1) is transferred from
the bearing cap (pos. 1) to the upper shell (pos. 2) and via its mating faces to the
lower shell (pos. 3).
The bearing bore is equipped with the following geometry:
1. central oil supply groove and oil inlet in the upper shell which ends in a sloping
run-out (Item 5.1) in both sides of the lower shell, see Plate 70801.
2. the bearing bore is furnished with a bore relief (Item 5.2) at the mating faces
of the upper and lower shell, see Plate 70801.
9.2 The Thin Shell (Insert Bearing) Bearing Assembly (Plate 70805, Fig. 2)
This is a rigid assembly (Fig. 2). The bearing cap (pos. 1) which has an inclined
vertical and horizontal mating face, is wedged into a similar female geometry in the
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-01 Bearings
bedplate (pos. 2), which, when the assembly is pretensioned, will ensure a positive
locking of the cap in the bedplate.
The lower shell is positioned by means of screws (Pos. 3). During mounting of the
lower shell it is very important to check that the screws are fully tightened to the
stops in the bedplate. This is to prevent damage to the screws and shell during
tightening of the bearing cap. See also Vol. II, Maintenance, 905.
See also Item 5.5, ‘Thin Shell Bearings’ earlier in this section. For information re-
garding inspection and repair, see Item 7, ‘Practical Information’.
10. Crankpin Bearing Assembly (See Vol. III, ‘Components’, Plate 90401)
This assembly is equipped with thin shells, and has two or four tensioning studs,
depending on the engine type. Crankpin bearing assemblies with four studs must
be tensioned in parallel, for example first the two forward studs and then the two
aftmost studs; the tensioning may be executed in two or three steps. If four hydrau-
lic jacks are available only one step is necessary plus check-step.This procedure
is recommended in order to avoid a twist (angular displacement) of the bearing
cap to the mating face on the connecting rod.
The oil supply groove transition to the bearing sliding surface is similar to that of
the main bearing geometry. For information regarding inspection and repair, see
Item 7, ‘Practical Information’.
11. Guide Shoes and Guide Strips (Plate 70806)

(See also Vol. III, ‘Components’, Plate 90401)
1. The guide shoes, which are mounted on the fore and aft ends of the cross-
head pins, slide between guides and transform the translatory movement of
the piston/piston rod via the connecting rod into a rotational movement of the
crankshaft.
The guide shoe is positioned relative to the crosshead pin with a positioning
pin screwed into the guide shoe, the end of the positioning pin protrudes into
a hole in the crosshead pin and restricts the rotational movement of the cross-
head pin when the engine is turned with the piston rod disconnected.
The guide strips are bolted on to the inner side of the guide shoes and ensure
the correct position of the piston rod in the fore-and-aft direction. This align-
ment and the clearance between the guide strips and guide is made with
shims between the list and the guide shoe.
The sliding surfaces of the guide shoes and guide strips are provided with
cast-in white metal and furnished with transverse oil supply grooves and
wedges (see Item 5.3, ‘Axial Oil Grooves and Oil Wedges’, Plate 70806).
For inspection of guide shoes and guide strips, see Item 7.1, 7.3.3 and 7.4.1
a) and b) and Vol. II, ‘Maintenance’, 904.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Bearings 708-01
12. Thrust Bearing Assembly (Plate 70807)

The thrust bearing is a tilting-pad bearing of the Michell type. There are eight pads
(segments) or more placed on each of the forward and aft sides of the thrust collar.
They are held in place circumferentially by stoppers. The segments can be com-
pared to sliding blocks and are pivoted in such a manner that they can individually
take up the angle of approach necessary for a hydrodynamic lubricating wedge.
The lubricating/cooling oil is sprayed directly on to the forward and aft sides of the
thrust collar by means of nozzles positioned in the spaces between the pads. The
nozzles are mounted on a semicircular delivery pipe.
For clearances and max. acceptable wear, see Vol. II, ‘Maintenance’, 905-3.
13. Check of Bearings before Installation (Plate 70824)

Clean the bearing shells thoroughly before inspecting.
13.1 Visual Inspection

1. Check the condition of the bearing surfaces for impact marks and burrs.
Repair by scraping if necessary.
2. Check that the transition between the bore relief and the bearing sliding sur-
face is smooth.
13.2 Check Measurements

Place the shell freely, as illustrated in Plate 70824, Fig. 1.
Measure the crown thickness, with a ball micrometer gauge. Measure in the centre
line of the shell, 15 millimetres from the forward and aft sides.
Record the measurements as described in Item 7.12, ‘Inspection of Bearings’ and

Plates 70809 – 70814.
This will facilitate the evaluation of the bearing wear during later overhauls.
13.3 Cautions
As bearing shells are sensitive to deformations, care must be taken during han-
dling, transport and storage, to avoid damaging the shell geometry and surface.
The shells should be stored resting on one side, and be adequately protected
against corrosion and mechanical damage.
Preferably, keep new bearing shells in the original packing, and check that the
shells are in a good condition, especially if the packing shows signs of damage.
During transport from the store to the engine, avoid any impacts which could affect
the shell geometry.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Alignment of Main Bearings 708-02
1. Alignment
The lower main bearing shells should be so positioned, that they under the differ-
ent conditions (hot or cold engine) in the best possible way keep the main bearing
journals centred in a straight line, in which also bearings for the generator shaft are
centred.
Deviations from this centre line, will cause the crankshaft to bend and for those
bearings situated too high the load will be increased
2. Alignment of Main Bearings

See Plates 70816 and 70817
The bearing alignment can be checked by deffection measurements (autolog) as
described in the following Section.
Example; If two adjacent main bearings at the centre of the engine are placed too
high, then at this point the crankshaft centreline will be lifted to form an arc. This
will cause the intermediate crank throw to deflect in such a way that it “opens”
when turned into bottom position and “closes” in top position.
Since the magnitude of such axial lengthening and shortening increases in propor-
tion to the difference in the height of the bearings, it can be used as a measure of
the bearing alignment.
2.1 Deflection Measurements (autolog)

See Plate 70816
As the alignment is infl uenced by the temperature of the engine the deflection
measurements should, for comparison, always be made under nearly the same
temperature and load conditions.
It is recommended to record the actual jacket water and lub. oil temperatures in
Plate 70816.
Procedure
Turn the crankpin for the cylinder concerned to Pos. B1, see Fig. 2, Plate 70816.
Place a dial gauge axially in the crank throw, opposite the crankpin, and at the cor-
rectdistance from the centre, as illustrated in Fig. 1. The correct mounting position
is marked with punch marks on the crankthrow. Set the dial gauge to “Zero”.
Make the deflection readings at the positions indicated in Fig. 2.
“Closing” of the crankthrow (compression of the gauge) is regarded as negative

and “Opening” of the crankthrow (expansion of the dial gauge) is regarded as
positive, see Fig. 1.
Since, during the turning, the dial gauge cannot pass the connecting rod at BDC,
the measurement for the bottom position is calculated as the average of the two
adjacent positions (one at each side of BDC).
MAN Diesel A/S
708-02 Alignment of Main Bearings
When making deflection readings for the two rearmost cylinders, the turning gear
should, at each stoppage, be turned a little backwards to ease off the tangential
pressure on the turning wheel teeth. This pressure may otherwise falsify the read-
ings.
Enter the readings in the table Fig. 3. Then calculate the BDC deflections,
1/2 (B1+B2), and note down the result in Fig. 4.
Enter total “vertical deflections” (opening - closing) of the throws, during the turn-
ing from bottom to top position in the table Fig. 5 (T-B).
2.2 Checking the Deflections

See Plate 70817 and Testbed Report
The results of the deflection measurements (see Plate 70816, Fig. 5) should be
evaluated with the commisioning test measurements (recorded by the engine
builder in the commisioning test report on site). If re-alignment has been carried
out later on (e.g. following repairs), the results from these measurements should be
used.
Values of permissible “vertical deflections” etc. are shown in Plate 70817.
The values shown on Plate 70817 are specifically attributed to the crankshaft
condition, NOT the bearing wear condition.
• The values represent theoretical maximum deflection, which the crankshaft

material can sustain, for an unlimited time of operation, without risking to ex-
ceed the stress fatigue limits of the crankshaft.
• The values are unlikely to exceed the “permissible from new” in static condi-
tion (turning of the engine).
• For bearing wear measurements derived from deflection readings; always re-
fer to commissioning test results, and judge the relative change in deflection
over time.
• Abnormal/deviating deflection readings should always be investigated and

additional measurements performed, such as Top and Bottom clearance of
adjacent main bearings.
2.3 Floating Journals

See also Item 2.2 and Plate 70817
Use a special bearing feeler gauge to investigate the contact between the main
bearing journals and the lower bearing shells. Check whether the clearance be-
tween journal and lower shell is zero.
If clearance is found between journal and lower bearing shell, the condition of the
shell must be checked and, if found damaged, it must be replaced.
The engine alignment should be checked and adjusted, if necessary.
MAN Diesel A/S
Alignment of Main Bearings 708-02
To obtain correct deflection readings in case one or more journals are not in con-
tact with the lower shell, it is recommended to contact the engine builder.
If the deflection values are within limits and there is bottom clearance found, it
may be possible to install an offset bearing to get a positive bearing reaction.
2.4 Causes of Crankshaft Deflection

1. Excessive wear of main bearings
2. Displacement of bedplate (see ‘Piano Wire Measurements’)
3. Displacement of engine alignment and/or shafting alignment.
4. Loose or broken Staybolts.
5. Loose Foundation bolts.
6. Wear of Shock absorber material.
2.5 Piano Wire Measurements. Bedplate Alignment

A 0.5 mm piano wire is stretched along each side of the bedplate.
The wire is loaded with 400 N horizontal force.
At the centreline of each cross girder the distance is measured between the wire
and the machined faces of the bedplate top outside oil groove.
It will thus be revealed whether the latter has changed its position compared with
the reference measurement from engine installation.
This measurement requires special equipment available from MAN Diesel.
2.6 Shafting Alignment, Bearing Load, “Jack-up” Test

This can be checked by measuring the load at:
- the main bearings near to the generator
- the intermediate shaft bearings (plummer blocks)
- in the generator bearing.
Making these measurements normally requires specialist assistance.
As a reliable evaluation of the shafting alignment measurements requires a good

basis, the best obtainable check can be made if the contractor/supplier or repair-
shop has carried out the alignment based on precalculation of the bearing reac-
tions.
MAN Diesel A/S
Circulating Oil and Oil System 708-03
1. Circulating Oil (Lubricating and cooling oil)

Rust and oxidation inhibited engine oils, of the SAE 30 viscosity grade, should be
chosen.
In order to keep the crankcase and piston cooling space clean of deposits, the oils
should have adequate dispersancy/detergency properties.
Alkaline circulating oils are generally superior in this respect.
The international brands of oils listed below have all given satisfactory service in
one or more MAN B&W diesel engine installation(s).
Circulating oil
Company
SAE 30, TBN 5-10
Elf-Lub Atlanta Marine D3005
BP Energol OE-HT30
Castrol Marine CDX 30
Chevron Veritas 800 Marine
Exxon EXXMAR XA
Fina Fina Alcano 308
Mobil Mobilgard 300
Shell Melina 30/30S
Texaco Doro AR 30
The list must not be considered complete, and oils from other companies may be
equally suitable.
2. Circulating Oil System (Plates 70817 and 70818)

Pump (4) draws the oil from the bottom tank and forces it through the lub. oil cooler
(5), the filter (6), (with an absolute fineness of minimum 50 µm (0.05 mm), corre-
sponding to a nominal fineness of approx. 30 µm at a retaining rate of 90%) and
thereafter delivers it to the engine via two flanges: U and R.
U. The main part of the oil is, via the telescopic pipe, sent to the piston cool-
ing manifold, where it is distributed between piston cooling and bearing
lubrication. From the crosshead bearings, the oil flows through bores in
the connecting rods, to the crankpin bearings.
R1. The remaining oil goes to lubrication of the main bearings, thrust bearing
and turbocharger if the system oil and camshaft oil are separate systems
R2. Common system oil system.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
The relative amounts of oil flowing to the piston cooling manifold, and to the main
bearings, are regulated by the butterfly valve (7), or an orifice plate. The oil distri-
bution inside the engine is shown on Plate 70818.
Circulating Oil Pressure: See Chapter 701.
3. Circulating Oil Failure

3.1 Cooling Oil Failure
The piston cooling oil is supplied via the telescopic pipe fixed to a bracket on the
crosshead. From here it is distributed to the crosshead bearing, guide shoes,
crankpin, bearing and to the piston crown.
Failing supply of piston cooling oil, to one or more pistons, can cause heavy oil
coke deposits in the cooling chambers. This will result in reduced cooling, thus in-
creasing the material temperature above the design level.
In such cases, to avoid damage to the piston crowns, the cylinder loads should be
reduced immediately (see slow-down below), and the respective pistons pulled at
the first opportunity, for cleaning of the cooling chambers.
Cooling oil failure will cause alarm and slow-down of the engine.
See Section 701-02.
For CPP-plants with a shaft generator coupled to the grid, an auxiliary engine will
be started automatically and coupled to the grid before the shaft generator is dis-
connected and the engine speed reduced. See Plate 70311, ‘Sequence Diagram’.
After remedying a cooling oil failure, it must be checked (with the circulating oil
pump running) that the cooling oil connections in the crankcase do not leak, and
that the oil outlets from the crosshead, crankpin bearings, and piston cooling, are
in order.
3.2 Lubricating Oil Failure

If the lub. oil pressure falls below the pressures stated in Chapter 701, the engine’s
safety equipment shall reduce the speed to slow down level, respectively stop the
engine when the SHUT DOWN oil pressure level has been reached.
For CPP-plants with a shaft generator coupled to the grid, an auxiliary engine will
be started automatically and coupled to the grid before the shaft generator is dis-
connected and the engine speed reduced. See Plate 70311, ‘Sequence Diagram’.
Find and remedy the cause of the pressure drop.
Check for traces of melted white metal in the crankcase and oil pan.
“Feel over” 15-30 minutes after starting, again one hour later, and finally also after
reaching full load (see also Section 703-02).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
MAN B&W Maintenance of the Circulating Oil 708-04
1. Oil System Cleanliness

In a new oil system, as well as in a system which has been drained owing to repair or oil
change, the utmost care must be taken to avoid the ingress and presence of abrasive
particles, because filters and centrifuges will only remove these slowly, and some are
therefore bound to find their way into bearings etc.
For this reason - prior to filling-up the system - careful cleaning of pipes, coolers and
storage tank is strongly recommended.
2. Cleaning the Circulating Oil System

The recommendations below are based on our experience, and laid out in order to give
the contractor/supplier and operators the best possible advice regarding the avoidance
of mishaps to a new engine, or after a major repair.
The instruction given in this book is an abbreviated version of our flushing procedure
used prior to shoptrial. A copy of the complete flushing procedure is available through
MAN Diesel or the engine builder.
2.1 Cleaning before filling-up

In order to reduce the risk of bearing damage, the normal careful manual cleaning of the
crankcase, oil pan, pipes and storage tank, is naturally very important.
However, it is equally important that the system pipes and components, between the
filter(s) and the bearings, are also carefully cleaned for removal of “welding spray” and
oxide scales.
If the pipes have been sand blasted, and thereafter thoroughly cleaned or “acid-washed”,
then this ought to be followed by “washing-out” with an alkaline liquid, and immediately
afterwards the surfaces should be protected against corrosion.
In addition, particles may also appear in the circulating oil coolers, and therefore we rec-
ommend that these are also thoroughly cleaned.
2.2 Flushing Procedure, Main Lub. Oil System

Experience has shown that both during and after such general cleaning, airborne abra-
sive particles can still enter the circulating oil system. For this reason it is necessary to
flush the whole system by continuously circulating the oil - while bypassing the engine
bearings, etc.
This is done to remove any remaining abrasive particles, and, before the oil is again led
through the bearings, it is important to definitely ascertain that the system and the oil
have been cleaned adequately.
During flushing (as well as during the preceding manual cleaning) the bearings
must be effectively protected against the entry of dirt.
708-04 Maintenance of the Circulating Oil MAN B&W
The methods employed to obtain effective particle removal during the oil circulation de-
pend upon the actual plant installations, especially upon the filter(s) type, lub. oil centri-
fuges and the bottom tank layout.
Cleaning is carried out by using the lub. oil centrifuges and by pumping the oil through
the filter. A special flushing filter, with fineness down to 10 μm, is often used as a supple-
ment to or replacement of the system filter.
The following items are by-passed by blanking off with special blanks:
a. The main bearings

b. The crossheads
c. The thrust bearing
d. The turbocharger(s) (MAN B&W , MET)
e. The axial vibration damper
f. The torsional vibration damper (if installed)
g. The moment compensators (if installed)
See also Plates 70821, 70822.
It is possible for dirt to enter the crosshead bearings due to the design of the open bear-
ing cap. It is therefore essential to cover the bearing cap with rubber shielding through-
out the flushing sequence.
As the circulating oil cannot by-pass the bottom tank, the whole oil content should par-
take in the flushing.
During the flushing, the oil should be heated to 60-65°C and circulated using the full ca-
pacity of the pump to ensure that all protective agents inside the pipes and components
are removed.
It is essential to obtain an oil velocity which causes a turbulent flow in the pipes that are
being flushed.
Turbulent flow is obtained with a Reynold number of 3000 and above.
V×D
Re = × 1000, where
V
R e = Reynold number
V = Average flow velocity (m/s)
v = Kinematic viscosity (cSt)
D = Pipe inner diameter (mm)
The preheating can be carried out, for instance, by filling the waterside of the circulat-
ing oil cooler (between the valves before and after the cooler) with fresh water and then
leading steam into this space. During the process the deaerating pipe must be open,
and the amount of steam held at such a level that the pressure in the cooler is kept low.
In order to obtain a representative control of the cleanliness of the oil system during
flushing, “control bags” are used (e.g. 100 mm wide by 400 mm long, but with an area of
not less than 1000 cm2, and made from 0.050 mm filter gauze). Proposals for checkbag
housings are shown on Plate 70822.
To ensure cleanliness of the oil system after the filter, two bags are placed in the system,
one at the end of the main lub. oil line for the telescopic pipes, and one at the end of the
main lub. oil line for the bearings.
To ensure cleanliness of the oil itself, another bag is fed with circulating oil from a con-
nection stub on the underside of a horizontal part of the main pipe between circulating
oil pump and main filter. This bag should be fitted to the end of a 25 mm plastic hose and
hung in the crankcase.
At intervals of approx. two hours, the bags are examined for retained particles, where-
after they are cleaned and suspended again, without disturbing the oil circulation in the
main system.
The oil flow through the ’’control bags’’ should be sufficient to ensure that they are con-
tinuously filled with oil. The correct flow is obtained by restrictions on the bag supply
pipes.
The max. recommended pressure differential across the check bag is 1 bar, or in accor-
dance with information from the check bag supplier.
On condition that the oil has been circulated with the full capacity of the main pump, the
oil and system cleanliness is judged sufficient when, for two hours, no abrasive particles
have been collected.
As a supplement, and for reference during later inspections, we recommend that in par-
allel to using the checkbag, the cleanliness of the lub. oil is checked by particle counting,
in order to find particle concentration, size and type of impurities. When using particle
counting, the flushing is acceptable when the cleanliness level equals ISO 4406 xx/19/15
or better.
In order to improve the cleanliness, it is recommended that the circulating oil centrifuges
are in operation during the flushing procedure. The centrifuge preheaters ought to be
used to keep the oil heated to the proper level.
If the centrifuges are used without the circulating oil pumps running,
then they will only draw relatively clean oil, because, on account of low
oil velocity, the particles will be able to settle at different places within the system.
A portable vibrator or hammer should be used on the outside of the lub. oil pipes dur-
ing flushing in order to loosen any impurities in the piping system. The vibrator is to be
moved one metre at least every 10 minutes in order not to risk fatigue failures in piping
and welds.
A flushing log, see Plate 70823, is to be used during flushing and for later reference.
As a large amount of foreign particles and dirt will normally settle in the bottom tank dur-
ing and after the flushing (low flow velocity), it is recommended that the oil in the bottom
tank is pumped to a separate tank via a 10 μm filter, and then the storage tank is again
cleaned manually. The oil should be returned to the tank via the 10 μm filter.
If this storage tank cleaning is not carried out, blocking up of the filters can frequently
occur during the first service period, because settled particles can be dispersed again:
a. due to the oil temperature being higher than that during flushing,
b. due to actual engine vibrations, and ship movements in heavy seas.
Important: When only a visual inspection of the lub. oil is carried out, it is impor-
tant to realise that the smallest particle size which is detectable by the human eye
is approx. 0.04 mm.
During running of the engine, the lub. oil film thickness in the bearings becomes as low
as 0.005 mm or even lower. Consequently, visual inspection of the oil cannot protect the
bearings from ingress of harmful particles. It is recommended to inspect the lub. oil in
accordance with ISO 4406.
3. Circulating Oil Treatment

3.1 General
Circulating oil cleaning, during engine operation, is carried out by means of an inline oil
filter, the centrifuges, and possibly by-pass filter, if installed, as illustrated on Plate 70818.
The engine as such consumes about 0.1 g/kWh of circulating lub. oil, which must be
compensated for by adding new lub. oil.
It is this continuous and necessary refreshing of the oil that will control the BN and vis-
cosity on an acceptable equilibrium level as a result of the fact that the oil consumed is
with elevated figures and the new oil supplied has standard data.
In order to obtain effective separation in the centrifuges, it is important that the flow rate
and the temperature are adjusted to their optimum, as described in the following.
3.2 The Centrifuging Process

Efficient oil cleaning relies on the principle that - provided the through-put is adequate
and the treatment is effective - an equilibrium condition can be reached, where the en-
gine contamination rate is balanced by the centrifuge separation rate i.e.:
Contaminant quantity added to the oil per hour = contaminant quantity removed by the
centrifuge per hour.
It is the purpose of the centrifuging process to ensure that this equilibrium condition is
reached, with the oil insolubles content being as low as possible.
Since the cleaning efficiency of the centrifuge is largely dependent upon the flow-rate, it
is very important that this is optimised.
The above considerations are further explained in the following.
3.3 The System Volume, in Relation to the Centrifuging Process

As mentioned above, a centrifuge working on a charge of oil will, in principle, after a
certain time, remove an amount of contamination material per hour which is equal to the
amount of contamination material produced by the engine in the same span of time.
This means that the system (engine, oil and centrifuges) is in equilibrium at a certain level
of oil contamination (Peq) which is usually measured as pentane insolubles %.
In a small oil system (small volume), the equilibrium level will be reached sooner than in a
large system (Fig. 1) - but the final contamination level will be the same for both systems
- because in this respect the sys- Pe ntane ins olubles % Fig. 1

tem oil acts only as a carrier of
contamination material.
P eq
Smal l
A centrifuge can be operated at volume
greatly varying flow rates (Q).
Large volume
Practical experience has revealed
that the content of pentane insol-
ubles, before and after the cen- Ti me
trifuge, is related to the flow rate
as shown in Fig. 2.
Pe ntane ins olubles % Fig. 2
Fig. 2 illustrates that the amount (difference , before/after centrifuge)
of pentane insolubles removed
will decrease with rising Q.
Q
100%
It can be seen that:
a. At low Q, only a small portion of the oil is passing the centrifuge/hour, but is be-
ing cleaned effectively.
b. At high Q, a large quantity of oil is passing the centrifuge/hour, but the cleaning
is less effective.
Thus, by correctly adjusting the flow Pentane ins olubles equilibrium level % Fig. 3
rate, an optimal equilibrium cleaning
level can be obtained (Fig. 3).
This minimum contamination level

is obtained by employing a suitable
flow rate that is only a fraction of min
the stated maximum capacity of the
centrifuge (see the centrifuge man- Q
Q optimum 100%
ual).
3.4 Guidance Flow Rates

The ability of the system oil to “carry” contamination products is expressed by its deter-
gency/dispersancy level.
This means that a given content of contamination - for instance 1 % pentane insol-ubles
- will, in a detergent oil, be present as smaller, but more numerous particles than in a
straight oil.
Furthermore, the particles in the detergent oil will be surrounded by additives, which
results in a specific gravity very close to that of the oil itself, thereby hampering particle
settling in the centrifuge.
This influences the position of the

minimum in Fig. 3, as illustrated in P entane insolubles equilibrium level %
Fig. 4. Fig. 4
As can be seen, the equilibrium lev-

el in a detergent oil will be higher Detergent oil
than in a straight oil, and the opti- St raight mineral oil
mum flow rate will be lower.
However, since the most important

factor is the particle size (risk of Q
Qd Qs 100%
scratching and wear of the bearing
journals), the above-mentioned difference in equilibrium levels is of relatively minor im-
portance, and the following guidance figures can be used:
In general,
a. the optimum centrifuge flow rate for a detergent oil is about
20-25% of the maximum centrifuge capacity,
b. whereas, for a straight oil, it is about 50-60%.
c. This means that for most system oils of today, which incorporate a certain deter-
gency, the optimum will be at about 30-40% of the maximum centrifuge capac-
ity.
The preheating temperature should be about 80°C.
4. Oil Deterioration
4.1 General
Oil seldom loses its ability to lubricate, i.e. to form an oil film which reduces friction, but
it can become corrosive.
If this happens, the bearing journals can be attacked, such that their surfaces become
too rough, and thereby cause wiping of the white metal.
In such cases, not only must the bearing metal be renewed, but also the journals (silvery
white from adhering white metal) will have to be re-polished.
Lubricating oil corrosiveness is either due to advanced oxidation of the oil itself (Total
Acid Number, TAN) or to the presence of inorganic acids (Strong Acid Number, SAN).
See further on in this Section.
In both cases the presence of water will multiply the effect, especially an influx of salt
water.
4.2 Oxidation of Oils

At normal service temperature the rate of oxidation is insignificant, but the following
three factors will accelerate the process:
4.2.A High Temperature

The temperature level will generally increase if the coolers are not effective.
Local high-temperature areas will arise in pistons, if circulation is not continued for about
15 minutes after stopping the engine.
The same will occur in electrical preheaters, if circulation is not continued for 5 minutes
after the heating has been stopped, or if the heater is only partly filled with oil (insuffi-
cient venting).
4.2.B Air Admixture

Good venting of the bottom tanks should be arranged.
The total oil quantity should be such that it is not circulated more than about 15-18 times
per hour. This ensures that sufficient time exists for deaeration during the period of
“rest” in the bottom tanks.
It is important that the whole oil content takes part in the circulation, i.e. stagnant
oil should be avoided.
4.2.C Catalytic Action

Oxidation will be considerably accelerated if oxidation catalysts are present in the oil.
In this respect, wear particles of copper are especially bad, but also ferrous wear par-
ticles and rust are active.
In addition, lacquer and varnish-like oxidation products of the oil itself have an accelerat-
ing effect. Therefore, continuous cleaning is important to keep the “sludge” content low.
As water will evaporate from the warm oil in the bottom tank, and condense on the tank
ceiling, rust is apt to develop here and fall into the oil, thereby tending to accelerate oxi-
dation. This is the reason for advocating the measures mention in Section 702-01, con-
cerning cleaning and rust prevention.
4.3 Signs of Deterioration

If oxidation becomes grave, prompt action is necessary because the final stages of de-
terioration can develop and accelerate very quickly, i.e. within one or two weeks.
Even if this seldom happens, it is prudent to be acquainted with the following signs of
deterioration, which may occur singly or in combinations.
• The sludge precipitation in the centrifuge multiplies.
• The smell of the oil becomes bad (acrid or pungent).
• Machined surfaces in crankcase become coffee-brown
(thin layer of lacquer).
• Paint in crankcase peels off, or blisters.
• Excessive carbon deposits (coke) are formed in piston cooling chambers.
In serious cases of oil deterioration, the system should be cleaned and flushed thor-
oughly, before fresh oil is filled into it.
4.4 Water in the Oil

Water contamination of the circulating oil should always be avoided.
The presence of water, especially salt water, will:

• accelerate oil oxidation (tend to form organic and inorganic acids)
• tend to corrode machined surfaces and thereby increase the roughness of bearing
journals and rods, etc. (see e.g. Section 708-01).’
• tend to form tin-oxide on white metal (see Section 708-01).
In addition, freshwater contamination can enhance the conditions for bacteriological at-
tack.
For alkaline oils, a minor increase in the freshwater content is not immediately detri-
mental, as long as the engine is running, although it should, as quickly as possible, be
reduced again to below 0.2% water content.
If the engine is stopped with excess water in the oil, then once every hour, it should be
turned a little more than 1/2 revolution (to stop in different positions), while the oil circu-
lation and centrifuging (at preheating temperature) continue to remove the water. This is
particularly important in the case of salt water ingress.
Water in the oil may be noted by “dew” formation on the sight glasses, or by a milky ap-
pearance of the oil.
Its presence can also be ascertained by heating a piece of glass, or a soldering iron, to
200-300°C and immersing it in an oil sample. If there is a hissing sound, water is pres-
ent.
If a large quantity of (sea) water has entered the oil system, it may be profitable to suck
up sedimented water from the bottom of the tank. Taste the water for salt.
In extreme cases it may be necessary to remove the oil/water mixture, and clean and/or
flush the system, before filling up again with the cleaned oil, or the new oil.
4.5 Check of Oil Condition

As described in items 4.3 and 4.4, the on site surveillance of oil condition involves keep-
ing a check of:
• alterations in separated sludge amount

• appearance and smell of the oil
• “dew” on sight glasses
• lacquer formation on machined surfaces
• paint peeling and/or blistering
• “hissing” test
• carbon deposits in piston crown.
In addition to the above, oil samples should be sent ashore for analysis at least every
three months. The samples should be taken while the engine is running, and from a test
cock on a main pipe through which the oil is circulating.
Kits for rapid on-board analyses are available from the oil suppliers. However, such kits
can only be considered as supplementary and should not replace laboratory analyses.
5. Circulating Oil: Analyses and Characteristic Properties

Used-oil analysis is most often carried out at oil company laboratories. It is normal ser-
vice for these to remark upon the oil condition, based upon the analysis results. The re-
port usually covers the following characteristics:
Guiding Limits for used

Property Remarks
oils
Oil Type Alkaline detergent (for 2-stroke engines)
Specific Gravity Usually 0.90-0.98. Mainly used for identification of the ±5%
oil. (of initial value)
Viscosity The viscosity increases with oil oxidation, and also
by contamination with cylinder oil, heavy fuel, or water. max. + 40% min.-15%
A decrease in the viscosity may be due to dilution with (of initial value)
die-sel oil.
Flash Point (open Lowest temperature at which the oil gives off a com-
cup) bustible vapour. Gives an indication of possible fuel oil min. 180°C
contamination.
TAN This expresses the total content of organic and inor-
(Total Acid ganic acids in the oil. Organic (or weak) acids are due max. 2
Number) to oxidation. TAN = SAN + Weak acid number.
SAN This expresses the amount of inorganic (or strong) ac-
(Strong Acid ids in the oil. These are usually sulphuric acid from the
Number) combustion chamber, or hydrochloric acid arising from
0
salt water (ought to be stated in the analysis). SAN
makes the oil corrosive (especially if water is present)
and should be zero.
Alkalinity/BN Gives the alkalinity level in oils containing acid neutral- max.+ 100%
(Base Number) izing additives. See also Service Letter SL02-408/KEA. min.-30%
(of initial values)
Water Risky if TAN and SAN are high. Salt water has a higher fresh:0.2%
corrosive effect than freshwater. (0.5% f. short periods)
See previous point 4.4. Saline: trace
Conradsen Residue from incomplete combustion, or cracked lu-
max. + 3%
Carbon bricating and cylinder oil.
Ash Some additives leave ash, which may thereby be used
to indicate the amount of additives in the oil. The ash
can also consist of wear particles, sand and rust. max. + 2%
The ash content of a used oil can only be evaluated
by comparison with the ash content of the unused oil.
Insolubles Usually stated as pentane/heptane and benzene in-
solubles. The amount of insoluble ingredients in the
oil is checked as follows: Equal parts of the oil sample Non-coagulated pentane
are diluted with benzene (C6H6) and normal pentane insolubles max. 2%
(C5H12) or heptane (C7H14). As oxidized oil (lacquer and
varnish-like components) is only soluble in benzene,
and not in pentane or heptane, the difference in the
amount of insolubles is indicative of the degree of oil Non-coagulated benzene
oxidation. The benzene insolubles are the solid con- insolubles max. 1%
taminants.
The above limiting values are given for reference /guidance purposes only.
The assessment of oil condition can seldom be based on the value of a single param-
eter, i.e. it is usually important, and necessary, to base the evaluation on the overall
analysis specification.
For qualified advice, we recommend consultation with the oil company or engine builder.
6. Cleaning of Drain Oil from Piston Rod Stuffing Boxes (Plate 70824)
The oil which is drained off from the piston rod stuffing boxes is mainly circulating oil
with an admixture of partly-used cylinder oil and, as such, it contains sludge from the
scavenge air space. In general, this oil can be re-used if thoroughly cleaned.
Plate 70824 shows the cleaning installations. (Option)
The drain oil is collected in tank No. 1. When the tank is nearly full, the oil is transferred,
via the centrifuge, to tank No. 2, and thereafter, via the centrifuge, recircu-lated a num-
ber of times.
When centrifuging the stuffing box drain oil, the flow-rate should be decreased to about
50% of what is normally used for the circulating oil, and the preheating temperature
raised to about 90°C. This is because, in general, the drain oil is a little more viscous
than the circulating oil, and also because part of the contamination products consist of
oxidized cylinder oil, with a specific gravity which does not differ much from that of the
circulating oil itself.
Water-washing should only be carried out if recommended by the oil supplier. Finally, the
centrifuged oil, in tank No. 2, should be filtered a number of times through the cellulose
fine filter, at a temperature of 60-80°C.
This will remove any very fine soot and oxidation products not taken out by the centri-
fuging, and thus make the oil suitable for returning to the circulating system.
Provided that the circulating oil is an alkaline detergent type, it is not necessary to anal-
yse each charge of cleaned drain oil before it is returned to the system. Regular sam-
pling and analysis of the circulating oil and drain oil will be sufficient.
If, however, the circulating oil is not alkaline, all the cleaned drain oil should be checked
for acidity, for instance by means of an analysis kit, before it is returned to the system.
The “total acid number” (TAN) should not exceed 2. See also Item 5,
‘Circulating Oil: Analyses & Characteristic Properties’.
If the TAN exceeds 2, the particular charge of drain oil should be disposed of.
Turbocharger Lubrication 708-05
1. MAN Diesel T/C, System Details

See Plate 70828
The lub. oil system for the MAN Diesel type of turbocharger is shown separately on
Plate 70828.
The system is supplied from the main lub. oil system.

The oil is discharged to the main lub. oil system. The discharge line is connected
to the venting pipe, E, which leads to open air.
In case of failing lub. oil supply from the main lub. oil system, e.g. due to a power
black-out or defects in the system, the engine will stop due to shut-down. Lubrica-
tion of the turbocharger bearings is ensured by a separate tank.
The tank is mounted on top of the turbocharger, and is able to supply lub. oil until
the rotor is at a standstill, or until the lub.oil supply is re-established.
2. MET T/C, System Details

The MET turborchargers are also lubricated via the main lub. oil system. See de-
scription of turbocharger lub. oil system in Item 1 ‘MAN Diesel T/C, System De-
tails’.
3. ABB TPL T/C, System Details

The ABB TPL turbochargers are designed either with an integrated lub. oil system
or with a similar system as MBD TC. Please refer to the relevant ABB TPL-instruc-
tion manual.
MAN Diesel A/S
Hydraulic System for
708-08
ME Engines
7Camshaft Lubrication for Engines with Uni-Lube Syst
This chapter describes the system layout, components and operating principle of
the hydraulic systems shown in Plate P70830, etc.
All position numbers are described and their intended use explained.
Also shown is a Plate 70840 used when detection of malfunctions and leaks in the
hydraulic system can be useful (this document is general, and position numbers
named in this document must not be used on your system).
1. ME Engine Concept and Mechanical Hydraulic System Layout

The ME engine concept primarily concerns the use of a mechanical hydraulic sys-
tem for actuation of the fuel injection pumps and the exhaust valves, which are
electronically controlled by a computer based control system. The starting air sys-
tem is also controlled electronically by the ME control system.
Introduction of the hydraulic injection and exhaust actuation requires a hydraulic

power supply, designed with all the necessary functionality needed. The hydraulic
system used on the ME engine is outlined in the related diagrams on plates
P70830, etc.
With reference to these diagrams, the layout is explained in the following.
Main system lubricating oil is used as the hydraulic medium. The oil is filtered by
the Filter unit to the appropriate purity for use in an oil hydraulic system. The oil is
then pressurised either by the Engine Driven Pumps, when the engine is rotating,
or by the Electrically Driven Pumps, when the engine is at standstill. In the Safety
and Accumulator Block, pressurised oil is accumulated to ensure a stable oil sup-
ply to the Hydraulic Cylinder Units (HCU).
A HCU is fitted to each cylinder. The HCU comprises a distribution block, carrying
the hydraulically activated Fuel Oil Pressure Booster and the exhaust valve actu-
ator. The control valves (ELFI, ELVA valves or the FIVA valve, respectively) and
the necessary accumulators are mounted on the distributing block. The block con-
nects the high-pressure oil supply to both the fuel oil injection system and the ex-
haust valve actuation system.
The fuel oil injection system consists of the hydraulically activated fuel oil pressure
booster with associated control valve, the high-pressure pipes and the fuel
valves.
The exhaust valve actuation system consists of an exhaust valve actuator with as-
sociated control valve, the oil push rod (high-pressure pipe), and finally the ex-
haust valve.
The fuel valves and the hydraulically activated exhaust valve itself are similar to
that of the MC engines.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
The starting valves are pneumatically opened by activating the solenoid valves
(ZV 1120 C, pos. 51) controlled by the Engine Control System, see the related di-
agram “Pneumatic Manoeuvring System Diagram” on Plate 70318.
For cylinder lubrication, the ME Lube System is used, with lubricators located on
the HCU.
2. Functional Description
2.1 Hydraulic Power Supply Unit
The function of the Hydraulic Power Supply (HPS) unit is to deliver the necessary
high-pressure hydraulic oil flow to the fuel injection system and exhaust valve ac-
tuation when the engine is at either stand-by or running. The HPS unit consists of:
2.1.1 Filter unit

2.1.2 Electrically driven start-up or start-up/back-up pumps
2.1.3 Engine driven pumps
2.1.4 Safety and accumulator block
2.1.5 High pressure piping
2.1.6 Drip pan with leak sensors
2.1.1 Filter Unit

The main filter (pos. 106) of the HPS unit is of the multi-cartridge, self-cleaning
type with automatic back-flushing of the cartridges.
The back-flushing is performed with compressed air. It is effected regularly on a

time basis, or if the pressure drop across the filter exceeds a pre-defined level.
A redundant filter (pos. 105) is installed in parallel with the main filter, and is used
during overhaul of the main filter. Switching to the redundant filter and back is done
manually without interrupting the oil flow to the pumps.
The butterfly valve (pos. 115) is closed during all normal service conditions. It is
used in situations where cleaning of the entire supply of lubricating oil is required.
The ME filter unit has a 6 microns nominal mesh size (10 microns on the first en-
gines built). The redundant filter has 25 microns nominal mesh size. The conven-
tional lubricating oil filter used for the engine has a nominal mesh size of 34 - 48
microns.
The ME filter is fitted with a differential pressure indicator and produces an output
signal to activate an alarm if the pressure drop becomes abnormally large.
2.1.2 Electrically Driven Start-up or Start-up/Back-up Pumps

The Hydraulic power supply is available in two versions.
One version is the classic ME power supply where the hydraulic power is gener-
ated by engine driven pumps, and the start-up pressure is created by electrically
driven pumps. The capacity of the start-up pumps is only sufficient to generate the
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
start-up pressure. The engine cannot run with the engine driven pumps out of op-
eration.
The second version is similar to version one, but the electrically driven start-up
pumps have a capacity sufficient to give at least 15% engine power (Back-up pow-
er or also named “Combined”). The electric power consumption should be taken
into consideration in the specification of the auxiliary machinery capacity.
The purpose of the electrically driven pumps is to ensure adequate hydraulic sys-
tem pressure in situations where the main engine is not rotating, and thus not driv-
ing the engine driven pumps. The electrically driven pumps operate when there is
no hydraulic oil consumption. Therefore, only a small capacity is needed, and the
pumps are thus relatively small compared to the engine driven pumps.
The electrically driven pumps are either of the fixed or variable displacement type.
After a situation where the system has been depressurised, for instance after an
engine shutdown or a black-out, the electrically driven pumps must run for a cer-
tain period to build up an adequate system pressure for starting the engine. The
length of this period is determined by the accumulator capacity in the system and
the flow produced by the electrically driven highpressure pump.
The pressure relief valves installed in the circuit limits the maximum pressure in
the circuit and leads excessive oil back to the suction side of the pumps.
The operation of the high-pressure pumps is supervised by means of the pressure

transducers (pos. 320).
2.1.3 Engine Driven Pumps

All engine driven, hydraulic oil pumps are of the variable displacement type and of
the same size. The displacement is electronically controlled by the ECS via a built
in control valve on the pumps.
The pumps function when the engine is rotating, as they are mechanically driven
by the gear, which is permanently connected to the crankshaft. Their flow is deter-
mined by the actual displacement and rotational speed.
The pumps are designed to have two directions of rotation and the same direction
of flow. This is necessary as most engines are reversible. On reversing of the en-
gine, the displacement control of the ECS must alter the swash plate to the oppo-
site direction of flow.
The engine driven pumps are the engine’s main hydraulic suppliers when the en-
gine is running.
In the event of failure of one pump, the remaining pumps are dimensioned to be
capable of supplying sufficient hydraulic oil corresponding to 100% engine load.
In the event that the electric power to the pump displacement control valve is lost,
the pump will mechanically go to maximum displacement in the AH direction. The
non-return valves (pos. 215) are installed to allow a failing engine driven pump,
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
which pumps in the wrong direction, to draw from the suction side and deliver the
oil back to the suction side again.
2.1.4 Safety and Accumulator Block

The pre-charged accumulators of the Safety and Accumulator Block (on some
newer engines the accumulators are mounted directly on the engine-driven
pumps) are partly filled with a high pressure oil, ensuring a stable supply, without
fluctuation, to the cylinder units.
The block contains pressure relief valves, which protects the high pressure system
against excessive pressure.
The relief valves protect the electrically driven pumps and controls the maximum
pressure in the system during pressure build-up before starting. This is done when
operating on plants which require continuous boosting of the exhaust oil push rod
(exhaust valve activation).
The valve (pos. 310) protects the engine driven pumps against a too high pres-
sure. It is electrically controlled by the ECS and can be opened in different situa-
tions to feed the hydraulic oil back to the suction side of the engine driven pumps.
The valve (pos. 311) is the main system pressure relief valve protecting the entire
system. This valve has the highest pressure setting of the relief valves (pos.310,
311 and 312)
Non-return valves (pos. 304 and 305) are installed at the hydraulic oil outlet from
the engine driven and electrically driven pumps, in order to prevent back-flow
through any inactive pump.
The pressure transducers (pos. 320) are used by the ECS for controlling the en-
gine driven and electrically driven pumps.
The non-return valves are related to the operation of a failing engine driven pump
described above.
Pressure relief valves (pos. 310, 311 and 312) have safety functions as described
above. The electrical actuation of the valves pos. 310 is duplicated (not shown on
the diagram) to allow redundant control as implemented in the ECS.
2.1.5 High Pressure Piping

The hydraulic oil pipes between the Hydraulic Power Supply unit and the Hydraulic
Cylinder Units employ doublewalled piping or hoses on some newer engines. Dou-
ble piping is also used for highpressure pipes between the individual HCU units.
The inner and outer bores of the double piping are connected by separate lines in
the distribution blocks (not shown on the diagram).
The space between the inner and outer pipes is connected to a leak line, in which
a restriction and a pressure controlled valve are installed. In the event of a small
leak from the inner pipe, the flow transmitter (leak indicator) (pos. 355) will release
an alarm. In the event of a severe leak, the restriction causes a pressure loss lead-
ing to increased pressure in the leak line and outer pipe. This pressure increase
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
closes the pressure controlled valve (pos. 345) and the system pressure is now
contained by the outer pipe. The pressure transducer (pos. 330) issues an alarm
indicating that the outer pipe is now pressurised – unrestricted service is allowed
until repair is possible.
The HPS and its internal piping are all shielded by a container fitted around the
HPS. This shielding is designed to contain a leak flow and lead it to the drip pan.
The piping, as described above, is designed to ensure the safety of the crew, and
that a single failure, e.g. a leak from the inner pipe, will not affect the operation of
the engine.
On Plate 70845 the double wall pipe design of larger (80-98) ME-engines is
shown.
Due to the relative movement between the pipe and the flanges (large engines 80
- 98), the sealing rings (see Fig 1. Plate 70845) must be lubricated. This lubrication
is maintained by letting a small amount of hydraulic oil seep into the outer space
between the pipes. The oil amount lead to the outer pipe is matched and supplied
in a rate through the orifice Pos. 347 so that the oil pressure in the space between
the pipes is kept from 0-10 bar.
The orifice(s) is normally placed in the end flanges on the foremost and aftmost
HCU block (depending on the engine cylinder amount). See Plate 70845 fig. 2.
Should the pressure (seen on the MOP) rise above 10 bar, a leak in the double
wall pipe might have appeared. As described above the line break valve Pos. 345
will close and normal running is continued. The line break valve is normally situat-
ed on the accumulator block. See Plate 70845 Fig. 3
2.1.6 Drip pan with leak sensors

A drip pan is located just below the hydraulic power supply unit to collect leaking
oil and lead it to drain. In the drip pan, two leak detecting level switches (pos. 360
and 361) are installed. A small, yet significant, leak from the HPS will, due to the
restriction in the outlet, cause the level in the drip pan to rise and be detected by
the lower level switch (pos. 360). This situation will activate an alarm. A severe
leak will also be detected by the higher switch (pos. 361) and cause the ECS to
shut the engine down.
3. Hydraulic Cylinder Unit

The Hydraulic Cylinder Unit (one per cylinder) consists of a distribution block, an
electronically controlled fuel injection system and an electronically controlled ex-
haust valve actuation system. The distribution block serves as a mechanical sup-
port for the hydraulically activated fuel oil pressure booster (pos. 500) and exhaust
valve actuator (pos. 515), each with their electronically controlled control valve
ELFI/ELVA or common FIVA, respectively.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
4. Distribution Block
The function of the distribution block, as by its name indicates, is to distribute the
hydraulic oil to the ELFI/ELVA or FIVA control valves mounted on the distribution
block.
Nitrogen pre-charged hydraulic accumulators (pos.450) are fitted on the distribu-

tion block. Their function is to ensure that the necessary hydraulic oil peak flow is
available for injection of fuel oil and actuation of the exhaust valve.
Close to the ELFI/ELVA or FIVA valves, are two manually operated valves. One
valve connects the high pressure inlet side (pos. 420) and the other (pos. 421)
connects the accumulators to the bedplate (drain).
These manually operated valves are used for separating a HCU during overhaul.
WARNING !
To protect the accumulators from unnecessary stresses (fast
accelleration of the membrane) and oil jets, the valve Pos. 420
must not be opened at pressurised oil system.
After check/overhaul or whatever situation where the valve Pos.

420 has been closed the opening procedure is:
1) The engine must be stopped (no oil pressure)
2) Open/Close all valves into normal running position.
3) Pressurise the system by starting the Start-up pumps.
The manually activated valve (pos. 531) connects the oil push rod with its supply.
The valve must be closed during overhaul of the exhaust valve.
5. Electronically Controlled Fuel Injection

The electronically controlled fuel injection system consists of the hydraulically ac-
tivated fuel oil pressure booster, its controlling valve (ELFI or FIVA) and the fuel
valves.
The ELFI or FIVA valve (controlled by the ECS) is capable of fast and precise con-
trol of the oil flow to the fuel oil pressure booster. This oil flow pushes the hydraulic
piston (pos. 502) and the fuel injection plunger (pos. 504), generating the injection
pressure and, hence, the injection.
After the injection has finished, the plunger and piston are returned to their starting
positions by connecting the piston to a drain and driving the plunger back by
means of the pressure in the fuel supply. The fuel oil pressure booster is then filled
and ready for the next injection.
The design principle of the high pressure pipes and fuel valves is similar to that of
the MC engines. The fuel system permits continuous circulation of the heated
heavy fuel oil through the fuel oil pressure boosters and fuel valves to keep the
system heated during engine standstill.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
6. Functional description of the Throttle Valve on the Fuel Oil Pressure Booster
As seen in the drawing on plate 70841, a throttle valve is situated at the bottom of
the Fuel Oil Pressure Booster Housing.
Via a bore from the housing bottom, the oil space underneath the Fuel Oil Pres-
sure Booster Piston, is vented through the throttle valve.
A small bore in the throttle valve piston ensures ventilation of the oil space at en-
gine standstill (no oil pressure and low oil pressure at start-up), thereby keeping
the engine ready for start without having to ventilate the system.
When the Fuel Oil Pressure Booster is activated (FIVA valve activated) the oil
pressure in the space underneath the Fuel Oil Pressure Booster will raise signifi-
cantly to lift the piston. At the same time, the highpressure oil will overcome the
resistance of the spring in the throttle valve and the piston in the throttle valve will
close.
In this way the oil amount vented from the space underneath the main piston is
kept very low.
7. Electronic Exhaust Valve Actuation System

The design of the hydraulically activated exhaust valve is similar to that on the MC
type engines, i.e. the exhaust valve is opened hydraulically and it is closed by an
“air spring”.
The actuator system fitted to each HCU consists of the ELVA or FIVA and the
twostage hydraulic exhaust valve activator.
The electronic ELVA or FIVA (controlled by the ECS) opens for the oil flow to the
two-stage hydraulic actuator.
In the first stage the activation piston (pos. 517) is driven by the hydraulic pressure
acting on both the activation piston itself and the hydraulic piston (pos. 516). The
first stage performs the initial valve opening against the cylinder pressure. In the
second stage the movement of the hydraulic piston is stopped, and the activation
piston performs the second stage, lower force, main stroke of the exhaust valve
alone.
The exhaust valve is closed by connecting the activation piston to a drain via the
ELVA or FIVA valve and letting the air spring of the exhaust valve drive it to closed
position. This movement also drives the push rod oil back into the exhaust actua-
tor, preparing it for the next actuation.
The HCU design ensures that a failing HCU can be disconnected from the high
pressure system by manually operated valves, thereby enabling repair work while
the engine is running on the remaining cylinders.
In the case that the control signal for the ELFI or FIVA valve is missing (pressu-
rised or non-pressurised system), the control spring will position the valve so that
the hydraulic piston oil from the space below is connected to tank. This is the fail-
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
safe position, where the main spool in the FIVA is moved to the position Cfi to T,
Cva to P.
With regard to the safety of the ship’s personnel and the engine, the highpressure
fuel pipes are, as on the MC type engines, shielded by steel braiding.
8. Components
Pos. 101
Butterfly valve. Normally open. Used for shutting-off to the filter during overhauls
at standstill.
Pos. 103
Double stage, 3-way cock. Situated between the Automatic back flushing filter and
the Stand-by filter. Used when Automatic filter elements are to be cleaned manu-
ally during normal engine running.
Pos. 104
Mini-mess valve installed by the filter unit inlet (For mounting of portable pressure
gauge).
Pos. 105
Single filter. 25 microns filter mesh.
Pos. 106
Automatic back flushing filter. Boll filter. The main purpose of this filter is to keep
the hydraulic oil clean, thereby avoiding small particles damaging movable parts
of the hydraulic components. 6-microns filter mesh. 10-microns filter mesh on the
first engines build (2003 -2005).
Pos. 107
Mini-mess valve installed by the filter unit outlet (for connection of portable pres-
sure gauge).
Pos. 108
Mini-mess valve installed by the system inlet. (for connection of portable pressure
gauge).
Pos. 109
(Only used on the L42MC/ME engine).
Butterfly valve. Normally open. Used for shutting off the bypass valve during over-
hauls.
Pos. 110
Rubber Compensator (optional).
Pos. 115
Butterfly valve. Normally closed. Used during flushing at the commissioning of the
engine. Used after major overhauls and when found necessary.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
Pos. 120
Bypass valve. Normally closed. This valve has two main functions:
1. The main purpose of this valve is to secure oil supply to the highpressure
pumps. When/if the Automatic back flushing filter becomes heavily contami-
nated, the oil pressure on the outlet side of the filter and bypass valve will drop.
The lower oil pressure on the outlet side is transmitted via a pipe connection
to the membrane on the valve, the valve will open and lead the oil past the
filter unit to the highpressure pumps (the bypass valve starts to open when
the oil pressure drops below 0.8 bar).
Simultaneously, a proximity switch, measuring on the bypass valve spring,

will measure the spring movement and raise an alarm on the MOP panel. To
rectify this alarm (as specified in the alarm field under suggested action) the
engineer must open the manual filter (valve 103) and, thereby, secure filtra-
tion of the oil running to the pumps.
2. If for some reason the engine load is raised rapidly, e.g. fast acceleration or-
dered from the manoeuvring handle on the bridge, the consumption of oil is
suddenly increased. This could cause the pressure on the outlet side of the fil-
ter to drop and the bypass valve will, as described above, open at 0.8 bar.
Pos. 121
Proximity switch (function described in Pos. 120).
Pos. 130
A pressure transducer measuring the oil pressure on the suction side of the main
supply pumps. The output from the transducer is sent to the ECS of the engine.
The suction pressure is continuously shown on the HPS screen on the MOP. An
alarm is activated if the suction pressure is too low.
Pos. 131
An orifice, ø 0.5 mm, for above pressure transducer (130) is installed to protect the
transducer against pulsations and ensure a steady amount of oil to the transducer.
Pos. 155
Mini-mess valve installed in the low-pressure line (for connection of portable pres-
sure gauge).
Pos. 201
Highpressure Axial Piston Pumps. Type Rexroth A4VSO. Driven by either a gear
or electric motors.
Pos. 202
Mini-mess valve installed in the lowpressure inlet before the pump (for connection
of portable pressure gauge).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
Pos. 203
Mini-mess valve installed in the highpressure pump outlet (for mounting of porta-
ble pressure gauge).
Pos. 204
Line break valve. Normally open. The valve protects the system in case of pilotline
(Sp) failure.
Pos. 205
Safety coupling (el-motor, gear – Rexroth pump).
Pos. 206
El-motor (driving the Rexroth pump).
Pos. 210
Electronically controlled proportional valve situated on the highpressure pump.
The proportional valve controls the oil amount delivered by the pump. This is done
by changing the swash plate angle. The larger the angle the more oil is delivered,
a smaller angle gives less oil.
Pos. 210-2
On/Off valve for pump Nos.4 and 5 only. Only engines with more than 3 (three)
engine driven pumps.
Pos. 215
Check valve – cartridge. Non return valve in use when the pump draws from the
pressure side of the system (not used on engines with only el-driven pumps).
Pos. 220
A positional transducer situated on the pump. The transducer sends an electrical
current corresponding to the swash plate angle of the pump, thereby telling the
ECS the exact amount of oil circulated by the pumps.
Pos. 226
(Only used on very few 1. edition ME engines).
Pressure transducer on the start-up pump unit.
Pos. 227
(Only used on very few 1. edition ME engines).
Orifice for pressure transducer pos.226 above.
Pos. 230
Butterfly valve on the highpressure pump suction side. Normally open.
Pos. 235
Check valve.
Pos. 236
Check valve.
Pos. 240
Orifice.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
Pos. 241
Orifice.
Pos. 276
Mini-mess valve installed on the start-up pump pressure side.
Pos. 277
Start-up pump.
Pos. 277a
Throttle valve.
Normally Open. This valve is used in cases where failure on engine driven pumps
or gear for engine driven pumps, might occur. By manually closing this throttle
valve, the pressure control function change from pressure relief valve 277b (ad-
justed to 175 bar) to pressure relief valve 277c (adjusted to 220 bar). The electri-
cally driven pumps are all limited mechanically on all engines (to 50% of maximum
pump displacement). In the failure situations described above the mechanically
stroke limitation have to be cancelled. In this way the oil amount delivered from the
electrically driven Start-up/Back-up Pumps ensures a running of the engine at ap-
proximately 15% load (back-up power).
Should a failure situation occur, we recommend that you contact MAN Diesel for
this special running of your specific engine.
Pos. 277b
Pressure relief valve.
Pos. 277c
Pressure relief valve.
Pos. 278
Electric motor.
Pos. 279
Coupling house.
Pos. 280
Coupling.
Pos. 280a
Coupling part.
Pos. 285
Inlet valve at start-up pump unit. Normally open.
Pos. 304
Non-return valve. The non return valve is installed on the highpressure side of the
pumps to separate the pump from the pressure side. The forces in the oil in pipe
P2 is extremely high during normal running (pressure is high, oil amount is high,
forces in accumulators are high). Should an electric motor, driving one of the
pumps, suddenly stop (electric failure, broken clutch) the forces from the other
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
pump, together with the forces mentioned above, will try to force the stopped pump
in the wrong direction, thereby violently stress and maybe destroy the pump. This
is avoided when the nonreturn valve closes immediately after pressure drop at
pump standstill.
Pos. 305
Nonreturn valve. The nonreturn valve (placed by the accumulator block inlet) is in-
stalled on the start-up pump pressure side to protect the pump against a high pres-
sure when the engine is running on the engine driven pumps.
Pos. 309
Check valve – cartridge. Non return valve.
Pos. 310
Pressure relief valve (opening pressure 230 bar).
Pos. 310a
Pilot valves arrangement situated on pos.310 pressure relief valve.
Pos. 310b
Orifice.
Cyl. Bore 50 60 70 80 90 98 cm
Orifice dia. 10 12 15 18 22 28 mm
Pos. 311
Pressure relief valve. Normally closed. The pressure relief valve is mechanically
adjusted to an opening pressure of 250 bar. If the oil consumption drops, the pres-
sure will rise, and if the pressure rises above 250 bar, the relief valve will open and
lead the oil back to the main tank.
Pos. 312
Pressure relief valve. Normally closed. The pressure relief valve is mechanically
adjusted to an opening pressure of 175 bars. Should the oil consumption suddenly
fall, the pressure will rise and should the pressure rise to more than 250 bar the
relief valve will open and lead the oil back to the main tank.
Pos. 315
Ball valve. Normally closed. Used when the system needs to be drained off during
repairs etc.
Pos. 316
Ball valve. Normally closed. This valve is used when testing the double wall pipe
for leakages, normally used during commissioning, but also after major repairs of
the piping system. In the event of a leak from inner to the outer pipe that cannot
be repaired immediately, ball valve pos. 316 is opened and normal running via the
outer pipe is maintained.
Pos. 320
Pressure transducers. The system is supplied with three (3) transducers for redun-
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
dancy reasons. During normal running, all three transducers send an analogue
signal to the ECS. The average value is shown on the MOP.
Pos. 321
An orifice, ø 0.5 mm for the above pressure transducers (320), is installed to pro-
tect the transducers against pulsations and ensure a steady amount of oil to the
transducers.
Pos. 330
Pressure transducer. The transducer is used for surveillance of the pressure in the
double- wall pipe, in the event that the engine is running with pressure in the outer
pipe due to a leakage in the inner pipe. The pressure value is shown on the MOP.
Oil in the outer pipe is not a normal running situation; therefore only one (1) trans-
ducer is present.
Pos. 331
An orifice ø 0.5 mm for above pressure transducer (330), is installed to protect the
transducers against pulsations and ensure a steady amount of oil to the transduc-
er (only active in the event of oil pressure in outer pipe, see pos 330 above).
Pos. 332
Mini-mess valve installed in the outer pipewall of the double wall pipe (for connec-
tion of portable pressure gauge).
Pos. 333
Ball valve. Normally closed. This valve is used when testing the double wall pipe
for leakages, normally during commissioning but also after major repairs of the
pipe system.
In the event of a leak from the inner to the outer pipe that cannot be repaired im-
mediately, ball valve pos. 333 is opened and normal running via the outer pipe is
maintained.
Pos. 335
Accumulators. Mounted on the Safety and Accumulator block or directly on the en-
gine driven pumps to avoid oil pulsations in the hydraulic system and keeping the
oil pressure steady at all engine loads.
Manufacturer: HYDRO LEDUC.
Pos. 339
Mini-mess valves mounted at the main high pressure pipe (P1) for measuring the
system pressure (for connection of portable pressure gauge).
Pos. 340
Mini-mess valves installed in the main highpressure pipe (P2) for measuring the
system pressure. (for connection of portable pressure gauge).
Pos. 345
Line break valve. Normally open. In the event of a leak in the inner main pipe, and
the amount of oil lost is so high that the amount of oil needed for normal running
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
cannot be maintained, this line break valve will close. Running of the engine will
be allowed without limitation.
Pos. 346
Line break valve.
Pos. 347
(Only used on large 80 - 98 ME engines).
Orifice. Lubricant connection P2 to double wall pipe sealing. ø=0.6mm.
Pos. 355
Leak indicator. In the event of a leak from the inner pipe, and the amount is so high
that the small reservoir is filled, an alarm will be raised. This will not affect the run-
ning of the engine, but the engineer is now warned about the leak (searching for
leaks is described in the procedure attached this document).
Pos. 360
Leak indicator. The Hydraulic Supply Unit is enclosed in a cabinet protecting
against forceful oil jets if a leak should occur. In the event of a minor oil leak oc-
curring inside the cabinet a drip pan placed in the bottom of the cabinet will be filled
and an alarm will be raised (the drip pan is fitted with an overflow pipe with a di-
ameter size and a height in the drip pan that match the oil amount allowed to leak
without interfering with a safe oil delivery to the hydraulic system).
Pos. 361
Leak indicator. If the leakage described in Pos. 360 above increases, the drip pan
will run full, and shutdown of the engine will occur.
Pos. 405
Drain valve. Normally closed. Drain of oil to tank during repairs on HCU block.
Opposite Drain valve 405 (see drawing) return oil from the HCU block (during nor-
mal running) is led back to the main tank via an overflow pipe. This overflow se-
cures that the HCU block and the attached components are ‘vented’ and ‘flooded’
at all times.
Pos. 406
Drain valve.
Pos. 420
Inlet valve. Normally open. Main supply valve of highpressure oil to ELFI, ELVA or
FIVA valves
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
WARNING !
To protect the accumulators from unnecessary stresses (fast
accelleration of the membrane) and oil jets, the valve Pos. 420
must not be opened at pressurised oil system.
After check/overhaul or whatever situation where the valve Pos.

420 has been closed the opening procedure is:
1) The engine must be stopped (no oil pressure)
2) Open/Close all valves into normal running position.
3) Pressurise the system by starting the Start-up pumps.
Pos. 421
Drain valve. Normally closed. Drain used during maintenance of ELFI/ELVA, Fuel
Oil Pressure Booster, Exhaust Valve Actuator, Accumulators.
Pos. 425
Mini-mess valve fitted on the HCU block measuring the system pressure (for con-
nection of portable pressure gauge).
Pos. 430
Double wall Pipe Detection valve. Normally open.
Pos. 431
Double wall Pipe Drain valve. Normally closed.
Pos. 435
Mini-mess valve fitted on the HCU block measuring the oil pressure in case of a
possible leak (for connection of portable pressure gauge).
Pos. 440
ELFI Valve or FIVA valve. ELectronic Fuel Injection valve or Fuel Injection Valve
Actuation valve, which is capable of fast and precise control of the hydraulic oil
flow to the fuel pump. The oil flow acts on the hydraulic piston and fuel injection
plunger, generating the fuel injection pressure and hence the injection.
Manufacturer: Curtis-Wright, Parker Hannifin, MAN Diesel.
Pos. 445
Electric Linear Motor driving the ELFI valve (proportional type).
Manufacturer: Curtis-Wright.
Pos. 450
Accumulators. Mounted on the HCU block to avoid oil pulsations in the hydraulic
system and keeping the oil pressure steady at all engine loads.
Manufacturer: HYDRO LEDUC.
Pos. 455
Mini-mess valve fitted on the HCU block measuring the oil pressure at the inlet to
the ELFI valve (for connection of portable pressure gauge).
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
Pos. 456
Mini-mess valve fitted on the HCU block measuring the oil pressure at the inlet to
the ELVA valve (for connection of portable pressure gauge).
Pos. 465
Mini-mess valve fitted on the HCU block measuring the oil pressure at the outlet
from the HCU block (for connection of portable pressure gauge).
Pos. 470
ELVA valve. ELectronic Exhaust Valve Activation valve opens for the oil flow to the
two-stage hydraulic actuator, which drives the pushrod oil to open the exhaust
valve.
Manufacturer: Curtis-Wright
Pos. 475
High Response Valve. The High Response Valve is an electric on/off valve driving
the ELVA valve.
Manufacturer: Curtis-Wright
Pos. 480
Airing Orifice.
Pos. 500
Fuel Oil Pressure Booster.
Pos. 501
Positional Transducer. Inductive sensor measuring the movement off the fuel
plunger in the fuel oil pressure booster. Raises an alarm if the plunger movement
is slower/faster than a predefined value stated in the ECS. The sensor has no in-
fluence on the opening/closing timing of the ELFI valve.
Pos. 502
Hydraulic piston.
Pos. 503
Umbrella.
Pos. 504
Fuel plunger.
Pos. 505
Fuel injection pipes.
Pos. 510
Fuel injection valves.
Pos. 515
Exhaust Valve Actuator.
Pos. 516
Hydraulic piston.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
Pos. 517
Activation piston.
Pos. 520
High Pressure Pipe (push rod pipe).
Pos. 525
Exhaust Valve Top.
Pos. 526
Positional Transducer. Inductive sensor measuring the movement of the exhaust
valve spindle. Raises an alarm if the spindle movement is opening too low or slow-
er/faster than a predefined value stated in the ECS. The sensor has no influence
of the opening/closing timing of the ELVA valve.
Pos. 527
Check valve. Non return valve from exhaust valve top outlet.
Pos. 528
Orifice from exhaust valve top inlet.
Pos. 530
Non-return valve. Oil from the Low Pressure System is always delivered to the
High Pressure Pipe. This is to keep the High Pressure Pipe ‘flooded’ at all times
and avoid fluctuations in the oil system (see also Pos. 541).
Pos. 531
Supply valve. Normally open. See Pos. 530 above. This valve must be closed dur-
ing overhaul of the Exhaust Valve Actuator and High Pressure Pipe. Also to be
closed if FIVA valve is changed.
Pos. 540
Mini-mess valve fitted on the Exhaust Valve Actuator top measuring the oil pres-
sure in the High Pressure Pipe (for connection of portable pressure gauge).
Pos. 541
(Only some ME engines).
Orifice ø1.0 mm. The Exhaust Actuator is equipped with 3 (three) drains.
The lower drain pipe drains the space between the Hydraulic Piston (516) and the
Activation Piston (517). Although the tolerances between the piston and the liner
in the Exhaust Valve Actuator are very narrow, a very small amount of oil will al-
ways escape through this drain.
The upper drain drains the High Pressure Pipe during overhauls. As the amount
of oil in the High Pressure Pipe is rather high and oil spill will be too high if the pipe
is loosened and removed to fast (not to mention the cleaning after overhaul), this
drain drains the oil from the High Pressure Pipe to the main tank. When the bolts
at the top flange of the High Pressure Pipe are loosened and a light push loosens
the pipe (so that air can escape) the oil will (in a few minutes) be drained to the
tank.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
The middle drain is designed with an orifice (541). This orifice ensures a stable
change of the oil in the top of the actuator. The movement and damping of the oil
in the actuator is generating high energies in the top section of the actuator, this
energy results in an oil temperature rise (that may be harmful and stress the ma-
terial), which can be removed by changing a small amount of oil in the top of the
actuator.
Pos. 545
Mini-mess valve fitted in the Exhaust Valve Actuator bottom for measuring the oil
pressure activating the actuator activation piston (for connection of portable pres-
sure gauge).
Pos. 550
Mini-mess valve fitted in the Fuel Oil Pressure Booster bottom measuring the oil
pressure activating the Fuel Oil Pressure Booster hydraulic piston (for connection
of portable pressure gauge).
Pos. 555
Leak Indicator. Placed underneath the drip pan for all HCU units. An alarm will be
activated if an oil leak is too large.
Pos. 560
Connection valve.
Normally open. Must be closed when working on cylinder lubricators.
Pos. 565
Mini-mess valve fitted in the HCU block measuring the oil pressure activating the
ME cylinder lubricator (for connection of portable pressure gauge).
Holes Pos.701, 702 and ‘not numbered’ (not shown on diagrams)
Functional description of drain holes Pos. No. 701, 702 and ‘not numbered’ all sit-
uated on both front-end and aft-end of the HCU Block.
As seen on Plate 70842, the HCU blocks have 3 drain holes on the sides. 702 on
the aft end side and hole 701 and hole ‘not numbered’ on the fore end side. (En-
gines with port side manoeuvring side)
The hole 701 is a drain/peep hole connected through bores to the underside of the
Fuel Oil Pressure Booster. Should the inner sealing ring under the Fuel Oil Pres-
sure Booster leak, system oil is detected in the drain 701.
The hole ‘not numbered’ is a drain/peep hole from the drain surrounding the Fuel
Oil Pressure Booster. (Eventually leaking oil is collected here and drained away to
avoid oil filth)
The hole 702 is a drain/peep hole connected through bores to the underside of the
Exhaust Valve Actuator. Should the sealing ring under the Exhaust Valve Actuator
leak, system oil is detected in the drain 702.
ME Cylinder Lubricator (no pos.number)
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
708-08
ME Engines
Functional description of the Level Switch located on the HCU Block at the inlet
pipe to the Cylinder Lubricator on ME Engines.
(Inclusive the 3-way cock fitted on the inlet pipe to the Level Switch).
As shown in Plate 70843, a level switch is placed on the cylinder lubricating oil inlet
pipe to the cylinder lubricator.
The function of the level switch is to keep the lubricator filled and secure an oil flow
to the lubricator at all times. If the feeler in the level switch is exposed (low oil level
in the house) an alarm will be activated and a slow-down of the engine will occur.
The force of gravity and heated inlet lubricating oil pipes from the gravity tank to
the lubricators keep the level switch and, thereby, the lubricator filled. The lubricat-
ing oil is kept at 45 degrees Celcius in the tank, and the inlet main pipe is insulated
and heat traced to keep the same temperature at the inlet of the lubricator on the
HCU block.
The 3-way cock on the inlet pipe before the level switch is closed when overhaul-
ing the lubricator (or level switch). When closing the 3-way cock, the level switch
is vented to open air to secure that the level switch and inlet pipe to the lubricator
is pressure free and empty before overhaul (at the same time, the alarm is activat-
ed and the slow down function is checked).
If the 3-way cock is closed by mistake during engine running, the venting to open
air will ensure (because of normal consumption) that an alarm of no cylinder lubri-
cation in the lubricator concerned is activated.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
MAN B&W Bearing Monitoring 708-09
1. Monitoring
The aim of monitoring engine bearings, is to avoid extensive damage to the engine,
by constantly measuring e.g. the relative wear or the temperature or other. Monitor-
ing in a wider perspective, has numerous good side-effects. One in particular is
that the well known fact of possible contamination of internal engine parts, when
opening up, is decreased. Therefore, monitoring as such is an aid to the engine
personel, to base the frequency with which the bearings are opened up for inspec-
tion, on actual wear or temperature or other, instead of the traditional time based
checking frequency, thus prolonging the opening-up frequency. The systems de-
scribed in the following are designed to monitor the engine bearings continiously
using various techniques.
BWM is a security system monitoring the bearings and giving alarms or slow down
depending on the severity of the damage. BWM do not prevent potential damage
on the bearings but the intention is that it should prevent consequential damage
to the more valuable parts such as the crankshaft and the bed-plate. BWM do not
change how often the bearings must be inspected without opening up.
• WIOM (Water In Oil Monitor) is a system intended to prevent certain damage

to bearings whom may be linked to to high water content in the lubricating oil.
• SLEM (Shaft-Line Earthing Monitoring) is system intended to prevent certain

damage to bearings whom may be linked to spark erosion.
• BWM and BTM is therefore considered as Engine Protection System.
• WIOM and SLEM is therefore considered as Bearing Protection System.
1.1 Bearing Wear Monitoring (BWM) (for monitoring condition)

The aim of the BWM system is to detect a bearing damage before the lining
(Babbitt or Tin-Aluminium) is worn away by lining scuffing (Tin-Aluminium), wi-
ping, abrasive wear, melting out or extensive fatigue of the lining (Babbitt) and
steel to steel contact occurs. However, the intended effect of the system is not
to protect the bearing shells as such, but mainly to prevent consequential dama-
ge of the crankshaft and bedplate in case of severe bearing failures.
The principle of the BWM system is to measure the vertical position of the cross
head in bottom dead centre (BDC) (see Plate 70847, principal drawing that shows
x-head and BWM sensor on guideplane). The BWM system monitors all three
principal crank-train bearings using two proximity sensors forward/aft per cylin-
der unit and is placed inside the frame box.
Targeting the guide shoe bottom ends continuously, the sensors measure the
distance to the crosshead in BDC. Signals are computed and digitally presented
to computer hardware, from which a useable and easily interpretable interface is
708-09 Bearing Monitoring MAN B&W
presented to the user. The measuring precision is more than adequate to obtain
an alarm well before steel-to-steel contact in the bearings occur.
In case of wear in a main bearing, in a crankpin bearing or in a crosshead bea-

ring, this vertical position will reflect the wear. By appropriate signal processing
following a MAN Diesel specification, the system delivers a relay output signal on
three levels, PRE-WARNING, ALARM and SLOW-DOWN in the case of abnormal
wear of one or more bearings.
The pre warning signal is not connected to the alarm or safety system. This
means that if the BWM system goes into pre warning state, this is shown locally
with a yellow LED on each BWM junction box (the way of pre-warning may vary,
depending on manufacturer´s design of system). The pre warning state is not a
critical state, nonetheless the yellow LED, will draw the attention to the fact that
one or more of the cranktrain bearings is/are showing signs of abnormal wear
beyond the pre warning limit. If a pre warning signal occours MAN Diesel recom-
mends that the cranktrain bearings in question are checked at next port of call
or earliest convinient.
The alarm and slow-down signals are connected to the alarm and safety system.
If alarm state is reached, MAN Diesel recommends that an inspection of the
cranktrain bearings in question is carried out as soon as possible, given that the
conditions for the ship as such is not compromised. Also refer to Guidance Value
Automation 701-02.
In the case where the BWM system has given a pre warning or an alarm,
pointing out that one or more cranktrain bearings are showing wear beyond
the limits stated in Guidance Value Automation, refer to the Procedure for
the respective bearings in order to take further action on the matter.
1.2 Bearing Temperature Monitoring System (BTM)
The BTM system continuously monitors the temperature of the bearings. The
monitoring is performed either by measuring the temperature on the rear side of
the bearing shell directly or by detecting the return oil from each bearing in the
crankcase. In case of a specified temperature is recorded, either a bearing shell
temperature or bearing oil outlet temperature, an alarm is raised. For shell tem-
perature in main, crankpin and crosshead bearings two high-temperature alarm
levels apply.
The first level alarm is indicated in the alarm panel while the second level acti-
vates a slow down command. For oil outlet temperature in main, crankpin and
crosshead bearings two high temperature alarm levels including deviation alarm
apply. The first level of the high temperature/deviation alarm is indicated in the
alarm panel while the second level activates a slow down command.
In the case where the BTM system has given an alarm, pointing out that one
MAN B&W Bearing Monitoring 708-09
or more cranktrain bearings are showing a temperature beyond the alarm

limits, refer to the Procedure for the respective bearings in order to take
further action on the matter.
1.3 Water in Oil Monitoring (WIOM)
Water content in the lubricating oil can be extremely damaging to engine bea-
rings, if significantly exceeding the saturation point of a given system oil, typically
max. 0.2 vol.%; for a short period up to 0.5 vol.%. This is particularly valid for
Tin-Aluminium lined crosshead bearings featuring lead overlay as running layer.
The higher the water content, the faster the wear rate.
The excessive water content will cause the lead overlay in crosshead bearings
to corrode away rapidly. Main and crankpin bearings lined with Babbitt or Tin-
Aluminium may also suffer irreparable damage from water contamination, but the
damage mechanism would be different and not as acute.
The above scenario can be prevented by continiously monitoring eventual water

contamination of the lubricating oil. For this purpose a Water In Oil Monitoring
system is implemented in the engine lub oil system, continiously meassuring the
relative humidity in the system oil. A probe in the oil piping system transmits a
signal to a unit, which calculates the humidity as Water Activity (aw). This method
of calculation has the advantage of being independent of oil type, temperature or
age. The system is connected to the alarmsystem.
In the case where the WIOM system has given an alarm, pointing out that
the humidity of the lubricating oil has risen above the alarm limit, refer to the
respective Procedure in order to take further action on the matter.
1.4 Propeller Shaft Earthing Device
The Propeller Shaft Earthing Device, is a system designed to avoid so called spark
erosion in the engine bearings and journals. The spark erosion phenomenon is a
result of difference in electrical potential between metal parts. The level of electrical
potential lies generally between 200 – 600 mV on engines without protection from a
Propeller Shaft Earthing Device.
In some cases, it has been found that this difference in electrical potential between
the hull and the propeller shaft has caused spark erosion on the main bearings and
journals of the engine. To avoid this, a continuous electrical earthing circuit between
the propeller and the ships structure, must be established. This circuit usually exists
when the propeller is at a rest, where a metal to metal contact is made between the
shaft and the stern tube liners, or main engine bearings and journals.
However, whilst the shaft is turning the bearing oil film creates an intermittent high
resistance which effectively insulates the propeller from the hull structure. Since the
propeller presents a relatively large surface area of bare metal, it attracts cathodic
protection currents, which tend to discharge by arcing across the bearing oil film.
This can result in spark erosion which eventually leads to pitting and ‘striping’ of white
metal bearing surfaces.
708-09 Bearing Monitoring MAN B&W
In order to reduce the potential between the propeller shaft (crankshaft) and the hull
(engine structure), thus protecting the engine, an earthing device is installed on the
intermediate shaft, see Plate 70848. The plate shows the principal components of
a Propeller Shaft Earthing Device. As a Condition Monitor a voltmeter is installed to
ensure a continuous display of the shaft/hull potential. The reading is not to exceed
50 mV. Readings in excess of this value (Alarm limit = 80 mV>) are indicative of worn
bonding brushes or poorly maintained brushgear and/or sliprings. The system is con-
nected to the alarm system.
Main Bearing, Thick Shell Design Plate 70801
A-A
(Bore Relief)
A
B
B-B
(Tang. Run-out)
A
B
Engine types with thick shell main bearing assemblies:
S/K/L50ME/MC
S/K/L60ME/MC
S/K/L70ME/MC
S/K/L80ME/MC
K/L90ME/MC
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Main Bearing, Thin Shell Design Plate 70802
A-A
(Bore Relief)
A
B
B-B
(Tang. Run-out)
Engine types with thin shell main bearing assemblies:
S26MC
S35MC
L35MC
S42MC
S46MC-C
S50ME-C/MC-C
S60ME-C/MC-C
S70ME-C/MC-C
S80ME-C/MC-C
S90ME-C/MC-C
K90-98ME-C/MC-C
MAN Diesel A/S
Crosshead Bearing Plate 70803
A-A
(Oil Wedge) A
A
Extent of oil wedges in crosshead bearing lower shell:
Engine type: Extent L (mm)*

S26MC
S/L35MC
S42MC
S46MC-C
S/K/L50ME/MC
S50ME-C/MC-C For actual values,
refer to Vol II,
S/K/L60ME/MC
procedure M90401
S/K/L70ME/MC
S/K/L80ME/MC
K80ME-C/MC-C
K/L90ME/MC
K90-98ME-C/MC-C
‘) On each side of the axial oil groove
MAN Diesel A/S
Plate 70804 Crankpin Bearing
B-B
(Tang. Run-out)
A-A
(Bore Relief)
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Main Bearing Assemblies Plate 70805
Fig. 1 Thick Shell
Fig. 2 Thin Shell
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Plate 70806 Guide Shoes and Strips
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Thrust Bearing Assembly Plate 70807
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Inspection of Bearings
Recording of Observations Plate 70809
References to Volume II, ‘Maintenance’

Inspection without Open-up Inspection
Bearing Type Opening-up and Overhaul
Main bearing 905 905
Crankpin bearing 904 904
Crosshead bearing 904 904
Guide shoes 904 –
Crosshead guides 904 –
Thrust bearing – 905
Camshaft bearing (only MC) 906 906
Recording of Observations
Use the Inspection Sheet, Plate 70814. For help, refer to example, Plate 70813.
A. Inspection without Opening-up

State the following information:
Date / Signature / Engine running hours / Type of inspection / Bearing type
(Plate 70809, Table 1) / Bearing number / Observation (Plate 70812, Table 3)/
Remarks / Clearances.
B. Open-up Inspection and Overhaul
State the following information:
Date / Signature / Engine running hours / Type of inspection / Bearing type
(Plate 70809, Table 1) / Bearing number / Manufacturer’s logo / Damage to
(Plate 70809, Table 2) / Observation (Plate 70812, Table 4) / Site and extent
of damage (Plate 70810-70811) * / Remarks / Clearances / Hydraulic opening
pressure / Roughness.
* The site and extent of the damage is determined by:
1. The approx. centre of the damaged area (see examples I, II and III).
The axial location (I) of the centre should be stated in (mm) from the aft end
of the bearing or the journal.
2. The extent of the damage defined by a circle with radius (r); or a rectangle (a,
b) or (a, b, +/– c), (see examples I, II and III).
Note: for isolated cracks, illustration III is used, with the measurement b omitted.
Table 1: Table 2:
Bearing Type Damage
Main bearing MB Overlayer OL
Crankpin Bearing CRB White Metal WM
Crosshead Bearing CHB Journal J
Guide Shoes GS Pin P
Crosshead Guides CG Transitions:
Thrust Bearing TB Oil Wedge OW
Bore Relief BR
Camshaft Bearing CSB Tang. Run-out TR
(only MC)
Back of Shell BS
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Plate 70810 Location and Size of Damage in Bearing Shells
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Acceptance Criteria for Tin-Aluminium
Bearings with overlayer Plate 70811
Crosshead Bearing Lower Shells
Overlayer
Intermediate layer
Tin-Aluminium (AlSn40)
Steel
Engine type: Max. allowed exposure (mm2)

26MC 2900
35MC 4300
42MC 6700
46MC-C 8100
50ME-C/MC-C 9600
60ME-C/MC-C 13100
65ME-C 16100
70ME-C/MC-C 17900
Maximum allowed exposure of the intermediate layer. Values are calculated according to
SL05-460/NHN.
MAN Diesel A/S
Plate 70812 Location of Damage on Pin/Journal
d
a
e
sh
ro
C Crosshead pin
(View from aft)
F M A
0
9 3
Main and crank bearing journals
(View from aft)
0
F M A
9 3
6
2
0
F M A
1
9 3
1 Main bearing journal
2 Crank pin bearing journal
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Observations Plate 70813
Table 3 Inspection without Opening-up (7.1)
Checks Symbol Observations

Oil flow OF • OK, similarity
U Uneven
Oil Jets OJ • OK, similarity
(Crosshead, Guide strips) R Reduced
M Missing
TW Twisted
White Metal WM • OK
SQ Squeezed out
CR Cracks
L Loose
M Missing
Crosshead Guides CG • OK
SC Scratches
CO Corrosion
SW Silvery White
Oil Pan OP • OK, clean
WM White metal fragments
Oil Condition OC • OK
DK Dark
WT Water traces
Table 4 Open-up Inspection and Overhaul (7.2)
Checks Symbol Observations Ref.

White Metal WM • OK
W Wiping 7.3 II
HC Hard Contact 7.4
7.7
OS Oil Starvation 7.5
CR Cracks 7.1
CRC Crack Cluster 7.1
L Loose 6.2
M Missing 7.4 B, 6.1
SSE Spark Erosion
CO Corrosion
Overlayer OL • OK 7.3 I
(Crosshead only) TE Tearing 7.3 II
W Wiping
Transitions: • OK 7.7
Oil Wedge OW RR Ragged Ridges 7.7
Bore Relief BR W Wiping 7.10BII
Tang. Run-out TR D Disappeared
Journal/Pin J/P • OK
SE Spark Erosion 6.2
CO Corrosion 7.4B, 6.1
6.1
SW Silvery White 7.4, 7.11
SC Scratches
Back of Shell BS • OK
FR Fretting 7.4
TH Trapped hard Particles 7.4
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Clearance (mm)
M/V
No.:
Date
Yard:
hours
Type of
pressure
Description of Condition Top
Journal/pin
Hydr. open.
Checked by
inspection 2)
Roughness 3)
Plate 70814
Engine running
Fore Aft
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

Builder:
Built year:
Engine type:
No.:
Engine
Inspection Records, Example
Total
CW / CCW 1) Running hours
4)
Date:
Checked by:
4)
4)
1) Engine direction of rotation, seen from aft, must be underllined; CW: Clockwise, CCW: Counter Clockwise
2) Inspection without opening-up: 7.1; Open-up inspection: 7.2
3) It should be stated whether the roughness is measured: M, or evaluated: E.
4) Only to be filled in, if all observations are carried out at the same running hours.
Clearance (mm)
M/V
No.:
Date
Yard:
hours
Type of
pressure
Description of Condition Top
Journal/pin
Hydr. open.
Checked by
inspection 2)
Roughness 3)
Engine running
Fore Aft
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

Builder:
Built year:
Engine type:
No.:
Engine
Inspection Records, Blank
Total
CW / CCW 1) Running hours
4)
Date:
Checked by:
4)
4)
1) Engine direction of rotation, seen from aft, must be underllined; CW: Clockwise, CCW: Counter Clockwise
Plate 70815
2) Inspection without opening-up: 7.1; Open-up inspection: 7.2

3) It should be stated whether the roughness is measured: M, or evaluated: E.
4) Only to be filled in, if all observations are carried out at the same running hours.
Report: Crankshaft Deflections
Plate 70816 (Autolog)
M/V Engine type: Total running Checked by:

hours
Builder: Engine No.:
Yard No.: Built year: Date:
For comparison of Ships draught, aft measured (m) Fully loaded Ballasted (m)
measurements (m)
Jacket cooling water temp. (°C) Main lub. oil temp. (°C)
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Top
Camshaft Exhaust
side
B1 B2
For deflection readings, a dial micrometer is to be placed in Bottom

Looking forward
the punch marks.
Closing of the crankthrow is regarded as negative deflection
(Unit for measuring and calculating: 1/100 mm)
Fig. 3 Cyl. No. and deflections

Crankpin position
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Near bottom, fuel pump side B1

Fuel pump side C
Top T
Exhaust side *) E
Near bottom, exhaust side B2
*) Positions C and E are included for reference purposes.
Fig. 4 Bottom 1/2 (B1 + B2) = B
Fig. 5 Vertical Deflections
Top-bottom or (T-B) = V
For permissible deflections, see Plate 70817. See also Item 2.2 ‘Checking the Deflections*
earlier in this Chapter.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Crankshaft Deflection, Limits Plate 70817
Normally obtainable
Realignment Absolute maximum
Type for a new or recently
recommended permissible
overhauled engine
mm mm mm
1 2 1 2 1 2
S26MC 0.12 0.23 0.31 0.35 0.46 0.46
L35MC 0.10 0.20 0.27 0.30 0.40 0.40
S35MC 0.17 0.35 0.46 0.52 0.70 0.70
S42MC 0.21 0.43 0.57 0.64 0.86 0.86
S46MC-C 0.23 0.46 0.62 0.69 0.93 0.93
K50ME/MC 0.12 0.25 0.34 0.38 0.51 0.51
L50ME/MC 0.17 0.34 0.45 0.51 0.68 0.68
S50ME/MC 0.23 0.46 0.61 0.69 0.92 0.92
S50ME-C/MC-C 0.23 0.47 0.62 0.70 0.94 0.94
K60ME/MC 0.15 0.31 0.41 0.46 0.62 0.62
L60ME/MC 0.20 0.40 0.54 0.61 0.81 0.81
L60ME-C/MC-C 0.22 0.45 0.59 0.67 0.89 0.89
S60ME/MC 0.27 0.55 0.73 0.82 1.10 1.10
S60ME-C/MC-C 0.28 0.56 0.75 0.84 1.13 1.13
S65ME-C 0.33 0.65 0.87 0.98 1.31 1.31
K70ME/MC 0.18 0.37 0.49 0.55 0.74 0.74
L70ME/MC 0.24 0.48 0.63 0.71 0.95 0.95
L70ME-C/MC-C 0.26 0.53 0.70 0.79 1.05 1.05
S70ME/MC 0.32 0.64 0.85 0.96 1.28 1.28
S70ME-C/MC-C 0.33 0.66 0.88 0.99 1.32 1.32
MAN Diesel A/S
Plate 70817 Crankshaft Deflection, Limits
Normally obtainable
Realignment Absolute maximum
Type for a new or recently
recommended permissible
overhauled engine
mm mm mm
1 2 1 2 1 2
L80ME/MC 0.27 0.54 0.72 0.81 1.08 1.08
S80ME/MC 0.36 0.73 0.97 1.10 1.46 1.46
S80ME-C/MC-C 0.38 0.75 1.00 1.13 1.50 1.50
K80ME-C/MC-C 0.22 0.44 0.58 0.66 0.88 0.88
L90ME/MC 0.30 0.60 0.81 0.92 1.22 1.22
L90ME-C/MC-C 0.27 0.54 0.72 0.81 1.08 1.08
K90ME/MC 0.25 0.50 0.67 0.75 1.00 1.00
K90ME-C/MC-C 0.20 0.41 0.54 0.61 0.82 0.82
S90ME-C/MC-C 0.36 0.72 0.96 1.08 1.45 1.45
K98ME/MC 0.25 0.49 0.65 0.74 0.98 0.98
K98ME-C/MC-C 0.20 0.41 0.54 0.61 0.81 0.81
1. Normal for all crank throws.
2. Permissible for the foremost crank throw, when the crankshaft fore end is provided
with a torsional vibration damper, tuning wheel or directly coupled to a generator rotor.
Permissible for the aftmost crank throw, when the crankshaft generator end is pro-
vided with a flexible coupling.
When the camshaft chain drive is located in the foremost part of the engine, the crank-
shaft deflection readings for cyl. 1, are to be measured with untightened chain.
When judging the alignment on the above “limiting-value”’ basis, make sure that the
crankshaft is actually supported in the adjacent bearings. (See Section 708-02 ‘Alignment
of Main Bearings’ point 2.3 ‘floating journals’).
Page 2 (2) When referring to this page, please quote Operation Plate 70817, Edition 0005
MAN Diesel A/S
lr
e
F
Deck
Filling pipe
To drain tank
Engine
Plate 70818
oil Full flow filter to be situated

as near as possible to the engine
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

Camshaft lub. oil
booster pumps
Feeler 45°C NB 50 mm
TI TI TI PI PI
5 Y
U AR Min. 15°
A 3 AB E Vent. for MAN B&W
6 and MET turbochargers
Cooling oil inlet
Lub. oil 7 Butterfly valve
Lub. oil inlet
cooler
De-aeration R
S
C/D
For initial filling of pumps Lubricating oil bottom tank

25 mm valve to be located on
(Engines with Uni-Lube System)
4 underside of horizontal pipe piece

25 mm hose connection for cleaning of To and from purifiers
Circulating Oil System (Outside Engine)
lub. oil system. See information letter
“Cleaning of lub. oil system”
By-pass valve may be omitted in cases
where the pumps have a built-in by-pass
If using centrifugal pumps it is recommended to Approximately the following quantity of

install a throttle valve at position A to prevent a too lub. oil should be treated in the 2
3
high oil level in the oil pan. A device preventing the purifiers 0.136 l/kwh. The capacity of
valve from being closed has to be introduced so that purifiers to be according to
the min. flow area gives the specified pressure at manufacturer’s recommendation.
inlet to engine under normal service conditions. it
ought to be possible to fully open the valve e.g.
when starting the engine with cold oil.
Plate 70820
Crosshead bearings
System oil outlet and piston Main bearings
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

TI TSA TS SHD
349 350 352
AR
Axial vibration damper
Thrust bearing
WEA WI Only 5 cyl.
472 471 S-engines
S
Aft R
(Inside Engine)
Fore
PI
Circulating Oil System
330
TI TSA FSA
PSA PS SHD
317 318 320
331 335
PI PSA TI
326 327 311
Lubricating oil to MAN B&W and MET turbochargers (see also Plate 70826)
Flushing of Main Lub. Oil System
Location of Chackbag and Blank Flanges Plate 70821
Lub. oil inlet to exhaust valve

actuator and for some engines
also camshafts
3
10
Common Lub. Oil

inlet RU
Manometer
**
Oil sample
Protection apron
Checkbag Flexible hose
housing
3
Man hole 4
* 2
Checkbag
housing
Manometer
**
* 1 7 8
5
6 Flexible hose
9
* See Plate 70822
** Max. recommended pres-

Oil sample sure before checkbag = 1
bar eff. or in accordance
with information from the
Blanking off pipes: checkbag supplier
1. Main bearings by-pass blanks

2. Cross head bearings by-pass blanks
3. Blank-off bearings and spray nozzles at main chain
4. Blank-off thrust bearing
5. Blank-off or by-pass axial vibration damper
6. Blank-off torsional vibration damper
7. Blank-off forward moment compensator chain drive (option)
8. Blank-off hydraulic chain tightener
9. Blank-off PTO-PTI power gear
10. Blank-off or by-pass turbocharger
MAN Diesel A/S
Flushing of Main Lub. Oil System
Plate 70822 Dimension of Checkbag and Blank Flanges
Sketch of Alternative Checkbag

checkbag checkbag monofil
housing: (inside engine): filter cloth
50 μm
Approximate
dimensions Flexible hose
Plate, welded
70
to housing
2” Checkbag frame
400
360
390
2” Pipe stub
160 75
The holes in the checkbag frame

are, in our experience, to be
approx. 5 mm in diameter, to avoid ø80
damage to the checkbag and a too ø80
high pressure drop.
The above filter components can be delivered from MAN B&W Diesel
* Blank flanges for flushing:
A) Blank at main bearings
D
D
H
4
B) Blank between telescopic pipes and crossheads

d2
Diameter > d2
D
D Diameter > D
H
9
Diameter < d1
d1
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Flushing of Main Lubricating Oil System
Flushing Log Plate 70823
M/V Engine Type: System Checked by:
Builder: Engine No.: M.E. Lub. Oil
Yard No.: Built year: Camshaft Date:
Info Pumps Filters Absolute/fineness Centrifuge Magnet Filter

Centrifugal Maker : Maker: Maker:
Screw Main : μm Type: Type:
Maker: Type : Capacity: Other Filters
Type: By-pass : μm Maker:
Capacity: Type : Type:
Filter Unit (if used) μm L.O. System
Type: Temp. Press. Pump 1-2 Purifier Filter Check
Maker: [C] [bar] Unit No.
at &
Inspection of Checked by Date Time Run- Run- Start/ Start/
pump ISO
start ning ning stop stop
& Code
Pipes: & hours hours running running
M.E.
Tanks: stop per total hours hours
day
Date: Remarks
Sign. Inspector: Yard/Engine builder Total flushing hrs.: Final cleanliness:

Check bags ISO 4406 Code
Recording of pump running hrs. with ½hr.

Cleaning and replacement of filters to be recorded under remarks.
Accepted flushing cleanliness level: Clean check bags after 2 hrs. (ISO 4406 Code ≤ 19/15)
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Plate 70824
C.J.C. filter and pump
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

32 mm nom. bore
AG LAH
Main engine
Tank top
Heating coil
Drain tank for oil from
To lub. oil bottom tank piston rod stuffing boxes
Cleaning System, Stuffing Box Drain Oil (Option)
From purifier
To purifier
Plate 70828 Turbocharger Lubricating Oil Pipes
g
n
e
v
a
c
S
TE
Scavenge air receiver 8707
Sealing air PT
8708
TI
PT 8707
8103
Expansion joint
MAN B&W
turbocharger
Tank
TE
8117
E
AB
U
Orifice
PT
E 8103
MET turbocharger
TE
8117
AB
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Plate 70829 Check Measurements
See also ‘Check of Bearings before Installation’
Fig. 1 - Measuring of crown thickness.
tr
n
e
C 15 mm
Centre line
15 mm
Ball micrometer gauge
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Gear Driven HPS, ELFI and ELVA Plate
Oil supply to
hydraulic 'pushrod'
for exhaust valve
526 ZT 4111 C
Fuel valves
510 530
Exhaust valve
525
High pressure pipes Hydraulic pushrod

505 520
Fuel pump 500
Hydraulic Exhaust
cylinder unit Valve
Actuator 515
Activation
Fuel injection
535
Fuel oil inlet piston 517
X plunger 504
Fuel oil outlet 501
F Pos
Hydraulic
Fuel oil drain I ZT 4114 C piston
AD
Umbrella
sealing Hydraulic
Hydraulic piston 503 piston 516
502
450 450 450
ELFI 440 ELVA 470
420 421
Return to tank
Distributor block 410
To AE LS 4112 AH
555
Hydraulic Power Supply unit
Safety and
PT 1201-1 C
accumulator block 300
PT 1201-2 C ZV 1202 B PT 1208-1 C
PT 1233 C 330
320 PT 1201-3 C 335 ZV 1202 A PT 1208-2 C 270
350
309 316
345
To AE 305 305
304 304 304
FT 1234 AH 310
335 335 335
355
311
215 215 215
312 312
PT 1221 C
Engine Electrically
driven driven
pumps 201 201 201 pumps
PT 1204-1 ZL PT 1204-2 ZL PT 1204-3 ZL 531

130 M M
Step-up gear 230 230 230 250
290 250 290
50
Pos. 285
Filter unit 130
XC 1231 AL 106 115

105
XC 1232 C
120 Back-flushing oil
Main filter RW
101
Engine lubr. oil

To AE LS 1235 AH 360 LS 1236 AH Z 361
Lube oil inlet

Schematic mechanical-hydraulic system RU
to engine
Plate
Gear Driven HPS, ELFI and ELVA
Gear Driven HPS, ELFI and ELVA Plate
Plate
510 F uel/Lube Oil Drain 520
F uel Oil Drain I S
501
I S
505 F uel Drain 540
4114
F uel Circulation 530
500 4115
504
526 515
503 4111
F uel Inlet 517
MAN B&W Diesel
502 525
516
550
D: \Us erdata\PXC\CADF IL E R\ME -engi ne G ear-driv en HPS \3061129- 7-5-4. CAD

E xh. V alve Top - Drain
465
545
528
527
440 C
445 470
4101 C 475
4102 4108
E LFI P ump - Lube Oil Drain

TL P T L 2
L P T L L 2
High P ressure P ipe Drain
531
ME Cyl. Lubricator
When referring to this page, please quote Plate P70830 Edition 0002
E LV A A ctuator - Drain
LP S LP S
L-atmospheric pressure
P2 P2
Main T ank Main T ank
456
Drain B ox - Common for all Hydraulic Cylinder Units Waste T ank
560
435
455
431
430
555
4112
421
405
420
425
450
P70830-0002
Plate
Page 5 (5)
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA Plate
Plate
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA
309
215
304
203
335
204
1240
1238
210
P2 x P2
B
1 1 1
MAN B&W Diesel
x 2 x 2 x 2
P1 B B B P1
A A A
x x x
A A A
B B B
T P T P T P
S S S
U U U
B A B A B A
Rkv Sp Rkv Sp Rkv Sp

B P B P B P
B1 MB B1 MB B1 MB
S S S
U U U
M M M
U MS R4 R3 R2 K1 K2 T R5 R6 R7 U MS R4 R3 R2 K1 K2 T R5 R6 R7 U MS R4 R3 R2 K1 K2 T R5 R6 R7
S S S
R(L) R(L) R(L)
P
P
P
I
I
I
L L
S S
205
201
130
131
230
202
220
1204
1222
Main T ank
Waste T ank
360
361
1235
1236
P70831-0002
Plate
Page 3 (5)
Plate
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA Plate
Gear Driven HPS,ELFI and ELVA, Plate
MAN B&W Diesel Separate LPS P70832-0002
Plate
Gear Driven HPS,ELFI and ELVA,
P70832-0002 Separate LPS MAN B&W Diesel
Gear Driven HPS,ELFI and ELVA, Plate
MAN B&W Diesel Separate LPS P70832-0002
Plate
Gear Driven HPS,ELFI and ELVA,
P70832-0002 Separate LPS MAN B&W Diesel
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA, Separate LPS Plate
Plate
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA, Separate LPS
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA, Separate LPS Plate
Plate
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA, Separate LPS
El Driven HPS and FIVA, Separate LPS Plate
Plate
El Driven HPS and FIVA, Separate LPS
El Driven HPS and FIVA, Separate LPS Plate
EL Driven HPS and FIVA Plate
Plate
EL Driven HPS and FIVA
EL Driven HPS and FIVA Plate
Plate
EL Driven HPS and FIVA
6L42MC/ME KMU Plate
Plate
6L42MC/ME KMU
6L42MC/ME KMU Plate
Combined HPS, Common LPS and FIVA Plate
Plate
Combined HPS, Common LPS and FIVA
Plate
Combined HPS, Common LPS and FIVA
Combined HPS, Separate LPS and FIVA Plate
Plate
Combined HPS, Separate LPS and FIVA
Combined HPS, Separate LPS and FIVA Plate
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA, Common LPS Plate
Plate
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA, Common LPS
Plate
Gear Driven HPS and FIVA, Common LPS
MAN B&W Diesel
I I I
P P P
Hydraulic Cylinder Unit

D:\Userdata\PXC\CADFILER\Diagr-04\LeakDetactionGeneral0404 .CAD D:\Userdata\PXC\CADFILER\Diagr-04\LeakDetactionGeneral0404 .CAD D:\Userdata\PXC\CADFILER\Diagr-04\LeakDetactionGeneral0404 .CAD D:\Userdata\PXC\CADFILER\Diagr-04\LeakDetactionGeneral0404 .CAD
Friday 4-04-23 Friday 4-04-23 Friday 4-04-23 Friday 4-04-23
455
420
421
455
420
421
455
420
421
315
455
420
421
340
320
Drain line - atmospheric pressure
276
312
312
203
316
276
310
203
203
311
A
B
Suction line
Leaks in Hydraulic System
A
B
T P B
B A
A
A
B
High pressure line P1
Safety and accumulator block

High pressure line P2
ME/ME-C Engines. Detection of Malfunction and
P70840-0003
Plate
Page 1 (4)
Plate
Page 2 (4)
P70840-0003
Basic Procedures
Item Function Possibilities Remarks

Measuring point 276 Pressure in START-UP Pressure adjustment at You can see this pressure at the MOP panel (Engine STAND-BY)
system arrangement the valve 310, 311 and Normal pressure adjusted to 175 bar.
312 To adjust the pressure at the valve 310 – OPEN the valve 316.
Investigation of pressure
building time.
Investigation of pumps
pressure and
displacement ability
Measuring point 203 Delivery pressure at the Investigation of delivered You can always see this pressure at the MOP panel.
gear driven pumps pressure. Normal pressure = System pressure
Investigation of gear
driven pumps, pressure
and displacement ability.
Measuring point 340 System pressure Investigation of system You can always see this pressure at the MOP panel.
pressure. Normal pressure ? set point system pressure.
Leak detection. Procedure for leak Investigation of pressure Stop the engine.
Measuring point 276 and detection on entire and possible leakages. Start the pressure building procedure with the START-UP pump arr.
340 system. Normal, pressure will increase to a pressure adjusted at the START-UP
pump arrangement. (175 bar)
If not, cut-out the Hydraulic Cylinder Unit, one by one, by closing the
valve 420.
When the pressure increase to expected level, the leakage position has
been found.
Leak detection. Procedure for leak Investigation of pressure Can be detected with engine in service.
Measuring point 455. detection on one and possible leakages. Cylinder cut-out (Electronically).
Hydraulic Cylinder Unit Investigation of pressure CLOSE the valve 420 at the HCU and investigate the pressure drop
building time. time. Compare the pressure drop time to the same value at the next
Investigation of pressure HCU.
drop time. Can be investigated when the engine is stopped. Use the START-UP
arrangement to build the pressure up at one HCU. Then compare the
pressure building time to the same value at the next HCU
MAN B&W Diesel
ME/ME-C Engines. Detection of Malfunction and Plate
MAN B&W Diesel Leaks in Hydraulic System P70840-0003
430
* On some engines minimess
pos. 435, are fitted only at the
D:\Userdata\PXC\CADFILER\Diagr-04\DetectionProcedureDoublePipes0404.CAD
431 aftmost or foremost HCU.
Friday 4-04-23
435
*
430
Friday 4-04-23
431
435 *
430
431
Friday 4-04-23
435 * Leak detector pos. 355 is

omitted on engines where
lubrication between the high
pressure pipes is present.
430
To state if your particular
engine is fitted with this leak
431
detector, we refer to the plates
P70830 - P70839
Friday 4-04-23
435 *
355
345
Plate
Page 4 (4)
P70840-0003
Item Function Possibilities Remarks

Leak detection in double wall Procedure for leak detection on Investigation of pressure and You can always see this pressure
pipes. entire system possible leakages. at the MOP.
Measuring points 435 Leak position detection
CLOSE the valve 430 at the last but
one Hydraulic Cylinder unit.
OPEN the valve 431 at last HCU to

decrease the pressure in the space
between the inner and outer pipe.
CLOSE the valve 431 at the last

HCU again.
Check the pressure in the space

between at pos. 435, at the last
HCU.
If the pressure increase to the

system pressure level, the leakage
has been found.
When the leakage has been

eliminated, bring all the valves to
their normal running position.
MAN B&W Diesel
Throttle Valve on Fuel Oil Pressure Booster Plate
Throttle Valve
Drainholes in HCU Block Plate
Level Switch on ME Cylinder Lubricator Plate
PDS 1302 AH PI 1303 I TI 1310 I
Engine
Manuel
filter
Temperature Control
Valve RY
Oil Cooler
Auto
MAN B&W Diesel
filter
Cooling water
inlet
To be positioned as
close as possible to
the engine
Oil Filling
Cooling water Pipe
outlet
Purifier or
Fine Filter Vent Pipe
Unit
PI 1301 I
RZ
LS 1320 AH AL
Hydraulic Control Oil System - Separate LPS
Oil Tank Manhole Drain to Waste

Oil Tank
P70844-0001
Plate
Page 1 (1)
Double Wall Piping
Plate
Fig. 1
Double Wall pipe: Sealing rings
Fig. 2 Minimess Pos. 332

End Flange:
Orifice Pos. 347
Scale 1:1
Double Wall Piping
Plate
Fig. 3 Design may vary
Ball valve Pos. 315

Flange
Non-return valve = Line break valve Pos. 345
Sealing ring
Gear Driven HPS, Common LPS, K98ME/ME-C, Plate
MAN B&W Diesel Version 4, Rexroth Pumps P70849-0001
When referring to this page, please quote Plate P70849 Edition 0001 Page (5)
Plate
Gear Driven HPS, Common LPS, K98ME/ME-C,
P70849-0001 Version 4, Rexroth Pumps MAN B&W Diesel
-POS.201
POS.215
-POS.201
POS.215
Page (5) When referring to this page, please quote Plate P70849 Edition 0001
210(1238,1240)
-POS.201
POS.202
POS.335
POS.230
POS.203
130,131(1204)
POS.215
-POS.201
-POS.130,131(1204)
POS.215
-POS.201
POS.215
Plate
P70849-0001 Version 4, Rexroth Pumps MAN B&W Diesel
Page (5) When referring to this page, please quote Plate P70849 Edition 0001
MAN B&W Diesel Version 4, Eaton Pumps P70850-0001
Plate
Page 2 (5)
P70850-0001
POS.304 POS.304
A B A B
P T P T
PSt PSt
PSt2 PSt1 PSt2 PSt1
MSt MSt
A1 T B1 A1 T B1
LH RH LH RH
-POS.203
-POS.203
MA D1 MA D1
A X A X
-POS.201, 215 (EATON)
Version 4, Eaton Pumps
-POS.201, 215 (EATON)
S
OPEN at 0,2 bar S
OPEN at 0,2 bar
A A
-POS.310,310A(1202)
L3 L3.1 L8 L5 ML L3 L3.1 L8 L5 ML
Opening pressure = 230 bar -POS.130,131(1204) B MB L1L2 B MB L1L2
-POS.130,131(1204)
-POS.202 -POS.202
-POS.230 -POS.230
MAN B&W Diesel
POS.304 POS.304 POS.304
MAN B&W Diesel
A B -POS.210 A B -POS.210 A B -POS.210
P T P T P T
-POS.335
-POS.335
-POS.335
PSt PSt PSt
PSt2 PSt1 PSt2 PSt1 PSt2 PSt1
MSt MSt MSt
A1 T B1 A1 T B1 A1 T B1
LH RH LH RH LH RH
MA D1 MA D1 MA D1
A X A X A X
-POS.201, 215 (EATON) -POS.201, 215 (EATON) -POS.201, 215 (EATON)

Version 4, Eaton Pumps
-POS.203 -POS.203 -POS.203

S
OPEN at 0,2 bar S
OPEN at 0,2 bar S
OPEN at 0,2 bar
A A A
-POS.220 -POS.220 -POS.220
L3 L3.1 L8 L5 ML L3 L3.1 L8 L5 ML L3 L3.1 L8 L5 ML
-POS.130,131 (1204) B MB L1L2 -POS.130,131 (1204) B MB L1L2 -POS.130,131 (1204) B MB L1L2
-POS.202 -POS.202 -POS.202
-POS.230 -POS.230 -POS.230

P70850-0001
Plate
Page 3 (5)
Plate
P70850-0001 Version 4, Eaton Pumps MAN B&W Diesel
MAN B&W Diesel Version 4, Eaton Pumps P70850-0001
LPS (SEE PAGE 2)
LPS
POS.103
MAN B&W Diesel
-POS.106
POS.107
POS.115
POS.105
POS.108
POS.103
POS.101
LUBE OIL INLET - 2,2 BAR
BACKFLUSHING OIL TO PURIFIER
AIR INLET - 7 BAR
MAIN TANK
MAIN TANK (SEE PAGE 2)
ME Version 5, Rexroth Pumps
El driven HPS, Common LPS, FIVA,
WASTE TANK
WASTE TANK (SEE PAGE 2)
P70851-0001
Plate
Page 1 (5)
Plate
Page 2 (5)
P 2 (SEE PAGE 3)
P70851-0001
-POS.335
-POS.340
POS.315
-POS.320,321
-POS.320,321
-POS.320,321
POS.311
Opening pressure 315 bar
LPS
-POS.155
DRAIN (SEE PAGE 3)

LPS (SEE PAGE 1) LPS (SEE PAGE 3)
MAIN TANK (SEE PAGE 1) MAIN TANK (SEE PAGE 3)

MAN B&W Diesel
POS.304 POS.304
MAN B&W Diesel
POS.304
P2 (SEE PAGE 2) P 2 (SEE PAGE 4)
POS.201,210,220 -POS.201,210,220 -POS.201,210,220
POS.203
-POS.203
POS.203
-POS.130,131 -POS.130,131 -POS.130,131

POS.202 POS.202 POS.202 DRAIN (SEE PAGE 4)
Drain (SEE PAGE 2)
-POS.230 -POS.230 -POS.230
LPS (SEE PAGE 4)
LPS (SEE PAGE 2)
POS.361
POS.360 WASTE TANK (SEE PAGE 4)
P70851-0001
Plate
Page 3 (5)
Plate
Page 4 (5)
P70851-0001
POS.304
POS.304
P 2 (SEE PAGE 3) P 2 (SEE PAGE 5)
POS.203
POS.203
-POS.130,131 -POS.130,131
POS.202 POS.202
DRAIN (SEE PAGE 3) -POS.230 -POS.230 DRAIN (SEE PAGE 5)
LPS (SEE PAGE 3) LPS (SEE PAGE 5)
WASTE TANK (SEE PAGE 3) WASTE TANK (SEE PAGE 5)
MAN B&W Diesel
POS.526
POS.525
POS.520
POS.505
-POS.500,502,503,504 -POS.528
POS.530
MAN B&W Diesel
-POS.515,516,517
POS.540
-POS.501
POS.510
POS.527
POS.550
POS.440,445
POS.465
POS.450
POS.480
POS.480
POS.565
POS.531
CYL. LUBRICATOR INLET

POS.560 POS.421
POS.455 POS.420
CYL. LUBRICATOR RETURN
TO THE NEXT HCU

LPS (SEE PAGE 4)
TO THE NEXT HCU

DRAIN (SEE PAGE 4)
TO THE NEXT HCU
P2 (SEE PAGE 4)
TO THE NEXT HCU
TO THE NEXT HCU
-POS.555

P70851-0001
Plate
Page 5 (5)
LPS (SEE PAGE 2)
MAN B&W Diesel
POS.103
-POS.106
POS.107
POS.115
Lubricator (Pos.106) POS.105
Air filter (Pos.106)

POS.108
POS.103
POS.101 LUBE OIL INLET - 2,2 BAR
BACKFLUSHING OIL TO PURIFIER
AIR INLET - 7 BAR
ME Version 5, Eaton Pumps

Plate
Page 1 (5)
P70852-0001
Plate
Page 2 (5)
P 2 (SEE PAGE 3)
P70852-0001
-POS.335
-POS.340
POS.315
-POS.320,321
-POS.320,321
-POS.320,321
POS.311
Opening pressure 315 bar
-POS.155
LPS
DRAIN (SEE PAGE 3)

LPS (see page No 1) LPS (SEE PAGE 3)
MAN B&W Diesel
POS.304 POS.304
POS.304
MAN B&W Diesel
P2 (SEE PAGE 2) P 2 (SEE PAGE 4)
A B A B A B
P T P T P T
PSt PSt PSt

PSt2 PSt1 PSt2 PSt1 PSt2 PSt1
MSt MSt MSt
A1 T B1 A1 T B1 A1 T B1
LH RH LH RH LH RH
MA MA MA
A A A
POS.201,210,220 POS.201,210,220 POS.201,210,220
S S S
A A A
POS.203
POS.203
POS.203
L3 L3.1 L8 L5 ML L3 L3.1 L8 L5 ML L3 L3.1 L8 L5 ML

B MB L1 L2 B MB L1 L2 B MB L1 L2
-POS.130,131 POS.202 -POS.130,131 POS.202 -POS.130,131 POS.202
Drain (SEE PAGE 2)

-POS.230 -POS.230 -POS.230
LPS (see page 2)

POS.361
Main Tank (see page 2)
POS.360
Plate
Page 3 (5)
P70852-0001
Plate
Page 4 (5)
P70852-0001
POS.304
POS.304
P 2 (SEE PAGE 3) P 2 (SEE PAGE 5)
A B A B
P T P T
PSt PSt
PSt2 PSt1 PSt2 PSt1
MSt MSt
A1 T B1 A1 T B1
POS.203 POS.203
LH RH LH RH
MA MA
A A
POS.201,210,220 POS.201,210,220
S S
A A
L3 L3.1 L8 L5 ML L3 L3.1 L8 L5 ML
B MB L1 L2 B MB L1 L2
-POS.130,131 POS.202 -POS.130,131 POS.202
DRAIN (SEE PAGE 3) -POS.230 -POS.230 DRAIN (SEE PAGE 5)
LPS (see page No 3) LPS (SEE PAGE 5)
MAN B&W Diesel
POS.526
POS.525
POS.520
POS.505
-POS.500,502,503,504 -POS.528
POS.530
MAN B&W Diesel
-POS.515,516,517
POS.540
-POS.501
POS.510
POS.550 POS.527
POS.440,445
POS.465
POS.450
POS.480
POS.480
POS.565
CYL. LUBRICATOR INLET POS.421

POS.531
POS.560
POS.455 POS.420
CYL. LUBRICATOR RETURN
TO NEXT HCU
LPS (SEE PAGE 4)

TO THE NEXT HCU
DRAIN (SEE PAGE 4)
TO THE NEXT HCU
P2 (SEE PAGE 4)
TO THE NEXT HCU
TO THE NEXT HCU

-POS.555

Plate
Page 5 (5)
P70852-0001
Water Cooling Systems Chapter 709
Table of Contents
709-01 Water Cooling Systems

1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Seawater Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Jacket Water Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

3.1 Operation in Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4. Central Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

4.1 Operation in Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5. Preheating during Standstill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6. Jacket Water Cooling Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
709-02 Cooling Water Treatment

1. Reducing Service Difficulties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Types of Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Corrosion Inhibitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Cooling Water Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4 Venting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2. Checking the System and Water during Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2.1 Regularly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.2 Once a Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3 Every Third Month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.4 Once a Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.5 Every Four-Five Years and after Long Time Out of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.6 Water Losses and Overhauling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. Cleaning and Inhibiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.2 Cleaning Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.3 Inhibitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4. Cleaning and Inhibiting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.2 Degreasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.2.A Prepare for degreasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2.B Add the degreasing agent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2.C Circulate the solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2.D Drain and flush the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Chapter 709 Water Cooling Systems
Table of Contents
4.3 Descaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.3.A Prepare for descaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.3.B Add the acid solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.3.C Circulate the acid solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.3.D Neutralise any acid residues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.4 Filling up with Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.5 Adding the Inhibitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5. Central Cooling System, Cleaning and Inhibiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

5.1 Nitrite-borate Corrosion Inhibitors for Fresh Cooling Water Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.2 Non Nitrite-borate Corrosion Inhibitors for Fresh Cooling Water Treatment . . . . . . . 9
PLATES
Seawater Cooling System Main and Auxiliary Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70901

Jacket Cooling Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70902
Central Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70903
Preheating of Jacket Cooling Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate 70904
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Water Cooling Systems 709-01
1. General
Pipe systems vary considerably from plant to plant. The following schematic pipe
diagrams are included here, for guidance, to illustrate the essential principles of
the circuits and their correlation.
For a specific plant, the correct details must be found in the piping diagrams
supplied by the shipyard.
2. Seawater Cooling System (Plate 70901)

Seawater is drawn up through the sea connection (1) by the seawater pump (2).
From the pump, the water-flow is divided into three separate branches:
1. through the adjustable valve (3) direct to the main engine scavenge
air cooler(s).
2. through the non-return valve (5) to the auxiliary engines
3. through the adjustable valve (3) to the lub. oil cooler and jacket
water cooler, which are connected in series.
Other branches may be installed in parallel with branch 3:
– Water supply to PTO/RCF lube oil cooler (if installed).
The sea water from the above-mentioned branches is later mixed again, and then
continues to the thermostatically controlled 3-way regulating valve (6) at the sea-
water overboard valve (7).
Regulating valve (6) is controlled by the sensor (8) which is located in the seawater
inlet pipe. The thermostat is adjusted so that the water temperature at the pump
inlet is kept above 10°C, in order to prevent the lub. oil from becoming too viscous
on the cold cooling surfaces (see also ‘Alarm Limits’, Section 701-01).
If the seawater inlet temperature drops below the set level, then regulating valve
(6) opens for the return flow to the seawater pump suction piping.
3. Jacket Water Cooling System Plates 70902, 70904

The jacket water is circulated through the cooler and the main engine cylinders by
the jacket water pump (1). The thermostatically controlled regulating valve (2), at
the outlet from the cooler, mixes cooled and uncooled jacket water in such propor-
tions that the temperature of the outlet water from the main engine is maintained
at about 80-85°C. See Section 701-02.
Regulating valve (2) is controlled by the sensor (3), which is located in the cooling
water outlet of the main engine.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
In order to avoid increased cylinder wear it is important to maintain the cooling wa-
ter outlet temperature at 80-85°C.
A lower temperature may cause condensation of sulphuric acid on the cylinder

walls.
An integrated loop in the auxiliary engines ensures a constant temperature of 80°C

at the outlets from the auxiliary engines.
To prevent air accumulation in the cooling water system, a deaerating tank (4) (cy-
clone tank) has been inserted in the piping. The expansion tank (5) takes up the
difference in the water volume at changes of temperature.
Also an alarm device is installed to give off alarm, in case of excessive air/steam
formation in the system. See Section 701-02.
Pressure gauges are installed to enable checking of the pressure difference

across the engine. See Section 701-02.
3.1 Operation in Port (Plate 70902)

The main engine is preheated by utilising hot water from the auxiliary engine(s).
This preheating is activated by closing valves (6) and opening valves (7).
Activating valves (6) and (7) will change the direction of flow, and the water will
now be circulated by the auxiliary engine-driven pumps.
From the auxiliary engines, the water flows directly to the main engine jacket out-
let. When the water leaves the main engine, through the jacket inlet, it flows to the
thermostatically controlled 3-way valve (2).
In this operating mode, the temperature sensor (3) for valve (2) measures in a non-
flow, low temperature piping. Valve (2) will consequently be set to lead the cooling
water to the jacket water cooler (8), and further on to the auxiliary engine-driven
pumps.
The integrated loop in the auxiliary engines will ensure a constant temperature of
80°C at the auxiliary engine outlet, thus preheating the main engine.
Auxiliary engines in stand-by are automatically preheated by hot water entering

through valves F3 and leaving through valves F1.
4. Central Cooling System (Plate 70903)

In the central cooling water system, the central cooling water pump (3) circulates
the low-temperature freshwater (central cooling water) in a cooling circuit: in par-
allel through the scavenge air cooler(s), through the lub. oil cooler and jacket water
cooler, the two last mentioned connected in series, and through the auxiliary en-
gines.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Water Cooling Systems 709-01
The temperature in the low temperature part of the system is monitored by the
thermostatically controlled regulating valve (4). Adjust the regulating valve so that
the min. temperature at inlet to the air cooler, the oil cooler, and the auxiliary en-
gines is above 10°C.
Regarding main and auxiliary jacket cooling water systems, see previous section
3., ‘Jacket Water Cooling System’.
4.1 Operation in Port (Plate 70903)

The main engine is preheated by utilising hot water from the auxiliary engine(s).
This preheating is activated by closing valves (6) and opening valves (7).
Activating valves (6) and (7) will change the direction of flow, and the water will
now be circulated by the smaller port service central water pump.
From the auxiliary engines, the water flows directly to the main engine jacket out-
let. When the water leaves the main engine, through the jacket inlet, it flows to the
thermostatically controlled 3-way valve of the jacket water cooler.
In this operating mode, the temperature sensor for the thermostatically controlled
3-way valve measures in a non-flow, low temperature piping. The valve will con-
sequently be set to make the cooling water by-pass the jacket water cooler and
return to the port service pump.
The integrated loop in the auxiliary engines will ensure a constant temperature of
80°C at the auxiliary engine outlet, thus preheating the main engine.
Auxiliary engines in stand-by are automatically preheated by hot water entering

through valves F3 and leaving through valves G1.
5. Preheating during Standstill

Preheat the engine in accordance with Section 703-07.
Preheat by means of:

· A built-in preheater, see also Plate 70904.
The capacity of the preheater pump should correspond to about 10% of the ca-
pacity of the jacket water main pump.
The pressure drop across the preheater should be approx. 0.2 bar.
The preheater pump and the main pump should be electrically interlocked to
avoid the risk of simultaneous operation.
· Cooling water from the auxiliary engines, see item 3.1, ‘Operation in Port’
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
6. Jacket Water Cooling Failure

It is assumed that the temperature rise is not caused by defective measuring
equipment or thermostatic valve. These components should be checked regularly
to ensure correct functioning.
If the cooling water temperature, for a single cylinder or for the entire engine, rises
to 90-100°C, follow this procedure:
Open the test cocks on the cylinder outlets.
Is the water coming out?
YES
· Close the test cocks.

· Re-establish the cooling water supply at once, or stop the engine for troubleshooting.
NO The cooling space is not completely filled with water. This results in local overheating,
and hence the formation of steam.
· Close the test cocks.
· Stop the engine.
· Close the outlet valve on the overheated cylinder.
· Open the indicator cocks.
· Keep the auxiliary blowers and lub. oil pumps running.
· Turn the piston of the cylinder concerned to BDC to slowly cool down the overheated
area via the air flow through the cylinder and indicator cock.
· Leave the engine to cool.
This prevents extra shock heat stresses in cylinder liner, cover and exhaust valve housing,
if the water should return too suddenly.
· After 15 minutes, open the outlet valves a little so that the water can rise slowly in the
cooling jackets. Check the level at the test cocks.
· Find and remedy the cause of the cooling failure.
· Check for proper inclination of the freshwater outlet pipe, and for proper deaeration from
the forward end of the engine.
· Make a scavenge port inspection to ensure that no internal leakage has occurred.
Note: Slow-turn the engine with open indicator cocks before starting the engine.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S
Cooling Water Treatment 709-02
1. Reducing Service Difficulties

To reduce service difficulties to a minimum, we strongly recommend:
• effective protection against corrosion of the cooling water system by adding a

chemical corrosion inhibitor. See Item 1.2.
• using the correct cooling water quality. See Item 1.3.
• effective venting of the system. See Item 1.4.
• Checking the system and water during service. See Item 2.
• Using the correct cleaning and inhibiting procedure. See Items 3 and 4.
1.1 Types of Damage

If the above-mentioned precautions are not taken, the following types of damage
may occur:
• corrosion, which removes material from the attacked surface by a chemical

process.
• corrosion fatigue, which may develop into cracks because of simultaneous
corrosion and dynamic stresses.
• cavitation, which removes material because of local steam formation and
subsequent condensation in the cooling water, due to high water velocity or
vibrations.
• scale formation, which reduces the heat transfer, mostly due to lime deposits.
Corrosion and cavitation may reduce the lifetime and safety factors of the parts
concerned. Deposits will impair the heat transfer and may result in thermal over-
load of the components to be cooled.
1.2 Corrosion Inhibitors

Various types of inhibitors are available but, generally, only nitrite-borate based
inhibitors are recommended.
A number of products marketed by major companies are specified in the table on

Page 9. The relevant dosages are also mentioned, and we recommend that these
directions are strictly observed.
Cooling water treatment using inhibiting oils is not recommended, as such treat-
ment involves the risk of uncontrolled deposits being formed on exposed surfaces,
and furthermore represents an environmental problem.
The legislation for disposal of waste water, incl. cooling water, prohibits the
use of chromate for cooling water treatment. Chromate inhibitors must not
be used in plants connected to a freshwater generator.
When referring to this page, please quote Operation 709-02, Edition 0005 Page (9)
MAN Diesel A/S
1.3 Cooling Water Quality

It is important to use the correct cooling water quality. We recommend to use de-
ionized or distilled water (for example produced in the freshwater generator) as
cooling water.
This prevents, to a wide extent, the formation of lime stone on cylinder liners and
in cylinder covers, which would impair the heat transfer, and result in unacceptably
high material temperatures.
Before use, check that the following values are not exceeded:
– Hardness: max. 10° dH (=10 ppm CaO)
– pH: 6.5-8.0 (at 20°C)
– Chloride: 50 ppm (50 mg/litre)
– Sulphate: 50 ppm (50 mg/litre)
– Silicate: 25 ppm (25 mg/litre)
Check that there is no content of:

– Sulphide
– Chlorine
– Ammonia
Softening of the water does not reduce its sulphate and chloride contents.
If deionized or distilled water cannot be obtained, normal drinking water can be

used in exceptional cases.
Rain water, etc. must not be used, as it can be heavily contaminated.
1.4 Venting
The system is fitted with a deaerating tank with alarm and with venting pipes which
lead to the expansion tank.
See Section 709-01.
2. Checking the System and Water during Service

Check the cooling water system and the water at the intervals given below:
We recommend to keep a record of all tests, to follow the condition and trend of
the cooling water.
2.1 Regularly
Whenever practical, check the cooling water system for sludge or deposits. See
also Item 2.5, ‘Every Four-Five Years and after Long Time Out of Operation’.
Check at the cooling pipes, cooling bores, at the top of the cylinder and cover and
exhaust valve bottom piece.
Page (9) When referring to this page, please quote Operation 709-02, Edition 0005
MAN Diesel A/S
Sludge and deposits can be due to:

• contaminated cooling water system,
• zinc galvanized coatings in the cooling water system.
Experience has shown that zinc galvanized coatings in the freshwater cooling
system are often very susceptible to corrosion, which results in heavy sludge
formation, even if the cooling system is correctly inhibited.
In addition, the initial descaling with acid will, to a great extent, remove any
galvanized coating. Therefore, generally, we advise against the use of galva-
nized piping in the freshwater cooling system.
2.2 Once a Week

Take a water sample from the system during running.
Take the sample from the circulating system, i.e. not from
the expansion tank or the pipes leading to the tank.
Check the condition of the cooling water.
Test kits are normally available from the inhibitor supplier.
Check:
• The concentration of inhibitor must not fall below the value recommended by
the supplier, as this will increase the risk of corrosion.
When the supplier specifies a concentration range, we recommend to main-

tain the concentration in the upper end.
• pH-value should be within 8.5-10 at 20°C.
A decrease of the pH-value (or an increase of the sulphate content, if mea-

sured) can indicate exhaust gas contamination (leakage).
pH can be increased by adding inhibitor, however, if large quantities are nec-

essary, we recommend to change the water.
• Chloride content should not exceed 50 ppm (mg/litre).
In exceptional cases, a maximum of 100 ppm can be accepted, however, the

upper limit specified by the inhibitor supplier must be adhered to.
An increase of the chlorine content can indicate salt water ingress.
Trace and repair any leakages at the first opportunity.
If out-of-specification results are found, repeat the tests more frequently.
2.3 Every Third Month

Take a water sample from the system during running, as described in Item 2.2,
‘Once a week’.
MAN Diesel A/S
Send the sample for laboratory analysis, in particular to ascertain the content of:
– inhibitor
– sulphate
– iron
– total salinity.
2.4 Once a Year

Empty, flush and refill the cooling water system.
Add the inhibitor. See also Item 4.5, ‘Adding the Inhibitor’, further on.
2.5 Every Four-Five Years and after Long Time Out of Operation
Based on the regular checks, see Item 2.1, clean the cooling water system for oil-
sludge, rust and lime. Refill and add the inhibitor.
See Items 3 and 4 further on.
2.6 Water Losses and Overhauling

Replace evaporated cooling water with non-inhibited water.
Replace water from leakages with inhibited water.
After overhauling, e.g. of individual cylinders, add a new portion of inhibitor imme-
diately after completing the job.
Check the inhibitor concentration any time a substantial amount of cooling water is
changed or added.
3. Cleaning and Inhibiting

3.1 General
Carry out cleaning before inhibiting the cooling water system for the first time.
This ensures uniform inhibitor protection of the surfaces and improves the
heat transfer.
During service, carry out cleaning and inhibiting every 4-5 years and after long
time out of operation, see also Item 2.5.
Cleaning comprises degreasing to remove oil sludge and descaling to remove rust
and lime deposits.
3.2 Cleaning Agents

Special ready-mixed cleaning agents can be obtained from companies specialis-
ing in cooling water treatment, and from the supplier of inhibitors.
See item 5.1.
These companies offer treatment, assistance and cooling water analysis.
We point out that the directions given by the supplier should always be closely fol-
lowed.
MAN Diesel A/S
The cleaning agents must not be able to damage packings, seals, etc. It must also
be ensured that the cleaning agents are compatible with all parts of the cooling
system to avoid any damage.
The cleaning agents should not be directly admixed, but should be dissolved in
water and then added to the cooling water system.
For degreasing, agents emulsified in water, as well as slightly alkaline agents, can
be used.
Ready-mixed agents which involve the risk of fire obviously must not be
used.
For descaling, agents based on amino-sulphonic acid, citric acid and tartaric acid
are especially recommended.
Use only inhibited acidic cleaning agents.

These acids are usually obtainable as solid substances, which are easily soluble in
water, and do not emit poisonous vapours.
3.3 Inhibitors
See Item 1.2, ‘Corrosion Inhibitors’, earlier in this Chapter.
4. Cleaning and Inhibiting Procedure

4.1 General
The engine must be at a standstill during the cleaning procedure to avoid
overheating during draining.
Normally, cleaning can be carried out without any dismantling of the engine.
Since cleaning can cause leaks to become apparent (in poorly assembled joints
or partly defective gaskets), inspection should be carried out during the cleaning
process.
4.2 Degreasing
Be careful. Use protective spectacles and gloves.

MAN Diesel A/S
4.2.A Prepare for degreasing

Does the cooling water contain inhibitor?
YES Drain the system.

Fill up with clean tap water.
Follow the procedure below.
NO
Follow the procedure below.
Heat the water to 60°C and circulate it continuously.

Drain to lowest water level in the expansion tank sight glass.
4.2.B Add the degreasing agent

Add the degreasing agent, preferably at the suction side of the running jacket wa-
ter pump.
Use the amount of agent specified by the supplier.
Drain again to the lowest level in the expansion tank if the cooling water system is
filled-up, before all agent is applied.
4.2.C Circulate the solution

Circulate the agent for the period specified by the supplier. Check and repair any
leaks.
4.2.D Drain and flush the system

Drain the system completely.
This will also flush out any oil or grease settled in the expansion tank.

Circulate the water for two hours.
Drain the system completely.
Proceed to the descaling procedure, see Item 4.3, ‘Descaling’.
4.3 Descaling
On completing the degreasing procedure, see Item 4.2, ‘Degreasing’, apply this
descaling procedure.
Be careful. Use protective spectacles and gloves.

To avoid polluting the discharge water with acid, it is recommended, if pos-

sible, to collect all the drained water that contains acid in a tank where it can
be neutralised, for example by means of soda, before being disposed.
4.3.A Prepare for descaling

Heat the water to a maximum of 70°C, and circulate it continuously.

Some ready-mixed cleaning agents are specified to be used at a lower tem-
perature. This maximum temperature must be adhered to.
MAN Diesel A/S
4.3. B Add the acid solution

Dissolve the necessary dosage of acid compound in a clean iron drum, half filled
with hot water. Stir vigorously, e.g. using a steam hose.
For engines that were treated before the sea trials, the lowest dosage recommend-
ed by the supplier will normally be sufficient.
For untreated engines, a higher dosage - depending on the condition of the cool-
ing system - will normally be necessary.
The solubility of acids in water is often limited. This can necessitate descaling in
two stages, with a new solution and clean water. Normally, the supplier specifies
the maximum solubility.
Fill the drum completely with hot water while continuing to stir.
Slowly add the acid compound at the suction side of the jacket water cooling
pump.
Drain some water from the system, if necessary.
4.3.C Circulate the acid solution

Keep the temperature of the water at the prescribed preheating temperature, and
circulate it constantly.
The duration of the treatment will depend on the degree of fouling.
Normally, for engines that were treated before the sea trials, the shortest time rec-
ommended by the supplier will be sufficient.
For untreated engines, a longer time must be reckoned with.
Check every hour, for example with pH-paper, that the acid has not been neu-
tralised.
A number of descaling preparations contain colour indicators which show the state
of the solution.
If the acid content is exhausted, a new admixture dosage can be added, in which
case the weakest recommended concentration should be used.
4.3.D Neutralise any acid residues

After completing the descaling, drain the system and flush with water.
The flushing is necessary to remove any debris that may have formed during the
cleaning.
Continue the flushing until the water is neutral (pH approx. 7).
Acid residues can be neutralised with clean tap water containing 10 kg soda per
ton of water. As an alternative to soda, sodium carbonate or sodium phosphate
can be used in the same concentration.
Circulate the mixture for 30 minutes.
Drain and flush the system.
Continue to flush until the water is neutral (pH approx. 7).
MAN Diesel A/S
Check the acid content of the system oil directly after the descaling,
and again 24 hours later. See Section 708-04.
4.4 Filling up with Water

To prevent the formation of rust on the cleaned surfaces, fill up with water immedi-
ately after the cleaning.
Fill up, with deionizer or distilled water, to the lowest level in the expansion tank.
See also Item 1.3, ‘Cooling Water Quality’.
4.5 Adding the Inhibitor

On account of the lack of hardness, the deionized or distilled water is relatively
corrosive.
Add the corrosion inhibitor immediately after filling up.
Weigh out the quantity of inhibitors specified by the supplier. See item 5.1.
We recommend to use the maximum amount specified by the makers.
Dissolve the inhibitor in hot deionized or distilled water, using a clean iron drum.
Add the solution at the suction side of the running jacket water cooling pump or at
another place where flow is ensured.
A liquid inhibitor may be entered directly into the system by equipment supplied by
the maker. Follow the maker’s instructions.
Fill up to normal water level, using deionized or distilled water.
Circulate the cooling water for not less than 24 hours. This ensures the forming of
a stable protection of the cooling surfaces.
Check the cooling water with a test kit (available from the inhibitor supplier) to
ensure that an adequate inhibitor concentration has been obtained. See also Item
2.2, ‘Once a Week’, ‘Check: Inhibition concentration’.
5. Central Cooling System, Cleaning and Inhibiting

It is important for the proper functioning of this system to remove existing deposits
of lime, rust and/or oil sludge in order to minimise the risk of blocking the coolers,
and to ensure a good heat transfer. Subsequent inhibiting shall, of course, be car-
ried out.
For central cooling water systems, which are arranged with separate high and low
temperature freshwater circuits, the careful, regular checks which are necessary
for the jacket cooling water (= high temperature freshwater circuit) are not neces-
sary for the low temperature freshwater circuit.
MAN Diesel A/S
5.1 Nitrite-borate Corrosion Inhibitors for Fresh Cooling Water Treatment
Maker’s min.
Delivery
Company Name of Inhibitor Recommended
Form
Dosage (*)
Castrol Ltd. Swindon Castrol Solvex WT4 Powder 3 kg / 1000 l
Wiltshire, England Castrol Solvex WT2 Liquid 20 l / 1000 l
Drew Ameriod Marine DEWT NC Powder 3.2 kg / 1000 l
Boonton, N.J./USA Liquidewt Maxiguard Liquid 8 l / 1000 l
Liquid 16 l / 1000 l
Nalfloc Ltd. Northwich, NALFLEET 9-121 Powder 2.5 kg / 1000 l
Cheshire, England NALFLEET 9-108 Powder 2.2 kg / 1000 l
Liquid 5 l / 1000 l
Rohm & Haas (ex Duolite) RD11 DIAPROSIM RD25 Powder 3 kg / 1000 l
Paris, France DIA PROSIM Liquid 50 l / 1000 l
Vecom Maassluis, Holland CWT Diesel QC2 Liquid 12 l / 1000 l
Wilhelsen Ships Service AS Unitor Dieselguard NB Powder 2 kg / 1000 l
Lysaker, Norway Unitor Rocor NB Liquid Liquid 9 l / 1000 l
Generally we recommend 2000-2500 ppm Nitrite.

(*) Initial dosage may be larger.
5.2 Non Nitrite-borate Corrosion Inhibitors for Fresh Cooling Water Treatment
Maker’s min.
Delivery
Company Name of Inhibitor Recommended
Form
Dosage (*)
Chevron, Houston Havoline XLI Liquid 50 l / 1000 l
USA Havoline XLC 350 l / 1000 l
Wilhelmsen Ships Service AS Unitor Cooltreat AL Liquid 50 l / 1000 l
Lysaker, Norway
(*) Initial dosage may be larger.
These lists are for guidance only and must not be considered complete. We under-
take no responsibility for difficulties that might be caused by these or other water
inhibitors/chemicals.
The suppliers are listed in alphabetical order.

Suitable cleaners can normally also be supplied by these firms.
MAN Diesel A/S
Air cooler
Lub. oil cooler for gear

(PTO/RCF unit not TI
included in standard F.w.
engine delivery) cooler
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

TI
TI
Regarding the lub. oil

Lub. oil coolers, this valve should be
cooler adjusted so that the cooling
Main engine
Air cooler water inlet temp. is not
TI Lub. oil cooler below 10° C.
These valves to
be provided with
gradual scale
Aux. Aux. Aux.
Eng. Eng. Eng.
Cooling water pumps BWL
PT Feeler
8421 PI
Shipside
Main and Auxiliary Engines
Seawater Cooling System
PI
Cooling water pump for

aux. engine
Sea chest (port service)
Plate 70901
Jacket cooling water Venting pipe ought to be discharged
just below lowest water level Expansion tank must be placed
Sea water
min. 5 m above the engien cooling
Fuel oil water discharge pipe
Alarm must be given if excess air High level alarm
Venting pipe or automatic
is separated from the water in the
venting valve to be arranged
de-aerating tank
in one end of discharge pipe. Low level alarm
(Opposite end of discharge
to pump)
Alarm device box
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

see special drawing
Orifice for adjustment of
cooling water pressure Normally closed valve
To be opened when the
system is filled with
cooling waer. (Manually
or automatically)
Tracing of F.O.
drain pipe
*) Pre-
heater
Jacket The freshwater generator

De-aerating tank F. W.
Jacket water pumps water generator
to be coupled in and out
see special drawing cooler slowly min. 3 minutes
3 bar head
Main
engine Water inlet for From tracing of F.O. drain pipe
May be connected to S.W. main
Jacket Cooling Water System
cleaning turbocharger
system if generator does not
have separate cooling water pump
Drain from bedplate/cleaning Fresh cooling
turbocharger to waste tank water drain
It is recommended to install pre-heater
if pre-heater possibilities from aux.
For flow rates and capacities for engines fresh cooling water system are
main engine, see list of capacity not available
for actual engine type
Number of Aux. engines, pumps, coolers, Thermostat controlled 3-way valve

etc. subject to alterations according adjusted to 80°C cooling water outlet
to the actual plant specification temperature
For arrangement common for main engine

and MAN B&W Aux. engines, see special
Plate 70902
drawing
Expansion tank
Seawater central
Central cooling water cooling water
Jacket cooling water
These valves to be
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

provided with graduated
scale
Seawater
outlet
Regarding the lub. oil coolers, this

valve should be adjusted so that the
inlet temp. of the cooling water is
not below 10°C
Lub. oil
cooler
Air pocket, if any, in the pipe line between Central
the pump, must be vent to the expansion tank cooler
Central Cooling System
Central
Seawater cooling Jacket Main
pumps water engine
water cooler
pumps
Cooling water
drain air cooler
Seawater
inlet
For arrangement common for main

Number of Aux. engines, pumps, engine and MAN B&W Aux. engines,
coolers, etc. subject to see special drawing
Seawater
alterations according to the inlet
actual plant specification For jacket cooling water
system, see special drawing
Plate 70903
Preheating of Jacket Cooling Water Plate 70904
p
Temperature Preheater
increase of capacity in
jacket water % of nominal
MCR power
°C 1.5% 1.25% 1.00% 0.75%
60
50
0.50%
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 hours
Preheating time
Preheating of Jacket Cooling Water
If the cooling water is heated by means of a preheater installed in the freshwater

system, the curves above can be used.
The curves are drawn on the basis that, at the start of preheating, the engine and
engine-room temperatures are equal.
Example:
A freshwater preheater, with a heating capacity equal to 1% of nominal MCR
engine shaft, output, is able to heat the engine 35°C (from 15°C to 50°C) in the
course of 12 hours.
Cooling water preheating during standstill is described in Section 703-07.
MAN B&W Diesel A/S

1 - 50-108 Me-Me-C Operation (D2378a)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 - 50-108 Me-Me-C Operation (D2378a)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 - 50-108 Me-Me-C Operation (D2378a)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Barred Speed Range

Hull No.: DY153

Whereas the torsional vibration calculation report (Doc.

In case of misfiring of one cylinder, defined as no ignition but

Please note, the result will be verified by measurement on

Text Index Drawing No.

Frontpage 700-00 V70000-0003

Safety Precautions and Engine Data 701

Table of Contents 701TOC V701-0001TOC

Checks during Standstill Periods 702

Table of Contents 702TOC V702-0003TOC

Starting, Manoeuvring and Running 703

Table of Contents 703TOC V703-0007TOC

Text Index Drawing No.

MOP Hydraulic System Plate 70329 VP70329-0004

Special Running Conditions 704

Table of Contents 704TOC V704-0001TOC

Fuel and Fuel Treatment 705

Table of Contents 705TOC V705-0003TOC

Performance Evaluation and General Operation 706

Table of Contents 706TOC V706-0003TOC

Text Index Drawing No.

Synopsis Diagrams - for engine (Pi) (2 pages) Plate 70605 VP70605-0001

Cylinder Condition 707

Table of Contents 707TOC V707-0003TOC

Bearings and Circulating Oil 708

Table of Contents 708TOC V708-0003TOC

Text Index Drawing No.

Bearing Monitoring 708-09 V70809-0001

Text Index Drawing No.

Water Cooling Systems 709

Table of Contents 709TOC V709-0003TOC

Instruction Book ‘Operation’

for 50-108ME/ME-C Engines

General Edition 0001

Further details may be found in:

❖ Plant installation drawings

MAN B&W Diesel A/S

701 Safety Precautions and Engine Data

702 Checks during Standstill Periods

703 Starting, Manoeuvring and Running

704 Special Running Conditions

705 Fuel and Fuel Treatment

706 Performance Evaluation & General Operation

707 Cylinder Condition

708 Bearings and Circulating Oil

709 Water Cooling Systems

The Index gives a comprehensive list of the subjects covered.

701-01 Safety Precautions

701-02 Guidance Value Automation

701-05 IMO NOx Components and Technical File

2. Checking Setting Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

4. Survey methods including on-board verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

5. MAN B&W survey procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Engine Room Staff

Operation and Maintenance of MAN B&W engines is to be carried out exclusively by

Minimum personal safety equipment

Entering the Crankcase or Cylinder

First aid measures in the event of skin contact: